Home

User`s Manual

1. Supported Components All forms and controls Properties Enabled Specifies whether the feature is active Start event Client event or condition that starts the Custom Code execution Sample Implementation ClientCustomCode ClhentCustomCodel Enabled Yes Start Event Button Insert onclick 425 AJAX Condition special feature Description The Condition is a special feature that compares two values and then the result is used as criteria upon which other AJAX features can be enabled or executed Condition can be used in a similar way to events where a conditional event is fired when something no longer meets a specific criteria e g when a field value changes from empty to some other value Supported Components All forms and controls Properties Property Description Condition A boolean condition such as or less than to be used when comparing two values Parameter 1 Name of the first variable whose value is to be compared Source Type The type of the first variable containing the value to be compared Available source types are Expression URL Cookie Control Parameter 2 Name of the second variable whose value is to be compared Source Type The type of the second variable containing the value to be compared Start event Client event or condition upon which the comparison is being made You can select one or more events Sample Implementation Condition Condition1
2. Messages ity Projec Files E For Help press Fl NewPropect CodeCharge Studio 5 Forms Edi j Add Connection Server me Za Add Diagram Qo Server Connections 7 Designs Publish z A Settings Gy Publishing Settings project Project Pui chirp to utilize multiple data Fullscreen Options W i Source Wiew Conirel Teals Properties Ox Data Events Format 13 Site Diagram The site diagram feature enables the developer to produce a visual representation of the pages within the site as well as show how the pages are linked to one another P O Y f g gt m i A i F J a z ag j b JE HIN Pages Bt ome ages it ages_maint Footer Header Resmmces Conc Fies i IT IT ANA 14 Integration with Other Products Web pages created with CodeCharge Studio can be opened with any web editor either by opening the HTML files saved by CodeCharge Studio on the disk or by right clicking on a page within the CodeCharge Studio IDE and selecting Open Externally After a page is modified and saved it is automatically available back within CodeCharge Studio Application Templates Solutions CodeCharge Studio comes with ten templates and examples of pre built web applications that can serve as starting points for your applications These applications are ready for customization and adaptation for organizational needs
3. ccccccccccccssssseeceeeeceeeeeseeeceeeeeseueeseeceeseaeesaeeeeeeeesseaaaseeeeeesessuaaseseeeeees 164 UsingJava SCPI SOND sanr a a aa aa Na 165 Editing Programming Language Source Code cccccccceccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaaeeesececeeeesaaeseeeeesessaaaseseeeeeses 166 Using MeAUWHCOMDPEIEOPIONS cera ar a a a a a a 167 LVS A A E E AAE EA A EEPE hoe AE E AE E OE A E hee 171 YserintenacE siner a a a aa a 172 Searching and REpIaCINO srnka a a e a e a a E E 180 LISTING orte DIAG ANN Ss yaaa a a a ds teats ane iow aac 184 Using Extemal RA i ML EGO S act acon cvs eis ei eee ees ae Ree L 186 International Character Set and File Encodings cccccccccsseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessaeeeeeeeeeeeessaaaseeeees 187 Internationalization and Localization of Web Applications cccccccccccseeeeeceseeeeeeeeeeeseseeeesaeeeeeaaaeees 189 SEIS Ca LO CANS riae n N N E AEN 191 User MeErnaC Emi eee reece er eee ee ee eee eee 192 Pade and Component GaChinG censor coca carte ive oe nda a ieee eats 199 Yser IMIS MAC ete es cucracceat tasted Mone a e a teat aonb edt renee meetin ett 201 DOMVEl Pl OMS atgeiferecatelesscacnsd eared aeenet T EE E T OA E E 205 Deploying Projects sena a a a a wants 211 Deploying ASP ApPICAONS asccivestccccsesi tries otra ati nes cei ia e aa a a 211 DEDIOVING PAF APDIICATIONG isesi a a a a E a E udtiaiawiaxenianaadoeant 212 DeDIOVING PERL ApDICANONS tvccsnctivlsatels nersiviaerassalacesauavl cassia ve snlueesiviaitaviseiela o
4. fv Create Remember me checkbox E3 Layout Display buttons as r Buttons 2 Style a Alternatively if you opted to add a Logout Link to a Custom Page you now have to select the custom page to where the link will refer rs Authentication Builder Page FA Type konee fi A Click Next to proceed to step 3 315 Step 3 Selecting Layout Select a layout to be used to display the form Layout Settings Layout parameter You now have options to customize the component layout i Authentication Builder Layout Te Type Vertical C Horizontal C HTML Template from file Click Next to proceed to step 4 Step 4 Selecting a Style The final step applies only if you are building a login form that involves the selection of a style for the form Click the Finish button to close the builder and generate the form 316 Calendar Builder Calendar Builder creates a Web calendar that is based on a table or query containing date specific information To begin the process of creating a Web calendar select it from the Toolbox panel Step 1 Selecting a database connection Specify a database connection and builder options Use an existing database Select previously configured database connection connection Create Create a new database connection or select a sample database Use one of the example databases provided with CodeCharge Studio as an Internet Intranet alternative to selec
5. When you are finished defining a connection with the Data Link Properties window CodeCharge Studio will generate a connection string and put the string into the field under Use Connection String and pre fill the username and password fields Note you must complete or cancel the Data Link Properties window before you can continue in the IDE If you switch windows back to the IDE you may find that CodeCharge Studio is unresponsive to any input To avoid this simply find and select the Data Link Properties window and finish or cancel your selections 104 Configuring the Server Side Database Connection There are two types of connections you can configure to use with CodeCharge Studio design side and server side Design side refers to connections that you use with the IDE i e CodeCharge Studio to develop your application Server side refers to connections that your application uses after your application is published to the server Within your published application code is generated by CodeCharge Studio to open and maintain the database connection and retrieve and update data Therefore the connection options available to use within your application will differ depending on the target platform server for your application The connection may be different from the design side connection especially if you are publishing your web application to a remote web server Before defining the server side connection you should know some details
6. Remove a Design Applied to a Web Page You can remove a design from a web page in two ways e Select the Designs button on the ribbon bar and then select the Remove design from this page option from the context menu In Design or HTML mode right click on the page and select the Remove design from this page option You can remove designs from your project in your project settings but you cannot remove the default design since some of your pages may be using this design 150 Changing the Designs folder Typically the files for your designs are placed in a folder called Designs however you can select a different folder in your project settings Select Home Settings on the ribbon bar then the Designs tab 151 Applying designs dynamically at run time The designs in your project can be selected dynamically when users request your web pages Like CodeCharge Studio styles you have several options you can configure that determine how a specific design is requested These options are configured in your project settings Note for dynamic selection to work correctly the designs in your project specifically the designs folder must be published entirely with your project Project settings Designs settings Project Designs a tai ham BlueSkies Remove i am eSet defzutt Business Dynamic Design Settings Dynamic Design Settings x Designs folder Designs eS
7. PriorityMaint 221 Adding Sorter Controls to the Form You can also add sorter controls to Grid and Editable Grid forms so that the user can sort the form records based on different fields It is standard to add sorter controls in the top row of the table above the row containing the actual controls Use the Sorter option under the Forms tab of the Toolbox to add the sorter After adding the sorter configure its properties The Name property should be changed to a more appropriate name based on the control that the sorter applies to In the Sort Order property select the database field that will be used to perform the sort when the sorter is clicked Sorter controls can vary in complexity with the default being a simple link that the user can click You can change the format of the sorter by right clicking on it and selecting the Edit Sorter option In the Edit Sorter dialog select a different format for the sorter Builders Forms Edit ES Update Panel Tabbed View G Dialog Panel Table TaskManager CodeCharge Studio 5 Layout 4 Tabbed Tab Panel P Include Label Link Text Template Panel ha PlaceHolder page Path Box Components Controls PT GridTestPage x TrasksGrid Labeli La nel Peann d hel endow sd Mo records Properties Data Events Format TasksGrid Attributes Connection intranet Data Source Type Table Data Source tasks Restricted No Records Per P
8. Create or select a sample database C Internet Database C Intranet Database i Autoincremented primary keys Fe Internationalized use translation g O resources res Save builder options The Autoincremented primary keys checkbox should be activated if the records that will be contained in the Editable Grid will have autoincrement primary keys that are provided automatically by the database With this option selected the Editable Grid will not have an editable or submittable control for the primary key since that would result in a database error Conversely if primary keys are user provided then this option should not be selected In this case the Editable Grid would have a field where the user can enter a value for the primary key Click Next to proceed to step 2 323 Step 2 Editable Grid Fields You now have to select a data source as well as the fields to be included in the editable grid form Query Builder to specify the Mult Column Primary Key Fields for the Grid none 324 Editable Grid Field Settings Data Source Build Query Primary Key Fields for the Grid Control Type Order by Select the table or query that contains the fields to be used in the EditableGrid Opens the Visual Query Builder where you can construct a join query which retrieves fields from multiple tables Within the Visual Query Builder window you can select multiple related tables then select fie
9. Static Menu Items Caption Text to be displayed as the menu item URL Destination page or URL to open via the menu item Target HTML target property to use for the menu item This allows for the destination URL to be opened in the same window a new window or an existing window or frame An empty target will open the destination URL in the same window i Menu Builder rm Menu Home El Company 4 ja About Us n Management F Layout p Products 2 Style Item details Caption About Us URL eomus ii Target self After fields have been selected click Next to go on to step 3 378 Step 3 Selecting Menu Layout Select desired menu layout either horizontal vertical or vertical tree ez Menu Builder Layout pa Type C Horizontal IA Static Data Vertical Left to Right Vertical Right to Left C Vertical tree The Layout Step is disabled in Menu Builder if the Artisteer Design is applied to a page If the Menu Form is added to the Menu Panel placeholder then the Horizontal Menu Layout will be applied automatically Otherwise if the Menu Form is added to other panels like the Sidebar or the Content Panel then the VerticalMenu template will be used If such template does not exist in the Design folder that the simple list will be added and the appearance will be shown according to the chosen design Step 4 Selecting Menu Style The final step allows select
10. After selecting the procedure click on the Get Parameters button to retrieve any parameters defined for the procedure In most cases the parameters will be retrieved with their proper properties such as Direction and Data Type You can double click on any parameter and change its properties if the default ones are not correct In the case of a grid form the parameters are used to determine what records will be displayed in the grid so it is important that the Direction Data Type Type and Source properties be configured correctly After configuring the properties click Ok to close the Data Source window Query Builder a Home T Add Parameter ld y lB se igemon a P Parameter Property Save and Open Refresh Query i Close Connection Types Delete Parametel Save Connections Queries Name Direction Data T T Source Default V Design Default Value RETURN_VALUE ReturnValue Int URL RETURN VALUE id Input Int URL id Once the Data Source is setup you can add fields to the form based on the fields returned by the procedure A stored procedure can also be used to insert update or delete records using a record form or editable grid You will notice that in the Properties window a record or editable grid form has the following properties e Custom Insert Type Custom Insert Custom Update Type Custom Update Custom Delete Type e Custom Delete lf for example you want to use a stored procedur
11. Date Format dd mm yyyy HH nn ss Boolean Format true false Use LIMIT TOP Same as Design PHP Database Library nection name Port Socket 3306 Password tion dded to all servers base connection settings to other servers 213 If the database that you intend to use is not among the list find out if there is an ODBC driver for the database so that you can connect to the database through ODBC For instance if you intend to use a Microsoft Access database you could create an ODBC DSN for the database then configure the server side connection to connect through ODBC Of course a Microsoft Access database can only be located on a Windows machines so this precludes deploying the database on a different platform other than Windows Most of the database connections in PHP require you to specify login details e g username and password For instance a connection to a MySQL database must have a username and password specified Add New Connection Design Advanced Server dd mm jyyyy HH nn ss Date Format Boolean Format true false Use LIMIT TOP Same as Design PHP Database Library MySQL ha Database or ODBC connection name intranet Host Port Socket localhost 3306 Login Password root eoeeeene E Persistent Connection The new connection will be added to all servers You may need to setup database connection settings to other servers ue OK Cancel Along with the
12. ORa condition is selected the search form will include only one textbox control and a value entered into the textbox will be used to search against all selected database fields Alternatively you can choose the a ceAdvanced Searcha option which creates a single textbox while also automatically adding a listbox with search options so that users can specify whether they want to search for a ceAny Wordsa a ceAll Wordsa or a ceExact Phrasea This list box shows all the fields available in the table or view These are the fields to be shown in the search form They are selected from among the Available Fields select an Available Field then click this button to add it to the form Click this button to add ALL Available Fields to the form select a form field then click this button to remove it from the form Click this button to remove all fields from the search form Select a form field then click this button to move it upwards in the order of appearance Select a form field then click this button to move it downwards in the order of appearance Control type to be used for each of the fields in the form Click Next to proceed to step 3 396 Step 3 Selecting a Grid Form optional Select a page and a grid form to which the search will apply You can skip this step if the form is not yet available or you intend to use the search form for a different purpose ES Search Builder th Connection S
13. ccccccccccccccssesseeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesaeeceeeeeseseesseeeeeeeesseeesseeeeeeesessaaaeeeeeeesssaaagssss 280 eA ESE G70 a 1 cea eer er ee ee ne one eee eee ee eee ee ee eee 282 Fy OCI el eines ares cecissecnenstewedeaecandasecsseauenedanmaseieaiosainen sal AT E T deere nena acca 282 DUO ie eera tt lacnetueecausatuialen a a a a adenine a a N 282 CNECKDOX cia a a 282 BODO ONW Ean a a A E E ee eee ee 283 FORMI aa ae e e a a N 283 FPIOFIZONIGN RUS ssaa a E ea a a 283 FIV DCMI Ke cshnpe iciae a a a a a a N 284 Made BUO A a 285 FEAT E P E E E E EE E E EA EE A EEEE olen a is E A sen eiee 286 LSO a O E EA O 286 PII E T E dana hse cm TEE AEA E E E E AE E 287 mago LNK cate ars cael chet a canto las ae data ne rae Gast a Varo a rae e dala cued eeoaits 288 PACE sie cere se ee Ga ec ie A ae Me Gl aes 289 516 8 41 el 10 10 0 Aa aces ne tee area E A ats EE ae Pe eee eo ene ern a ee ore 289 LNE BICAK lee meee me ee eee ae en en ee eee eee eee ee eee ee ee eee ee eee 289 POS UO asics tescas sae ecnrsera nas E E E scene sce geleseeugenneed areonacaseseseawieeiaseatenesnaicsedsmdaseasacs 289 Paragraph IDI CAM csore onen eira e a e a 290 TOK naa E 290 TOUD OK a A A T E E A ee nL a eee ee oe 290 WORKING Wt DI UIGONS ansin E a E 291 ADDICATION Bulder eessen a aaa aaa 291 Authentication Bulder erresa a na ea le a l N 315 calendar 18 119 garter eae eo mcf a OT A eee 317 Directoy UNCC lee siracciysnrats Sateen acca bau a a de da dbaal a R eats
14. 52 Server Connections Quick Live Page Live Page in Browser Quick Live Page in Browser D A Al Gl amp Home Page in Browser Toolbox The Toolbox consists of three tabbed windows featuring a series of commands for adding various components to a page From Figure 10 11 the toolboxes are described as follows Builders Series of dialogs spanning the process of creating a page or form Forms and Controls Section of a page containing normal content markup and or labels HTML Controls HTML Elements which can be customized using the options Depending on how familiar you are with the various options on the Toolbox you can opt whether or not to have it display text along with the Icons You can also enable tooltips to be displayed when the mouse pointer hovers over a particular option Right click within the Toolbox to bring up a popup menu where you can toggle these features 53 Data Dictionary Open Connectios Add Query Query Type Add Table to FROM Add Condition to WHERE Rebuld SQL Add Parameter To SQL Edit connection Refresh Export Import Table SQL Stored Procedure Insert Brackets Remove Brackets Edit Condition Group By Order By Delete Add Parameter Parameter Property Delete Parameter 54 Builders A builder is essentially a series of dialogs spanning the process of creating a page or form The user configures the various options available in the series of dialogs At the end of wh
15. Advanced Search option which creates a single textbox while also automatically adding a listbox with search options so that users can specify whether they want to search for a oeAny Words All Wordsa or a ceExact Phrasea After specifying search options you can use the Preview button to see the form preview to confirm the selected options select an Available Field then click this button to add it to the form Click this button to add ALL Available Fields to the form select a search form field then click this button to remove it from the form Click this button to remove all fields from the search form Select a form field then click this button to move it upwards in the order of appearance Select a form field then click this button to move it downwards in the order of appearance Specify the control type to be used for each of the fields in the form 304 Specifying the Grid After configuring the search form you can access configuration options for the grid form by clicking on the Grid tab of the Details window PT Details users Search Grid amp Record on One Page Include in Menu Search Grid Link Editable Grid Record Preview W Active Grid layout Tabular x Alternate records Record separator Page Navigator lt lt 50f10 gt gt gt r fez Build Query Sorting Single Direction Indicator Available Fields Fields for the Grid user_password addre
16. Allfiles with extensions va Source Control html js asp php jsp cfm cfc pl pm cgi mdt Reset gt All files excluding extensions Styles z Press F9 or click on the Publish Project button to begin the publishing process Once completed open one of the pages within CodeCharge Studio and switch to Live Page mode to view the finished page Note that the browser opens the asp page and not the html page lf you anticipate that your users might access the site using an unqualified domain URL such as httpo www mydomain com then you should configure the server so that it opens up a asp page by default as opposed to a html page Otherwise the asp page would need to be specified in the URL Deploying PHP Applications The process of deploying PHP projects is relatively straight forward provided that there is a properly configured server where the pages will be published A server such as Apache or IIS which has the PHP engine installed is capable of serving ordinary PHP pages that have been placed within the server root In some cases the PHP engine needs to have extensions installed or activated For instance if you use an Oracle database the PHP engine should have been compiled with Oracle support or the PHP ini file should be configured to enable Oracle support Another issue that often comes up with PHP is the use of session variables The security mechanism implemented by CodeCharge Studio makes use of session variables to store use
17. Condition does not equal lt Parameter 1 Source Type Control Parameter 2 Source Type Expression Start Event Paneli UpdateDE1 onsuccess 426 AJAX Dependent Listbox Related AJAX Libraries e Prototype e NET AJAX Atlas Description The Dependent Listbox feature retrieves a selection from one list then matches the selection against a table or query to retrieve a set of values that are used to populate another listbox e g you want the user to select a product category and product but you only want to display the products for the selected category Supported Components Child listbox Properties Enabled Specifies whether the feature is active Name User assigned name identifying the feature within HTML Master Listbox Listbox containing parent value for the current listbox This selection is used to update the dependent listbox Fill on start Fill controls on load Service Page AJAX Service page used to retrieve matching records Sample Implementation DependentListBox DependentListBox1 Enabled Ves Mame DependentListBox s product id Master ListBox s category id Fill on start Ves Service Page services products by cakegory ccp 427 InlineDatePicker Description The InlineDatePicker feature adds a date control associated with the component you assign the feature to e g Suppose you have a Textbox on your form for collecting a date When you assign this feature to the control a date
18. Displays provider specific window displaying Source Control related file details including date and time modification details lock details location in the remote repository and development machine Refreshes file status from the repository it is useful for quering if file is locked by another user 126 Repository Connection Dialogs Visual SourceSafe The Visual SourceSafe Login dialog is displayed upon connecting to the Visual SourceSafe repository Basic Username and Password authentication fields and Database name field are required To specify a new database click Browse and choose srcsafe ini file location for a different Visual SourceSafe database After clicking Browse the Open SourceSafe Database dialog is displayed It lists preconfigured Visual SourceSafe repository connections and enables to select a new connection ini file Browse button and default Username settings Visual SourceSafe Login x Username admin Database Microsoft Visual Studia Browse OF Cancel Help After successful connection to Visual SourceSafe repository module folder choosing Add to SourceSafe Project dialog is displayed If a folder has already been created for newly created CodeCharge Studio project it should be selected in the folders tree clearing the Project textbox used for specifying new folder name If folder has not been created parent folder should be selected in the folders tree and the name sh
19. Enable Method Connection Table Cache Key Field Expiration Date Field Cache Content Field Enables the caching features in your project Select Database if you d like the cache to be stored in the database and managed by CodeCharge Studio generated code This option is not available in NET projects In NET projects select Internal to use the NET built in caching Select Custom if you d like to implement your own cache management functionality via custom code CodeCharge Studio will generate the cache management class framework in the common files for example Classes asp or Classes php which you can modify Database connection to the database that will store cached pages Database table that willA store cached pages Key table field that will store the cache key This should be a 65 byte long text char type field Numeric field that will store the expiration date and time of each cached page as the number of seconds since the Unix Epoch January 1 1970 00 00 00 GMT This should be a 4 byte integer field that will be able to store integer values in the range of approximately 1 billion to 2 billion Examples of appropriate field types are Database Field Type MS Access Long Integer MS SQL Server int bigint MySQL INT BIGINT Oracle PLS_INTEGER NUMBER 10 Sybase integer numeric 10 0 BLOB text type field Memo Text thatwill store the cached page output Project settings M Enable Connectio
20. HTML lt IMG ID Image1 NAME Image1 src admin gif gt Image Description This is used to embed an Image in the current page When you click on the Image option in the Toolbox a dialog box appears where you can navigate and select the Image file to be used 13_navFirst_beige gif ef 13 sortDESC_beige a gif a 13_nayvFirst_beige a gif Fs f 13_navLast_beige gif E home gif 1 BY 13_navLast_beige a gif ef logo gif Desktop BY 13_navMext_beige gif E nophoto gif on E 13 _navNext_beige a gif Chen gem 5 13_navPrev_beige a gir wW f 13_sort SC_beige gif b My Computer w File name acnin cit My Network F p Files of type Picture tiles gif jpg peg prig Cancel Ee 28 7 ImageLink HTML lt a href http www codecharge com gt lt img src logo gif border 0 gt lt a gt Description This is very similar to creating a HyperLink except that instead of having text to represent the link an Image is used When you click on the ImageLink option in the Toolbox a dialog box appears where you can select the Image to be used Open File 2 x History k f Des ktop My Documents a 1 pan 1 13_navFirst_beige gif E 13_sortDESC_beige a aif f 13 nayvFirst_ beige a gif E admin aif FE 13 navLast_beige gif E home gif fej 13_nayvLast_beige a gif i 13 navNext beige gif ET nophoto gif H 13 navNext_beige a gif f 13
21. Search alll W Non breaking space in empty cells Layout Display the total number of records Add Panels to each column Z4 Sorting Alternate records Use C55 style OG Navigation i Create alternate controls Click Next to proceed to step 8 355 Step 8 Selecting a Style optional The final step is optional and involves selecting a style for the form Grid Style Settings Style This element contains a list of styles to choose from The search form appears at the top with the grid right below it Once done click Finish to close the builder and generate the form Grid and Record Builder Often a grid form is used in conjunction with a record form to display multiple records and a link from the grid form records to the record form where the details of the record can be viewed and edited For this purpose the Grid and Record builder can be used to produce a grid form with an attendant record form To begin click on the Grid and Record Builder option in the Builder tab Step 1 Selecting a Data Source Select or create the database connection whose fields will be used in the two forms You can select one of the existing database connections create a new connection or select one of the sample databases Grid and Record Builder Settings Autoincremented If the database table has an autoincremented primary key field this prevents the builder primary keys from creating a record form with the primary key field si
22. The maximum size of the memory in megabytes available for the Java Virtual Machine when javac runs Semicolon separated file list These files will be copied to the WEB INF lib directory of your application Specifies the model folder Specifies the RegExp API Host server where your application will be deployed Specifies if the files will be output into the folder or will be packed into the war file The URL for the admin console The user name for the admin console The password for the admin console The context path including the leading slash of the application e g Sample The path to the application files on the server Leave it empty for local publishing The path to the CKeditor installation folder on the server absolute starting with or relative to the project folder For example CKeditor or CKeditor 85 Serviets 2 2 JDK 1 3 with Templates Use Data Source Extension Path to logfile Level of Logging Class Path Maximum Heap Size Runtime libraries Template Folder RegExp API Target server Deploy webapp as Manager URL Manager login Manager password Context Path Server Path CKeditor Base Path Specifies whether the Data Source extension should be used Full path to logfile Value out means System out err means System err Level of Logging DEBUG shows all messages CLASSPATH environment variable will be added to the specified Class path The maximum size of the mem
23. a Lfo mig Aid F CodeCharge Studio 5 oad FS Welcome to CodeCharge Studio 5 pg www codecharge com General Blank Project Appi ne Saluti j F p 7 y J y Employee Directory Taik Manager Portal Registration Form Forum ij m 1 z we DS J as 14 WE Store CCS Example Pack CCS Ajax Examples Blog News and Updates i 2010 Check for Updates e X Fullscreen Options ia Namea C Program Files 286 CodeChangeStudioS Propncts Brows You may change the language at any tne Sie Language Ese 5 haredlae cle HTML Section 508 compliant Crepte Project Cancel Community o Online Forum o Newsgroups Custom Code and Actions Applications generated with CodeCharge Studio can be easily extended by adding custom code or by using any of the predefined Actions Actions are user definable code components that are inserted into events Many actions are provided with the product while additional actions can be created by users and shared with others Internally actions consist of XML and XSL code that can be easily customized Fea Houad NewProject CodeCharge Studio 5 amp X Home Data Dictionary Builders Forms Edit Fullscreen Options Ri g i zaa pes SS ane ER E E is A Blank Inciudable Login Application Designs Publish Publish Live Home Source Wiew Page Page Page Buil
24. captions The Flash Chart Builder is available under the Builders tab After launching the builder you will be provided with the following configurations steps Data Source Specify a data source and fields to be charted PJ Add Modify Flash Chart Add Modify Flash Chart Select Data Source and columns for the Chart Data Source Connection InternetDB Data source store_orders Value fields son eee Caption field Max records Data series in Rows Columns 332 Connection Data Source Value fields Caption field Order by Max records Data series in Select or create a database connection to be used to retrieve data You can select one of existing database connections or create a new connection Table view SQL query or Stored Procedure that provides values to be charted Click the button to open the Visual Query Builder where you can design the database query or provide your own SQL statement or Stored Procedure to be used as Data Source Sample Data Source configuration via Visual Query Builder Query Builder Home al it Lb EEE ESF 7 Insert Brackets 2 Group By Remove Brackets ral Order By Save and Open Refresh Query Add Table AddCondition mir ie Close Connection Type to FROM to WHERE y Edit Condition g Delete Save Connections Queries sore orderit More product All Columns
25. does not contain not like is null is null not null is not null Parameter Source Name Name of the input parameter or expression block of code or a value in double quotes Type Source of the parameter Expression URL Form Session Application Cookie Format Format of the parameter value if applicable e g a Boolean field could have the format True False or Yes No Use Default Default value to be used if no value is received for the parameter You can opt to use the s Value if Null expression whenever the parameter is empty parameter Is empty jab ie When theCondition Type field in the Table Parameter window is set to Expression the options in the window are different compared to when the Condition Type is set to Parameter With the Condition Type set to Expression you can then enter any valid SQL expression and select whether the SQL And or Or keyword should be used to add the expression to the rest of the where clause An example of an expression would be Year_Of Birth gt 1920 where Year_Of_ Birth is a field in the table 238 Using the Stored Procedure Parameter Window The Stored Procedure Parameter window is used to define input parameters when a stored procedure is being used as the data source Stored Procedure Parameter Window Properties Stored Procedure parameter Name Name of the stored procedure parameter Data Type Data type of the stored procedure parameter Data Size Data size of
26. property The following example is from the Blogs example solution This uses one of the built in Artisteer designs The Main page is mapped to the master page in the design The page contains several content panels e g title head content etc which are all mapped to different placeholders in the master page Some content panels contain just content e g Block1 Container while others contain template panels that contain other content panels e g Content Each template panel e g Panel_Post is mapped to a specific template in the design e g PostTemplate The content panels in each template panel are mapped to placeholders in the template e g Panel_ Post_title is mapped to the title placeholder in the Postlemplate master template Main pe Title He Head HH MainMenuContainer H Block 1Container Fe Block_Search E Block2Container re Block Categories E amp Y Block3Container Block _ Archive e Block_Style 5 Content F Before Show E3 Posts Before Show _Post_Category _Post_body _Post_datetime_updated Post_Edit Records You can create this entire structure manually by creating each panel separately and assigning the properties but CodeCharge Studio provides several ways to make this easier though you may often find that you still need to manually change the structures There are couple ways to apply a master templa
27. 12 00 430 RemoteCustomCode Description The RemoteCustomCode feature is used to add client side code to initiate a request for information from the server and add server side code to service the request e g a simple database request Like the ClientCustomCode feature CodeCharge Studio adds code stubs which you must find in the source in order to add your code e g if the RemoteCustomCode feature is named RemoteCustomCode1 then you search the HTML source for the code stub like RemoteCustomCode1 Parameters 77 C04C081F End RemoteCustomCode1 Parameters RemoteCustomCode1 Code 3 2A29BDB7 End RemoteCustomCode1 Code and the server code for RemoteCustomCode 1 Displaying 72 2ZA29BDB7 End RemoteCustomCode 1 Displaying Supported Components All forms and controls Properties Enabled Specifies whether the feature is active Start event Client event or condition that starts the Custom Code execution Asynchronous Determines whether XMLHttpRequest is used asynchronously or not Sample Implementation RemoteCustomCode RemoteCustomCodel Enabled Yes Start Event ButtonL onclick Asynchronous Yes HTML RemoteCustomCode1 Parameters 77 C04C081F method post parameters article_id 1 End RemoteCustomCode1 Parameters RemoteCustomCode1 Code 3 2A29BDB7 alert transport response Text End RemoteCustomCode1 Code 431 server code ASP RemoteCustomCode 1 Displaying 72 2ZA29BDB7
28. 2 Directory Builder Use an existing database connection Intern etDB Create Directory gt or select a sample database 2 Style C Internet Database C Intranet Database Internationalied use translation resources resz Save builder options Click Next to proceed to step 2 321 Step 2 Setup the properties of the category table Directory Builder Category Settings Category Table Database table that stores the list of categories to be presented in a directory index format Category ID field Category table field that stores the category id Category Name field Field that stores the category names or descriptions Parent Category field Field that stores the parent category id Root Category A value of the Parent Category field for the root highest level categories that do not have a identifier parent for which you may need to designate a value such as O or 1 used in the Parent Category Id field of the root categories The value will be set as default for the Data Source property No categories Message to be shown to users when the last lowest level category is reached and there message are no additional sub categories to browse Number of Columns Number of columns to output the list of the categories The value will be set as default for the Number of Columns property Create Directory When selected the Path component will be automatically configured and placed above the Path for the curre
29. 4 0 or higher Personal Web Server PHP 4 1 or higher MySQL PostgreSQL Microsoft Access MS SQL Server Oracle DB2 FoxPro or other database via ODBC The following is a list of steps that should be performed to setup and test the environment where the PHP pages will be published These steps don t have to be followed strictly in the order in which they are presented below Install and configure the web server software The PHP engine can be installed on a wide variety of web servers including IIS PWS and Apache The procedure for installing the PHP engine varies depending on the web server being used The PHP engine can be downloaded from http Wwww php net where you will also find information on how to perform the installation You can also download the free Apache web server along with its documentation from http www apache org Test the Web Server After installing the web server software you should run a test to make sure that the server is functioning properly For a server that has been installed on the local machine the root URL http localhost or http 127 0 0 1 can be used to test the server Please refer to the documentation for the server you have installed for information on how to confirm that the installation was successful Setup the Database lt is common to use the MySQL database when publishing in PHP You can download MySQL from http www mysql com where you will also find documentation for the database as well
30. 4 d Francais ll Save Page As e r m A Magyar j Save All Ctrl Shift 4 a ra r Polski Help b FI ia wm bout CodeCharge Studio Options Exit 72 Working with Projects Creating a New Project To create a new project Select the New project option in the dialog that appears when CodeCharge Studio is launched If CodeCharge Studio is open you can create a new project using the menu option File New Project This brings up the Create a New Project dialog where you can configure project properties Name Location Language Standards Pa ad General Blank Project Solutions Employee Directory ile E a a C Store Task Manager Portal Registration Form Forum Name of your project similarly to creating a title of a document Location folder where the project should be saved on the disk Programming language or technology for your web applications Web standards to be used in your web applications There are four options available for selection HTML Choose this option to create projects that utilize HTML specification standards HTML Section 508 compliant Choose this option to implement web accessibility requirements covered by Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act XHTML Transitional Choose this option for XHTML Transitional compliance XHTML Transitional Section 508 compliant Choose this option to use XHTML Transitional standard with the impl
31. 7 All Column All Columns i a order_date order_id category_id order_id order_item_it description order_status_id price image_url total product_id is_recommended userid quantity price product_id product_name Design SQL Review Data The list of available fields that can be charted provided by the Data Source Select fields to be presented graphically by the chart Select field whose value contains captions for the charted data Select field by which the displayed data should be sorted Maximum number of records values For example you may limit the number of 20 data records to be charted Select Rows or Columns depending on your data series Rows specifies that your data series are from the rows of the data Columns specifies that your data series are from the columns of the data 333 Type Select a type of chart that you like to use Column bar linear area and pie charts are available ES Add Modtly Flash Chart Add Modify Flash Chart Select Chart type bS Data Source Aj Type il Series 334 Series Specify captions for each of the data series to be charted PJ Add Modify Flash Chart Add Modify Flash Chart Specify Data Seres options b Data Source i Twe Total sales EH Seri Data series Caption Total sales z 335 Options Specify chart options PT Add Modify Flash Chart Add Modify Flash Chart Define Chart options Data Source size Typ
32. Apache doesn t directly support any specific programming language but is very often configured to work with PHP Java or PERL You can also install any of the other supported languages yourself Windows based web servers usually support ASP Active Server Pages applications that are written in VBScript a simplified version of Visual Basic The newer NET servers can execute VB NET and C programs If you do not have experience with these languages you can use a code generator such as CodeCharge http www codecharge com to generate your web applications in many popular technologies Obtaining a Permanent Web Server Assuming that you already have or plan to have content that you d like to make accessible to other Internet users you will need a web server that is always running If you have a high speed connection at your home you may be able to run a web server on your local computer as long as your computer always stays on or whenever you want your server to be accessible and your IP address doesn t change You ll need to find out from your ISP if your IP address is static or dynamic A dynamic address is reassigned to you each time you connect to the Internet and the address will probably be different on each connection If you provide your dynamic IP address to access your web server you will need to resend the IP address each time it changes A reliable and commonly used option is to find a web hosting company that has a web serv
33. AutoFill Name Controls Start event employeesemp_name onchange _ Value value Fillon start Yes Se mice Page TE mices em lo PERCL a Note the Controls field is blank To see the controls Target controls that are filled in by the Autofill feature click on the Controls field then the ellipsis next to the field ra Controls _ Contralmame Fieldname Target title title value P department id department id value email value phone _ hore value phone work value fax value city value zip value address value enployeepicture picture SFC Zz employeeemp id emp id value 424 ClientCustomCode Description Client custom code is custom JavaScript that you may want to add to your web page If you add code directly into the HTML source the code may be deleted by CodeCharge Studio when the page is regenerated If you add the code as an AJAX feature this does not occur When you add a ClientCustomCode feature to a component CodeCharge Studio adds a code block to the HTML source To add your code you open the page in HTML mode then locate the code block that was added For example suppose you added a ClientCustomCode feature named Panel1ClientCustomCode2 CodeCharge Studio generates names automatically for each feature you have but you can rename the feature Then you would add your code after these lines in the HTML Custom Panel1 ClientCustomCode2 83 2A29BDB7 Write your own code here
34. Design is selected by Query String parameter Parameter name design Session variable Session variable name design Cookie Cookie name design Expiring in 365 days 152 Designs This is the name of the folder in your project where the designs can be found Note this folder must folder be published with your project otherwise the design selection will fail Query String Select this option if you would like the design to be selected via an URL Query String parameter parameter The name of the design is the same as the folder name where the design exists e g design blueskies Parameter The name of the URL parameter to be used for selecting a design The default is design name Session Select this option if you would like the design to be selected via a session variable If the Query variable String parameter option is also checked then the session variable will be automatically set when a design parameter is supplied in the URL Otherwise you will need to custom modify the code generated by CodeCharge Studio to set the session variable Session The name of the session variable to be used for selecting a design The default is design variable name Cookie Select this option if you would like the design to be selected via a cookie If the Query String parameter or Session variable options are also checked then the cookie will be created and set automatically when a design is selected via an URL parameter or s
35. Dim DB Dim SQL Dim RecordSet Set DB New clsDBInternetDB DB Open SQL SELECT article_title FROM articles WHERE article_id amp DB ToSQL CCGetFromPost article_id ccs nteger Set RecordSet DB Execute SQL Response Write Article title amp CCGetValue RecordSet article_title DB Close End RemoteCustomCode 1 Displaying server code PHP RemoteCustomCode1 Displaying 72 2ZA29BDB7 db new cilsDBinternetDB SQL SELECT article_title FROM articles WHERE article_id db gt ToSQL CCGetFromPost article_id ccsInteger db gt query SQL if db gt next_record echo Article title db gt f article_title db gt close End RemoteCustomCode1 Displaying Server code Perl RemoteCustomCode1 Displaying 72 2ZA29BDB7 db clsDBInternetDB gt new SQL SELECT article_title FROM articles WHERE article_id db gt ToSQL CCGetFromPost article_id ccsInteger db gt query SQL if db gt next_record echo Article title db gt f article_title db gt close End RemoteCustomCode 1 Displaying server code ColdFusion lt RemoteCustomCode1 Displaying 72 2A29BDB7 gt lt CFMODULE Template CCToSQL cfm Value Form article_id Type ccsInteger outoutVar fldArticleld Mode SQL gt lt CFSET strSQL SELECT article_title FROM articles WHERE article_id amp fldArticleld gt lt CFMODULE Template CCOpenRS cfm strName Arti
36. Finance Desi Po Employee List Administration Conrad Murphy conrad company com Administration User Vance Cole vance vance Corporate vance company com Development Administration Oleg Douglas oleg company com CodeCharge Studio comes with two sample Access databases plus corresponding ODBC DSN definitions that are installed automatically when you install CodeCharge Studio The sample database files are located in the installation folder There are also several SQL scripts to create the databases in other formats See Connecting to Databases For this example create a connection to the Intranet sample database called intranet Which type of connection e g OLEDB ODBC SQL Server MySQL etc should not matter as long as the database definition is the same Click on the Data Dictionary tab and select Open Connection then the connection for intranet Faldo om a Home Data Dictioniz is Bra Refresh i Export Open Relatic Connection La Import Connections Database Explorer A E Tables absence_types E cache E P customers P departments m SS amn times Double click on the departments table 407 Click on department_name in the middle part of the Property Editor This changes the current database field and updates the list of properties accessible in the Data Dictonary Property Editor You can also change the selected database field by clicking on the colum
37. If the Internationalized option is selected the builder inserts a resource key in the page instead of text What you see in the document page is a resource key e g res product_name for every text string inserted by the builder The builder automatically adds entries to the translation file for every piece of text that it generates on the web page i e form title field captions button text etc These entries are only added to the translation file corresponding to the default locale e g English You must add the entries to the other translation files if you want the language translations to be consistent Note the Internationalized option is automatically selected if your project has more than one language translation file You cannot select or unselect the option On the web page you see only the resource keys e g res product_name What your users see when the page is displayed is the translated text Product Name from the translation file Wherever there is text on your web page you can substitute a resource key for the text and define a translation string Placing translation resource keys on Web 190 Select a Locale Selecting the locale determines how text is translated on your web page When you publish your project you can use several methods to specify the locale to be used The following locale selection methods are available URL parameter The locale can be specified by the locale parameter locale in th
38. PostTemplate If you look at the solution examples particularly the blog and store solutions there are two ways that the menu content is created as a menu component blog or a list of links store In both cases the menu is actually part of an include page that is part of a content panel that is mapped to a placeholder in the master page The include page contains a template panel that is mapped to a master template in the design The template panel contains another panel that contains the actual menu and is mapped to a placeholder in the master template The built in designs created with Artisteer include template pages intended to format sections within the master page of the design To know which ones you want to use depends on the orientation of each section and the styling design stylesheets and the template HTML code 137 Creating a New Master Template Like a master page a master template is a CodeCharge Studio page with placeholders for content you want to replace Typically you design your master template to style parts of your master page but you can apply it to any page You create a blank master template in the same way as any other CodeCharge Studio page but like master pages these pages are not intended to contain forms controls etc Note when you create a new template your page may look like the following since CodeCharge Studio does not distinguish between template pages and content pages or ot
39. Supports different formats for numeric date or time data Used to toggle the date selector Equivalent of a Text Box except that a hidden field has no visual representation on the rendered page Used to when a large amount of data needs to be entered Used to toggle the selection of an option Used to embed an image into the current page Used to represent the link an image is used Used for the selection of mutually exclusive options Used to present a list of options from which the user can select one Serves the purpose of submitting all the fields within the form to the designated action page Used to toggle the list of option selections Used to add file upload component to the page Used to add rich text WYSIWYG editor CKeditor to the page 57 Edit se B Paste C d p ei lt gt Tahoma 3 12 pt i Es EE A i S TESTE LEES Table Label Hyperlink Controls Tags Font Face Font Size Paste As Text Cut Copy Delete Bold Italic Underline Numbers Bullets Decrease indent Increase indent Left align Center Right align Font Color Font Color Clear formatting Reveal Tags Header Hightlight Paste the contents of the Clipboard Insert table with selected size Used to provide text that identifies other elements within the page Link to another resource Insert HTML controls Insert HTML tags Selec
40. The type of values that the label holds such as Text Integer Date etc Text to display when the label s value is empty The text can be in HTML format if Content property is set to HTML Select HTML if you would like to output the data as is without converting it to text Select Text if you like to convert HTML content to text Label s value format as specified in the database it will be used in SQL statements that retrieve label s data Whether to hide duplicate values if you do not want to show the same value in multiple consecutive rows Function to be used if you want the value to be auto calculated The following functions are available Sum Count Min Max and Average Specify when the function based calculations should be reset never at page level or at group level Whether the label value should be shown as percentage of a higher level group or the report 2 1 Report Sections Description Every report is made up of multiple sections each section serves a different purpose and can be adjusted separately Report sections are often used as containers for individual controls such as Labels but may also include calculated fields based on Sum Count Min Max Average Percent functions or custom code The report sections have predefined names that allow the report engine to process and position each section appropriately therefore section names cannot be modified within CodeCharge Studio In the design mod
41. form gt Login record search and editable grid forms all use submit buttons to submit form values for processing Calendar Navigator Description Calendar Navigator controls the navigation area where users can select the year and month to be displayed by the calendar Checkbox Overview HTML lt input type checkbox name Checkbox1 value 1 Checkbox1 gt Image kd Description A checkbox is used to toggle the selection of an option It can also be viewed as a Boolean or On Off control An ordinary HTML checkbox always submits a value of on when checked If a checkbox is unchecked when the form is submitted the checkbox control is termed as unsuccessful and does not submit any value at all CodeCharge Studio expands on the functionality of the default HTML checkbox by enabling the user to specify arbitrary values to be associated with the checked and unchecked states of a checkbox Checkbox List Overview HTML lt input type checkbox value Value name CheckBoxList1_Name Check gt Description Image Description A Checkbox List is based on an HTML input of type checkbox A Checkbox List control differs from the Checkbox control in that a CheckBox List can be rendered into multiple checkboxes based on the data source For example 209 a Checkbox List could have a data source which contains a list of five projects in which case the control would show M CodeCharge My Project C Test Project C Great Project C
42. input control but the value it contains is used by the form when the form is submitted This hidden input control should not be altered or deleted or the component will not fuploadnction properly Template Variables The File Upload component also contains two template variables called FileName and FileSize il Picture State FileName FileSize bytes File upload Browse Delete When the page is viewed by the user these two variables are substituted with the following values e FileName If the current record being viewed has an existing file associated with it the name of the file will be displayed in this variable e FileSize If the current record being viewed has an existing file associated with it the size of the file will be displayed in this variable The FileName and FileSize template variables are empty whenever a new record is being added or an existing record does not have an associated file The variables will only appear when there is a file already associated with the current record These two template variables should not be altered or deleted or the component will not fuploadnction properly Delete Checkbox The last element in the File Upload component is a checkbox which is used to indicate whether an existing file should be deleted from the server Picture State FileName FileSize bytes File upload Browse The checkbox will only appear if the current record being viewed is a
43. months a quarter or full year These and other visual characteristics of the calendar can be specified in the calendar component s properties Right click on it and select the Edit Calendar Navigator Layout option to change the look of the calendar navigator 254 To properly display event information within a calendar s date cells it is required that the underlining data source contain a date or datetime field or separate date and time fields The internal date format can be specified within the database connection settings server tab or directly within the calendar s Date DB Format property Calendar Properties You can click on glyphs surrounding a calendar to expose the calendar s design time properties under the Data tab of the Properties panel or click on the name of the calendar in the Project Explorer Certain calendar properties can also be modified dynamically at run time The list of available design and run time properties of a calendar can be found in the Web Calendar Component Reference Login Form Description A Login form is used to enter authentication credentials to access a restricted page or form The login form contains a field for the username and another for the password When the login form is submitted its underlying code checks that the credentials are authentic giving the user can access the restricted page If a user is not able to provide authentic credentials they will not be able to proceed past the logi
44. newthread link 5rc id Headernewthread link gt newthread link lt a gt 3 Delete the Footer page since this is part of the design we will add Also delete the include reference to the footer on the default page Create an include page called Search and then cut and paste the search form on the default page to this new include page Cut amp paste the form as a record not as text Change the field caption from Topic or Message to WMessage and change the style of the form Sand Beach to No Style The new search form should look something like this Search Error Message s_message Add the farm song design to the project and make sure it is the default design Refresh the Project Explorer so the design appears in the folder tree Project settings Remove Set default Dynamic Design Settings 142 Select the default page and change the Style for the Page from Sand Beach to No Style and then apply the farm song design to the page using the Apply design to this page option in the context menu as described before You will notice that this is not entirely what we want The formatting is not correct The header does not appear as a menu and there is no search form Project Explorer X 9 Default x Lj NewProject4 E E Pages Designs 4 images Styles Default f home_link i mewthrea
45. or use a single connection You can configure the design side connection to use ODBC OLEDB or any other database type besides MySQL MySQL Connection x Connection Name Connectionl OK MySOL server localhost Port 3306 Cancel User Name Help is User Password ia Database E Connection Name Name of your choice MySQL server IP address or the name of the server instance e g localhost and the port number default is port 3306 User Name User account to be used to access the database Password Password corresponding to the User name Database Database instance to connect to To configure a different type of connection select Expert mode on the default connection dialog From this point you have 3 options for configuring a connection to your MySQL database ODBC connection string or Directly to MySQL native interface You can switch back to just the native interface by setting the Connection Type to Directly to MySQL and selecting Simple Mode not available on the other connection types There are 3 versions of the Add New Connection dialog in Expert Mode depending the Connection Type you select 102 Native MySQL Interface Connection Name Database Connection Type MySQL server port Username Password Database Add New Connection x Design Advanced Server Connection Name Connectionl Database MySQL Con
46. to the one submitted via a form The server program that is being executed should accept and process only the information that it uses Choosing Web Technology Making technology choices is one of the most difficult and critical decisions facing any organizations After the web application is built future developments may require that the application to be converted to another programming language or integrated with software that utilizes a different technology CodeCharge Studio makes it easier to convert a web application created with it from one language to another Technology decisions are often based on the available budget the operating system preference and available database Here we describe how these factors influence your decision Note that the following subsections are meant for informative purposes to those who are new to web development and do not yet have a technology preference The final decision is up to you and you should always perform proper research before making long term decisions Cost If you re looking for the most inexpensive solution then you ve probably heard that Linux with the Apache web server MySQL database and PHP scripting engine can be obtained and installed for free This is also the technology of choice for many small web sites though it is also used with large web projects such as parts of the Yahoo web site Some flavors of Java for Linux can also be obtained at no cost as well as PERL Another popula
47. 0 or ColdFusion MX The generated code is able to run properly on all these later versions You can add custom code specific to these later versions provided that the server you will deploy to supports the tags you add For example if you deploy to a ColdFusion 5 0 or MX server you can make use of the CFGraph CFChart tags but you would not be able to do this with a ColdFusion 4 01 server The ColdFusion 4 01 server side connection is unique in that it must be made via ODBC Add New Connection x Design Advanced Server Date Format yyyy mm dd HH nn ss Boolean Format true false ka Use LIMIT TOP intranet User Name User Password Database Type Database ODBC MS Access Before you publish your site to the server you need to create the ODBC DSN that you will connect to If you publish your site to a remote host you will probably need to ask the host to create the DSN for you unless it has already been configured Once the DSN is created enter the DSN name and any optional parameters i e username and password under the Server tab of the connections properties dialog If you use ColdFusion 5 0 or ColdFusion MX you are not limited to an ODBC DSN when making the server side connection However you have to register a data source name in the ColdFusion Administrator for the database you are using E Home K Logout Documentation TechNotes Release Notes Version Information Help SERVER SETTINGS a Settings Cach
48. 2 specify a correct type string 3 make sure the assemblies for the provider are published with your application e g placing them in your bin folder Refer to your vendor documentation and www msdn microsoft com for more details 115 Source Control Integration Using the Source Control Source Control integration is one of the new CodeCharge Studio 5 features making collaborative web site development a breeze Integration with popular Software Configuration Management packages that are in use by most software development companies makes the CodeCharge Studio 5 professional IDE ideal for teams working on large web systems CodeCharge Studio 5 integrates basic operations for retrieving current version committing new versions and updating files in shared remote repositories Source control basics Software Configuration Management includes two important aspects keeping track of any changes made to project files and providing access to project files for team members Version tracking means that the Software Configuration Management system makes it possible to retrieve any historical version of any project file or even a state of the files at some moment in time Most Software Configuration Management packages rely on a central installation called Repository that stores all the information about file changes including the time and users making these changes Users working on the files in the repository need to download its current state loc
49. A Masier template can be used to develop a consistent appearance within fragments of a page For each section of your master page you can develop a separate styling for the content A master template is a CodeCharge Studio page that contains HTML and a set of placeholders representing sections of content that are mapped from your content page A content panel is a panel with content such as forms and controls that you want mapped to a master page or master template A template panel is a panel that is mapped to a master template and contains the content panels that are mapped to the master template thru the placeholders The template panel is used just like a container panel It contains other panels that are mapped to placeholders in the master template The master template property identifies which master template to use Like a master page each of the content panels within a template panel are mapped to the master template using the placeholder property Which template they apply to master page or master template depends on whether or not the panels are contained in the page or the template panel i e a structure of panels A master template and a master page are very similar However a content page is mapped to a master page template using the master page property The content panels within a content page are mapped to the master page template using the placeholder property A panel with an a master template property is a
50. AJAX service select the service under the services folder in the Project Explorer and change the properties of the service in the Properties pane and or modify the HTML source for the service page 421 Ajax Features AJAX Autocomplete Description The Autocomplete feature retrieves and displays a list of matching records from an AJAX service as a user types an entry For example it can be used within a search form to provide a list of suggested search terms The feature passes the value of the current control as URL parameter always named term An AJAX service can then use the appropriate parameter to retrieve matching records Supported Components Textbox Properties Enabled Specifies whether the feature is active Name User assigned name identifying the feature within HTML Service Page AJAX Service page used to retrieve matching records Template List of built in templates The button allows you to customize selected template Value The selected value Sample Implementation JAutocomplete JAutocompletel Enabled Yes Name JAutecompletel Service Page services TextBoxl JAutocompletel ccp Template Text Value label Configure custom template for Autocomplete list Edit template lt a A lt div class cecs item container gt lt div class ccs label gt labelb div gt lt div class ces description gt desc lt div gt lt div gt lt a gt PlaceHolder Source Name Vlabe Tarticle
51. ASP or PHP are usually pre installed on most systems that have a web server If you use a web hosting service it consists of a web server and one or more scripting engines Check with your web hosting provider to obtain the list of supported web technologies or refer to Choosing Web Technology if you need help making this decision Setting up the work environment CodeCharge Studio has several possible configurations based on the programming language and database being used Each combination of language and database has its own unique merits In each of the following tables we examine some of the typical setups for each language Note You can use setups beyond those show below ASP Setup A common configuration for the development of ASP applications Development Environment for the development and testing of applications A Windows desktop computer with an installation of CodeCharge Studio A local MS Access database or a copy of a remote MS Access database or a local or remote SQL server PWS or IIS Web Server with VBScript 5 5 support or higher Server Environment for hosting the final application A Windows server such as Windows NT Server Windows 2000 Server or Windows 2003 Server An MS SQL database IIS Web Server with VBScript 5 5 support or higher The following table provides a list of applicable operating systems web servers databases and language version options for ASP and Templates ASP Setup Windows NT
52. Advanced Step 1 Choose a database connection and builder options PS Autofill Builder Use an existing database connection IntranetDB Create go Settings or select a sample database C Internet Database Intranet Database T Internationalized use translation resources res M Save builder options Cancel lt Back Next gt Anish Use an existing database Select a previously configured database connection connection Create Create a new database connection or select a sample Use one of the example databases provided with CodeCharge Studio as an database Internet Intranet alternative to selecting an existing database connection If this option is selected the database connection will be created automatically Internationalized Use translation resources in place of text Save builder options Preserve the options selected in the Builder for each step The options will be automatically pre selected the next time you use the Builder 415 Step 2 Configure Feature Data Source The following options are available when configuring the Autofill feature Target Control Data Source Search Field Filled Controls ra Autofill Builder Target Control Ha Connection store products product name _ Data Source fea a store_products Search Field l product id Filled controls Control name Target price value image_url iia
53. ColdFusion server Server Environment for hosting the final application A Windows server such as Windows NT Server Windows 2000 Server or Windows 2003 Server An MS SQL database IIS Web Server with ColdFusion server The following table provides a list of applicable operating systems web servers databases and language version options for ColdFusion 47 ColdFusion Setup Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 Unix Linux Internet Information Services IIS 4 0 or higher Personal Web Server Apache server ColdFusion 4 0 1 4 5 ColdFusion 5 x ColdFusion MX Microsoft Access MS SQL Server Oracle MySQL PostgreSQL DB2 FoxPro or other database via ODBC The following is a list of steps that should be performed to setup and test the environment where the ColdFusion pages will be published These steps don t have to be followed strictly in the order in which they are presented below Install and configure the web server software In order to deploy ColdFusion pages a web server with the ColdFusion engine installed is required The minimal ColdFusion version you can use is 4 0 1 This means that you can use any version higher than this i e 4 5 5 0 and MX Each of these different versions can be installed on a variety of web servers ranging from Microsoft IIS and PWS to Apache and Netscape Server Please consult the documentation for the version that you intend to use to find out which web servers ar
54. Column The Text Column is the value returned from the bound table Specify the name of the page where the grid and search form will appear Select a field by which the records will be ordered by when initially displayed Every other record in the grid will appear in a row with a different background color than the preceding record Each row where a record appears is followed by an empty row that separates it from the next row with a record 306 Linking the Grid to Records In the Links tab of the Details window you can specify how the records in the grid form will be linked to the records in the record form Table Link Details Settings Uses one of the existing form fields as the link field You can then specify the field to be used from Grid column among the available fields New Grid You can also create a new column in the Grid form specifically to link to the Record form Enter column some text of your choice to be used for this new grid column ra iw Details users Search Grid amp Record on One Page Include in Menu Search Grid Link Editable Grid Record Preview Select the Link Field Grid column addressi city date add email fax last_name phone_home title user_login zip gt New Grid column Detail mep 307 Specifying the Editable Grid Table Editable Grid Details Settings Active Primary key Grid layout Sorting Page Navigator Available Fields Fields for
55. Events Form Title Input Add Edit Employees Report Events Columns properties Display Input o Display Control Label Events Caption Emp ld Default Value Format Content DBFonat 10 Type of control Defining a Primary Key If you are running one of the builders that updates the database it s necessary for CodeCharge Studio to uniquely identify records in the database either with a primary key or a unique column A primary key is normally one field in the table but you can have a primary key defined by multiple columns When the primary key columns can be detected automatically using the underlying database connector and datasource CodeCharge Studio will use the primary key by default But when the primary key cannot be determined it is necessary to define a primary key or one or more columns that can be used in lieu of the primary key Rather than define this each time you run one of the builders you can use the Database Explorer to define this for each table however you must be careful to select columns that uniquely identify the record especially if you choose to override the primary key columns that are already defined in the database To change the primary key columns for a table right click on the column you want to add and select click on the action Is Primary Key The added column should now have a key icon next to the column name To remove a column from the primary key set right click on an existi
56. Form C Internet Database C Intranet Database Style Internationalized use translation resources fres W Save builder options Click Next to proceed to step 2 394 Step 2 Search Builder Fields This is the main step and involves selecting fields to be shown in the form and other display options im os ow Search Builder Table ty Connection users l Interactive Search Records per page listbox F Orientation Page Sa Vertical Horizontal 395 search Builder Field Settings Table Sorting list box Records per page list box Orientation Advanced Available Fields Search Fields a a E E O O 5 p o lt O D Database tables whose fields will be used in the search form Gives the search form two list boxes for sorting The first will contain a list of all the available fields so that the user can select the field to sort by The second list box will indicate the desired sort order ASC DESC The search form will have a list box that can be used to specify the number of records to be returned per page Specifies vertical or horizontal orientation of the search form Click this button to specify the advanced search option such as a submit method type and other provided options If the amp ANDa condition is selected the search form will contain an input control textbox or listbox for all selected database fields If the
57. Form Letter Justified Layout With Groups Group Left and Above Group Left Group Above Group Outline Set of options available when you are not using any groupings in your report Grid type report layout with column captions placed within the Page Header section Columnar report layout with headers placed to the left of the detail Each data source field corresponds to one row Free form report layout where the data is formatted based on the user specified template The template is created in a separate builder step Justified report layout Each data source field corresponds to two report rows where field name is placed in a row and the data is shown in the row below it Set of options available when you are using groups in your report Report layout that places group field to the left and above the 1st column of the following group or detail Field names captions are placed within Page Header Report layout that places group field to the left of the 1st column of the following group or detail Field names captions are placed within Page Header Report layout that places group field above the 1st column of the following group or detail Field names captions are placed within Group Header Report layout with indented group fields Field names captions are placed within Group Header a Report Builder i Connection WS Data Source a Calc Fields gaa Groups Group Left and Above
58. HTML code that is enclosed within curly braces Caution should be observed when editing this content and this should only be done using the Properties window or Project Explorer window In HTML mode there is another form of block that is not evident in the Design mode This occurs in the form of HTML comments and is used to mark out the beginning and end of content that can be viewed as a logical unit lt BEGIN blockname gt Block contents go here lt END blockname gt There are numerous types of logical units that are represented by blocks The common denominator is that there is an HTML comment to mark their beginning and another to mark their end Additionally it is possible to have nested blocks so that one block is within another In this scenario the naming of the blocks makes it clear where each of the blocks begins and ends Therefore it is important to make sure that none of the block comments are altered or removed otherwise the page would not function as correctly 63 Any client side events that are added using the Events tab of the Properties window are also visible in HTML mode The script code appears at the top of the page in the lt head gt lt head gt section The illustration below shows the code that is added for an OnLoad event of a page to set focus to a field in a form lt script language JavaScript gt Begin CCS script function page_OnLoad joage_OnLoad 1 1C 723708 Set Focus 5 84B912
59. If you do not have a database yet then you should first become familiar with the database concepts and create your database for use with CodeCharge Studio Choose MS Access if a visual interface and ease of use is important to you or choose MySQL if you need better scalability and don t mind learning a little bit of SQL 39 Getting Started Downloading CodeCharge Studio You can acquire a copy of the CodeCharge Studio installation executable from the YesSoftware Web site at http www yessoftware com The installation features a 30 day trial period that allows prospective users to test CodeCharge Studio before purchasing the software Both licensed users and trial users download a fully functional version that is time limited unless activated using a valid serial number Installing CodeCharge Studio Please ensure that your system meets the requirements stipulated in the Prerequisites section before beginning the installation Before starting the installation process please make sure you are logged into Windows as an administrator You must have administrator privileges to install CodeCharge Studio On Windows Vista we recommended turning off the User Account Control To begin the installation process locate and double click the CodeCharge Studio setup file You must agree to the License Agreement before you can proceed with the installation process Click on the Yes button to indicate your acceptance of the License Agreement and click Next to
60. Java PHPLib for PHP or DBI for PERL Server Requirements Generated code runs on all operating systems with installed application servers capable of executing the following programming languages ASP runs on IIS and PWS servers with VBScript 5 5 ASP NET C ASP NET VB ColdFusion PHP J2EE PERL 5 25 Contacting Product Support Free and paid online support for CodeCharge Studio is offered worldwide in English 24 hours a day at http support yessoftware com The available support programs are listed at htip Awww yessoftware com purchase product php product_id 1 When submitting support issues or questions please always specify the operating system server and programming environment you are using and describe the details of your issue For example if something doesn t work specify the exact error message or symptoms of the problem Please also state if the issue is reproducible and the steps to replicate it Terms and Definitions Action User definable code generation component which inserts a block of code into an event procedure CodeCharge Studio comes with several predefined Actions which are installed into the following folder CodeCharge Studio folder Components Actions Internally actions consist of XML and XSL code that can be easily customized by experienced developers The utilized XSL code will be documented in a future SDK Software Development Kit Authentication The process of verifying if
61. Link and Image Link CheckBox List ListBox or Radio Button Clicking on the button will open the List DataSourse dialog illustrated below Link and Image Link Clicking on the button will open the dialog with link properties Specify the control type to be used for each of the fields in the form Click Next to proceed to step 3 Step 3 Selecting Record Options Set the functionality that will be available in the record form You can uncheck any of the options if you don t want the form to have the corresponding functionality m Record Builder Title Uy Connection Add Edit Users 45 Data Source Actions om Allow Insert ES __ Allow Update Layout iv Allow Delete Confirmation dialog GJ Style Include Cancel button Display buttons as Buttons C Images Encrypt password value in database option is available only when both of the following conditions are met Encrypt passwords in database using option is enabled in Advanced Security Settings Record form contains an editable control based on the password field specified in Project Security Settings Click Next to proceed to step 4 383 Step 4 Selecting Layout co Record Builder Layout lj Connection Vertical lH Data Source ae HTML Template from file Actions DivRecord ccp built in E 7 ea Style Click Next to proceed to step 5 Step 5 Selecting a Style Select a style to be used to display the re
62. Link1_Src gt Home page lt a gt For multilanguage projects the second component Link1 can be a translation lt a hret Link1_Src gt res Link1 lt a gt 2 2 List Box Overview HTML lt select name ListBox1 gt lt option value gt Select Value lt option gt ListBox1_Options lt select gt Image Select Value Description A List Box is used to present a list of options to the user The user clicks on the dropdown arrow to view all the options available Using its format properties a list box can be configured to display more than one value at a time and allow the user to select multiple values The values displayed in the list box can come from database content or can be specified manually using a semicolon separated list of values List boxes are often used when displaying database tables which are related to other tables The properties for a List Box can be configured to display content from a database table whose primary key is related to a field in the form where the List Box is placed Navigator Overview Image Description The navigator is used exclusively on grid and editable grid forms as is the Sorter control A navigator provides functionality that allows the database records within a form to be browsed A navigator can be of varying complexity ranging from very simple navigators with single links to move back and forth to complex navigators that have links for individual pages and display
63. M T W The format can also be changed later within the Weekday Format property Display days from the surrounding months Otherwise the calendar s cells with dates of different months will be empty Creates customizable area between week rows implemented as an HTML table cell that by default contains a horizontal line Highlight the calendar cell containing the current date The highlighting is implemented via separate styles cascading style sheets which may result in a different highlighted look depending on the selected style Certain styles may show a highlighted cell background in a different color others may place a thicker border around a highlighted cell Highlight calendar cells containing weekends Display event captions within calendar cells which will result in calendar cells displaying the text from the Event caption field selected in Step 2 of the builder You can convert the label displaying the event captions to a link that users can click to access another page showing selected event s details Include a section that will be shown when there are no events for a given date By default this section displays the text No events PS Calendar builder Title Haj Connection Events Data Source Type Annual 4 Month format Full January 2005 Weekday format Initial M T Navigation Show days of nearby months G Style v Highlight
64. Match whole word only Perform a search for whole words as opposed to parts of larger words Match case Perform a search which distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters Regular Expression Activate this checkbox if the text entered in the Find what field is a regular expression Look In Current Document Perform the search in the current document only All Open Documents Perform the search in all opened documents Current Project Perform the search in files belonging to the current project File types Enter a wildcard expression to determine the file types to be searched Find Find the next occurrence of the text to be replaced Stop Stop the current search Close Close the dialog box A Find In Files Find whats O o Match whole word only Match case Regular expression Look In Current Project 7 File types 182 Replace in Files Along with searches performed in multiple files you can also search and replace text within multiple files To perform this type of search use the Edit Find and Replace Replace In Files menu option to bring up the Replace In Files dialog Find what Replace with Match whole word only Match case Regular Expression Look In File types Find Next Replace Replace All Skip File Close Enter the text or regular expression to search for Enter the text which will be used as the replacement text Perform a search for whole words as opposed to parts of
65. Menu Bar Notice that within the menu option some of the sub options also have underlined letters You can navigate further to these sub options by simply pressing the underlined letter For instance within the File menu you can open a page by pressing the O key followed by P Menu Shortcut Keys Shortcuts can be configured in the Customize dialog from Options menu Customize x Toolbars Commands Quick Access Keyboard Menus Options Category Commands Key assignments NewProject a Open Project Close Project Rename Project Save Page E Save Page As Reset All Save All Print Press new shortcut key Print settings Remove Description Create New Project These are commands that are frequently used when working with documents and have dedicated access keys that are not only used within CodeCharge Studio but would also be found in most Windows applications The commands are as follows 70 Key Combinations File New Project New Page Open Project Open Page Save Print Edit Undo Redo Cut Copy Paste Select All Find Find Next Find in Files Replace Replace in Files Go to Minimize or restore the Ribbon Project Publish Project Publish Page Quick Publish Page Live Page Quick Live Page Live Page in Browser Quick Live Page in Browser Home Page Home Page in Browser Table Move Column Left Move Column Right Move Row Up Move Row Down He
66. ODBC Administrator This has a number of advantages since your CodeCharge Studio projects only need to include the name of the Data Source rather than all of the configuration information Therefore several projects or published applications can have the same name but different database connections You can also change the database connection configuration without having to change your CodeCharge Studio project Creating an ODBC DSN CodeCharge Studio provides a convenient way that you can create a new ODBC DSN You can also create a DSN by running the ODBC Administrator available from your system Control Panel In either case the steps involved are essentially identical To create an ODBC DSN from CodeCharge Studio The first step is to open the Add New Connection dialog This can be done by right clicking on the Connections option in the Project Explorer window and selecting New Connection from the pop up menu Select the Use ODBC Data Source Name radio button to indicate your intention to use an ODBC DSN then click New to begin the process of creating the DSN This starts the ODBC Data Source Administrator which is a separate task Note until you finish or cancel the Administrator you will see this message whenever you switch back to the IDE This is likely to occur if you switch windows or tasks before closing the Administrator If you see this message switch back to the Administrator window complete or cancel your actions close th
67. Order Source URL Target Include value in cache key Name Grid1Dir Source URL Target Include value in cache key Do not cache the page during the processing of the submitted search form ccsForm is a temporary URL parameter used by Web applications to determine if a form was submitted and needs to be validated and processed Include the search keyword in the cache key assuming that the search field is named s keyword Include in the cache key the specified number of grid records to show on a page page size Include in the cache key the specified page number Include in the cache key the field name used to sort the grid The field name is a value assigned to Grid1Order parameter when a user clicks a sorter icon Include in the cache key the specified sort direction The value ASC or DESC is assigned to Grid1Dir parameter when a user clicks a sorter icon Caching W Enable Caching 30 Days Duration ccsForm s keyword Grid1 Pagesize Grid1 Page aridi Dir aridi Order Auto Fill OK Cancel 204 Manage Cache Action The Manage Cache action can perform the following tasks Clear whole cache Clears the whole cache by removing all cache keys and data It can be used for example when major parts of the Website are modified or regenerated Remove selected Use when page layout or information has changed and cached content is no longer valid page from the cache When you select t
68. Parameters Convert URL To Restricted Allow Insert Allow Update Allow Delete Preserve Parameters Custom Insert Type Custom Insert Custom Update Type Custom Update Custom Delete Type Custom Delete A unique name for the form A login form does not retrieve data from the database so this property is left blank The Login form uses the database settings specified in Security tab of the Project Settings dialog window A login form does not retrieve data from the database so this property is left blank A login form does not retrieve data from the database so this property is left blank The page where the user will be redirected after successfully logging in However if the user was trying to access a restricted page or form they will be redirected to the page they were trying to access prior to being redirected to the login page Specify a common separated list of form or URL parameters which should not be propagated when the form is submitted Specify whether the URL should be automatically converted to an absolute URL or secure URL for the SSL protocol https This property should always be set to No since the user should be able to access the login form otherwise they would not be able to login This property is always set to No since the login form does not handle database content This property is always set to No since the login form does not handle database content This property is always set to No s
69. Placeholder for the display total number of records option in the builders One final note make sure that the HTML in the template is valid since CodeCharge Studio needs to parse the HTML when you run the builder and any inconsistencies may not be handled correctly 155 Adding Form Templates to your Project There are three ways you can add a form template to your project You can copy and paste one of the built in templates from the CodeCharge Studio installation folder or you can use the CodeCharge Studio project explorer to create a template by creating a new page and editing the HTML You can also add a template to your project simply by selecting one of the built in form templates in the builder If the template does not already exist the template will be copied to your project ra Record Builder Layout Qa Connection C Vertical Error 4 Data Source eas Freteae femp Jogin fe a i HTML Template from file Emp Password fomp password Actions Vertical ccp built in ha ET Emp Name Groupa Select Value Departmenti Select Value dit Employees c I J I Cancel lt Back Next gt Finish When you run the builder you have the option of selecting a particular layout which normaly corresponds to one of the built in templates selecting a built in template from the installation folder or selecting a template that has been added to your project For form templates in your
70. Source property of the form is used to specify the database fields that will be available in the form All the fields in a form often come from a single database table In this case the Data Source property will list only this single form It is also common to create forms whose fields come from multiple database tables One way to construct such a form would be to manually specify an SQL statement which selects fields from all the necessary tables However an easier way to select fields from multiple database tables would be to use the Visual Query Builder VQB The Visual Query Builder enables your to visually select fields from multiple database tables You do not have to worry about constructing the SQL statement since the Visual Query Builder does this automatically There are many ways of getting to the Visual Query Builder When building a form using any of the builders the Build Query button can be used to open the Visual Query Builder You can also get to the Visual Query Builder by using the Data Source property of a form When the Visual Query Builder window appears another smaller window also appears that contains a list of the database tables available in the current connection Select the tables that you want to use in your grid You can select multiple tables by holding down the ctrl key while clicking on the table name Click Add to add the fields to the Visual Query Builder Click Close to close the window The tables you select appear
71. Specify whether the Editable Grid should allow the user to update existing records Allow Delete Specify whether the Editable Grid should allow the user to delete existing records Allow Cancel Specify whether the Editable Grid should have a cancel button which would abort any current operation and return to the page specified in the Return Page property of the form Show Confirmation Prompts the user to confirm the insert update or delete operations dialog for Submit aH Editable Grid Builder as Actions fg Connection M Allow Insert Number of empty rows 3 W Allow Update W Allow Delete 4 Sorting Include Cancel button l Show confirmation dialog for Submit IA Data Source Search HE Navigation Display buttons as i Options Buttons Images Click Next to proceed to step 8 Step 8 Selecting a Style optional Select a style for the editable grid form This step is optional Editable Grid Style Options Style This element contains a list of styles to choose from After selecting a style click the Finish button to generate the form to the page 331 Flash Chart Builder Flash Chart Builder provides a visual method for designing and including Flash charts within a Web page The created Flash Chart component will retrieve data from the database at run time and present it as a visual graph The Flash Chart Builder provides various options for configuring the chart s data source style layout colors and
72. Studio offers an unprecedented way for users to quickly build powerful database driven web applications By using a simple point and click interface users can select desired components programming language presentation schemes and database queries without any programming or without the need to fully understand the underlying web technologies What further sets CodeCharge Studio apart from all other products is sheer speed For example CodeCharge Studio makes it possible to create a simple task management system in under five minutes Several pre built application templates are included and can be adapted to the developer s needs and extended into full featured web systems Separation of Programming logic from the Presentation Layer CodeCharge Studio fully supports the separation of programming logic from the presentation layer by generating source code files asp ohp jsp etc which are separate from their corresponding HTML files HTML templates This approach allows web teams to utilize best practices by allowing designers to work separately and in parallel with developers Many other technologies force developers to perform design tasks and designers to deal with code The CodeCharge Studio approach allows the developer to produce applications that can be further customized by modifying the HTML template files within CodeCharge Studio s IDE or through a suitable design environment all this while leaving the code untouched Fast Pract
73. Style optional The final step is optional and involves selecting a style to be applied to the Gallery You can also select No Style if you don t want to use any style or a oe Dynamic a if you want to assign a style dynamically at runtime Click the Finish button to close the builder and generate the form Press F9 to publish your project and enjoy Search Employees ewe O Employees Gallery bi o Deering arsen George Pennington Wictor Tomlin 348 Grid Builder Use the Grid builder to create grid forms that can have an optional related search form The builder provides many options that would otherwise require a considerable amount of time to add manually To begin the process click on the Grid Builder option in the Builders tab Step 1 Creating a Database Connection Select or create a database connection from where the data shown in the grid will be retrieved You can select one of the existing database connections create a new connection or select one of the sample databases A Grid Builder Use an existing database connection l Intranet Create or select a sample database rea C Internet Database C Intranet Database A ee By 5 Internationalized use translation resources tres HB Naviga M Save builder options Click Next to proceed to step 2 Step 2 Grid Data Source You now have to select a data source as well as the fields to be included in the grid fg Gr
74. TOP E Same as Design Use ODBC Data Source Name Source amp Server MapPath database mdb amp Build Use Connection String If you opened the common asp file you would see the connection string appearing Connection String in Common asp ConnectionString Provider Microsoft Jet OLEDB 4 0 User ID Admin Data Source amp Server MapPath database mdb amp Persist Security Info False If you are publishing to the same machine where CodeCharge Studio is installed you can simply specify that the server side connection string is the same as the design connection string After configuring the connection string properly make sure that the Publish tab of the Project Settings window specifies the correct location where the files should be published Unless you are using a virtual folder the Server Path folder should specify a location within the root of your web server 211 Project settings x E General m Active Server Serverl Edit Servers Server Script 3 Website will be published to this server until a diferent server is selected 2m Locales amp Encodings Please check that the database connection settings are setup correctly for this server ey Pu blishing Type Local Network if Connections Server Path C Inetpub wwwroot TaskManager Browse E Security Server URL http localhost TaskManager Files to publish Lt Pay SNS Project Files code and HTML template files Be Caching
75. The builder will list all of the built in designs installed with CodeCharge Studio When you select one of the designs from the list the design is copied to your project and applied to the pages created with the builder cs Application Builder Project yj Connection ey Options W Authentication IA Tables Details i Page Layout Review Style CCS Styles Headline gt l Slogan text Search CSO Error List of Cus gva i HE _ 7 Cancel lt Back Next gt Finish Applying a Design to a Web Page Once you have some designs in your project you can apply or change a design to your web page in several ways e When you create a new page the new page dialog has an option to apply a design when the page is created Selecting this option applies the currently selected default design to the new page Note it is not necessary to have any designs in your project to apply this option If no designs have been added yet CodeCharge Studio will copy the first built in design found in your installation folder under Designs Blank Page k x F Hew Page Mame vo Apply Design to new page e To apply a design to an existing page first open the page from the Project Explorer Click on the Home tab and then the Designs button Project group on the ribbon bar then select the design you want applied If a design has not already been applied to this page you w
76. These events are HTML control events Sample Implementation HideShow HideShow1 Enabled Yes Mame Hide Show ControlId store _ products Show event store_productsSearchCondition1 onfalse Hide event store_productsSearchCondition1 ontrue 429 Numeric Up Down Description The NumericUpDown feature is used to change a textbox to a graduating list An up and down icon is added to the textbox When the user selects the up arrow values are automatically displayed and increased in the textbox as the user continues to select the up arrow The starting value is the Mininum value property defined below The down arrow does the reverse The feature can also be applied to show graduating date or time values in a format specified for the feature Supported Components TextBox Properties Enabled Specifies whether the feature is active Name User assigned name identifying the feature within HTML Minimum value Maximum value Increment Step of increment Alternate Increment Increment value with pressed Shift button Type Date in months Type Time in hours Type Type of content Numeric Date or Time Format Format of data in PHP format For example date format m d Y Sample Implementation NumericUpDown NumericUpDown Enabled Yes Mame HumericlpDown 1 Minimum value 01701 2010 Maximum value 31701 2010 Increment 1 Alternate Increment 2 Type Date Format dimi Image 5 01 31 2010
77. Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 Internet Information Services IIS 4 0 or higher Personal Web Server ASP 3 0 with VBScript 5 5 Microsoft Access MS SQL Server Oracle MySQL PostgreSQL DB2 FoxPro or other database via ODBC The following is a list of steps that should be performed to setup and test the environment where the ASP pages will be published These steps don t have to be followed strictly in the order in which they are presented below Install and configure the web server software Some versions of Windows such as Windows NT Server Windows 2000 Server Windows 2003 Server and Windows XP Professional have the option of installing IIS server during the operating system installation process or later from the operating system setup CD If your version of Windows does not allow the installation of IIS e g Windows 98 you can install Personal Web Server PWS which is a scaled down version of IIS Server The YesSoftware website has a tutorial that contains more information about installing and configuring PWS 44 Test the Web Server After installing the web server software you should run a test to make sure that the server is functioning properly For a server that has been installed on the local machine the URL http localhost or http 127 0 0 1 can be used to test the server When you type in this address you should be able to see the default page in the root directory of the server In particular
78. a a a a Generating ages list Page generation is complete 17 Index Directory The Directory component facilitates the creation of a Yahoo style Directory or Index The Directory is made up of a hierarchy of categorized listings which the user can navigate through This makes the Directory component especially useful when creating Web portals where information is provided taxonomically i fe E E New 5 iw E i E E i E jil Common Files generation is complete Publishing to CAinetpubywwsarootyMewPraje ctl 18 Multi Select ListBox The listbox component has been improved to allow the end user to select multiple values within the listbox unlike in previous versions where only one value could be selected The Multi Select listbox can therefore be used in database tables with one to many relationships Common Files generation is complete Publishing to OC inetpubyawswrootMewProje ctl 19 Date Picker The Date Picker component enables the user to specify date values by selecting a date from a pop up calendar The pop up calendar is a small browser window which contains a monthly view of dates and also has the capability of scrolling backwards and forwards to other months ty Pages H Cera Resources a a ii Restricted Access Denied rt WAL T Includable Sol Access On Enable Cachin
79. a user has sufficient security privileges to view a web page If a web page requires authentication and a user is not logged in generated programs automatically redirect the user to a specifically designated Login or Access Denied page Once a user logs in generated programs utilize Sessions to store user access information for limited number of time Code Generation The process of translating project model into executable programming code CodeCharge Studio uses an open XML file format to describe all project components and properties while during code generation it applies proprietary code templates to the project model which results in the final code output Component A component is an object that makes up a Web page or a CCS project and can be used for displaying data and accepting user input Many components are assigned a data source to bind their controls Components can be divided into Forms such as Grid Record Directory and Editable Grid Controls including Label TextBox etc Supporting controls such as Sorter Navigator and Date Picker Users may add modify and delete components on a page just like working with objects in Visual Basic and other integrated development environments Components placed on a page make up the hierarchical structural of such page and are represented via HTML within the page s HTML template and via XML within the page s definition stored in the corresponding ccp file When adding a component t
80. about how the server is configured such as which connectors ODBC OLEDB NET are installed on the server the type and location of the database etc Note that the process of configuring the server side database connection is different for different target platforms programming languages Server Side Connections for ASP When using ASP there are two common methods used to create the server side connection The first method involves using an OLE DB provider such as the Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE DB Provider used to connect to Access databases The other method involves making a connection with an ODBC DSN When using an ODBC DSN the DSN must be configured on the machine where the pages will be published You can then simply specify the ODBC DSN name when configuring the connection Refer to Configuring the Design Side Database Connection for more details about configuring a DSN Add New Connection Design Advanced Server Database MS Access Date Format yyy y mm dd HH nn ss Boolean Format true false Use LIMIT TOP Same as Design Use ODBC Data Source Name Nevin Use Connection String Provider Microsoft Jet OLEDB 4 0 Data Source Build User Name Admin User Password The new connection will be added to all servers You may need to setup database connection settings to other servers Help OK Cancel 105 Date Format This property specifies the format of date types expected in the databas
81. and MySQL you may want your generated programs to use the PHPLib database connectivity library to connect directly to MySQL without the use of drivers 94 Creating a New Database Connection There are several ways of creating a database Connection Select the Add Connection button on the ribbon bar Select the Settings button on the ribbon bar to display the Project settings Select the Connections button and click Add Right click on the Connections icon in the Project Explorer pane and select New Connection Right click on Connections in Project Explorer and select New Connection from the pop up menu rat Hi om o eg ig NewProjectl CodeCharge Studia 5 Data Dictionary Builders Forms Edit Fullscreen Options Add Connection s Serveri ae a y l He Add Diagram l Server RSS EES z a5 ee Designs canna Publish Publish Live Home oes View Pages Project Publishing Tools Project Explorer xX if NewPagel xo Properties An Linge NewProject1 a Data Events Format E E Pages Nenpagel fy Diagrams Ti Connections Resources On Cache Common Files Before Initialize EZ Project E a ba Files Exp 3 2 After Initialize On Initialize View Database Explorer UX Before Show Pil Design HTML Code Preview Live Page For Help press F1 95 Configuring the Design Side Database Connection There are two types of connections you can configure to use with CodeCharge Studio design side and ser
82. any one of the three operations Unlike the grid or editable grid forms which are capable of handling multiple records at the same time the record form can deal with only one database record at a time Record forms are usually used in conjunction with grid forms To open a record the record form needs to be provided with the primary key value of the record to be opened A Link field from a grid form could be used to submit the primary key value to the record form For example the following link has a URL parameter called userid lt http localhost mySite default asp userid 1 gt which could be captured by the record form and used to open the database record whose userid value is 1 Record forms can be constructed using the Record builder or manually using the barebones record form provided under the Forms tab of the Toolbox It is recommended that you use the Record Builder unless you need to exercise full control over the creation of the record form 243 Record Form Properties To expose the record form properties click on either of the glyphs under the Data tab of the Properties window or click on the name of the record form in the Project Explorer Record Form Properties Name Attributes Connection Source Type Data Source Return Page Remove Parameters Convert URL To Restricted Allow Insert Allow Update Allow Delete Preserve Parameters Custom Type Custom Insert Custom Type Custom Update Custom Type Cust
83. are perfect as a starting point for creating simple web applications CodeCharge Studio runs exclusively on the Windows platform The web applications that it generates are platform independent and can run on any system i e Windows Mac Linux and others as long as the system has a Suitable server Windows IIS server can execute ASP scripts while many Linux servers are pre configured to run PHP scripts The programs generated by CodeCharge Studio do not require any custom components to be installed and can run on virtually any applicable web server It is recommended and sometimes required that the latest scripting engine be installed e g ASP3 or PHP4 5 The specific requirements are listed in the System Requirements section When you work with CodeCharge Studio you can usually connect to a remote database residing on your server In some cases e g when working with Microsoft Access you may need to have a copy of the database stored locally on your desktop since remote connection may not be possible Each project within CodeCharge Studio can have two distinct connection types One connection type is the design time connection used during the development process and the other is the server side connection used by the generated pages after they have been deployed For example if you are using MySQL PHP you might use an ODBC connection to design your application but when you deploy your application use the MySQL native interface f
84. as well as the navigational controls Grid Option Settings Sorting Select the type of sorting controls that you want to have in the grid es Grid Builder Sorting Haj Connection fo Sorting IA Data Source C iphon fe Caption w Search C Caption w a BE Navigation Click Next to proceed to step 6 Step 6 Define Navigator Grid Options Further customize the grid form by selecting the caption to be used for sorting as well as the navigational controls Grid Option Settings Page Navigator Select the type of Navigation controls that you want to have in the grid Modify The Custom Navigator window allows you to add custom navigation controls to the form Ea Grid Builder Navigation Connection W No Page Navigator lA Data Source C W 4 5 of 10 CH c al Search le lt lt 5o0f10 gt gt Layout fe First Prey 1 2345 of 10 Next Last C Manual Input Z4 Sorting C Custom Modify i og W Add Page Size Selection Click Next to proceed to step 7 354 Step 7 Define Common Grid Options Further customize the grid form by selecting the caption to be used for sorting as well as the navigational controls Grid Option Settings Title Title for the Grid No records found message Specify the message that will be displayed in the grid form if there are no records to be shown Non breaking space in Inserts a non breaking space amp nbsp into empty grid cells This option
85. authentication details a PHP connection typically requires you to specify the location of the machine where the database is located This value is entered in the Host parameter If the database is located in the same machine as the PHP pages you can simply enter localhost If the database is not located in the same machine you need to specify the IP address or domain address of the machine where the database is located In CodeCharge Studio 5 added PHP MySQL Native Connection MySQL Connection Connection Name PHP_MySQL_NativeConnection MySQL server localhost User Name root User Password TLLLLIT Database test Port 3306 Cancel Help 214 Deploying PERL Applications PERL projects are published to a CGI Common Gateway Interface directory of a PERL enabled server There are many variations of PERL which can be installed and configured to make a web server such as Apache or IIS capable to serving pl files When PERL pages are published to a server and one of the pages is requested over a browser the web server invokes an instance of the PERL executable which runs the requested page and returns the results to the user Before publishing a PERL project there are certain properties that are unique to PERL that need to be configured To configure these properties click on the project name in the Project Explorer window so that the properties appear under the Data tab of the Properties window Data Events Format la
86. be able to merge any content panels into the rendered page This example has two placeholders called Title and Content The lt div gt classes are supposed to work in conjunction with the CSS rules in the designs stylesheet to format and orient the content in the section lt div class art Block gt lt div class art Block tl gt lt div gt lt div class art Block tr gt lt div gt lt div class art Block bI gt lt div gt lt div class art Block br gt lt div gt lt div class art Block tc gt lt div gt lt div class art Block bc gt lt div gt lt div class art Block cl gt lt div gt lt div class art Block cr gt lt div gt lt div class art Block cc gt lt div gt lt div class art Block body gt lt div class art BlockHeader gt lt div class gt lt div gt lt div class r gt lt div gt lt div class art header tag icon gt lt div class t gt Title lt div gt lt div gt lt div gt lt div class art BlockContent gt lt div class art BlockContent body gt lt div class art BlockContent gt Content lt div gt lt div gt lt div gt lt div gt lt div gt 138 Applying a Master Template You apply a master template to portions of an existing page The page may or may not be mapped to a master page i e have a design applied to the page Again content panels are mapped to either a master page or a master template using the placeholder
87. be used to access the database This is required if your database needs a username and password login This is required if your DSN has not been configured with a username Password User password to be used to access the database This is required if your database needs a username and password login This is required if your DSN has not been configured with a password Advanced Tab When you are developing your application there are many instances where you ll need to select a Table from your database This tab allows you to narrow or expand the list of tables displayed by CodeCharge Studio For example Views by default are included in any Table lists if you want to exclude Views unselect the Show Views option The options you select here depend on the type of database you select For example some databases support Catalogs and Schemas while others do not Server Tab Refer to Configuring the Server Side Database Connection for more details 101 Design Time Connection to a MySQL Database Earlier versions of CodeCharge Studio did not include a native MySQL interface in the IDE so it was necessary to use an ODBC connection at design time This is no longer required Now by default CodeCharge Studio uses a native interface when the target platform is PHP or PERL Also by default the design side and the server side connections are assumed to be the same so you only define one connection You are not constrained to use native interface
88. body gt tags on your content page into this panel The content panel is mapped to the content placeholder so if your master page does not have this placeholder your page will not appear correctly Therefore you should always include a placeholder called content on your master page Similarly CodeCharge Studio always creates a content panel called head that is mapped to the head placeholder on your master page When you apply a design to a page all of the code between the lt head gt tags on your content page is moved to this panel e Content placeholders can be called anything so long as they match the right panel s placeholder property When applying a design CodeCharge Studio creates a content panel for every placeholder in the master page but the content is only moved automatically to the content panel the one called content If you decide that you don t need some of the panels created you can remove them from your page For instance if you apply one of the built in Artisteer designs you may not need all of the content panels that are created But make sure that each content panel left on your content page is mapped to one placeholder in the master page otherwise your published web page will not appear correctly at run time 133 e You can dynamically select a design at runtime but ONLY if all of your designs have the same consistent mapping between your content pages and the placeholders in the templates and master p
89. box allows to improve performance by retrieving only records that by retrieving only match current period records that match current period Time stored in a The event time is stored in a separate field in the database separate field Event Time field The database field containing times of events to be shown in the calendar Event Caption field The database field containing captions to be shown in the calendar These can be event names titles descriptions etc fa Calendar builder 7 Data Source ee U Connection events Hna ae ne Eg Year Navigation Event Date field amp Style Z 7 Improve performance by retrieving only records that match current period l Time stored in a separate field Event Time field Event Caption field Click Next to proceed to step 3 318 Step 3 Specify the calendar Type Month format Weekday format Show days of nearby months Week separator Highlight current day Highlight weekends Show event captions Include No Events section Type of calendar to build It can be either an annual quarterly tri monthly or monthly calendar Format to be used to show month names in the calendar header It can be a full month name abbreviated Jan Feb Mar or numeric The format can also be changed later within the MonthDate property Format to be used to represent weekdays It can be a full weekday name abbreviated Mon Tue Wed or single letter
90. can be found in the specified locale and then the specified locale s translation will be used This allows you to place the majority of text translations into a single neutral locale file like English while placing only non shared translations into a separate locale file like English UK 197 It s important to know that the above fallback process applies independently to text resources and formats therefore you can create a locale without any text translations and with formats that are specific to each country For example you may create a generic resource with English translations and display dates and numbers in different formats if the selected locale is English US vs English UK Keep in mind that each locale including the neutral ones like English and Spanish must have some formats associated with them For that reason CodeCharge Studio allows you to specify Country specific Formats when you add a new neutral locale and no country is selected per se Glossary 18N An abbreviation for the word internationalization the letter followed by 18 letters followed by N Internationalization the process of producing an application that can be localized for a particular country without any changes to the program code Internationalized applications store their text in external resources L10N An abbreviation for the word localization the letter L followed by ten letters followed by n Locale a combination of a language and countr
91. characters in a different encoding you can use the META declaration to specify a different encoding for the HTML documents for example lt META http equiv Content Type content text html charset EUC JP gt When saving an HTML template CodeCharge Studio will then parse the HTML content and use the specified character set to encode the HTML file being saved It should be noted that using such META declaration is an accepted standard that will also allow other programs for example MacromediaA DreamweaverA to open and save the same HTML file using the specified encoding Note when using the META declaration within includable pages the META tags will automatically be removed during project publishing since the parent s page charset encoding should be applied The META declaration within includable pages will be used only to specify the encoding when editing the page using external HTML editors Modifying and saving programming code files File Encoding When working with the programming source code CodeCharge Studio by default saves the files using the encoding specified in the File Encoding setting of the project Project settings General 3 File Encoding Western European Windows 1252 E Server Script z Default HTML Encoding Western European Windows 1252 a ng Date Display Format ShornDate j Publishing Site Locales va Source Control s Styles Use Internationalization Feat
92. checkouts Cancel Set time a Advanced Get Options Dialog Replace Action that should be taken when trying to overwrite writable file during Get operation writable Ask Replace Skip Merge Set timestamp Timestamp that should be assigned to the retrieved file Current Modification Check In Make writable Makes files got from the server writable Advanced Get Options x Replace writable OF tance Set timestamp Undo Check Out Advanced Options Dialog Local Determines what action should be taken with the local file copy during Undo Check Out operation copy Replace Undo Check Out Advanced Options x Local copy OK x Replace 7 r Help 130 Multiple Directories within a Project Typically all the pages within a given project are contained within the same folder Any links between the project pages are simple relative links with just the name of the linked page Most projects usually have an images folder and a themes folder that contain resources such as images and external cascading style sheets If necessary you can create a project with multiple nested folders but there are some considerations that you have to bear in mind When an existing page within a project is moved to a different folder CodeCharge Studio prompts you whether the links to the page should be adjusted accordingly You should select Yes so that other pages that link to the relocated page are adjusted to reflect the new
93. class gt com fredck CKeditor connector ConnectorServlet lt servlet class gt lt init param gt lt param name gt baseDir lt param name gt lt param value gt UserFiles lt param value gt lt init param gt lt init param gt lt param name gt debug lt param name gt lt param value gt true lt param value gt lt init param gt lt load on startup gt 2 lt load on startup gt lt serviet gt lt serviet gt lt serviet name gt SimpleUploader lt servlet name gt lt serviet class gt com fredck C Keditor uploader SimpleUploaderServlet lt servlet class gt lt init param gt lt param name gt baseDir lt param name gt lt param value gt UserFiles lt oaram value gt lt init param gt lt init param gt lt param name gt debug lt param name gt lt param value gt true lt param value gt lt init param gt lt init param gt lt param name gt enabled lt param name gt lt param value gt false lt param value gt lt init param gt 264 lt init param gt lt param name gt AllowedExtensionsFile lt param name gt lt param value gt lt param value gt lt init param gt lt init param gt lt param name gt DeniedExtensionsFile lt param name gt lt param value gt php php3 ohp5 phtml asp aspx ascx jsp cfm ctc pl bat exe dll reg cgi lt param value gt lt init param gt lt init param gt lt param name gt AllowedExtensions mage lt param name gt lt param value gt jpog gif jpeg ong bmp lt param valu
94. components that are based on the stylesheet CSS In CodeCharge Studio a page type style means the CSS formatting rules apply to all the components e g forms on the page while a component style type only applies to a particular component Which type of style that you select affects how the HTML is generated so that it coincides with the page or component type style If you are using a custom form template you need to make sure the template is consistent with the stylesheet you use This also applies if you are using a Design Whenever you have a Design applied to a page you can always choose to use the CSS in your design instead of one of the Style profiles If you choose this however you need to make sure that the Design you select is consistent and complete for the HTML generated from your template Example This example shows how you can create the most basic type of form template to generate a form containing just the content of the database then use another template to format the output at run time e First create a new folder called Templates Grid if it does not already exist in your project Create a new page called MyGrid and set the Includable option on the page to Yes Remove any HTML code that may exist on the page so you start with a blank page Paste the following code into the page This HTML represents the most basic form Save the page 158 lt BEGIN Row gt lt BEGIN Contro Content gt Co
95. datasource For example you can define a caption for a Record form Input and assign actions to events related to handling the Record form Any time you run the Record builder this caption will be used for the form caption and the events will be added to your page Database Columns The database columns pane is mostly for displaying database information about the table you selected You cannot change any properties except adding or removing a field from the primary key right click next to the field name Control the control pane is where you select the properties for the control type associated with the field you select in the database columns The properties for each control type is the same as the properties you would set for a control in the Properties pane of the Project Explorer The Display tab and the Input tab refer to the set of controls that are generated by different builders For example a Grid only includes Dislay type controls since a grid is used to display data A Record form is normally used to collect data so a Record form normally includes Input type controls The set of Display controls is actually a subset of Input controls since some fields of input forms may also be designated to display data e g a field of a Record could be a Label control used just to display some database field that you want users to see but not change Just remember Display and Input are related to the controls gen
96. description innerHTML Field name price image_url description The control to which the Autofill feature will be assigned to After the Autofill feature is defined an icon for the feature will appear under the control in the Project Explorer pane The Autofill may be activated after the value of this control changes but you also control the activation of the Autofill feature using the Start Event described below See Autofill Properties for more details on changing properties The table to be used to create an AJAX service that will be used at runtime to retrieve the matching record This is the source of the data used to fill in the other controls of the form A query can be created in place of a table by clicking the Build Query button which opens the Visual Query Builder The database field to be searched for the value entered in the Target control e g if the Target control is employee name the value entered in this field is compared against the Search database field to find the database record used to fill in the othercontrols of the form This field is usually the same as the control source of the Target Control field The fields must be consistent otherwise the Autofill will fail e g comparing employee name against a database field for e mail addresses will likely fail Note by default the control value is used as the source data for matching against the Search field However after you finish defining the
97. displayed in the Project Explorer right beside the item s icon The indicators are available in both Page and File views 116 Note The page node sometimes represents multiple files and additional indicators are available to show that some files under the page node have a different status than the page file itself exclamation mark indicator oz orja ai vE v a a vE l a2 The page file is not under Source Control The page file has been added CVS only The page has been added CVS only There are files with different statuses for this page The page file is ready for editing CVS only The page is ready for editing CVS only There are files with different statuses for this page The page file is locked in server checked in The page is locked in server checked in There are files with different statuses for this page The page file was changed locally checked out The page was changed locally checked out There are files with different statuses for this page The page file is checked out to another user File state transition diagram CVS The CVS Software Configuration Management system uses unreserved checkout and offers more complex locking and file state transition CodeCharge Studio 5 CVS plug in uses additional states for uncommitted added files repository is notified that a file is added but file contents have not been committed yet and for changed file changed locally not committed potentiall
98. divided into folders named the same way as each style for example Styles SandBeach which include the corresponding css cascading stylesheet files and additional sub folders with images Graphical images are stored in the Images sub folder for example Styles SandBeach lmages while images representing text e g button text are stored in a subfolder named the same as the language code for example Styles SandBeach lmages en for English CodeCharge Studio also supports dynamic styles denoted as Dynamic in the style selection dialogs By assigning this style to a page or component you will be able to dynamically assign a specific style at run time When assigning dynamic styles to a component or page CodeCharge Studio replaces the style name within the HTML with the text CCS Style This is used as a tag that is replaced with the actual stylesheet when your web page is requested lt link href Themes CCS_Style Style css type text css rel stylesheet gt lt img src Styles CCS_Style Images Spacer gif gt 171 User Interface Style Selection Many CodeCharge Studio builders include a style selection step To apply a style simply select it from the list of available styles At the same time you may use the Apply to option if you want to apply the style to the whole page or only the component that you re creating e g record or grid form Alternatively click the Style Builder button to open the Style Builder and mod
99. formats should be used by default so that even when the country is unknown the data can still be displayed in some acceptable format like yyyy mm da for dates It is also a recommended practice to use neutral locales to store common text translations while adding country specific locales to store additional translation strings that are spelled differently in each country This way you don t need to duplicate the same translation strings Your application will automatically select a translation from the neutral locale such as French whenever a translation is not found in the currently specified language and country like French Canada All internationalized web sites created with CodeCharge Studio utilize a set of attributes and resources for each language and country such as e Output Encoding Language resource file containing translated text strings e Date boolean and numeric formats The internationalization features and resources are always available in CodeCharge Studio even when you create a single language web site You can internationalize your web site when using a single language or you can choose to have certain pages internationalized but not others The internationalization consists mainly of the developer inserting translation keys during application design and replacing them with translated text by the application at run time When creating or changing captions on your web pages you have the choice to type the text directly or ins
100. forms Project Path Specifies the current location of the project and its file name This is for informational purposes and cannot be edited from this dialog Exclude missing form fields parameters from data updates Specifies the default processing method for missing form fields and parameters This feature was introduced in CodeCharge Studio 3 1 to improve the functionality of the Record and Editable Grid components When this option is enabled any fields that are hidden within a form and therefore missing when submitted will be excluded from the INSERT or UPDATE statement and therefore preserving previous database values When disabled hidden fields will be saved into database with null values clearing any previous value already in the database Fields may be hidden either by placing them within panels or by setting field s Visible property to No or Dynamic Note this option doesn t apply to Custom Insert and Custom Update features as they provide corresponding options and can be used to override this default value at form level Project settings General settings New Page Template Home Page fr Form Templates Templates m CiiProjects NewProjectliProject ces LA Project Path IM Exclude missing form fieldsiparameters from data updates 19 Configuring Publishing Settings When you publish a page or an entire project CodeCharge Studio first generates the programming code to the s
101. horizontal orientation of the search form The search form will have a list box that can be used to specify the number of records to be returned per page Specifies vertical or horizontal orientation of the search form Additional features for the search form You can specify whether the form should be submitted using the POST or GET method You can also specify whether you want each database field to be represented by a search form field or alternatively have one search form field which can be used to search all database fields using the OR operator You can also decide to use the Advanced Search option which provides an opportunity for users to select a type of search they want to perform The a ceAdvanced Searcha option creates a single textbox while also automatically adding a listbox with search options so that users can specify whether they want to search for a ceAny Wordsa a ceAll Wordsa or a oeExact Phrasea You can also opt to use the a coeCleara option to allow user to clear the search fields when clicked Additionally you can specify that the search button be the default button so that hitting the enter key would be the same as clicking the search button These are the fields to be shown in the search form They are selected from among the Available Fields Refreshes the connection if you make changes to the database while using the builder Select a form field then click this button to move it upwards i
102. href PathCategory_Src gt PathCategory lt a gt lt END PathComponent gt lt BEGIN CurrentCategory gt CurrentCategory lt END CurrentCategory gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt table gt lt END Path NewPath1 gt Image Main PathCategory gt CurrentCategory Description The Path component is mainly used in conjunction with the Directory form to provide a sequential list of links leading up to a category within a hierarchy The data source of a Path component corresponds to a listing of hierarchical categories As the user browses through the categories the path component displays the path leading up to the current category from the root category For further information about the Path component please refer to the Directory Form section of the User s Guide Radio Button Overview HTML lt BEGIN RadioButton RadioButton gt lt input Check type radio name RadioButton1 value Value gt Description lt END RadioButton RadioButton gt Image Description Radio button controls are used for the selection of mutually exclusive options A number of radio buttons with the same name are presented so the user can select one When a radio button control is rendered on the page the default behavior is to have all the radio buttons appearing horizontally as shown below C pini p Opting C Optimi 2 6 You may have the individual radio buttons appear vertically by addin
103. is optional and should be used only if you want to provide a search form that will allow users to filter records displayed in the gallery Gallery Search Settings Create Search Filter Sorting list box Records pe page list box Orientation Advanced Available Fields Search Fields am 4 a ba Control Type Activate this option if you decide to create a search form for your gallery Adds to the search form two listboxes for sorting The first listbox will contain a list of all the available fields so that the user can select the field to sort by The second listbox will indicate the desired sort order ASC DESC If this option is selected the search form will have a listbox that can be used to specify the number of records to be returned on each page Specifies vertical or horizontal orientation of the search form Click this button to specify additional features for the search form such as submit method POST or GET search type meaning the a ANDa and a ORa conditions or Advanced Search option etc This listbox shows all the fields available in the table or view This listbox displays the fields that will be shown in the search form They are selected from among the Available Fields Select an Available Field then click this button to add it to the form Click this button to add ALL Available Fields to the form Select a form field then click this button to remove it from
104. is selected in the grid the page is redirected to the maint page and a query parameter is passed to identify the record that should be queried and displayed e g emp_id 11 This is a common technique used to handle primary key fields unique record columns but the form builders such as the Grid builder do not make the same assumptions as the Application Builder If you want to enable this by default you need to change the display control type and configure the properties for these database fields in the Data Dictionary The following section shows how to do this with a Link control 406 Data Dictionary Example This example shows you a simple case where you may use the Data Dictionary to configure the default properties of the forms and controls generated by the builders Changing Captions and Defining a Link Parameter This example is just a simple demonstration of configuring the Data Dictionary to change the default controls captions and titles of forms We will use the departments and employees table of the intranet sample database to display a list of departments and the employees that belong to each department We will configure our changes in the data dictionary first then run the Grid builder to create two forms like the ones shown below The page should display a list of department names When we click on one of the departments the second grid will display a list of all the employees within the department Ea
105. is specific to that particular style and form If you later change the Page style it does not affect any forms created with the Component style You can change the Component style for a form but the change only affects that form not any other forms on the page even if they share the same style When you use a form template the rules change since the HTML code is not generated entirely by the builder Refer to Using Form Templates for more information If you have a Design applied to the page you cannot assign a style in the builder either Page or Component style This is because the HTML generated for your form is based on the template you supply therefore it does not contain the code that maps to the CSS rules in the stylesheet Also to prevent conflicts between the styles defined in your design and the styles defined in one of the CodeCharge Studio styles you are not allowed to select a different Page style Similarly if you do not have a Design applied to the page you can change the Page style but not the Component style since the component style depends on generating specific HTML code for the form that makes it unique to that style The CSS rules in your stylesheet only work so far as the rules in the stylesheet refer to elements or attributes of the code in the template which is something you defined when you created the template If you want your forms to appear correctly your template code should be consistent with howeve
106. is used to empty cells make browsers display cell borders even if a cell is completely empty Display the total number of Specify if the label which shows the total number of records in the record set should records be displayed above the grid Add Panels to each column Specify if all controls are taken into the blocks of the following type lt BEGIN for Hide Show functionality ControlType ControlName gt lt END ControlType ControlName gt It will be used to dynamically hide show controls on the page Alternate records If this option is checked every other record in the grid will appear in a row with a different style than the preceding record You can further choose how the alternate rows should be implemented Selecting a ceCreate alternate controlsa will create two data rows where one row will have a different background color to emphasize the separation between consecutive rows Selecting a ceUse CSS stylea applies the Set Row Style action to the Before Show Row event of the grid where in turn the main and alternate CSS style classes are specified By default the Set Row Style action will apply the Row style class to standard grid rows and the AltRow class to alternate grid rows Both these classes are defined within the Style css file used by the current page or grid and can be modified as needed Ea Grid Builder Title Jy Connection Ist of Users US Data Source No records found message No records
107. limit The component can also be configured to allow or disallow certain file types from being uploaded to the server After a file is successfuploadlly uploaded to the server it is assigned a name in the form of yyyymmddHHnnss lt originalName gt where yyyymmddHHnnss is the date time value indicating the time when the file was uploaded This date time value ensures that the uploaded files have unique names The File Upload component can be added to a Record form or an Editable Grid Both of these forms are capable of submitting values unlike a Grid form which does not submit any values To add a File Upload component use the File Upload option located under the Forms tab of the Toolbox 01 02 Slider m 2q Captcha HEHH 123 Numeric Up Down File Uplgad Inline Date i Picker E Popup Date Picker trail FEK FCKeditg File Upload Additional 7 Note ASP 3 0 does not have native support for uploading files When using ASP it is necessary to install third party software to perform the upload when invoked by ASP code However this is not necessary if you decide to use the script based pure ASP upload method CodeCharge Studio is able to work with the following upload components 265 A COM based components Persits Upload CLSID Persits Upload Company Persits Software Inc URL http www persits com ABCUpload CLSID ABCUpload4 XForm Company WebSupergoo URL http Wwww websupergoo com B Scr
108. lt body gt lt html gt 157 Applying a Form Template in the Builder When you run one of the builders one or more forms are created and added to your page The number of forms generated depends on the builder and whether or not you have included a search form For example the Grid and Record builder generates a grid form a record form and a search form if you have enabled this option For each of these forms when you run the builder you have the option of selecting a built in form template or supplying a template from your project Fa Grid and Record Components Builder IW Create Search Filter re meee Interactive Search Error E Grid Records per page listbox Keyword fs keyword Cs Layout Vertical C Horizontal HTML Template from file r GEE MEENTE e ci sd ag department _id _ Layout O e b Adyar Horizontal ccp built in H Options am j emp_login T Recor paa Sr femployee_is_active gp Style l Data Source ity Department Id Emp Login Oi Navigation i T Ti ct TT F Control Type TextBox faddress i Cr Cancel lt Back Next gt Finish How Styles apply to your template depends how you wrote the template A particular Style created by CodeCharge Studio consists mainly of two parts One part is the CSS stylesheet that defines all the formatting rules The other part is the generated HTML for your forms and
109. mode you can enter a Line Break by typing the shift Enter keys together Radio Button HTML lt INPUT TYPE radio D Radio1 NAME Radio1 gt Description Radio button controls are used for the selection of mutually exclusive options A number of radio buttons with the same name are presented and out of these the user can select only one 289 Paragraph Break HTML lt P gt lt P gt Description A Paragraph Break represents a paragraph and has the effect of placing an empty space between two adjacent paragraphs Text Area HTML lt TEXTAREA ID TextArea1 NAME TextArea1 ROWS 4 COLS 15 gt Text Area lt TEXTAREA gt Image Description A Text Area field is used when a large amount of data needs to be entered It is possible to set the number of rows as well as columns to be displayed The control also has scrollbars to allow adding text beyond the specified rows and columns Text Box HTML lt INPUT TYPE text ID TextBox1 NAME TextBox1 gt Description A Text Box is used to provide single line input It is usually used when a small amount of data is to be entered 290 Working with Builders Application Builder The Application Builder can be used to create multiple project pages based on the tables or queries in a designated database connection In some instances the Application Builder can be used to create all the project pages The different steps of the Application Builder allow you
110. name of the AJAX feature that changes the panel s behavior This means that you can add or remove the Update Panel feature to from existing panels The following AJAX feature properties can also be adjusted UpdatePanel UpdatePanel Enabled Ves Children 45 Triggers Yes Refresh Enabled Specifies whether the Update Panel feature should be active When not enabled the panel will behave like regular panel Children As Specifies whether the Update Panel content should be refreshed when actions are performed on Triggers components included within the panel When not enabled the panel will refresh its content only on events specified in the Refresh property e g entering a value in the search field or selecting one of the navigation buttons on the grid form triggers an update to the panel such as update to the records displayed in the grid Refresh List of events that activate panel refresh in addition to standard children actions enabled via Children As Triggers 440 Dialog Panel Description The Dialog Panel feature displays panel content in a separate window overlay Supported Components Panel Properties Name User assigned name identifying the feature within HTML Title Set the Title of a window overlay Modal Is window Modal Specifies whether the window is displayed as a Modal window or not A Modal window requires the user to close the window before the user can interact with the web page unde
111. of available styles Sele amp amp amp ES List of Store Categories OE Te aP aTa Pa aTa aTa aTa Ta Ta aTa aT Ta Ta aTa aTa aTa aTa aTa aT aTa Ta aTa aTa Mh a h h h h h el el h el h ala a al al ila ila ala h h ln el il la h h ella h lla h all il ila il ll il il el il h la la lla k ila la ila il h il el h il la la la lla h ila ila ill il ll ln il il h ala tl h la la lla h ila ill ila il il il el il h la la h alla il lla la il il ll la h h a ala la ala lla ila h ll ila ll ll il il la al la h la Category id amp Y f Category Name amp aegon OOOO do Enw OOOO Ct Mo records Records per page First First Frew Prev Page Number gf Edit with builder E Copy Rename Grid store_categories Cut As Text Insert translation Apply Design to this page Table lt TABLE gt Properties lt TR gt Properties lt TD gt Properties lt FONT gt Properties Page Properties T Pro perties 7 Delete Grid store categories 8 8 8 8 89 fr 230 The Directory Form Description The directory form is speci
112. of events contains most of the available events but it is not guaranteed to be comprehensive for all browsers and neither does it indicate browser compatibility Data Events Format tasks x Server Client be On Load Add Action Add Code How to use Fil This event occurs on the client side when the user submits a form but before the Generally there are two common ways of adding JavaScript code to an event If the amount of code involved is small you can add all the code directly within the HTML tag To demonstrate this approach the following listing contains JavaScript code attached to the onClick event of the submit button The syntax of the code includes the javascript keyword that identifies the type of script A semicolon separates the javascript keyword from the actual JavaScript code that is executed lt input name Cancel type submit value Cancel onClick javascript confirm Are you sure you want to cancel gt The confirm function is a JavaScript function that displays a popup window in which the user can click on an Ok or a Cancel button The function takes a string argument that is displayed in the body of the popup window In most cases you will want to execute more that one line of code This is where the use of functions becomes useful Just like in other languages a JavaScript function is a group of one or more statements that can be invoked as a single entity A function
113. option the HTML for your forms is generated mostly in the same way as it would for Page style however the stylesheet used is from the design applied to your page not any of the CodeCharge Studio styles in your project If you want your generated forms to have a particular styling select component style The builder will generate specific HTML code for your selected style and there should not be any conflict with the style you selected and the design applied to your page This way you can have both the content of your web page styled with your applied design and have your forms styled differently with one of the selected CodeCharge Studio styles You may notice that when you run the builder the preview window shows how the design applied to your page looks for the page and the form If you have a default style selected in your project the preview window will also show your forms in this style as if you selected Component style There is always a style assigned by the builder to your form so you should check this step otherwise the HTML generated by the builder may not be what you want If your page already has some generated forms before you apply a design CodeCharge Studio will replace your stylesheet and HTML code with code that is compatible with the design Again if your forms have component styling your layout coloring fonts etc are preserved But since you cannot have both a page style and a 174 design
114. other relief sought by YesSoftware in the event of a breach of this License YesSoftware shall not be required to notify you of any breach nor make any demand or claim against you resulting from any such breach or for a demand to stop any use or distribution in violation of the terms of this License and you agree that any breach of this License and damages resulting therefrom shall relate back to the first and earliest breach thereof Failure of YesSoftware to enforce its rights pursuant to this License shall not constitute a waiver of such rights and shall not prejudice YesSoftware in any later enforcement of its rights or rights to seek damages therefrom 7 UPGRADES If you acquired this Software as an upgrade of a previous version this Agreement replaces and supercedes any prior Agreements You may continue to use the previous version of the Software provided that both the previous version and the upgrade are installed on the same computer at all times You may not have a previous version and the related upgrade version installed on separate computers at any time 8 ENTIRE AGREEMENT This End User Agreement is the entire agreement between you and YesSoftware relating to the Licensed Software and supercedes all prior written or oral statements promises representations and agreements 9 GOVERNING LAW The agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of California Any action or proceeding brought by either party against the o
115. proceed The next window presents you with fields to enter your name company name and serial number To take advantage of the 20 day trial period enter Trial Version into the Serial Number field Click Next to proceed Confirm or specify the destination folder where you want CodeCharge Studio to be installed The default recommended path for installing CodeCharge Studio is C Program Files CodeCharge Studio If you wish to change this path click Browse and specify an alternate path Once complet click Next to proceed After all the selected files have been installed and configured you will see a window that confirms the successful installation Click Finish to complete the installation process C CodeCharge Studio 5 Installation Welcome Welcome to the CodeCharge Studia 5 Setup program This program will install CodeCharge Studio 5 on Your computer Itis strongly recommended that you esit all other Windows programe before running ji this Setup program Click cancel to exit Setup and close any programe You hawe running Click Hert to continue with the Setup program Warning This program i protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the masimum extent possible under law Astrum Installer by Thraes Software 40 If you installed CodeCharge Studio i
116. project the builder will only display the files found in the templates folder under the folder corresponding the builder e g Record Grid etc If you keep your project templates in a different location you will need to browse and select the specific template file using the ellipsis lf you create a form template or copy and paste one of the built in templates from the installation folder you need to be aware of a few issues 156 e f you copy and paste the template from the installation folder make sure you copy both the ccp and html files e Make sure your template page includes all of the template blocks and content tags required for your project and the builder e Always save your template pages before using e Place your template files in the templates folder and corresponding component folder e g Record Grid etc where they can be found by the builder Lag forum aie App_Code F App _GlobalResources bin Designs images jE a Styles E Templates E Authentication 4 EditableGrid H 0 Gallery S d Grid E Columnar ccp Columnar html i Gallery ccp Gallery html J Justifed ccpp Justified html I SimpleColumnar ccp SimpleColumnar html 1 SimpleTabular cop SimpleTabular htmi Tabular ccp Tabular html i Record Search Clientl18N aspx c Clientl18N asox cs E fy Proj F Files U4 Dat e Although a template is
117. result further converted to a 32 byte hexadecimal value This allows the encrypted cache key to be unique without storing large amounts of data Each of the above sets of attributes page name and parameters values are encrypted separately and separated by period to allow all cache keys for a specific page to be deleted when needed In the end the exact makeup of a cache key is as follows cache_key hex md5 path_and_page_name hex md5 parameters The resulting cache key is 65 bytes long Cache Events 199 The process of caching pages or retrieving the cache is associated with the a ceOn Cachea event and executed whenever cache related functionality is performed The On Cache event is executed before the cache key is being sought and cache retrieved and before a page is being saved into the cache Additionally the CacheAction CacheAction variable is set respectively to Fetch or Store to help you determine which of the actions are being performed The On Cache event can be used to alter the way the caching process is performed Examples include creating complex cache keys disabling the cache under certain circumstances logging user traffic even when pages are cached and executing additional code during the caching process Cache Actions CodeCharge Studio includes the Manage Cache action Manage Cache can perform tasks including clearing the whole cache removing expired cache objects or removing a cached page
118. run time The Locale ID cannot be modified Formatted data Examples of numeric boolean and date time data formatted according to the Country or Country samples Formats specified above The Edit Locale dialog also contains the Customize button that opens the Customize Formats dialog allowing you to associate custom formats with the selected locale The options available in this dialog are self explanatory and similar to regional settings in Microsoft Windows The Code Settings dialog allows you to specify the Locale for ASP PHP and NET This is an advanced feature that can be used to override the formats defined by CodeCharge Studio with formats defined by the NET ASP or PHP environments and associated with the specified Locale 194 Placing Translation Resources on Web pages You internationalize a web application by placing translation resource keys throughout the web pages You can localize the page at the same time by specifying the appropriate translation text for each key All builders can also place commonly used resource keys if you select the Internationalized option when running a builder To place a translation string on a page in the Design or HTML mode right click anywhere on the page and select Insert translation To convert existing text to a resource key highlight the text right click and select Insert translation Search users First Name is frst name i Last Name s lastname List of User
119. server side interface for deployed applications The following table provides a list of applicable operating systems web servers databases and language version options for PERL 46 PERL Setup Unix Linux Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 Apache Internet Information Services IIS 4 0 or higher Personal Web Server PERL 5 0 or higher i e some popular distributions of PERL include ActiveState PERL Mod_PERL for Apache and Indigo PERL MySQL PostgreSQL Microsoft Access MS SQL Server Oracle DB2 FoxPro or other database via ODBC The following is a list of steps that should be performed to setup and test the environment where the Perl pages will be published These steps don t have to be followed strictly in the order in which they are presented below Install and configure and test the web server software The Perl language comes in many distributions as shown in the table above Among the most popular are ActivateState Perl and Indigo Perl You can also find more distributions at htip www perl com Depending on the distribution of Perl you decided to use the accompanying documentation should contain information on how to install configure and test the server Note The Perl distribution is installed on top of a web server such as Apache or IIS If you already have a web server you can examine each of the distributions to see which is compatible with your web server If you don t have a we
120. some of the frequently accessed information without connecting to the Internet Using a Firewall for Secure Internet Access Computers that are publicly accessible via the Internet are exposed to various security risks such as hacking or virus infections Due to these risks it is recommended that you use a firewall to filter unwanted requests that may come via the Internet The firewall can be setup to meet specific criteria and filter both incoming and outgoing traffic Many firewalls also act as proxy servers and routers allowing you to use a single device for all your Internet connectivity needs Due to the increase in security risks firewall popularity has grown exponentially and Windows XP currently includes a simple built in firewall Web Servers Now that you have a better understanding of Internet connectivity you should understand how an actual web site functions on the Internet When you surf the Internet your browser acts as the client that connects to various web servers and displays the information returned from a server Your computer can also act as a web server if you install and run a web server application such as Personal Web Server PWS IIS Internet Information Services or Apache The web server listens for incoming Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP requests and responds by sending back the appropriate information HTTP is an Internet protocol that defines the format used to exchange information over the Internet HTTP req
121. style on the same page this code may change If you remove a design from your page the styling reverts back to whatever it was before you applied the design Note when you create a new project the default style is basic If you run one of the builders e g grid and select a new page style this will also change the default style Every time you create a new page afterwards this will be the default style for the page When you create a new page you may not notice that a stylesheet has been applied to the page because some CodeCharge Studio styles have a background definition and some do not Regardless there may be situations where you do not want a stylesheet added to the page For example CodeCharge Studio does not distinguish between template files and master pages in your design and other CodeCharge Studio pages So when you create a new template file or master page a stylesheet will be added that you may not want and may conflict with any CSS e g other stylesheets in your design To remove this find and remove this link lt link rel stylesheet type text css href Styles Basic Style_doctype css gt Managing Project Styles and Settings Every time you apply a style to a page or component it is added to the list of project styles The list of styles and related settings can be managed in the project settings The style options can be used to e review all the styles used within the project e manage styles used within the proje
122. submitted 269 Image Overview HTML lt img src Image1 gt Image Description The Image control is used to embed an image into the current page Ideally this control is used when the image location is stored in a database column When the form is processed at runtime the image location is retrieved from the database and used to create the actual img tag that displays the image on the page If you simply need to display a static image on the page you should use the Image element under the HTML tab of the Toolbox Image Link Overview HTML lt a href ImageLink1 gt lt img src ImageLink1_Src border 0 gt lt a gt Image 4 r Description An Image Link is similar to an ordinary Link control Instead of text an image is used to represent the link Like an ordinary link an Image Link can be used to link to other pages or even the same page At the same time image links pass selected parameters to the destination pages Include Page Overview HTML IncludePage1 Image Unchuche Page 1 Description Certain pages are created specifically for the inclusion in other pages such as the header and footer pages that appear in many sites The Include Page control is used for this purpose Before a page can be included using the Include Page control the page to be included must be defined with the Includable property set to Yes It is necessary to set the Includable property so that other include files that
123. tag within the page Additional options for advanced users are described below 193 Advanced Locale Settings Locale Selection The advanced locale settings contain additional internationalization options which allow you to specify how the web application should set the active locale at run time Query String Parameter name that you d like to use in the URL to specify the locale or language neutral parameter locale For example when the parameter name is locale and the URL contains the string locale tr then the French language will be selected and its corresponding locale activated Refer to the section on Locale Selection and Fallback Process for more details about language and locale selection The locale URL parameter automatically sets the session variable and cookie if you select to use them This allows you to create a single URL that activates a specific language that is preserved for the duration of the session and or the cookie Session Name of the session variables that you d like to use to specify the locale and language variables Cookie Name of the cookie that you d like to use to specify the locale and specify its duration in days HTTP Header If specified the locale will be selected automatically when your Web application detects an Accept acceptable locale selection in the HTTP header sent to the server by a Web browser For more Language information please refer to HI TP Accept Language In multiple and confli
124. td gt lt tr gt lt END RowError gt e Like the grid form an editable grid has a row containing sorter controls and another row at the bottom that contains the navigator controls e In addition to the columns for each of the database fields that need to be shown an editable grid has an extra column that is used to indicate the records that should be deleted This column contains a single checkbox control which the user can activate before submitting the form so that the corresponding records are deleted Fortnstate FormScript List of Users Fi l E Error FirstName amp LastName amp Y i Email Delete Begin Row Error first_name I last_name title email Mo records wE ka Page Number of Total Pages gt EJ Submit The bottom row of the editable grid also contains the Submit and Cancel buttons The Submit button is used to initiate insert update and delete operations The Cancel button is used to terminate any current operations based on the contents of the rows within the editable grid When the form is submitted the underlying code determines what operation to perform based on the submitted values 202 Editable Grid Properties The properties of an Editable Grid which are displayed under the Data tab of the Properties window are similar to the properties of a record form An Editable Grid has some unique properties such as Empty Rows and Delete Control as shown below Editable Grid
125. template panel Template panels also contain content panels which are mapped to the placeholders in the master template with the olaceholder property Even though every panel has both a placeholder property and a master template property do not assign both properties at the same time Also all of the content panels within a template panel should map to the same master template That is if one of your content panels within a template panel refers to a placeholder that is not in the master template it will not be rendered on your page at run time A master template can be used to style any portion of a CodeCharge Studio page It does not have to be used in conjunction with a master page Most of the built in Artisteer designs include one or more master templates with each design When you apply one of the designs to a page CodeCharge Studio creates a content panel on your page for every placeholder on the master page i e title content head body menu etc You should notice that every one of these panels is mapped to the master page with the placeholder property But in addition to the master page the designs also usually include several master templates you can use to style each of the content panels For example if your page has a menu the design normally includes a MenuTemplate that can be used to style the content panel for your menu a ContentTemplate EE MasterPage Ha Title P Head MenuTemplate 7
126. the Editable Grid gt cy 4 cy Cc Build Query Allow Insert Custom Insert Number of empty rows Allow Update Custom Update Allow Delete Custom Delete Include Cancel Button Page Name Order by Control type Indicates your intention to create a editable grid form Select the type of navigation controls you want to have on the editable grid form This list box shows all the fields available in the table or view These are the fields to be shown in the editable grid form They are selected from among the Available Fields select an Available Field then click this button to add it to the form Click this button to add ALL Available Fields to the form select a form field then click this button to remove it from the form Click this button to remove all fields from the form Select a form field then click this button to move it upwards in the order of appearance Select a form field then click this button to move it downwards in the order of appearance Opens the dialog to specify parameters used for joining with other tables The Table View identifies the other to which the current table is bound by the Bound Column The Text Column is the value returned from the bound table Specify the name of the page where the editable grid and search form will appear Select a field by which the records will be ordered by when initially displayed 308 Configuring the Record After configuring the l
127. the database and most ODBC and OLEDB providers support interfaces that expose how these relationships are defined However when the relationships are not defined or the connection is using a connector that doesn t have support for foreign keys CodeCharge Studio creates artificial relationships based on the field names in the tables Specifically when two fields of a table have the same name CodeCharge Studio assumes that a relationship exists between the tables The Visual Query Builder always relates tables by field names when CodeCharge Studio cannot discover the relationships from the database but the Data Dictionary will only do this if you request the relationships to be added with the Suggest icon on the ribbon bar Relationships can also be added or deleted in the Database Explorer The Database Explorer and the Visual Query Builder are very similar except the relationships you define in the Data Dictionary are permanent and reuseable When you change or define a relationship between tables in the Visual Query Builder the relationship only exists for that query e g if you define a relationship between the employees table and the departments table on the department_id field where it didn t exist before the relationship only exists for that query When you define the relationship in the data dictionary the relation can be resused every time you run one of the builders 402 To view the relationships between tables using the Dat
128. the form Click this button to remove all fields from the form Select a form field then click this button to move it upwards in the order of appearance Select a form field then click this button to move it downwards in the order of appearance Specify the control type to be used for each of the fields in the form Click Next to proceed to step 4 344 Step 4 Define Layouts Grid options Select the desired design of the grid template and placement of components inside it Here you have four layouts to choose from Columns Number of columns to be used in the gallery Rows Number of rows to be displayed per page Note the total number of records per page will be equal to the number of Columns multiplied by the number of Rows Custom HTML Grid layout that represents data in datasheet view i e in a form of rectangular table with column Template captions across the top row identifiers usually listed down the left margin and the data in the cell where the row and column intersect cs Gallery Builder Layout Ha Connection Gallery Style Columns Rows z Search C HTML Template from file p m L m uaa e a Galler FLL l OUIC M ang IA Data Source Click Next to proceed to step 5 345 Step 5 Define Gallery Options Step 5 allows you to define the following gallery layout options Gallery Options Layout Images Non breaking Space in empty cells Display the total number of rec
129. the min at the bottom the max at the top Possible values Horizontal Vertical Default value of slider Sample Implementation Name Sliderl Enabled Yes Length 100 Minimum value 0 Maxi mum value 100 Step 10 Position After On entation IH orizo ntal Default Value Image ee ee 442 InMotion Framework Support VB NET and C CodeCharge Studio 5 includes support for an open source 3rd party ASP NET application framework InMotion Framework that simplifies C and VB NET development and eliminates a need for generating code The InMotion Framework is shown as a technology choice when creating new projects Name MF irstApplication Location C Project Files CodeCharge Studio 5 Projects x Browse Language ASPONET VB InMotion Framework z ASP 3 0 with Templates ASP NET CH InMMotion Framework ColdFusion ColdFusion with Templates JSP 1 1 JDK 1 3 Ferl 5 0 with Templates FPHP4 PHF5 with Templates Servlets 2 2 JDK 1 3 with Templates Key benefits of using the InMotion Framework in your applications include e Building Web applications instead of generating code e Rather than generating large amounts of ASP NET code CodeCharge Studio creates powerful ASP NET applications in the form of clear and standardized ASPX files that utilize the static code framework This eliminates a need for dealing with understanding and modi
130. the most common database used with PHP and PHP has the capability of connecting directly to a MySQL database without going through an intermediate driver or provider The following are the settings that need to be made for the server side connection to the MySQL database Add New Connection Design Advanced Server Date Format mmddyy HH nn ss Boolean Format true talse M Use LIMIT TOR Same as Design PHP Database Library MySQL Database or ODBC connection name Internet Host Port Socket localhost Login Password username Corre W Persistent Connection The new connection will be added to all servers You may need to setup database connection settings bo other servers Help OK Cancel 109 Use LIMIT TOP PHP Database Library Database or ODBC connection name Host Port Login Password Persistent Connection Use ODBC Cursor This option specifies if the LIMIT or TOP clause should be used to limit the size of SQL result sets You should select this option when you have large tables and you anticipate that your SQL queries may return a large amount of data Select the library for the database Enter the name of the MySQL database Enter the IP address or hostname of the machine where the MySQL server is located Leave blank unless using a port other than the default 3306 The user account to be used to access the database The password correspondi
131. the parent component s Data Source only available for links located within data bound component e DataSource Parameter us used to retrieve a parameter from the stored procedure configured as Data Source only available for links located within data bound component e Parameter Source which specifies the expression that depending on the Source Type selected will be used to evaluate and retrieve parameter s resulting value for Source Type URL Form Session Application and Cookie Parameter Source specifies name of a variable to extract from the selected scope for Expression typed parameters Parameter Source specifies expression to evaluate against the site s selected language with Source Type DataSource Column Parameter the Parameter Source is a dropdown list with DataSource columns parameters available for selection e Parameter name which is a name of the parameter to attach to a link Advanced Tab In the Target Frame field of the Advanced Tab you can define where the linked document will be opened for example if the target _blank the document will open the document in a new browser window In the Screen Tip field you can enter the text will be displayed in the browser for the link The second component Link1 value can be specified using the Default Value property and can be set changed in the RunTime Also the second component Link1 can be changed for the plain text but you will be unable to change it in the RunTime lt a href
132. the search form does not handle database content Custom Delete This property is always left blank since the search form does not handle database content Type Custom Delete This property is always left blank since the search form does not handle database content Because search forms are always used in conjunction with other forms it is only in very rare occasions that you will need to create a search form manually starting with a barebones record form In order for a search form to operate seamlessly with another form there are a number of properties which have to be synchronized Using the builders to create the search form takes the hustle out of the process since the builder will configure both the search form and the corresponding form which will receive the search criteria 208 Working with Controls Button Overview HTML lt BEGIN Button Button1 gt lt input type submit value Button1 name Button1 gt lt END Button Button1 gt Image Description When placed within an HTML form a submit button serves the purpose of submitting all the fields within the form to the designated action page A submit button submits only those fields within the form in which is it contained and cannot be used to submit fields from multiple forms In order for the submit button to work it must be within an HTML form whose action property specifies the location where the form will be submitted i e lt Form action page htm gt lt
133. the total range of pages When you click on the Navigator Icon in the Toolbox the Create Navigator window appears where you can configure the properties of the Navigator Navigation Type Select the link type of the navigator Text links Image buttons Image buttons with text First Prev Next Last Activate the corresponding checkbox if you want to have a link for the option in the navigator Disabled links are not Links for pages that cannot be navigated are not displayed e g when displaying page 1 visible the link for the First page will not be displayed 2 3 Page Numbers No No Page numbers are shown Current page only Only the current page number is shown Current page in the A list of pages is shown with the current page appearing in the center center Current page moving A list of pages is shown with the current page appearing in plain text relative to the other pages Number of page links The number of pages that should be shown in the list of pages Show total pages Show the total number of pages that can be browsed Create Navigator x Name Navigatorl Navigation type Page Numbers Text links E No 6 Image buttons 6 Current page only Image buttons with text saa page in the center Disabled links are not visible Current page moving gt Manual i ii Number of 7 Previous Prey a bike 10 z First First Show total pages Next Next Add Page Size Selection Last Last Preview Records per pa
134. this Software or any modification thereof will run under any language software or program other than implemented by YesSoftware You agree that any modifications made to this Software belong to YesSoftware and are permitted for your exclusive use during the period of this License Agreement and may not be transferred sold or licensed to another entity 3 USE AND EVALUATION PERIOD You may install and use one copy of this Software on one client computer for software development purposes Subsequent installations require you to obtain additional licenses unless you are transferring this Software to another computer You may not network this Software or otherwise use it on more than one computer or computer terminal at one time You may not lease or otherwise rent the Software but you may transfer the Software and accompanying written materials on a permanent basis provided the recipient agrees to the terms of this Agreement You may not sublicense or permit simultaneous use of the Software by more than one user If you are evaluating this software you may use an evaluation copy for the maximum of twenty 20 days in order to determine whether to purchase this Software 4 LIMITED WARRANTY THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND YESSOFTWARE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES RELATING TO THIS SOFTWARE WHETHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE 30 5 LIMITA
135. title Tdate add Cancel 422 AJAX Autofill Description The Autofill feature retrieves a matching record from an AJAX service and populates selected fields within the current form The current control value will be passed to the AJAX service as an URL parameter named keyword An AJAX service can then use this parameter to retrieve the matching record The Autofill feature is implemented via the jQuery AJAX library and shown as JAuitofill Supported Components All controls Properties Enabled Specifies whether the feature is active Name User assigned name identifying the feature within HTML Controls Controls to be populated with field values retrieved from an AJAX service You can also specify the HTML property as the target for each control if other than value For example specify src to modify the image source for an Image control Start event Client event or condition upon which the feature is executed You can select one or more events or conditions via the provided dialog Value field HTML property of the current control whose value will be passed to the AJAX service as criteria to find matching records Sample values value innerHTML span The AJAX service can use this value in the form of URL parameter named keyword Fill on start Fill controls on load Service Page AJAX Service page used to retrieve matching records 423 Sample Implementation Autofill AutoFill Enabled Yes
136. to a commercial host you will need to request that the data source be created for you Deploying Java amp JSP Applications Deploying Java projects is relatively straightforward because most modern Java servers support Web Application Archive WAR standard for java applications deployment The details of server configuration and deployment process may vary from server to server Generally you must only specify the path to the generated war file and context path to the web application Many servers support auto deployment and you only need to copy the generated war file to the particular directory one the server and the server will do the remaining job for you CodeCharge Studio has several project properties that can affect the application deployment Class Path Property that is needed for the compilation of a project At minimum the Servlets API should present XML parser library and Regexp library may also be needed See Java Application requirements section for more information Runtime libraries The libraries your application depends on that will be copied to the WEB INF lib directory and eventually added to the application class path at run time Target server This defines how your application will be deployed Different servers have different deployment options Deploy webapp as This property has two options e as war file Standard WAR will be generated This options works with most modern application servers and the auto deployment f
137. to create grid record and search forms for any of the tables within a database connection Once you ve completed the Application Builder steps you can then publish your web pages or edit them within CodeCharge Studio to include custom functionality The information provided in this section demonstrates the steps to create multiple project pages using the Application Builder Accessing the Application Builder There are two ways of accessing the Application Builder e New Project To create a new project select in menu New Project Select Application Builder and click Create Project General Blank Project Solutions Employee Directory Task Manager Portal Registration Form Forum e Add New Page To add new pages to an existing project select Application Builder PR a Home Data Dictionary Builders Blank Includable Login Page Page Page CodeCharge Studio s Application Builder has nine steps for creating a new project 291 Step 1 General Project Settings The first step of the Application Builder is where you configure the project wide settings for the following four parameters Code Select the programming language for the project Language Site Language Select the spoken language for the project pages Server Path Specify the server path were the pages will be published Server URL Specify the URL that maps to the Server Path specified above This is the URL you wi
138. to reload it 186 International Character Set and File Encodings According to the World Wide Web Consortium W3C If a user agent eg a browser is unable to detect the character encoding used in a Web document the user may be presented with unreadable text This information is particularly important for those maintaining and extending a multilingual site but declaring the character encoding of the document is important for anyone producing XHTML HTML or CSS To understand character sets and character encodings in more detail we recommend that you refer to the WC3 document at http Awww ws org TR i18n html tech ri20030510 102757952 When working with CodeCharge Studio you will deal with character encodings at several levels e modifying and saving HTML templates modifying and saving programming code files ASP PHP etc e displaying HTML content in users Web browsers Modifying and saving HTML templates HTML Encoding When working with HTML templates CodeCharge Studio will save the HTML page using the character encoding specified by the META element When creating new pages the META declaration is inserted automatically based on the Default HTML Encoding setting in your project settings If such META declaration is removed from the page then the system encoding will be used lt is recommended that all HTML pages are created and saved using the same encoding as the File Encoding described below When your page needs to contain
139. to see the code as it would appear in a browser window With a HTML file you can also use the HTML tab of the Toolbox to add pure HTML controls However you cannot add any of the controls or components listed under the Builders and Forms tab of the Toolbox Note that for any of the HTML controls that you add you can use the Format tab of the Properties window to examine and modify their properties Home Data Dictionary Builders NA A fa See Blank Includable Login Application i Fage Fage Page Builder Delete Pages Projea Explorer IX E3 TaskManager Pages e Diagrams li Connections Resources Common Files Saving a Project You can save your project at any time Select File Save All from the CodeCharge Studio menu Click Save All in the top CodeCharge Studio toolbar FR Ho o a a E F i aiii aj Save all pages 19 Workspace The workspace consists of several windows panels that you will work with By dragging the windows panels you can arrange the CodeCharge Studio workspace layout to fit your preferences You can detach undock the panels by double clicking on their titles which will make them appear to float freely You can also prevent re attachments docking of panels into the edges or corners of CodeCharge Studio workspace by dragging them while holding the CTRL key on your keyboard Woe Lo c a yg J7 NewProjectl CodeCharge Stud
140. use Add New Connection Design Advanced Server Date Format yyyy mm dd HH nn ss Boolean Format truetalse M Use LIMIT TOR Same as Design Server Database Type Database onec MS Access gt OBI Data Source Mame DBI ODBC internet Login Password EE Connection is cached Specific DEI attributes O PrintError LongReadLen 2000 RaiseError l LongTruncok The new connection will be added to all servers You may need to setup database connection settings bo other servers Help OK Cancel Within CodeCharge Studio setting up the Server side database connection is pretty straight forward To begin with note that the design time connection does not use the DBI or DBD packages but rather can be configured to connect directly to the database using OLE DB or ODBC It is only the server side connection that uses DBI The connection string used for the server side connection Is of the form DBI database driver _name database_name For example for a MySQL database DBI MySQL MySQLDBName For an ODBC DSN DBI ODBC DSNName 111 Server Side Connections for ColdFusion When using the ColdFusion application engine and language all server side connections must be made through an ODBC DSN The design time connection used within CodeCharge Studio can be configured using an OLE DB provider or an ODBC DSN but the server side connection must use an ODBC DSN The Server tab of the conn
141. web site If you do not enable this method or if you do not want to support locales specified by the user s browser you may allow users to select a locale directly on your web site via a list box or link URL added to your web pages For example you can add a list box or Link parameter that changes the local setting using an URL parameter session variable or cookie All available methods of specifying a locale are listed in the Advanced Locale Settings section CodeCharge Studio includes examples that demonstrate how to implement a list box with language selection In some cases a user s web browser may indicate the preference of a language without specifying the country a neutral locale in other cases the selected language or locale may not be supported by your application but can be substituted by another language or locale Web applications created with CodeCharge Studio handle these situations by utilizing locale defaults activated via the resource fallback process Resource Fallback Process In an internationalized web application you will need to specify the default Site Locale which is the language and country to be used when the web browser does not provide the language preference or a requested locale is not available You may also offer neutral translations as a substitute for country specific translations for example you may provide generic Spanish text to all users who prefer Spanish Mexico Spanish Spain or any other flavor of Spanis
142. will be stored If this value is not specified the FindBin module will be used to determine this folder Session The time in minutes after which session variables in an inactive session will be terminated Timeout Session The interval that session files are checked for expiration and subsequenily deleted A clean rate of Files Clean 100 would mean that the check is performed after each 100 page in the application is requested A Rate larger value results in a longer duration between checks while a lower value causes more frequent checks After publishing a Perl project to a Linux Unix server you need to check that the files have the right permissions Linux Unix allows for three types of permissions read write and execute In addition to these three permissions there are three groups of people to whom the permissions can be uniquely applied the file owner members of the file s group and everyone else If you have access to a Unix shell command prompt within the server you can find out the permissions for a file using the command Is I filename pl The permissions are displayed as a set of ten characters representing the permissions for the three groups of users e g rw r rw The first character indicates that a file rather than a directory is being referred to The permissions can also be expressed as a three digit number whereby each digit represents the sum of permissions for each of the three categories of user s Permission Set
143. with the hyperlinks above mark amp select the search form then select Template Panel from the ribbon bar For the master template select the Block Template and for the placeholder select Content This will create a template panel and two subpanels one for the title and one for the content i e the search form So far the default page should look something like this thome_link i newthread_link Search Forum Messages Topic w Author w Date Added w Error Pictures embeded in Email Rocky Ang 19 01 2001 17 37 24 Message ICF Custom Taq directory Michael 19 01 2001 17 18 28 Author T a a a eae iB Ce we Pe a lane a PTL Ty aT __ writinadbresultstomultiplepages _ _ shialslamasp _ 04 01 2001 19 56 52 _ Clear 3 error message in DB MSG seopo 04 01 2001 11 28 41 what is this error Itworks on my iis feiyeung 04 01 2001 5 02 30 igote dzie vpl 03 01 2001 3 21 26 No records Page Number Page_Number of 1 Q The Headline and Slogan text can be changed in the master page To change the title Forum Messages so it appears above the table instead of inside the table change this code with this code lt table class Header border 0 cellspacing 0 cellpadding 0 gt lt tr gt lt td class HeaderLeft gt lt img alt src CCS_PathToMasterPage lmages Spacer gif gt lt td gt lt td class th gt lt strong gt Foru
144. within the HTML For example when using a grid form the Row and AltRow blocks of the grid are structural and therefore cannot be included into a panel Control Access within Panels From the control access point of view the panel component is transparent Panels can be considered non existing when programming visibility of child components For example let s assume the following page structure Pagel Grid1 Label1 Grid2 Panelt Label1 The following code is used to specify values of Label1 PHP Grid1 before show row Grid1 gt Label1 gt SetValue new value End of Grid1 before show row Grid2 before show row Grid2 gt Label1 gt SetValue new value End of Grid2 before show row You may notice the panel s transparency allows for panels to be easily removed or added to pages without any code adjustments Panels vs Visible property Many CodeCharge Studio components provide the Visible property that can hide components Setting this property value to Dynamic hides the component programmatically by extending its block definition within the HTML The Visible property is a viable and simplified solution that allows users to hide components without using panels however this method has the following disadvantages e Difficulty of hiding multiple components simultaneously e Absence of visual representation of hideable components in the Design mode e Limited usability due to unclear scope The panel component wa
145. within the Visual Query Builder window each in a small window containing a list of the fields in the table Depending on how the fields in the different tables are named you might notice that some tables are joined together by lines These lines represent relationships between the tables The relationship between tables is based either on the actual database definition or implicitly based on the names of the fields in the table Some databases support what is called referential integrity e g SQL Server which simply means that you can define links between tables based on the Primary Key defined in the tables The Primary Key is one or more fields that uniquely identifies every record in the table Other tables are linked to this table using a field called the Foreign Key The Foreign Key is a value that is compared against the Primary Key values in another table to find specific records e g use the project_id field in the Tasks table to find the project name in the Projects table Referential integrity insures that the values in the tables are consistent i e ensures that you cannot have a project_id value that does not have a corresponding project in the Projects table Other databases e g Access do not support referential integrity but do allow you to relate tables by arbritrarily linking fields to each other between tables Other databases do not support any kind of table relationships Both the Data Dictionary and the Visual Query Builder
146. 0 Las Vegas NV 89123 USA Telephone 1 888 241 7338 Fax 1 866 312 8049 Email info yessoftware com URL http Awww yessoftware com 32 Introduction to Web Programming The Internet The Internet is a network of computers If you dial in from home to America Online AOL or an Internet Service Provider ISP your computer is connected to the Internet Every device on the Internet has a unique Internet Protocol IP address This is a 32 bit number that allows your computer to be found by other computers This IP address is assigned to you dynamically by the ISP when you connect to its computers and may change each time you connect to the system If you use a high speed connection such DSL or cable you may have a static IP address that never changes You can usually view your IP address on a Windows computer by using the command ipconfig all To find out who owns a particular IP address you can search for it at ARIN s web site http Awww arin net a non profit organization that assigns and maintains the IP addresses for North America Connecting to the Internet If you are connected to the Internet at your workplace you are usually connected via a router which is used to join two networks A router that connects a private network to the Internet is also known as a gateway The router routes the traffic between computers and networks and sends the packets of information to the destination through the shortest available path on
147. 1 x Design HTML Code Preview Live Page 438 Alternatively you can highlight a part of HTML first and then select the update panel in the Toolbox This will place the selected HTML into the new update panel uPA bell m co Ly B F epee _ EmployeeDirectoryEx CodeCharge Studio 5 a i Home Data Dictionary Builders Forms Edit Fullscreen Options a z En Editable Grid Egg Eau Ee iew _ Sorte A ab a ab i JG E Grid Record Report Directory Dialog Panel Panel nelude Label Link Text I E Template Panel EJ PlaceHolder page gt gt Path Rox Ez Calendar Forms Components Controls X Properties Data Events Format Attributes Restricted Access Denit Includable No SSLAccessCNo Enable CachNo oan By Demand ae EmpsDetail a EmpsGrid es Se a ih Groupstrid es Header a ee Login i Sass Ta Diagrams Ez ae Ss SS s Resources No records Fs en Common Files ee a aaa Messages AX Generating Common Files gt Generating Header Warning Error occurred when creating Virtual Directory in IS Unable to create Virtual Directory tree You can create only one Virtual 4 li os Ef Directory please verify the Server URL Publishing to C wirtualdirs ccsS5ex fromecs4 EmployeeDirectoryEx CS fare fir ib For Help press Fl 439 AJAX Update Panel Feature As mentioned above the Update Panel is also the
148. 1 3 21 AM mi m Ei a i m 145 Using Artisteer Designs Designs are master pages created with the Artisteer web designer that you can apply to web pages in your project CodeCharge Studio is installed with a number of built in designs you can use but you can also create and add new designs with Artisteer See www artisteer com for more details about creating designs you can add to your projects For more details about master pages please refer to Using Master Pages 146 Adding Designs to your Project Before you can use a design you must add the design to your project There are several ways you can add designs e Copy one or more of the built in design folders e g BlueSkies from the installation folder under Designs to your project folder The designs must be copied to a folder called Designs unless you change your project settings Changing the Designs Folder If you have created a custom design with Artisteer copy your Artisteer created design folder to your project e Add a built in design from the ribbon bar Select the Home tab and the Designs button Project group on the ribbon bar Click on the icon and then select one of the built in designs CodeCharge Studio will copy the built in design to your project folder e Select one of your pages in the Project Explorer pane then right click on the page in Design mode and select Apply Design to this Page fro
149. 321 Editable Grid Builder scssi a snteddnnebambaanwila a a a a AA AA 323 Fasi Gila tl BUGET eroa a a a a 332 Flash Chat Style Builder agsara a aa a a fauietat 339 Galery Buen sanana a a a 340 Gnd BUJE on T ee nt nT ROR Se eres 349 Grid and RECO BUNS istescscciiacasahectiegnandpadaaasewcesnaaysmuaswGiel sadpaibseceiuaadlssegdal ewibedsledoadaaaias dnt asst suiieswaayoenss 356 Master Detail BUM AG bassin tussasre seis a a a ode lies a a a ea a i a 366 After selecting a style click the Finish button to generate the form to the Ppage cceceeeeeseeeeeeeees 376 Menu BUNGE an wx essen etenec E N es ee ee eee 376 Creating menus based on static list Of MENU ITEMS cee ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeaeaeseeeeeseaeeeeeeesaaees 378 Creating database criven MENUS arimari eE a E E acdda tad cauba sae deds 380 Record BUET aiao as dene ce e A cetGats gnc Gear E ene san NENEN OR 382 Wep Repor BUJE ainssi a N eet ee eee eee 385 Sear Bulder ue aes sess ace E a esc ae hae eee N 394 Wsitng the Data DiCional Visesa tate ven iis a eet eet dare at one E N tetas 398 Changing Control Properties in the Data Dictionary ccccccccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseseueeeeeeeeeeeesaaas 398 WOKING WIN PA AX a tate Nusa et scene nsvaclsta a Nuala del watrnansncevaalinbainde esl euaicbeuaaetusadeeasectndates 412 Ajax Feature BUNS Si satis cies astiatutartures dnc nauseam n aaa 412 AJAX Autocomplete BUNGE sssxicceiseinadsaiasininenuaetentaueudeivlaamedG
150. 75 document Form1 TextBox1 focus End Set Focus Close page_OnLoad 1 FCB6E20C bind_events 1 F4D605D7 function bind_events page_OnLoad End bind_events window onload bind_events Assign bind_events 1 19F 7B649 End CCS script lt script gt Notice that event code is displayed with a different background color compared to the rest of the HTML content Usually the background color is light gray and signifies that the code was generated by CodeCharge Studio and has not been altered If you modify or add your own code anywhere within the gray background the background will change to white by default This is an indication that the code is different from what CodeCharge Studio generated 64 Code Mode Code Mode displays the programming code for a page By default the code in a page is displayed against a gray background to indicate that it has not been altered from its original state Making changes to the code will cause the background to change to white by default In addition all the code will be color coded in order to distinguish various parts of the code For instance commented code will appear in a different color compared to Strings or even reserved words It is common to have pages with upwards of a thousand lines of code To assist in navigating large amounts of code the document window makes it possible to jump to specific points in the code by selecting an object then a member of the object to bri
151. Access In order for the web pages to be able to use the Access database the security settings for the database have to be setup correctly Make sure that the database file is not opened in exclusive mode by any other user Using Windows Explorer right click on the database file and open the properties dialog Under the security tab make sure everyone has access to the file or at the least the ASPNET or NETWORK SERVICE in the case of using IIS 6 0 account should have Read and Write Permissions on the file and folder where the file resides This account is the account that is used by the web server to access the database If you are using a different database such as MS SQL server or Oracle make sure that you have an account in the database with which you can access the required tables If you intend to use an ODBC connection with NET Framework 1 0 you need to download and install the ODBC Net managed provider as indicated in the table above Create and Test a CodeCharge Project CodeCharge Studio comes with a number of example projects that you can easily generate and publish as a way of testing your setup Each of these examples comes with an Access database and a database script file that you can use to recreate the database Please refer to the section on the example solutions for detailed instructions on how to setup and use them You can also refer to the Quick Start section within the documentation for step by step instructions to create a
152. Artisteer you can create elaborate designs that work seamlessly with your CodeCharge Studio application however it is not strictly necessary to have Artisteer to use these features The rest of this section describes how you can create your own templates without Artisteer and apply them to your projects This is a description of creating and using templates not a full explanation of creating a design since design refers to the collection of template pages stylesheets images and other files that define your project design To create template pages and stylesheets you will need to know HTML and CSS Normally the way you apply a master page is the same as applying a design to a page You select the page then in either Design or HTML mode right click the mouse and select the Apply Design to this page option This will apply the current default design If you follow the conventions described in this section you can create a master page that will appear alongside the built in Artisteer designs which you can select from to set the default page Delete Text Insert translation Insert attribute i Change Style Page Properties ET Properties Note after you apply a design you can also use the context menu to remove the design This will undo the creation of all the panel structures created on your page for the design Be careful though when you remove a design since all of your content is moved back to the page and your content panels
153. CS PathToMasterPage When you apply a design from the ribbon bar CodeCharge Studio automatically updates the master page property on your content page using the internal variable CCS_PathToMasterPage variable This variable is the path to the selected default design folder When you use this variable you can use dynamic design selection with your published web site when you have more than one master page design in your project If you do not use the CCS_PathToMasterPage property you cannot use dynamic selection e g if you set the master page property directly on the page instead of applying the design from the gallery See Using Artisteer Designs for more details about using this variable and dynamic design selection Note though like the built in designs the design name you specify in dynamic selection is the name of the folder where your master page resides If the master page cannot be found on the server i e the design was not published with your project CodeCharge Studio will apply the default design instead How Content is Mapped to your Templates This section describes how the content on your content page is mapped to the master page in your design A content page contains the components such as forms and controls that you want merged with the master page It doesn t matter what order you create the content You could start off by simply creating a CodeCharge Studio page add whatever forms you want included in the p
154. Charge Studio addresses these needs and allows anyone to create database enabled applications without the need for extensive programming For designers comfortable with the host of existing design applications CodeCharge Studio can work in conjunction with virtually any HTML design tool Systems Integrators VARs and ISVs Companies which produce sell or support any software applications will find CodeCharge Studio valuable for creating Web interfaces for their solutions For example a CRM software vendor offering Windows solution can easily create the Web equivalent of their product or at a minimum Web enable parts of an application and its functionality How it Works CodeCharge Studio incorporates the features that enable developers to quickly build web applications These include builders that create pages and forms and data aware components and controls that can be placed on a page CodeCharge Studio web enables your databases by providing the foundation for information exchange between databases and web browsers A powerful Application Builder is also provided to get you started The builder automatically uses your database s structure to automatically create a set of web pages that use the database as the back end The following steps demonstrate how to create a basic application using the Application Builder Start CodeCharge Studio Create a new project Name the project and select Application Builder Specify project settings su
155. CodeCharge Studio Version 5 1 User s Manual Ee EE 8 c EAEE EEEE EEE EE E EE E EEEN 6 Introduction to GodeCharge Studie sasiisnsra iee e e a a a a ee 6 Who Should Use CodeCharge Studio tamieniani a a 6 HOWIE OCS pes e I ee a ca a A E T T T 7 FPROGUCHIR CATS S ecaa bitin ct ta ashe dean naitarea tila e 8 Key Features of CodeCharge Studio ssscicciesziagesdieeiactenitndatiencladsedeewageioniateiscaewaaacegsmwdceheisaneccanetotsaasenats 8 DV SIEM RECUING INS IS ce datzraedtetedea dusted en e eaa enra airen einiol 25 GoOntacting Product SUPPO ais eee ee ee eee 26 MSTA Sel CHAIN OMS ace sanctity ete ase Sco neat eee cae gan eet toe nee seen eee ees 26 End User License Agreement sere cutest shan taatiaued odeciaGdasstinlusadedtieceletearoudegteleteid sehen cnetaiude then alaneted 30 FOr MOr MOMania Eaa 32 intrOduCTION 10 Web Progra mMiN asse a or iea e ated 33 TASS ALC TING e e E AE A A E N EAE A E E E E 33 Connecting tonne Meme rrna a a a a a a 33 Using a Firewall for Secure Internet ACCESS cccccccceececcceeceseeeseeeeeeeeeeeuaesesceeeeesaaeaeeeeeeesssaaaeeeeeees 33 WeDo CPW CL Saviano sins astascaszasacaisiessGarcaanetasaa a a a 33 Running Programs Ona WED Server seissen a e a aei aa aea sentdheblenletw tented de 34 obt anmng a Permanent Web Server areca a ee E 34 DOMA NANOS rore E T Ree ee 34 Creating HTML Conte nt iisas anaa a aa ia aa i A a a a aAA 35 PUDISMIMG WeD COMEN ote ses a e a a E a e a a a e 35 TYDS OLWEDSIIE S
156. Context element as a child to Host element in your resin conf configuration file lt web app id JSPPortal app dir c projects Portal JSPPortal war gt id is the context path of your application app dir is absolute or relative to global app dir path to the war file Scenario 3 Deployment through web app configuration DataSource extension is used e Before code generation verify that Use Data Source site property is set to Yes e Set connection DataBase URL property to java comp env jdbc Connection1 Where Connection is name of your connection e Add resource ref element as child of web app element lt resource ref gt lt res ref name gt jdbc Connection1 lt res ref name gt lt res type gt javax sql DataSource lt res type gt lt init param driver name Driver Class Name gt lt init param url Database connection URL gt lt init param user User Name gt lt init param password User Password gt lt init param max connections 20 gt lt init param max idle time 30 gt lt init param enable transaction false gt lt resource ref gt res ref name is a JNDI name as indicated in your CCS Connection properties WebLogic 7 0 scenarios e Check that DB drivers are in class path of your server e Choose appropriate scenario and change properties marked red scenario 1 Auto deployment from applications directory DataSource extention is not used e Before code generation verify that Use Data Source site propert
157. Data tab under the page properties Select the Master Page property then find and select the master page you just created above Refresh the Project Explorer and you will notice that a new panel has been created in your page called content and the content of your page Hello world has been moved to the new panel For this example the master page has a placeholder called content But if you did not have a placeholder called content CodeCharge Studio would have created a panel called content anyway Note though this wouldn t have worked because without a content placeholder called content the content would never be mapped to the master page and your web page would not be rendered correctly Select the content panel and look at the properties pane You will notice that the placeholder property has been updated to content This placeholder refers to the content placeholder in your master page This property is what CodeCharge Studio uses to map content panels to the placeholders on your master page You can change the placeholder name and placeholder property but they must match so your web page is rendered correctly The HTML for your content page should look something like this lt BEGIN Panel content gt lt p gt Hello World lt p gt lt END Panel content gt lt BEGIN Panel head gt lt meta name GENERATOR content CodeCharge Studio 5 0 0 12000 gt lt END Panel h
158. E 215 Deploying GoldEusion Applications 0 00 itd eee eee ee 216 Deploying Java amp JSP ADpliCatlO Ms nsira a a a a a a 218 Add Context element as a child to Host element in your resin conf configuration file c00 220 DEDIC YING NS ADDIICATIONS sasctususnqstasacine Venrends aeaea 222 WOKO WICH POMS aeniea a Velebiseleisaads i lavanstansctesainti ta e e N 225 BUCA G Forms Manually sssi a Th asaubnadnea Doeauanaiinenatarieaiaaei 225 IHS TVS CON A OM Milica aaiecaa ts de Shuaaitnetnac a ore emeaant aaa aecacic ters cia ation nents atanc and yamenatanertenen oat 231 FOM DAS OUG Oeria E edad aa a aa E eenseetalentaamiacescantoneeiacs 234 SaF O e a a 242 VSS RILO K m aA A sock toda ers ate EIEEE A PE E acs EAEN EE E E T ected ae erate oa ese S E E EE 243 Web FEDOMING and Repor FOr iaiccccaanticdiewiaren senlatasapasetssatadseeanstalotonametdeinasnas doe aa aa 247 EODISG d aaa a a a a ee 251 bY oo f 7 A ea N a a A 254 HO ONG Fe OMIA tt ants toca hen sy Bee utente aac oe aan cae eluent ba ecie nt oaee a r 259 SEWN F 8 Renee one ne oe eee eee ee ene eee 257 Working With G OMUOIS rresia a e a A A N AE N a 259 BUON VCR VOW orros eei a e aa a e aN 259 calendar Navigator iian a A a acne 259 CIECK DOK OVETVICW arinisoin a a r a E nantntenee ade 259 CIMECKOOX LIST OVENIEW siniora yacaecoe sacutte dean beandb ean ahaetncubatuaaataguariwieeeiaadeane tacuieneeuemindiaaaass 259 Date PICKET OVCIVICW seneievce cadeearecau a aa
159. E gasn73 a 30 MY GEL PHP From Gere 17a TIEFE TET 1733 Pori and Gii dar ne Ward da Wa tii id H asa ss FFF anc uryS0L Yen Deretlopmane H 3ra 698 81 2 0 5a Pirtensigral IS JAE Da ear aT S700 ee eb 6 Biginnding Wilke Bare Pages 10 Diii Fl b Poop remorey Mee amp Oo Peegiamnning aliFushinF ash amp Easy Oeerbnereant Magterkig coki skin dF 545 Picea Pen RS AF TD Tawh ousi EdF sionin Fi Cures 40a G55 ES Te 1y Pab Dovelogmoniwrh JP smem EORKEI Rd anw Web eeann PHP L aaf massa mam mags anw Cate pay Tobak 425 95 amne rate dd TUONO Pe Page Todd You can quickly create different types of reports using the Report Builder and later customize the report in the Design or HTML mode and modify the properties of the report individual report sections or controls placed within those sections CodeCharge Studio generates reports as a set of HTML files and files containing the programming code that makes up the report engine The HTML representation of a report can be modified in the design mode or in the HTML mode by adjusting the underlining HTML code At run time the report engine loads the HTML template replaces the dynamic control placeholders with dynamic data and outputs the page to the Web browser Data Grouping lt is assumed that reports will often be used for presenting hierarchical grouped data where the report engine rather than an SQL query performs the grouping Each group is
160. Expiration Date Field Defines the column that stores the data after which the session should be considered stale numeric and be ready to be removed by the garbage collector function Cache Content Field Defines the column that stores the session data Project settings Caching settings y General Enable e Server Script Method Database H ey Locales amp Encodings Connection InternetDe G4 Publishing Table tyr Expiration Date Field numeric Cache Content Field v E Security Groups ET 11 Locales amp Encodings Settings This section allows you to configure internationalization settings for your application File Encoding Defines the character set used in the generated code Default HTML Encoding Defines the character set used in the HTML files Date Display Format Defines the default date display format if no format is defined for a control Site Locales Defines site locales used by the project They define different settings e g number or time formats Use Internationalization Enables CCS features that allow users to switch the generatated application s Features locales during run time Project settings x File Encoding Western European Windows 1252 ha Default HTML Encoding Western European Windows 1252 Date Display Format shonDate E 7 Site Locales English D
161. FI applications or CGI White Browse Chck Next to complete the wizard e Click Finish to create the virtual folder Publishing Settings Once you setup the virtual directory open the Project Settings dialog within CodeCharge Studio Under the Publishing tab specify the directory path for the virtual folder in the Server Path field The Server URL field should reference the alias name you entered for the virtual folder The alias i e NetProject is assigned to the appropriate path parameters in the settings Project settings Type Local Network Server Path C Inetpub wwwroot TaskManager Browse Server URL http localhost TaskManager Files to publish Project Files code and HTML template files All files with extensions html js asp php jsp cfm cfc pl pm egizmat Reset A All files excluding extensions p Configure the other project settings as required When you publish the project the files will first be generated to a temporary folder where they will be compiled After compilation the files including the compiled dll will be published to the specified path where they can be accessed in a browser window using the alias name of the virtual folder 224 Working with Forms Building Forms Manually The quickest way to create any type of form is to use one of the builders that automate the process If you need to create a form manually in order to gain maximum control of the forms f
162. Go to Project Settings gt Styles and click Add to add and copy several different styles into your project Set one of the styles to be the default using the Default button Enable the Use Dynamic Styles option Create a page that uses Dynamic style Press F9 to generate the application and publish the files including the new stylesheet files View your live page and append style StyleName to the URL For example htto localhost NewProject1 NewPage1 php style School htto localhost NewProject1 NewPage1 php style Modern htto localhost NewProject1 NewPage1 pho style Simple htto localhost NewProject1 NewPage 1 php style Innovation Once a style is specified by a user via an URL it will be saved automatically in a session variable or cookie if you enable them This allows Web visitors to come back to your site and see the last applied style i e without the style parameter in the URL as long as the session or cookie has not expired To provide users with a visual way to chose a style implement a set of a links or a listbox that will redirect users back to your site style parameter specified in the URL as shown in above examples How Styles Apply to Your HTML Code A particular style created by CodeCharge Studio consists of two main parts One part is the CSS stylesheet images and related files that define the style The other part is the generated HTML for the components e g Grid which the style applies to In CodeC
163. Grid Properties Data Events Format abell Label Labell Name TasksGrid Attributes Connection intranet Data Source Type Table Data Source No records Restricted No Records Per Page 20 Page Size Limit Features 226 Adding Columns and Controls to the Form The form created contains two columns with form fields You can add more columns and fields e To add columns to the existing table use the Insert Column options in the Table toolbar The same toolbar also has an Insert Row option to add rows to the table e After you add columns to the table you can also add more controls from the Forms tab of the Toolbox e As you add the controls configure their essential properties such as Name Control Source and Format ro Wdo of Ba Table TaskManager CodeCharge Studio 5 Home Data Dictionary Builders Forms Edit i Layout a u HoE Hae a a Properties Delete Insert Insert Insert Insert Column Merge Split Move Move Row Move Column Move Column TS 7 i Row Above Row Below Column Left Right Cells Cell Row Up Down Left Right Table Rows amp Columns Merge Move Project Explorer Ox 3 GridTestPage x El E Pages a Designs Ji images TasksGrid i Styles abel _ abel Begin Row Administration Default EmployeeList EmployeeMaint task name Label2 End R Header nd Rows E Login No records E E GridTestPage EE TasksGrid PriorityList
164. Group Left Group Above Group Outline 4 Sorting Click Next to proceed to step 5 388 Step 5 Specify summarized fields for the report Specify the inclusion of totals and other calculated values within the report All available math functions are enabled for numeric fields while the Count function can be used with other types of fields Total values will be calculated for each group and the report as a whole Group based functions will be included in the corresponding Group Footer sections Grand totals will be placed into the Report Footer If Sum function is available and selected you can also select the Calculate percent of total for sums option Sum Count Min Max Average Show Detail and Summary Show Summary Only Hide Detail Calculate percent of total for sums Select calculation types that you d like to be performed for each field They correspond to common math functions that can be used to create and include calculated fields on the report The calculated fields will be created in the selected group s footer section Select this option if you d like both the detail and summary sections of the report to be included in the report This is a common selection This option is available in case you don t need the details to be included in the report but forgot to use the GROUP BY statement in your underlining SQL data source When this option is selected the detail section of the report will be hidden programma
165. If needed you can click on another table name and access the Details window for that table You can also click on the All link in the Table column to apply global options for all the forms to be created 311 Table Link Details Settings Search Grid amp Record form on Select this option if you want the Search Grid and Record forms to appear on One Page the same page for all pages Include in Menu If selected a link to all pages will be added in the navigation menu page Details for All Tables Search Grid amp Record on One Page Include in Menu Click Next to proceed to step 7 312 Step 7 Selecting a Style With all the other configurations in place you now have the chance to select a style to be used for the forms Page Layout Dialog Settings Style This is a list of available styles Select the No Style option if you don t want to use a style Preview This window shows how the forms would look based on the selected style Style Builder This button starts the Style Builder os Application Builder Style Articles ma ered C Designs from Artisteer Search Articles Ma connecta eae Grid Desc re 3 Options te s_ article desc A uA Title lfs_article_title Category Id Select Value l Tables Search TA Details List of Articles Article Id Article Title Category Name article id d farticle_title category name No records h Page Layout
166. Less connections as described here 103 DSN Less Connections Connection String An alternative to using a DSN connection is a DSN Less connection DSN Less refers to a connection you can define that uses a string of parameters containing all the details necessary to establish a connection to the database The makeup of a connection string varies depending on the database being used as well as the OLEDB provider or other connector While it is possible to simply type out a proper connection string CodeCharge Studio provides a convenient way to create a connection string for you when you use OLEDB The Data Link Properties window can be accessed from the Add New Connection or Modify Connection windows by clicking on the Build button The following list defines the important tabs of the dialog The Provider tab is used to specify the OLEDB provider Under this tab will be listed all the database providers currently installed on the machine Select the appropriate provider for the database you want to connect to and then click Next to move to the Connection tab In the illustration the Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE DB Provider has been selected to create a connection string to a Microsoft Access database The fields displayed on the other tabs such as Connection will vary depending on the provider selected in the Provider tab You may need to refer to the database vendor s website for more information In the case where the Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE DB Provide
167. Limit Enable Print Mode Lines Print Page per Default View Mode Identifier name used in the generated code and HTML template Database connection name to be used for retrieving report data Type of the data source that provides the data for the form such as a table stored procedure or SQL Table view SQL statement or stored procedure that the report is based on List of report groupings and sections Click the button to maintain the report groups or view its sections Whether to use authentication based on security access groups Click the button to specify user groups that can view the report The report will be hidden from all other users The height of the report page displayed in a Web browser measured in abstract line units assigned to each report section Refer to Report Paging section of the documentation for more information Maximum number of line units shown on the page in Web view mode Allow the report to be executed in print mode When in print mode the report will show all report pages on one screen so users can print it from their Web browser The height of the report page to be printed measured in abstract line units assigned to each report section Refer to Report Paging section of the documentation for more information Default report view mode Web or Print In Web mode the application will use the Lines per Web Page property to display a specific number of records per page In Print m
168. Members list appears with the nearest matching word highlighted This can save you from having to repeatedly type long names AutoComplete Option Modification By default AutoComplete works automatically However you can turn it off e Open Options Options dialog box on Code Editor tab Uncheck Enable AutoComplete option e lf the option is unchecked then CodeCharge Studio will not parse code sources and all AutoComplete options will not appear Invoking AutoComplete Options from the Keyboard You can invoke AutoComplete options using keyboard shortcuts CTRL SHIFT SPACE View parameter info CTRL SPACE Completing the Current Word CTRL SPACE Pressing on an empty line opens the Members list populated with global variables CTRL SPACE Pressing after a period or gt opens the Members list populated with all valid members UP and DOWN Arrow Switch between overloaded functions Keys ESC Press at any time to dismiss any AutoComplete option When AutoComplete Is Unavailable The following describes situations when the AutoComplete options may not work as you expect e There is a code error above the cursor e f there is an incomplete function or other coding error above the location of the insertion point AutoComplete will not be able to parse the code elements and therefore will not work You can enclose the faulty code in comment delimiters to enable AutoComplete again The insertion point is inside a code comment If the in
169. Navigation controls that you want to have in the grid If you want to have custom navigation controls on the form click Modify to open the Custom Navigator window You can customize the controls to suit your needs First Text for the link to the first record Previous Text for the link to the previous record Next Text for the link to the next record Last Text for the link to the last record Use images for links To have images instead of text for the navigation links Disabled links are not visible Links to pages that cannot logically be browsed are not shown e g if you are On page one you cannot browse using the first or previous links Page Numbers Apart from having the four links mentioned above specify whether you also want to have links to the individual pages and how they should appear Number of Pages Specify how many page links should be displayed Show total pages Display the total number of pages that can be browsed PA Editable Grid Builder Navigation w e No Page Navigator H Data Source 4 4 5 of 10 H c Cal Search O l lt lt lt 5o0f10 gt gt gt First Prev 1 23 45 of 10 Next Last sorting a Manual Input f Custom Options W Add Page Size Selection Actions G Style Click Next to proceed to step 6 329 Step 6 Options the Editable Grid Editable Grid Field Settings Records per page Specify the default number of records to be shown per page No reco
170. PriorityMaint ProjectList E ProjectMaint Search StatusesList StatusMaint TaskRecord E TypeMaint E Typeslist H HAA IAA E E I y Resources Common Files Pa Files Expl For Help press F1 H H The diagram window also has another of buttons in the toolbar which you can use to perform the various operations You can also access most of the functions listed by right clicking anywhere within the diagram window to bring up a popup menu 184 ain Add a page to the current diagram kas Hide a page that is currently in the diagram E Refresh the diagram to reflect any changes that may have been made to the pages 100 of Set the zoom level of the diagram aiel Specify the level of detail to be displayed in the diagram High Medium Low uf Undo the last operation that was performed on the diagram For rapid navigation within the project you can open any page displayed in the site diagram While within the diagram open a page by right clicking on the page icon and selecting the Open Page option 185 Using External HTML Editors Besides using Microsoft FrontPage to edit HTML content you can also configure CodeCharge Studio to work with the HTML editor of your choice Go to the Tools gt Options menu to specify the location of the program you want to use Options iy ee I Sort Database Tables Alphabetically Sort Da
171. Properties Name The name of the form Connection The database connection from which information will be retrieved Source Type The type of data source or the method used to retrieve the data Data Source The database tables SQL Query or stored procedure from where the data will be retrieved Return Page The page the user is directed to after the form has been processed successfully Remove Specify URL or Form parameters that should be removed when the form is submitted Parameters Convert URL To Specify whether URLs should be automatically converted to absolute URLs or secure URLs for the SSL protocol https Records Per Specify the default number of records that should be displayed per page Page Restricted Specify whether users must be logged in before accessing the form Empty Rows Specify the number of empty rows that will be provided at the bottom of the Editable Grid for the purpose of inserting new records Allow Insert Specify whether the form can be used to insert new data Allow Update Specify whether the form can be used to update existing data Allow Delete Specify whether the form can be used to delete existing data Delete Control Specify the name of the Checkbox or Hidden control which is used to determine the records that should be deleted Preserve Specify whether Get or Post parameters should be preserved Parameters Custom Insert For forms that require additional configuration for the insert operation specify
172. Report labels are similar to standard label controls however they contain additional properties that are report specific The following report label properties are available Name Identifier name used in the generated code and HTML template Control Source The type of data source that this control should be based on Type Control Source Field name or expression to be used as label s data source Format The type of values that the label holds such as Text Integer Date etc Text If Empty Text to display when the label s value is empty The text can be in HTML format if Content property is set to HTML Content Select HTML if you would like to output the data as is without converting it to text Select Text if you like to convert HTML content to text DBFormat Label s value format as specified in the database it will be used in SQL statements that retrieve label s data Hide Duplicates Whether to hide duplicate values if you do not want to show the same value in multiple consecutive rows Function Function to be used if you want the value to be auto calculated The following functions are available Sum Count Min Max and Average Reset At Specify when the function based calculations should be reset never at page level or at group level Percent Of Whether the label value should be shown as percentage of a higher level group or the report 250 Editable Grid Description Editable Grid form combines the function
173. Review Add New Records per p Add Edit Articles Error tarticle_desc Desc 4 rm Click Next to proceed to step 8 313 Step 8 Generating the Project and Pages This window displays a summary of the configurations that have been made to this point Click Finish to generate the pages and optionally publish them to the specified Server Path Once the pages have been generated the Project Explorer window will show all the pages for the project You can then open them and make any necessary changes Save options Fa Application Builder The following entities will be created hin E Page Login jg Connection a IncludePage Header S Record Login E Options lab TextBox login b TextBox password Y Authentication ab Button DoLogin et IncludePage Footer E Page Header Link articles_ _list Link events_lis_list S Link user_group_list r Link users_list_list gb Style E Page Footer nthe E Page articles _list Ee IncludePage Header B Record articlesSearch ab Button Button_DoSearch fabll TextBox article_desc abil TextBox article_title EH ListBox category_id Grid articles Tables TA Details li Page Layout 314 Authentication Builder A login or authentication form is used to input authentication details Login and Password that are required to grant access to users in sites that implement security The Authentication builder is used to add login lo
174. Server Environment for hosting the final application A Linux server MySQL database local or remote MySQL JDBC driver Tomcat Web server JDK 1 3 or higher The following table provides a list of applicable operating systems web servers databases and language version options for JSP and Java Servlets 48 Java Servlets and JSP Setup Unix Linux Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 Web Server Tomcat Resin BEA Weblogic IBM Websphere Macromedia JRun Apache Tomcat Internet Information Services IIS Tomcat or other Web Server that supports Servlet API version 2 2 MySQL PostgreSQL Oracle DB2 MS SQL Server Informix or other database via JDBC or JDBC ODBC Bridge The following is a list of steps that should be performed to setup and test the environment where the JSP pages or Java Servlets will be published These steps don t have to be followed strictly in the order in which they are presented below Install and configure the web server software The Servlet engine is implemented by a variety of web servers including Tomcat Resin Sun ONE Weblogic and WebSphere The procedure for installing the Servlet engine depends on the web server being used You can download the free Tomcat web server along with its documentation from http jakarta apache org tomcat Test the Web Server After installing the web server software you should run a test to make sure that the server is functionin
175. Source i sorting Navigation l Options Link R Layout re Style Builder C Component After selecting a style click the Finish button to generate the form to the page Menu Builder Menu Builder provides a visual method for designing and including menus within Web pages Menus can be based on data from a database or static values specified in the builder Products Downloads Support Purchase Company The Menu Builder is available in CodeCharge Studio under the Builders tab and provides various options for configuring the menu s data source style and layout After launching the builder you will be provided with the following configurations steps 376 Step 1 Specifying Type of Menu Items Specify whether you want the menu should be based on database values or static values i Menu Builder Menu Items f From Database Ha Connection C Static List l Data Source a Layout The following steps in the Menu Builder depend on your selection on the above screen Creating menus based on static list of menu items Creating database driven menus 377 Creating menus based on static list of menu items Step 2 Defining Static Menu In this step you specify and configure menu items and their parameters Click the button to add a new menu item within the currently selected item or to remove one Use the up and down buttons to move selected menu item position up or down
176. Super Project A Checkbox List is very much like a Listbox with multiple options If a Checkbox List control is associated with a database column the user can select only one value to be inserted or updated into the database Date Picker Overview Description The Date Picker component allows the user to select a date from a pop up calendar Each Date Picker is associated with an input control such as a Textbox When the user selects the date from the pop up calendar the date value is automatically entered into the associated control The Date Picker provides a visual display of the days within a month and allows the user to browse other months The value returned by the Date Picker when a date is clicked is based on the format specified in the Format property of the control If the Format property is not defined the date is returned in the format specified in the Default Date Format property of the project If both properties are empty the date will be returned in the format mm dd yyyy A Date Picker can be added in Record or Editable Grid forms only CKeditor or FCKeditor CKeditor is a third party rich text editor WYSIWYG that can be used instead of the HTML TextArea control CKeditor provides powerful visual text editing functionality for your pages E Source W O a E BeBe a E Fi a Boi U a xX x G5 E9 Ss 22 a B Ai Format Yl rot Ssa A A CKeditor installation file as well as CKeditor documentation can be found at
177. TION ON CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES NEITHER YESSOFWARE NOR ANYONE INVOLVED IN THE CREATION PRODUCTION OR DELIVERY OF THIS SOFTWARE SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH SOFTWARE EVEN IF YESSOFTWARE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR CLAIMS IN NO EVENT SHALL YESSOFTWARE S LIABILITY FOR ANY DAMAGES EXCEED THE PRICE PAID FOR THE LICENSE TO USE THE SOFTWARE REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF CLAIM THE PERSON USING THE SOFTWARE BEARS ALL RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE INNO EVENT WILL YESSOFWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT GREATER THAN WHAT YOU ACTUALLY PAID FOR THE SOFTWARE 6 TERMINATION This Agreement is effective until terminated This Agreement terminates on the date of the first occurrence of either of the following events 1 The expiration of one month from written notice of termination from Customer to YesSoftware or 2 At any time if you violate the terms of this Agreement Upon termination you shall destroy the written materials and all copies of the Software including modified copies if any You agree that monetary damages alone is not an adequate and just relief resulting from any breach of this License that a court order prohibiting any further breach of this License is necessary to prevent further damages and that you will not oppose any reasonable request for a temporary restraining order preliminary injunction or
178. TML is generated Instead of referring to a particular style in the code the code includes a tag variable that is replaced when the web page is requested i e runtime This way the stylesheet included with the rendered page can be selected at run time e g link rel stylesheet type text css href Styles CCS_Style Style_doctype css as well as some elements of the forms src Styles CCS_Style Images Asc gif Note the Dynamic style can only be applied to the whole page not to individual components Basic A simplified basic style that can be selected when no style is needed right now but you may want to assign a style later This option is similar to No Style but the HTML will be formatted in the same way as If using a style which makes it possible to specify a different style later e g using the change style menu choice in the context menu As you can see in the dialog you can select either a page or component type of styling to apply to the forms generated by the builder This refers to the HTML generated for the forms As mentioned above if you select Page the builder will generate a type of HTML that uses one stylesheet for the whole page When you select Page you are also selecting or changing the page stylesheet for the whole page therefore this could change how other forms appear on the page if they also were created with the Page type of styling If you select Component the builder
179. Themes or Styles and Themes option is selected then themes will be shown in the style selection dialog usually shown as the last step of component builders 176 Style Builder The Style Builder is a utility included with CodeCharge Studio and used for creating and modifying styles that are used to enhance the visual appearance of your page such as forms menus buttons etc The style builder is a convenient way to create styles without writing complicated CSS The builder can be accessed from several areas of CodeCharge Studio e g from the style selection steps in the builders or from project style settings The Style Builder window consists of 3 areas options value selection and preview area The preview area shows a sample HTML page preview based on the currently selected style option You click on an option such as Color Scheme choose one of the available selections and the preview pane shows the results The following is the list of available options Color Set of colors to be used by the style You can double click on one of the color schemes or select the Scheme Modify button to further modify and refine how the color scheme is applied to your page For example in the color scheme editor you can change the foreground and background colors for the captions on your forms by changing the colors for Header and Header Text Saturation Color saturation and brightness Table All forms are created with HTML tables T
180. X features you add in CodeCharge Studio thru the specific feature properties or with custom JavaScript you may add to your web pages Implementation AJAX service pages are created using the AJAX Service Builder and automatically placed in services folder The AJAX service page is a simplified page that includes the grid component template to output specially formatted data An AJAX service page includes a special hidden attribute that allows it to be generated without the usual HTML lt head gt and lt body gt sections The AJAX services supported by CodeCharge Studio are compatible with external AJAX libraries and components since they are based on common standards This means that external AJAX components should be able to obtain data from your AJAX Service built with CodeCharge Studio Likewise you should be able to use external AJAX data within your CodeCharge Studio forms 420 AJAX Service Builder To create a new AJAX service page select the Service Builder from the ribbon bar under the Builders tab then follow the steps on the screen by selecting the database table and fields to be the basis of your AJAX service Use an existing database connecti InternetDB j E or select a sample database Internet Database C Intranet Database C Internationalized use translation resources res W Save builder options Fields for the Grid order_item_id order_id product_id quantity price To modify an existing
181. _Link href htto www codecharge com target newframe gt Link to CodeCharge lt a gt Image Description Create Link General Parameters Advanced Text to display Static text Link address Static address Preview ca href gt lt a gt OK Cancel This is a link to another resource e URL Specify the location of the target resource e Target Frame If using frames enter the name of the frame where you want the linked resource to be opened in e Bookmark If you want the link to be a named anchor enter a unique name to identify it e Text This is the text the user will see and click on Note To see the HTML tags use the special symbols e g amp lt amp gt amp amp i e to display the following link How to use the lt I able gt tag you should enter the following How to use the amp lt Table amp gt tag in the Text input 284 Image Button HTML lt input tyoe Image id ImageButton1 name ImageButton1 src home gif gt Image P Description This is the graphical equivalent of the Submit Button When you click on the Image Button option in the Toolbox a dialog box appears where you can select the Image to be used to represent the button BY 13_navFirst_beige gif af 135 sortDESC_beige a gif Gl 13 navFirst_beige a gif E admin aif Sf 13_nayvLast_beige gif ET logo gif Type GIF Image Size 994 bytes B 13_navLast_beige a gif By 13_navNext_
182. _nayvPrey_beige gif be f 13 navPrey_beige a gif B13 sortasc_beige gif E 13 sort45C_beige a gif My Computer Te ec File name flogo gi My Network P Files of type Picture files gif pq ped prng Cancel Z After selecting an Image you then have to specify the URL of the resource to be linked to If applicable you can also enter the name of a frame where the link will be opened Create Link General Parameters Advanced Text to display Static text Text from database Link address Static address Address from database lt a href ye a gt Inline CS5 Style 288 Space HTML amp nbsp Description This is a non breaking space meaning that a line break cannot occur in its place It is used for instance when you don t want a line break to occur between two words Submit Button HTML lt INPUT TYPE submit ID Submit1 NAME Submitt VALUE Submit gt Image Submit Description When placed within an HTML form a Submit Button serves the purpose of submitting all the fields within the form to the designated action page The action page is specified in the action property of the Form element in which the Submit Button is placed Line Break HTML lt BR gt Description A Line Break forcibly ends the current line of text and continues the flow of content on the next line A Line Break is defined by a carriage return or a line feed When in Design
183. a 2 Sorting Click Next to proceed to step 3 386 Step 3 Create grouping levels for the report Specify the fields used for creating data groupings in the report The inclusion of groups is not required and this step is optional Groups The list of fields you selected as groups The report data will be grouped using this field s values For example the report will display the group header each time before category_name field s value changes and the group footer after the field s value changes The group footer may contain some calculated fields for example to show the number of items within the category You can select multiple groups the order of selected groups decides how the groups will be displayed and the data summarized Higher positioned groups should reflect a higher level of grouped data For example you might create groups in the following order continent country state region and city Sort Buttons Specifies ascending or descending sorting for the selected group AZ and ZA 2 Report Builder Groups ty Connection category_name Sela ela Calc Fields Click Next to proceed to step 4 387 Step 4 Select a report layout Select a report layouts which will determine the design of the report template and placement of components inside it The available layout options depend on if the report contains data groups or not Title Layout Without Groups Tabular Form Columnar
184. a E 260 Gieditor or FOKEdIlO eiir aene e e r taaa ee or otea a ea 260 CKEdOr OF F OKEOIO canana a ome sa Soaremedeaneneamemenere ne 263 Pile Uphbad OV SV IC W cennar a a a A a cea 265 Haden OVEIVIC W sso eraren a eave daaatedd saunanlvaaantelesecatss eietacuacsbeanteedanadteascet 269 AGE OV CIM OW siraru aoa a a a A 270 Image EINK OVETVIEW sisarensa an a a be a a aaa a a aea 270 MElUde PAJE OVENI EW aa a a a a A 270 Lael COVER VICW ooien sles han eeiae esctlone ieee elton hee ea hh Un eee ee 271 ENK OVET O W aoe tains otagerds gaia sscuaadcnesdat entiatueaton donate tnesiel ail odget ds asaiadsaesaavesaaetenccast 271 IST BOX OVET EW s co sect cct css Ne a ee Scare Pela saci tata teed peau sacs E 273 Navigator OUI VIG W arises eect tact a eta a a ists cha at eed acetate aac tte 273 Panelen issue aoe stands eee eee ae Reese Nese ese ee a ee 2 5 PaO VI CW ius as eset ae eh Sos aah et ath he eos ese iia ie ahah ce A 276 Radio BUOM OVeIVICW seron e a A Si aceds tabrhew en terete E atawle eeases 276 RED OM Label OVEIVIGW merenn srcazce esses cs Coys cease sacar atic te es asae3 ces eentaneestetasqcatese E RO RN 277 FRED ON SECIONO iea tae ese eo ae eae oe oho See a O 278 OMI COVETVICW anaiari sas a vais era vate caved ack Vote cunabe a veansaneraua veteran tune ciete eG 279 TONE PSO SVC Waa sores ate a a dc a eta ae Gasca ae ae ected eo ee 279 TEXTBOX OVCIVICW oaia e Maca saltiera cect E erates iede at irattte wart cheated 280 Component AttriDUteS
185. abase Explorer select the Relationships button on the ribbon bar under the Data Dictionary tab then add tables to the document pane either by selecting them from the drop lists at the bottom or dragging and dropping tables from the folder tree to the document pane If a relationship already exists between two tables it will be represented by a connecting line between the field in each table If you right click any area within the relationship window the context menu will appear Using this menu you can add a table or add all tables Add Table Add All Tables Like the Visual Query Builder you can delete or redefine any relationship shown This could be either an actual constraint defined in the database a previously defined relationship using the Database Explorer or an artificial relationship created by CodeCharge Studio based on the field names Also you can relate any fields between tables but you should be careful about picking fields since the relationships you define affects how CodeCharge Studio generates SQL queries Defining a Query Using the Database Explorer you can define a query that can be used as the datasource for the forms you create This can be useful if you need to reuse a query or uSe One query as a template for another To create a query right click on the Queries folder in the folder tree and select Create Query This will start the Visual Query Builder and from this point you can define a cus
186. able Parameter window is used to define input parameters when a table is being used as the data source Input parameters are used in the where clause of the SQL statement to determine the records to be retrieved from the table For instance the values submitted by a search form are received as input parameters by a corresponding grid or editable grid form and subsequently used to retrieve records based on the submitted search criteria The options available in the Table Parameter window vary depending on the selection made in the Condition Type field that appears at the top of the window We shall first examine the available options when the Condition Type field is set to Parameter Table Parameter Window Properties Field Name Name of the database table field that will be matched against the input parameter Type Data type of the field Text Integer Float Date Boolean Memo Format Format of the field if applicable e g a Boolean field could have the format 0 1 or Y N And Or Specify whether the field should be included in the where clause using the AND operator or the OR operator Condition Condition to be used to match the field value and the parameter value equals does not equal lt gt less than lt less than or equal lt greater than gt greater than or equal gt begin with like does not begin with not like end with does not end with not like contains like
187. able is initially created each row has the same number of cells but the table can then be adjusted to merge or split some of the cells In addition to the rows and cells it is further possible to assign attributes to the lt table gt lt tr gt and lt td gt tags to enhance their appearance When a table is used to determine the layout of the page the Border Size property is usually set to 0 so that the table in invisible to the user After creating the table you can then proceed to add content into the table such as text images or even forms containing other tables 163 Editing HTML Source Code When a page is opened in the HTML mode within the document window the HTML code that makes up the page template is available for viewing and editing While most of the HTML code is standard HTML markup typical of any HTML page there are some considerations that you need to remember if you edit the code manually Each page within CodeCharge Studio is composed of an HTML template whose contents are visible in the HTML mode and programming code that can be viewed in Code mode When the pages are published to the server and requested by a user over a browser the programming code opens and parses the HTML template code to create the final page that is sent back to the users browser The HTML template contains special blocks of HTML code which form the basis of the parsing process It is imperative that these blocks of HTML code be in a specific format i
188. ach of the pages You can also select a range of pages by clicking on the first page then holding down the Shift key while clicking on the last page in the range Once you have selected all of the pages click OK to create the diagram CodeCharge Studio creates a diagram based on the pages selected and shows how they are linked To improve the readability of the diagram you can click and drag the individual page icons to move them around You can also hold down the Ctr key when clicking on multiple page icons to select all of them and move them as a group Fa H oo as Eoo TaskManager CodeCharge Studio 5 a Home Data Dictionary Builders Forms Edit Fullscreen Options gt amp F Open ti Add Connection EF Server1 Er a Ai me Pe JL 4 Login Page zj Save 5 Add Diagram Qf Server Connections ars 5 Tas Blank Designs Publish Publish L Home Source View Page ZJ Application Builder A Delete F Settings 94 Publishing Settings Project Page Page Control Fages Project Publishing Tools t Ex Properties x Ca Lor Data Events Format El Pages 5 j j Designs E EmployeeList images Attributes Styles Restricted Ves E Administration Access Denied Pa Login ccp E Default Convert URL To None Employeelist Includable Mo EmployeeMaint SSL Access Only No Header Enable Caching No E Login Master Page fCCS PathToMas PriorityList
189. age 20 Page Size Limit Features e Al sorter H Eu ra WI OB Navigator Aa vy abl E au pE aa s 01 021 Inline Date Picker w Slider 124 Numeric Up Down Fopup Date Picker Additional TX a 228 Adding Navigator Controls to the Form If you are building a Grid or Editable Grid form you should also add a Navigator control to allow the user to browse forms in which the records span more than one page It is standard to add the Navigator control to the bottom row of the table If such a row does not exist you can use the Table toolbar to add a row e To add the Navigator click on the Navigator option under the Data tab of the Toolbox e When the Create Navigator dialog appears configure the options for the new navigator Custom Navigator Navigation Type Text links 6 Image buttons 9 Image buttons with text Previous Prev First First Next Next Last Last Preview Disabled links are not visible Page Numbers No 0 Current page only g Curent page in the center Current page moving 6 Manual Number of i0 page links WW Show total pages Add Page Size Selection Records per page _ First First Prev Prev OK Cancel 229 Specifying a Style for the Form After adding all the components for the form specify a style to enhance the look of the form and its contents Right click on the form title or icon and select the Edit option ct a style from the list
190. age If you do not assign a design at run time the design applied is the default design you selected in the IDE using Designs icon on the ribbon bar e You should be aware that the IDE does not distinguish between content pages master pages master templates form templates etc from other types of pages but there are certain conventions you should follow such as you should not try to include forms and controls in template pages A Simple Example This is a simple Hello World example to show how the master page and content page work Create a folder called designs mysite in your project folders In this folder create a new page called masterpage On the master page use the PlaceHolder button under the Forms tag on the ribbon bar to add a placeholder called content and one called head then save your page It is IMPORTANT to save your master pages whenever you make a change otherwise your master page may not be applied correctly Whenever you get an error make sure you have saved your master page After you are done the HTML for your master page should look something like this lt head gt lt meta http equiv content type content text html charset windows 1252 gt lt title gt masterpage lt title gt head lt head gt lt body gt content lt body gt In the Project Explorer add a new page to your web project then add some static text to the page Hello world Select the page and the
191. age then apply your design Or you could create a blank page apply a design then add your content as you would any CodeCharge Studio page Or you could do a combination of both As described previously your master page contains a set of placeholders When you apply a design to a page CodeCharge Studio creates a panel for each placeholder on your master page It also creates a couple other placeholders see description above for content and head even if your master page does not include these placeholders The placeholder property for each of these panels specifies which placeholder in the master page the panel is mapped to A panel with a placeholder property is called a content panel because everything within the panel as you can see in the folder tree or HTML is used to replace a placeholder in the template i e master page When your content page is requested each of the content panels are mapped to the master page and replace the placeholder tags within the HTML code This is done according to the panel s placeholder property If a panel on the page does not have a defined placeholder property or if a placeholder for that property does not exist on the master page the panel is not merged with the master page Similarly any content e g grid form that exists on the page but outside a content panel that is mapped to the master page does not get rendered on your page it is as if it does not exist lt is
192. ages put the Search form in an include page then add a reference to the include page on the content panel mapped to the section of your master page where you want the Search form to appear e g sidebar block Your placeholders in the master page define different sections where content is inserted from your content page Typically the styling on your page CSS stylesheet applies to the page and the individual sections but not the content that may appear in each section For example you might define a block of your page to contain a sidebar containing content related to but not the main content of the page The sidebar might contain other content elements such as search forms links calendars etc To maintain a consistent appearance of items in the sidebar you might want to define a particular styling to individual segments within the sidebar You can define this thru another template called a master template which describes the appearance of the content that appears within a particular section Master templates are described in the next section To use a master template with a master page select the content panel on your content page e g select a form in HTML mode and apply the master template property or move the content on your content page to an include page add a reference to the include page in a content panel on your content page then apply the master template to the content panel 136 Using Master Templates
193. aiara aaa a Piette tect iace con eat ae iieaee 35 Benefits of Using Web Technologie Serre aa a T N E 36 Challenges Encountered Using Web Technologies ccccccccesseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesssaeseeeeeeeeasaaeess 37 Arcmtecture Or WED APDICAVON S irnar aceasta chy otedaattheleeheasade seoeadeeasacshelangesseat 37 Ghoosing Web TECGhNOlOOYy sieren Aa ses attsoaca tes etcaecane sage E 38 Geng SLAC cise cnet hehehehe a cea deseasaet new bow easton S O 40 Pownloading GodeChiarge Std sonani E ea 40 Stalling GOdeCGharde Studi Owscccsent ss aea e a cit a id eee A ek 40 Upgrading Repairing or Uninstalling CodeCharge Studio ccccccccssseeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesaeseeeeeeees 42 Starting CodeCharge Studio ccccccccseessecccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeseeaseeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeeeeeseaas 42 What You Need 10 Get Stane Qaninin a a a aa 43 Setting UP the Work Environment erasia a a S oaia aana aaae 44 WORO ENVONMON hiere nan oire aaa aea E G 51 cCowmand Are dorsa ON fe er eR 51 TOODO ecteneer an eneiner ee rine aaa a ene Ea Een nee rien eee ee aera een ere ee renee eee 53 TNS Project EX DIOKCN siiciraincecnttnaudstasceatnnsietnhaniaattin sats a see siniaueectuiaatiavals aa 61 EAC Properties VVINGOW sastancecsssinccactnodernacataetenarvunoradstnetecarvwcndaasta Conan etteadianeasdarvenruncthayteadeaadeeSciamnceass 62 Message VVINGOW site vdaaseteivetctaiatins iene e a a aa a aides 63 VVORKING W OCUIMGIIS wads Matucor
194. al E F7 Fl E Options articles E i events 7 F ps Authentication iw C user groups l Tables Users If you click on a particular table name under the Table column the Details window appears in which you can configure more details for the table 301 Specifying the Search Details PT Details users Search Grid amp Record on One Page Include in Menu Search Grid Link Editable Grid Record Iv Active Sorting listbox Orientation Vertical Advanced Records per page listbox Horizontal Available Fields addressi user_login address2 first_name addresss last_name age_id phone_home card_expire_date email card_number city country_id date add Search Fields Page Name users_tist Control Type Textbox te The first tab in the Details window is the Search tab where you can configure an optional search form 302 p iw Details users Search Grid amp Record on One Page Include in Menu Search Grid Link Editable Grid Witoead E vl Active Primary Key user_id Allow Insert Custom Insert Grid layout Tabular E Number of empty rows 3 Sorting Single Direction Indicator eee ee Allow Update Custom Update Page Navigator lt lt lt 5o0f10 gt gt gt 7 eee Allow Delete Custom Delete Build Query Include Cancel button Available Fields gender_id group_id image_url income id ip_add ip_update Fie
195. ality of typical grid and record forms A grid form is designed to allow browsing of multiple records without the capability of altering the records while a record form is used to insert update or delete single records The Editable Grid brings together the functionality of grid and record forms by allowing the user to browse insert update or delete multiple records from the same form The editable grid can be used to make changes to multiple records using a single operation rather than dealing with each individual record The editable grid can be constructed using a builder or by dropping a barebones Editable Grid form onto a page The builder uses a series of dialogs to guide you through the steps of configuring various options for the Editable Grid that is based on a single database table You can also use the Visual Query Builder to construct a query that retrieves fields from different related tables If you use the Forms tab of the Toolbox to place a barebones Editable Grid onto a page you have to manually configure all the properties of the Editable Grid and add components such as Sorters and Navigator controls that are not included in the initial form You should use the builder to create the Editable Grid even if you intend to customize it later It is recommended you only use the barebones form if you want to exercise control over most of the construction of the form 251 Structure of the Editable Grid The structure of an Editable Gr
196. ally Source The name of the source containing the value to be assigned to the attribute Name For example source name abc used with the source type URL will dynamically retrieve attribute s value from such URL as www mywebsite com pagel php abc test When created the new attribute will be inserted into the HTML in the following format Component_Name Attribute_Name Where the Component_Name prefix is either the name of the parent component such as record or image or the word page if placed at the page level outside of any components When subsequently modifying the HTML manually it is important to note that an attribute that corresponds to specific component must be placed within the HTML template of that component for example lt input type text name TextBox1_Name value TextBox1 style TextBox1 style gt lt BEGIN TextBox TextBox1 gt TextBox1 someAtir lt inout type text name TextBox1_Name value TextBox1 gt END TextBox TextBox gt lt BEGIN Record NewRecord1 gt lt input type text name TextBox1_Name value TextBox1 style NewRecord1 style gt pa END Record NewRecord1 gt Examples of attributes placed incorrectly outside component s template TextBox1 someAttr lt input type text name TextBox1_Name value TextBox1 gt TextBox1 someAttr lt BEGIN TextBox TextBoxi gt lt input type text name TextBox1_Name value TextBox1 gt END TextB
197. ally to their computers This operation is usually called Update or Get Lastest Version and creates a working copy Before a file can be modified it has to be locked for editing using Edit or Check Out operation depending on the Software Configuration Management package being used To publish the changes to the repository Commit or Check In operation must be executed These operations are also required after adding new files to the repository Reserved vs unreserved checkout systems There are generally two kinds of Software Configuration Management systems Packages with reserved checkout prevent multiple users from editing the same file at the same time This is assured by putting a lock on a file before editing Other users must wait for the editor to release the lock before they can edit the file Source Control packages with unreserved checkout allow editing of any files in use by another user Potential problems and conflicts are detected during the commit stage The system checks if different users have not committed newer file version than the file being committed is based on If this situation is detected the committing user is left to perform a manual merge operation between the new file in the repository and the version that is being committed Most popular Software Configuration Management systems Microsoft Visual SourceSafe Visual SourceSafe is a Software Configuration Management package sold by Microsoft It is a reserved checkout syste
198. also a CodeCharge Studio page do not add components to your template e g Grid Record Panel etc Only the HTML text of the form template is applied to the form generated on your web page The normal properties of the page form and other controls that you might add or change in the Project Explorer are not applied to any new forms and may cause problems when you publish your pages e f you create a new template starting with anew CodeCharge Studio page you will notice that CodeCharge Studio adds sections to the HTML that are normally part of a new page see below but ignored by the builder since they are not part of the template blocks For a template page set the ncludable property for the page to yes and then delete any remaining HTML This will prevent CodeCharge Studio from recreating the code As you can see if you examine one of the built in templates e g Grid Tabular the only code you need in your template is the template blocks template variables and HTML to describe the layout and styling lt DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC W3C DTD HTML 4 01 Transitional EN htto www w3 org T R html4 loose dtd gt lt html gt lt head gt lt meta name GENERATOR content CodeCharge Studio 5 0 0 11675 gt lt meta http equiv content type content text html charset windows 1252 gt lt title gt NewPage 1 lt title gt lt link rel stylesheet type text css href Styles Basic Style_doctype css gt lt head gt lt body gt
199. ame folder where your project is stored then it copies the generated files to the web server The Publishing settings allow you to specify the folder where CodeCharge Studio should output the generated files during the publishing process You can generate the web application files locally to your hard drive or network or to external web servers via FTP SFTP SSH CodeCharge Studio supports publishing to different servers This allows the developers to publish their applications to different local or remote servers e g first publish the project to a test server or location and after the tests complete switch the publishing server to the deployment one Project settings x Publishing settings Active Server Server1 Edit Servers Website wil be published to this server until a different server is selected Please check that the database connection settings are setup correctly for this server Type Local Metwork Server Path Ic Inetoubwwwroot ewProject1s Browse Server URL http fflocalhost MewProject1s Files to publish f Project Files code and HTML template files All files with extensions cgi met Reset Reset Active server Defines the server for which the settings are to be changed There can be more than one publishing server defined within a project It is also possible to read server s setting from an existing CCS project file 80 Publishing Files Locally You can publish the
200. anced properties To activate the button select a field in the Fields for the Grid section Note The following field types have advanced properties CheckBox List ListBox Radio Button Link and Image Link CheckBox List ListBox or Radio Button Clicking on the button will open the List DataSourse dialog illustrated below Link and Image Link Clicking on the button will open the dialog with link properties Specify the control type to be used for each of the fields in the form Click Next to proceed to step 4 359 Step 4 Selecting Layout Grid Options Specify the type of layout in the grid form Grid and Record Builder Option Settings Layout Select layout for the grid form Records per page Specify the default number of records to be shown per page Rows per page Specify the default number of rows to be shown per page available when Gallery Style is selected Columns per row Number of gallery columns available when Gallery Style is selected Record separator If checked a template block called Separator will be inserted between rows and alternating rows La Grid and Record Components Builder Layout ta Connection Tabular e Grid Columnar Justified Data Source C Gallery Style Search C HTML Template from file Columnar ccp built in Sorting Navigation Records per page Rows per page 10 tions cous perrow a Record Record separator D Click Next to proc
201. and used by the builders you select to create your forms 399 Database Explorer The Database Explorer can be used to view the database catalog and select the tables and fields you want to define in the data dictionary The catalog is displayed as a familiar hierarchical folder tree P departments FA emp_times z Bee amp FA order items orders P priorities m P products E projects F projects_employees ea statuses E tasks task_id project_id prionty_id status_id type_id task_name task_ desc user_id_assign_by user_id_assign_to task_start_date task_finish_date E P types E user_events g Views Queres cy Proje SY Files Zh Datab l 4 p i OSa C8 Sa If you right click on any field name the context menu allows you add delete the field as a primary key column or reset any changes you made in the data dictionary for that field Reset is useful if you want to revert your changes back to the original state of that field in the data dictionary e g to revert back to the original database setting It does not affect any other fields that you may have configured in the data dictionary Is Primary Key Reset dictionary for emp login 400 To open the Data Dictionary Property Editor part of the workspace double click on a table or column from the Database Explorer Table properties Form Title Display List of Employees Grid Events Record Form
202. ar Java Application servers follow Tomcat 4 0 scenarios Check that the DB drivers are in the class path of your server Choose the appropriate scenario and change the properties marked red Scenario 1 Auto deployment from webapps directory DataSource extension is not used Before code generation verify that the Use Data Source site property is set to No Fill in connection properties to indicate Driver class name Database url user login and password Ensure that your database driver is in your application server class path Place the generated war file to where appBase attribute of Virtual Host configuration element points to Generally it is lt tomcat_home gt webapps Scenario 2 Deployment through Context configuration DataSource extension is not used Add Context element as a child to Host element in your server xml configuration file lt tomcat_home gt lt Context path JSPPortal docBase JSPPortal war gt lt Context gt path is the context path of your application docBase is absolute or relative to appBase path to the war file Scenario 3 Deployment through Context configuration DataSource extension is used e Before code generation verify that Use Data Source site property is set to Yes e Set connection DataBase URL property to java comp env jdbc Connection1 Where Connection is name of your connection e Define Context element as described in previous scenario e Add Resource child element with ResourcePa
203. aram value gt lt init param gt lt init param gt lt param name gt debug lt param name gt lt param value gt true lt param value gt lt init param gt lt init param gt lt param name gt enabled lt param name gt lt param value gt false lt param value gt lt init param gt lt init param gt lt param name gt AllowedExtensionsFile lt param name gt lt param value gt lt param value gt lt init param gt lt init param gt lt param name gt DeniedExtensionsFile lt param name gt lt param value gt php php3 php5 phtml asp aspx ascx jsp cfm cfc pl bat exe dll reg cgi lt param value gt lt init param gt lt init param gt lt param name gt AllowedExtensionslmage lt param name gt lt param value gt jpog gif joeg ong obmp lt param value gt lt init param gt lt init param gt lt param name gt DeniedExtensionsimage lt param name gt lt param value gt lt param value gt lt init param gt lt init param gt lt param name gt AllowedExtensionsFlash lt param name gt lt param value gt swf fla lt param value gt lt init param gt lt init param gt lt param name gt DeniedExtensionsFlash lt param name gt lt param value gt lt param value gt lt init param gt lt load on startup gt 3 lt load on startup gt lt servlet gt lt serviet mapping gt lt servlet name gt Connector lt servlet name gt lt url pattern gt lt C KBase gt editor tilemanager browser default connectors jsp connector lt u
204. arch criteria to determine the records that it will display This means that a search form is always used in conjunction with another form In actual sense a search form is basically a record form whose insert update and delete properties have been disabled Search forms can be constructed using the Search builder Grid Builder Editable Grid Builder or you can manually construct one using the barebones record form provided under the Forms tab of the Toolbox Unless you need to exercise full control over the creation of the search form it is recommended that you use one of the Builders The Search Builder can be used to create a search form is there is an already existing grid or editable grid form which the search form will apply to Otherwise the Grid and Editable Grid Builders allow the user to create a search form during the process of creating a grid or editable grid 20 Search Form Properties You can click on either of these glyphs to expose the search form properties under the Data tab of the Properties window Alternatively you can click on the name of the search form in the Project Explorer Because a search form is basically a special type of record form the search form properties are identical to those of a record form Search Form Properties Name A unique name for the form Connection A search form does not retrieve data from the database so this property is left blank Source Type A search form does not retrieve data from t
205. are normally included in ordinary site pages are not included twice thereby resulting in errors An ordinary page always has a number of include files such as those shown below in the case of an ASP page lt Include Common Files 1 D6EDE132 Yo gt lt INCLUDE FILE Common asp gt lt INCLUDE FILE Cache asp gt lt INCLUDE FILE Template asp gt lt INCLUDE FILE Sorter asp gt lt INCLUDE FILE Navigator asp gt lt End Include Common Files 2 0 By setting the Includable property to Yes these files are omitted since they will be available in the main page where the Include Page control will be placed Label Overview HTML Label1 Image Label Description A label field is probably the simplest of the Controls although its flexibility allows it to be used to represent a wide variety of content It is important to understand that Label fields are not HTML controls such as Text Box or Checkbox fields A Label is simply plain text and cannot be used to submit a value in a form Due to their read only nature Labels are used to present content that should not be altered For example grid forms are mainly composed of Label fields Use Label fields to represent dynamic or static data that does not need to be or should not be edited by the end user Link Overview HTML lt a href Link1_ Src gt Link1 lt a gt Image Link Description The Link
206. are removed Remember that when you apply a design CodeCharge Studio creates a content panel for every placeholder in your master page but the content of your page is moved to just the panel called content Your placeholders normally define the layout of your page e g block placement If you want certain content e g search form to appear in a particular location you need to move the content to the right content panel For example suppose your page has a Search form but you want the form to appear in the Block1 position some arbritrary position When you apply a design to your page CodeCharge Studio will create a panel called Content and move the Search form to this panel It will also create a Block1 panel if you master page has a placeholder called Block1 but initially the panel has no content To make the Search form appear in the Block1 location you will need to cut amp paste the Search form into the Block1 panel You can apply a design manually without using this menu by assigning properties to your page and panels but you have to thoroughly understand how to create a panel structure that corresponds to your master page and how to assign the properties correctly as described in the following sections 132 How Master Pages Work A master page is a regular CodeCharge Studio page you have created with a predefined layout that can include CSS static text HTML controls HTML elements etc The page becomes the l
207. arious commands by right clicking on an element to bring up a popup menu Ls EmployeeDirectory Pages E Designs l 5 tyles 61 The Properties Window The Properties window acts in conjunction with the Project Explorer and Document windows The Properties window consists of three tabs i e Format Data Events You will notice that the contents of each tab in the Properties window changes according to the selected element in the Project Explorer or Document window When using the Properties window a caption appears between the tabs and the list of properties with the type and name of the selected element For example in the illustration below a Grid form called events is the currently selected element lt is advisable to make a habit of checking the caption before setting any property or event values so changes are not made to the wrong element All the items in the Format tab and the Data tab display properties and events in a Name Value format The name of the property or event appears to the left of the window while its attendant value if any appears to the right In some of the properties drop down lists are used to specify a series of options to chose a value from in others you can simply type in a value Additionally some properties use popup dialogs of varying complexity and functionality to specify the property s value Unlike the other windows that we have seen so far the Properties window features its own Statu
208. as a link to download the MyODBC driver which can be used to make an ODBC connection to a MySQL database during design time required in earlier versions of CodeCharge Studio Create and Test a CodeCharge Project CodeCharge Studio comes with a number of example projects that you can easily generate and publish as a way of testing your setup Each of these examples comes with an Access database and a database script file that you can use to recreate the database Please refer to the section on the example solutions for detailed instructions on how to setup and use them You can also refer to the Quick Start section within the documentation for step by step instructions to create and publish your first web application and the section on deploying PHP projects PERL Setup A common configuration for the development of Perl applications Development Environment for the development and testing of applications A Windows desktop computer with an installation of CodeCharge Studio Local or remote MySQL database MyODBC driver Apache Web server Perl 5 0 or higher Server Environment for hosting the final application A Linux server MySQL database local or remote Apache Web server Perl 5 0 or higher You can obtain the MyODBC driver from www mysql com Note Earlier versions of CodeCharge Studio did not include a native interface to MySQL in the IDE so a MyODBC driver was needed during application design All versions support a
209. ase script file that you can use to recreate the database Please refer to the section on the example solutions for detailed instructions on how to setup and use them You can also refer to the Quick Start section within the documentation for step by step instructions to create and publish your first web application and the section on deploying ASP projects PHP Setup A common configurations for the development of PHP applications Development Environment for the development and testing of applications A Windows desktop computer with an installation of CodeCharge Studio Local or remote MySQL database MyODBC driver required in earlier versions of CodeCharge Studio Apache Web server PHP 4 1 or higher Server Environment for hosting the final application A Linux server MySQL database local or remote Apache Web server PHP 4 1 or higher You can obtain the MyODBC driver from www mysql com Note Earlier versions of CodeCharge Studio did not include a native interface to MySQL so the MyODBC driver was needed during the application design stage when the target platform was PHP or PERL All versions support a server side interface for deployed applications The following table provides a list of applicable operating systems web servers databases and language version options for PHP 45 PHP Setup Unix Linux Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 Apache Internet Information Services IIS
210. asrntiersuietenmuinteewieedini iota lean aA 412 AJAX AUTOR BUIGE eresie arn aea aoar lat oonntetaateciacssuietees 415 AJAX Dependent Listboxes Builder ccccccssssececccsseeecceeesecececeeueeeeesseaaeeeeesseaeeeeessgeeeesssageeenees 418 AJAX Services and Service Bulder canen a a a 420 PAM I COVONCS oein e a e E 422 AJAX AUIOCOMDIE Gasse a a a 422 InMotion Framework Support VB NET and CA ccccceceececeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseesaaaaaaeaseeeeeees 443 User s Guide Introduction to CodeCharge Studio Who Should Use CodeCharge Studio CodeCharge Studio allows users to automatically generate 80 to 100 of web applications and is an especially powerful tool in the hands of software developers even those unfamiliar with web technologies CodeCharge Studio can also be used by those who are new to programming It is highly recommended that you be familiar with programming concepts and database design or have an already existing database that you want to integrate into a web site Prior programming experience is recommended and sometimes required if you wish to create complex applications The section Introduction to Web Programming describes many concepts of web development that can help you understand how web applications generally work and how they differ from the standard client server and desktop applications CodeCharge Studio is best suited for the following types of users Web Application Developers Co
211. assword as the argument in place of the string to be encrypted Sample values for MySQL MD5 password PASSWORD password SHA1 password Note User passwords transferred from one database type to another for example from MySQL to MS SQL Server may become invalid if the new database doesn t support a compatible encryption function 92 Code Expression x Enable Remember Me feature Cookie Name Expiring in Numeric Sliding Expiration Encryption Key Programming code to be used to encrypt the password string Specify an encryption function and include password in place of the string to be encrypted Examples of code expressions for supported programming languages ASP MD5 password PHP md5 password Perl md5_hex password ColdFusion Hash password VB Net Security Utility MD5 password C Security Utility MD5 password Java Utils MD5 password Enables the Remember Me feature on login forms and allows the application to skip the login process during subsequent login attempts Defines the name of the cookie that stores user login information Specifies the number of days before the cookie expires The user will be prompted to login again after this period Specifies whether the cookie expiration should be reset to the Expiring in value upon each successful login This will extend the life of the cookie each time when the user is successfully authenticated 128 bit encryption
212. asterPage variable is the run time folder location for your master page If you put your templates in the same location you can dynamically change templates at run time For example most of the built in Artisteer designs include master templates you can use to style different parts of the page The designs share the same names for the master templates and the templates are located in the same location within the design folder This allows some applications to dynamically assign a design at run time Example Converting an Application Created with an Earlier Version of CodeCharge Studio This example is based on an application originally created with the Forums solution template in version 4 3 If you want to follow along you should create a new project based on this solution Make sure the project target is C InMotion Framework In this example we will convert the application to 5 0 then apply one of the built in Artisteer designs to the project This example demonstrates how to apply a design and use the master templates to style different sections of the web page Open the application and convert it to 5 0 141 Open the Header page and edit the HTML to change the header to just a list of links so we delete the graphics since this will be part of the design and eliminate all the formatting The result should look something like this 1 iza href home link 5rc id Headerhome link gt home link lt a gt 2 ita href
213. ation Intranet Database 3 Tables Additional options for tables and fields captions control types Details DataDictionary actions etc can be configured in the DataDictionary 293 Creating a new database connection If you opted to create a new database connection click on the Create button to open the Add New Connection window You can then create a database connection based on ODBC DSN or a Connection string Add New Connection x Design Advanced Server Connection Name Connectioni Database ANSI SQL 92 Use ODBC Data Source Name CCSiInternet Weve Use Connection String Build User Name User Password The new connection will be added to all servers You may need to setup database connection settings to other servers Help OK Cancel 294 Configuration DataDictionary Optional Additional options for tables and fields captions control types actions etc can be configured in the DataDictionary s S pi tamsi 295 Fields Values C Use a new database connection Create Additional options for tables and fields captions control types actions etc can be configured in the DataDictionary Sanit Click Next to proceed to step 3 296 Step 3 Builder Options Dialog Settings Enable smart naming Autoincremented primary keys M Use single keyword field for text and memo fields on Search M Publish th
214. ayout and formatting for the content of your page A master page is a key part of any design but not the only element You can find examples of master pages in the built in Artisteer designs Instead of designing the styling applied to each web page of your project the styling can be defined in one template page then applied to one or more other pages called content pages This way you can concentrate more on the forms and controls of your web pages and also the application logic behind your web site without having to consider the layout and formatting A page with an assigned Master Page property is a content page You use a content page to define the web pages of your CodeCharge Studio application They contain forms controls and other components that define your application There is no particular order that your design and content pages have to be developed You can create a CodeCharge Studio project then apply a design to your pages or you can apply a design to new pages you create and then add your content e g forms later or you can do a combination of both Normally you start by creating the master page first then adding placeholders for the content you want to map to the page Note there are no restrictions in the CodeCharge Studio IDE on how you can use master pages and content pages They behave like any other CodeCharge Studio pages you have worked with but the convention and the logic is that you use a master page as an HTML te
215. b applications use the client server architecture i e two tier where the browser acts as a thin client The three tier architecture is becoming more popular and even necessary when implementing enterprise systems that require better scalability Application Servers An application server is the middle tier in the three tier architecture Application servers process the business logic on the Web server and communicate between the web browser and the database or another system Web Services Web Services are programs that do not output information to the screen or Web browser but instead send the output to other programs in the form of XML They do not take input from users via the keyboard but rather read the information sent to them by other Web services in XML format Web services allow programs to exchange information across the internet and run remote applications as part of a local software system Cookies Cookies are small amounts of data sent by a program to the browser and stored on the user s machine to be retrieved later They are usually used to recognize users who come back to visit the same Website after several hours days or months Session Variables Session variables are similar to standard local variables but are used to store information that can be retrieved by other pages during the course of a user session Session variables usually store information in a special session file on the server You would usually create a s
216. b pages Menus can be based on data from a database or static values specified in the builder Products Downloads Support Purchase Company Flash Charts and Flash Chart Builder Flash Chart Builder provides a visual method for designing and including Flash charts within a Web page The Flash Chart component retrieves data from the database at run time and presents it as a visual graph ASP NET InMotion Framework C and VB NET CodeCharge Studio 5 includes support for 3rd party ASP NET application framework InMotion Framework that further simplifies C and VB NET development Hame MyFirst pplcatior Location C Program Files 86 CodeChargeStudioS Projects x Browse Language ASPONET CH Inkdotion Framework ki ASF with Templates 7 ASP NET VBE InMotion Framework ColdFusion ColdFusion with Templates JSP Perl with Templates PHP with Templates Servlets with Templates Create Project Cancel 23 Benefits of CodeCharge Studio CodeCharge Studio generates structured object oriented code that is easy to maintain and extend CodeCharge Studio makes code generation very practical by taking the hassle out of the process of generating professional level code Developers can easily modify any part of the generated code using a powerful code editor included with CodeCharge Studio Code that has been modified in the editor by the user is not overwritten during subsequent code generation CodeCharge
217. b server download the free Apache web server from http www apache org Most Perl distributions are compatible with Apache Setup the Database Database connections in Perl require special modules known as database interfaces lt is common to use the MySQL database when publishing in Perl You can download MySQL from http www mysql com where you will also find documentation for the database as well as a link to download the MyODBC driver which can be used to make an ODBC connection to a MySQL database Create and Test a CodeCharge Project CodeCharge Studio comes with a number of example projects that you can easily generate and publish as a way of testing your setup Each of these examples comes with an Access database and a database script file that you can use to recreate the database Please refer to the section on the example solutions for detailed instructions on how to setup and use them You can also refer to the Quick Start section within the documentation for step by step instructions to create and publish your first web application and the section on deploying Perl projects ColdFusion Setup A common configuration for the development of ColdFusion applications Development Environment for the development and testing of applications A Windows desktop computer with an installation of CodeCharge Studio A local MS Access database or a copy of a remote MS Access database or a local or remote SQL server PWS or IIS Web Server with
218. bapps and publish your project e Start Tomcat and then Apache Deploying Net Applications To create a project based on one of the Net languages i e C or VB Net there are certain prerequisites that have to be in place C and VB Net share a similarity with Java and JSP in that there is a compilation process that occurs when the project is published In most other languages such as ASP and PHP the project pages are simply published to the server where they can be accessed by a user For C and VB Net the cs or vb files are compiled to create a windows dynamic link library dll which is placed in the bin folder of the published project To generate C or VB Net projects you must have a local copy of the ASP Net Framework Redistributable or the Framework SDK installed on the machine Make sure that the version you obtain is 1 0 3705 or higher On server also required ASP NET AJAX 1 0 It can be downloaded from http www microsoft com downloads details aspx FamilyID ca9d90fa e8c9 42e3 aal 9 08e2c027f5d6 Path Settings After installing the Net framework you need to tell CodeCharge Studio where to find the compilers for C and VB Net To do so open the Options Options menu and in the Options window click on the Paths option In the field entitled Net SDK enter the path to the C or VB Net compiler file Default Server Path n C Inetpub wwwroot Default Server URL E components Design Edit
219. based on one field which can be selected in the Report Builder or in a report s Group property When report groups are used the data rows will be grouped into collections with the same value of the grouped field in each collection Each group also has a unique name associated group field and the data sort order After creating a new group the Group Header and Group Footer sections will automatically be added into the report s HTML template Report Modes The Report component supports two display modes Print and Web In Web mode the report contains navigation links or buttons that users can click to navigate through multiple report pages In Print mode all report pages are shown at once in the Web browser however report pages are separated by invisible page break tags that result in page breaks between printed pages when a user prints the report Page breaking is implemented by inserting the 247 Panel component into the Page Footer section The Panel contains the HTML paragraph tag lt p gt with the PAGE BREAK AFTER always Style attribute Note The report mode can be specified dynamically at run time by including in the URL the parameter named ShowMode with the value Web or Print You can specify the default mode in report s properties Report Paging You can specify Lines per Web page and Lines per Print page for a report which defines the page height in Web and Print modes respectively In Web mode the Lines per Web page
220. be edited with external Web editors and uses proper encoding when opening and later saving the file This default HTML encoding is inserted as a META tag only into new pages when they are created You can later change the encoding of individual pages by altering the META tag value Furthermore in multi lingual applications the HTML META tag may be overwritten at run time by the Output Encoding specific to the active language When the encoding is not specified here and not present as META tag within HTML the files will be saved in the system s default encoding Global option that specifies the default date format to be used when displaying dynamic data in date format on all Web pages You can specify either a non language specific date format such as mm dd yyyy or language specific format such as ShortDate which will be replaced at run time with the format specific to the active language or locale Note The global date display format can be overridden by specifying the date display format for individual controls such as Textbox or Label in their properties The list of languages and countries locales available in the project for localization purposes Each of the locales is associated with additional attributes and text translations that can be edited separately by clicking the Add Edit and Translations buttons The Set default button is also provided to specify which language should be used by default when the user or the a
221. beige gif E nophoto My Documents 713 navPrey_beige a qif w BY 13 sort45C_beige gif A 13 sort45C_beige a gif My Computer File name home gi My Network F Files of type Picture files gif joo ped png Cancel Zee 285 Label HTML lt label gt lt label gt Description As the name suggests Labels are used to provide text that identifies other elements within the page They can otherwise be termed as captions Listbox HTML lt SELECT ID Select NAME Select1 SIZE 3 gt lt OPTION gt Select1 lt OPTION gt lt SELECT gt Image Select Description A Listbox is essentially the same as a Dropdown with the distinction of being able to display multiple options With a listbox it is also possible for the user to select more than one option by specifying the Multiple property Password HTML lt INPUT TYPE password D Password1 NAME Password1 gt Image Description This is very similar to the Text Box except that all characters entered are masked using asterisks Most login forms will contain a password field Reset Button HTML lt INPUT TYPE reset D Reset1 NAME Reset1 VALUE Reset gt Image Reset Description A Reset button is used to return the fields in a form to the state they originally were in when the page loaded For instance if a field was empty then a value was entered clicking on the Reset button would clear the value 286 Image
222. calendar control is displayed for selecting the date when the textbox is selected Supported Components TextBox Properties Name User assigned name identifying the feature within HTML Highlight weekends Highlight calendar cells containing weekends Sample Implementation WateTmePicker JateTmePickerl Mame JDateTimePickerl Show Weekend No Image 1 1 2013 January 2013 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat al a all 7I al al 10 44 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 oz 283 29 30 31 Now 428 AJAX Hide Show Description The Hide Show feature controls visibility of another component form or control on the page It allows a component to be shown or hidden depending on specified conditions Supported Components All forms and controls Properties Enabled Specifies whether the feature is active Name User assigned name identifying the feature within HTML Control ld Name of the form or control to be shown or hidden Show event Client event or condition that makes the component visible You can select one or multiple events or conditions via the provided dialog These events are HTML control events Hide event Client event or condition that makes the component hidden You can select one or multiple events or conditions via the provided dialog
223. ce by storing and reusing the representation of a live page instead of executing the code and SQL statements during each page request It is especially useful when applied to pages that perform complex SQL queries such as pages that contain Directory or Calendar components Caching can be even more powerful when applied to includable pages which then act as cached components reusable across multiple Web pages Using the application caching features improperly may lead to harda to detect problems and are therefore only recommendedA to experienced users and within a limited number of website pages or features For practical reasons CodeCharge Studio supports the storage of cached pages in the database except for NET without the risk of dealing with improper file permissions CodeCharge Studio also supports custom caching storage A allowing experienced users to implement and share file based and other types of cache storage Note When using NET technologies such as VB NET and C the NET built in caching is used not the application based caching features When working with NET projects in CodeCharge Studio the database caching is not available and the following features are not used e Session variables are not used as cache parameters e There is no distinction between URL and Form parameters e The On Caching event is called only when the page is loaded Execution of Cached Pages During application execution when a page with enabled cach
224. ch as the programming language and path to the web server Specify the database connection type and establish a database connection Alternatively you can select one of the sample databases Intranet or Internet Configure site authentication by specifying the database table and columns that contain user login and password information as well as security groups and roles Select the database tables based upon which the web application will be created Specify the type of web page to be created for each of the previously selected database tables Specify if you want to create Search Grid Editable Grid and Record maintenance pages for each table Specify a style to be applied to the site The style defines the basic layout and appearance of different elements within a page The Application Builder will automatically create a project with sets of pages that make up the web application You can then publish the pages to the server and test them If you wish you can make further modifications to the created application by using the integrated development environment IDE CodeCharge Studio does not create or assist in the creation of databases There are many other tools that already perform that function For example you can easily create a database using Microsoft Access for Windows and even export it to MySQL for use on Linux CodeCharge Studio does come with two sample databases and several web applications that use the included databases They
225. cific translations that are particular to a given locale If you don t your web pages may not be rendered properly when they are requested When you add a language to your project CodeCharge Studio copies the translation file from your installation folder to your project folder Any custom translations you have made to other languages in your project are not automatically included in the new language file Also whenever you add a resource key and text to one language file the entry is not added automatically to the other languages If you make an entry in one language file you should add a similar entry in the other For example let s say you change the caption of your form and add English and French translations If you later add Spanish you will need to manually edit the Spanish translation file and add a new caption for your form so that all the translations are consistent Note too when you run one of the builders and internationalized is selected the builder may add entries to your translation file automatically but if you later add a locale to your project the translation file for that locale will not contain those translations unless you add them There are several ways in which text ends up on your web page You can add text directly to the page The text may be part of a control added by CodeCharge Studio or it may be part of one or more controls added by one of the builders Working with Builders The forms that are generated by the bu
226. cle title command ExecuteScalar ToString catch Exception e do something meaningful here result Exception e ToString End RemoteCustomCode RemoteCustomCode 1 Displaying 433 RemoteDLookup Description The RemoteDLookup feature is used to execute a database query from the client side without reloading the web page Supported Compo All forms and controls Properties nents Enabled Name Expression Domain Criteria Connection Convert result to Start event Target Name Type Of Target Control Property Specifies whether the feature is active User assigned name identifying the feature within HTML Field or expression to be used in the SELECT clause of the SQL statement to be executed Table or view name to be used in the FROM clause of the SQL statement to be executed Criteria to be used in the WHERE clause of the SQL statement to be executed Connection from which the database value will be retrieved Data type to which the retrieved value should be converted The type specified must comply with the nature of the value to be retrieved i e a string cannot be converted to an integer The possible data types are Text Integer Float Date Boolean and Memo Client event or condition that starts the execution Name of the variable which will receive the retrieved database value Type of variable which will receive the retrieved database value Control variable express
227. cleld sql strSQL gt Article title lt cfoutout gt queryArticleld article_title lt cfoutout gt lt End RemoteCustomCode1 Displaying gt 432 server code Java RemoteCustomCode Displaying 8 CF03A764 public void remoteCustomCodeDisplaying HitpServietRequest request HttpServietResponse response ServietContext context try JDBCConnection conn JDBCConnectionFactory getJDBCConnection InternetDB String SQL 5 SELECT article_title FROM articles WHERE article _id conn toSgql request getParameter article_id JDBCConnection INTEGER DbRow row conn getOneRow SQL response getWriter print Article title Utils convertToSitring row get article_title conn closeConnection catch Exception e do something meaningful here System out printin Exception e toString End RemoteCustomCode Displaying server code C InMotion RemoteCustomCode RemoteCustomCode1 Displaying 4 2A29BDB7 try Connection conn InMotion Configuration ApoConfig GetConnection InternetDB DataCommand command DataCommand conn CreateCommand command MTCommandType MTCommandType Table command CommandText SELECT article_title FROM articles WHERE article_id article_id command Parameters Clear command Parameters Add new InMotion Data Sgq Parameter article_id DataType Integer command Parameters article_id Value parameters article_id ToString result Arti
228. connection Create Create a new database connection or select a sample Use one of the example databases provided with CodeCharge Studio as an database Internet Intranet alternative to selecting an existing database connection If this option is selected the database connection will be created automatically Internationalized Use translation resources in place of text Save builder options Preserve the options selected in the Builder for each step The options will be automatically pre selected the next time you use the Builder 412 Step 2 Configure Feature Data Source The following options are available when configuring the Autocomplete feature Data Source employees Value Field emp_name Layout Simple text list C List with description List with images and descriptions 413 Target The control to which the Autocomplete feature will be assigned to After the Autocomplete feature is Control designed an icon for the feature will appear under this control in the Project Explorer When text is entered in this control a list of items matching the user s entry will appear under the control For example if the Target control is employee name typing a will return a list of employee names that start with the letter a Data The table to be used to create an AJAX service that will be used at runtime to retrieve the list of matching Source records This is the source of th
229. control associated with a database field you select the field in the database explorer or properties pane then select the Display or the Input tab and then select the component type from the drop down menu next to the caption Display Control or Input Control For example suppose you have a text field called name and you want this displayed as a Link control whenever name is part of a Record form but you want this displayed as a Textbox control whenever you want name to appear on an editable grid So you would select name field from the database explorer or properties window then select Link for the Display Control and Textbox for the Input Control You can accomplish the same task manually but to do this requires running one of the form builders changing the properties of the controls on each form and then repeating this for every form in your project which is very tedious and difficult to manage The Data Dictionary allows you to define the default control properties for each field in your database keeping your changes in one location so they can be reused in the builders For example whenever you refer to an employee s name in the database you want the caption to read Employee Name where a name is displayed Display type control and Enter employee name where a user would normally enter an employee name Input type control You can create a data dictionary where both types of captions are defined
230. control is composed of the two components shown in the HTML code above The first component Link1_Src gt is the page to be linked to The second component Link1 is the text that will appear on the browser to represent the link Links are used extensively in grid forms where you can have a simple link to another page or a link with parameters that need to be passed to the linked page The Link parameters are specified in the Href Source property and depend on the Href Type property General Tab For Href Type property Page e The text inserted instead the second component and appearing in the browser is specified in the Static Text field For multilaguage projects the Translation can be selected by clicking on the near the field e You can select a page or enter the URL in the Static address field For Href Type property Database e Inthe Text from Database field you can select a database field which value will be displayed in the broser You can also specify the Static Text field e Inthe Address from Database you can select a database field which value will be used as a link Parameters Used to add edit the link parameters variables passed through a link to the target page Link parameters are name value pairs specified after question mark following link s target page name Each name value pair is separated from another using amp ampersand character Example resulting link passing two parameters id and edit could lo
231. cord form The preview portion of the window shows how the final form will look with the selected style Click on the Finish button to close the builder and generate the form 384 Web Report Builder Using the Report Builder The Report Builder creates a report that is based on a table or query Search filtering functionality can also be configured here To start the Report Builder select it from the Builders tab The Report Builder consists of the following nine steps Step 1 Specify a database connection and builder options Select or create a database connection from where the data shown in the Report will be retrieved You can select one of the existing database connections create a new connection or select one of the sample databases Internationalization option is also provided as described below Use an existing database Select previously configured database connection connection Create Create a new database connection Select a sample database Use one of the example databases provided with CodeCharge Studio as an Internet Intranet alternative to selecting an existing database connection If this option is selected the database connection will be created automatically Internationalized Create an internationalized version of the report by using resource translation keys in place of text Save builder options Preserve the options that you re selecting on steps 1 through 9 of the builder The options will be automatically
232. cord form that operates on single records an Editable Grid deals with multiple records at the same time This means that when the Editable Grid is submitted for update or delete operations the form submits multiple primary keys corresponding to the records that need to be updated or deleted The Where parameter for the Custom update or Custom delete properties cannot simply specify URL or Form parameter types as the source of the primary keys There is a special parameter type which is designed to deal with the multiple values submitted by an Editable Grid This is the DataSource Column parameter Type as shown in the screenshot below Whenever you specify a Custom Update or Custom Delete operation for an Editable Grid make sure that the Type of the source parameter is set to DataSource Column Note a Custom Insert operation simply inserts a new record into a table without the need for a where clause There is no need to specify input parameters for a Custom Insert operation however you must specify parameters with Custom Update and Custom Delete operations Web Calendar Description The Web Calendar component outputs data in a monthly calendar format This is best suited for presenting date specific information like events tasks and birthdays October 2005 SIMI TIW 3 j4 j5 10 11 12 17 18 19 24 25 25 31 October 2005 The calendar component can be configured to display several monthly blocks on a page as three 3
233. cript For example the server can include VBScript or JavaScript code within the HTML which can be loaded and executed by the browser to perform various tasks without contacting the server until a later stage However browsers don t have direct access to the database and cannot read or update the data without sending a request to the server DHTML therefore cannot be used by itself to create database enabled web applications It can be used to offload certain tasks from the server that can be performed by the client For example the validation of form field values can be performed entirely on the client side One negative aspect of using DHTML is the lack of standards among various browser types Some Web browsers may not be able to process specific DHTML pages or may display them differently Publishing Web Content You will need to publish content to your web site to be viewed on the web You can do this by copying the files you create to a specific location on your web server that is used specifically for web pages Each web server has a configuration screen or a file where you can specify the main disk folder that maps to the root of your web site The files placed in the folder or its subfolders automatically become available on the web For example if you copy a file Page html to the test sub folder on your web server this page should be accessible via a URL such as http www mydomain com test Page html where www mydomain com can be replac
234. ct e select or show the default style for the project Note once you have defined a default setting every page you create will have that style A default stylesheet may be assigned once you have selected a stylesheet in one of the builders e CodeCharge Studio will add a link to the default stylesheet at the top of every new page Once you have defined a default style you will always have some stylesheet added to your page even if you do not intend to use that stylesheet If you do not want a stylesheet comment out or delete the link at the top of your page or in your master page e change how the dynamic style assignment feature works This is the available features in the project settings Project settings x Project Styles Apricot Default Set default All Styles Security Groups y Dynamically modify Styles Advanged 175 Project Styles Add Replace Style Builder Remove Set default Rebuild Refresh List Dynamically modify styles Advanced Use Styles Themes The list of styles assigned to the project Listed styles will be published to the web server and available for both static and dynamic use Add a new style to the style list so that it can be published to the web server with your project Styles are added into the project automatically when first used however this option is especially useful when utilizing dynamic styles since you can add any number styles t
235. ct users with insufficient privileges to the Login page 81 Specifying the Files to Publish In addition to specifying the local or remote FTP publishing settings you can also indicate which types of files you want to publish to the Web server Project Files code This is the default and recommended option for publishing It copies to the web server all file template and database files All files with extensions All files excluding extensions Project settings types that are commonly used by web applications For example in case of PHP these files are ohp PHP programs html templates js JavaScript gif and jog images and css cascading style sheets And if you store your MS Access database mdb in the project folder it will be copied to the web server as well This is also the fastest publishing option This option can be used to publish files with specified extensions for example if you utilize custom file extensions in your project and want to publish them Note this publishing option works slower than the publishing Project Files option since CodeCharge Studio needs to search the project folder for all specified file extensions This option can be used to publish all files but exclude files with specific extensions For example to avoid copying MS Access databases to the server each time the project is published Note this publishing option works slower than the publishing Project Files option
236. cting locale selection attributes are specified the higher positioned attributes will override those positioned below them in the order shown in the above dialog For example the URL locale parameter will override the locale specified in the session variable cookie or HT TP Header Specifying Locale Settings The locale language and country settings are specified when adding a new locale or editing an existing one from the Locales and Encoding configuration dialog The Add Edit Language dialog shown allows you to specify the following attributes Language Language associated with a set of translations characters and rules for presenting information in a localized format Country Country that further defines the locale or region and is associated with a set of translations resource file This is optional and if a country is not specified the associated resource file will be used as the default for the current language Country Country that defines the date boolean and numeric formatting This option is needed only as a Formats default when the Country is not specified If a user selects a language without a country the values can be displayed in these default formats Output Character encoding associated with text translations specific to the selected Language and Encoding Country The Output Encoding overrides the HTML encoding specified via the META tag Locale ID String that activates the selected locale Language and Country at
237. curity Groups This table contains a list of all the security groups that registered users can belong to Group ID The ID of the security group This also serves as the level of the group Group Name The descriptive name for the security group Higher Level Inclusive If this option is selected users with higher level security groups will be able to access of Lower Levels pages with lower security levels e g a user in security group 3 will be able to access pages with security levels 2 or 1 but not 4 Add Click this button to add a new security group Modify Click this button to modify an existing security group Remove Click this button to remove an existing security group a Application Builder z Project User Table users Gy Connection User ID Field user_id Login Field user_login Options Password Field userpassword Level Group Field group_id E Tiie rre petaj Security Groups z Group ID Group Name miiir E F C te TEE 2 Admin cn S W Higher Level Inclusive of Lower Levels Click Next to proceed to step 5 299 Step 5 Selecting Database Table and Field Settings In this step you select the tables in the database that you want to create pages for Available This is a list of the tables available in the database tables Selected This is a list of the tables you have selected and will be able to create pages with forms bas
238. current day Week separator Highlight weekends lv Show event captions lv Show event time Include No Events section Click Next to proceed to step 4 319 Step 4 Navigation type Navigation Type of navigation that you d like to include for users to navigate through calendar periods Several standard navigation types are available plus Custom which can be configured with more specific options es Calendar builder No Calendar Navigator Oy Connection Cae gt gt A Data Source lt lt 3010 gt gt C lt lt 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 gt gt lt lt 2010 gt gt C Custom Modify Click Next to proceed to step 5 Step 5 Select a style Select one of the existing styles that you d like to apply to your calendar or click Style Builder to modify an existing style or create a new one You can also select No Style if you don t want to use any style at all 320 Directory Builder The Directory Builder allows you to build multi level category trees The Category List can be displayed in two or more columns To begin the process of creating a Directory component click on the Directory Builder option in Builders tab Step 1 Selecting a Data Source Select or create a database connection from where the data shown in the directory will be retrieved You can select one of the existing database connections create a new connection or select one of the sample databases
239. custom code rather that manually editing the generated code Using events ensures that CodeCharge Studio can still update the code automatically when changes are made to the page In the rare event that you have to change the generated code you should clearly make a note of the change made for the sake of future maintenance Note You can revert to the originally generated code by deleting all the code then closing and opening the page This will cause CodeCharge Studio to re generate all the original code for the page without the changes that were made manually Within the source code you will also notice that the blocks of code usually have a comment line containing some value beginning with the ampersand symbol e g 1 5EF49D21 These comment lines should not be altered or removed since they aid in the placement of events at specific points within the code 166 Using the AutoComplete Options AutoComplete options provide quick access to valid member functions or variables including global variables by means of the Members list Selecting a member from the list inserts it into your code You can also use AutoComplete to view function declarations and variable type information By default AutoComplete is turned on However you can turn it off when needed The following list is a summary of each AutoComplete option Members List Members List displays a list of valid member variables or functions for the selected class or structure Sel
240. d Form Events Form Title Input Add Edit Employees Report Events Columns properties Database Column Data Type Display Input Display Contn Label vents Caption Emp ld Default Value Format Content DEBFonnat 10 Display Control Type of control The Data Dictionary complements the form builders When you run one of the form builders such as the Grid builder the builder uses a set of default controls and control properties to build the forms There are two categories of controls that the builder chooses from depending on the type of the forms generated by the builder Input controls are components that are typically used to build forms that display data Display controls are components that are typically used to build forms for displaying and editing data For example the Record builder builds a form for inserting or modifying records in the database so this type of builder uses the Input categories of controls for building the form The Grid builder on the otherhand is used to display records of the database so this builder uses the Display category of controls You can customize the way the builder creates forms by changing the control properties for each type of control but note the category of control you select affects different builders Some components are Input type of controls but you ll notice that the components for Display controls are also a subset of the Input controls To change the
241. d View Sorter Q abl 4 Fg 01 02 Slider Navigator a4 Dialog Panel Tabbed Tab e A E 123 Numeric Up Down E Dialog Panel 4f Tabbed Tab ap EHH AN Up D anel pe nclude abe in nline Date Panel Pa Includ Label Link Text a inline Dat iw PlaceHolder page Path Box Ow Picker Fopup Date Picker Components Controls Additional 3 Default 0 Header x t3 Search Add Template Panel HTML Template from file MenuTemplate ccp hi Ea Select PlaceHolder We are not quite done with this You may notice in the preview window that the links appear vertically instead of horizontally across the page If you look at the menu template the menu is described as an unordered list but we haven t defined the links as line items so it is unlikely the menu will be formatted correctly We need to change the links to line items and preview the window again 143 lt li gt lt a href home link S5rc gt thome 1l ink lt a gt lt 1i gt lt li gt lt a href newthread link 5rc gt newthread link lt a gt lt 1i gt tf B Fo fa In the master page there is a placeholder called sidebar1 We want to put the Search form in this sidebar and then use the Block Template in the design to format this block Select the Sidebar1 panel in the default page and add a reference to the include page Search Find and navigate to the include page Search Like you did
242. d in the document window Find what Replace with Match whole word only Match case Regular Expression Replace In Find Next Replace Replace All Cancel Enter the text or regular expression to search for Enter the text which will be used as the replacement text Perform a search for whole words as opposed to parts of larger words Perform a search which distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters Activate this checkbox if the text entered in the Find what field is a regular expression Selection This option is available if there is some highlighted text in which case the replacement is restricted within the highlighted text Whole File The find and replace is performed for the contents of the entire file Find the next occurrence of the text to be replaced Replaces the selected instance of the search criteria Replaces all instances of the search criteria Terminate the search and close the dialog box Replace es SC Match whole word only Replace In Replace All Match case Selection Regular expression Whole file Cancel Presenve case 181 Find In Files In addition to searches performed within a single document CodeCharge Studio makes it possible to search for text within multiple files To perform this type of search use the Edit Find and Replace Find In Files menu option to bring up the Find In Files dialog Find what Enter the text or regular expression to search for
243. d on a page to display and or accept information from users such as login information or user data Forms usually perform a specific task via a group of controls which are its child components Example forms are Grid Record Editable Grid and Directory Object A representation of a component such as form or control within the generated programs Objects often have properties methods and events that can be used to alter its behavior or execute custom programming functions Page A web page that holds components forms and controls and is used to present information to a user via a web browser or to accept and process user data CodeCharge Studio creates one Program for each Page Multiple pages make up the web application Pages are executed in one of the two following modes HTML Output mode Parses HTML Template and shows resultant HTML output Data Processing mode Receives Data submitted via form or URL and processes it accordingly Generated Pages consist of the following sections in execution order Include Common Files Common files are loaded and included into the page Initialize Page Variables Variables events connections and controls are defined and initialized Initial values are assigned to variables Authenticate User Pages with User authentication is performed Unauthorized users are redirected to the Restricted access only Access Denied page Initialize Objects Database Connection objects page controls and e
244. d that specifies the group to which each user belongs The group ID s are setup in a hierarchical manner such that users with a higher group ID have more security clearance than users with a lower ID If this is the case you can check the Higher Level Inclusive of Lower Levels checkbox so that users with a higher group ID can access all the pages that are accessible by users with a lower group ID You can uncheck the Higher Level Inclusive of Lower Levels checkbox if you want each group ID to be strictly allowed to access pages designated for that group only In this case a user with a group ID such as 3 will not be able to access a page designated for any other group ID Project settings Group Name Liser Manager Administrator Page Level Security You can specify the users who are allowed to access a page by using the Restricted property of the page in the page Properties window When the Restricted property is set to No all users can access the page without having to login If the Restricted property is set to Yes you can click next to the property to further specify the groups that are allowed to access the page The Page Security Groups window shows the various groups that are currently setup and allows you to specify which groups should be able to access the page For instance users belonging to the Admin group can access the page but not users belonging to the User group You can also click on the Groups button to a
245. d_link Search Forum Messages Topic w Author w Date Added w Error Pictures embeded in Email Rocky Ang 19 01 2001 17 37 24 Message CF Custom Tag directory Michael 19 01 2001 17 18 28 Author writing db results to multiple pages shiaislamasp 04 01 2001 19 56 52 Clear en amp error message in DB MSG seopo 04 01 2001 11 28 41 E Search whatis this error Itworks on my iis feiyeung 04 01 2001 5 02 30 E E ViewThread dynamic queries vpl 03 01 2001 3 21 26 i Diagrams tig Connections No records Page Number Page_Number of 1 Q O o Resources Common Files Cut and paste the include page header from the Content panel to the Menu panel The design we are using includes a placeholder on the master page called Menu and a master template called MenuTemplate The header contains a list of hyperlinks we want to create a menu from To do this we want to apply the MenuTemplate to the header Select the Forms tab on the ribbon bar then navigate to the include page Header and mark amp select the hyperlinks in the page Select the Template Panel icon on the ribbon bar select the MenuTemplate and then Menultems for the placeholder This will create a template panel with two subpanels one for the menu title and one for the menu items This will also move the hyperlinks to the menu items panel Cl Cy update Panel Tabbe
246. dated You must select a target property that is consistent with the type of HTML control that is rendered e g for a Label you would typically select innerHTML For a textbox you would normally select value For an image control you would normally select src Not all of the possible properties are listed here If you need to specify a different property then just enter the name of the property in the table However the name you enter must be exactly the name of an HTML property and the property you select must be consistent with the HTML control AJAX Dependent Listboxes Builder The Dependent Listboxes Builder simplifies the process of adding a Dependent Listboxes feature to your forms To invoke the Dependent Listboxes Builder select the Builders tab at the top of the Toolbox ribbon bar Home Data Dictionary Builders Forms Edit oe SA Master Detail re A fil Search 45 Authentication 5 Editable Grid 5 Gallery ae Service Record Report Calendar Menu al Grid and Record Directory View amp Edit Components Step 1 Choose a database connection and builder options Autocomplete Builder f Use an existing database connection InternetDB Create i settings or select a sample database Internet Database C Intranet Database Internationalized use translation resources res i Save builder options Use an existing database Select a pr
247. dd new groups Data Events Format General Attributes Access Denied Page Convert URL To None Includable No SSL Access Only No Enable Caching No Master Page ASP NET C InMotion Framework Validate Request True Scripting Support Automatic 90 Form Level Security Apart from setting security at the page level you can also set form level security This is done using the Restricted property of the form Click next to the Restricted property to set the groups that should be allowed to access the form The extent to which the groups can be configured depends on the type of form In the case of record forms you can set group access based on the different operations that can be performed in a record form The four operations are Read Insert Update and Delete A group with Full access is able to perform all the four operations When setting security at the form or the page level note that giving access to all groups is not the same as not setting any security at all If all groups have access each member of any of the groups is still required to login This means that people who are not registered in the database will not be able to access the form or page Data Events Format Connection IntranetDB Data Source Type Table Data Source tasks Return Page Remove Parameters Convert URL To None No Allow Insert Yes Allow Update Yes Allow Delete Yes Preserve Parameters GET Specify if the Security Access Group
248. deCharge Studio provides developers with all the functionality necessary to create powerful scalable and secure web applications rapidly Developers can focus on programming the essential business logic behind the application rather than the core application framework This group of users consists of corporate developers consulting companies and individual programmers and consultants Database Developers Database developers who are comfortable with visual database and application design tools will appreciate the natural data centric nature of CodeCharge Studio Microsoft Access programmers will especially find the CodeCharge Studio interface strikingly familiar Legacy Programmers Sophisticated and advanced system architects are often not familiar with web application development Visual Studio or other Windows programming environments are often too complex and do not offer an easy way to understand Web application development CodeCharge Studio simplifies and accelerates the process of web application development through a variety of features including drag and drop components application builders and pre built business solutions Webmasters and Designers Webmasters and designers are realizing the benefits and need for storing web content in databases especially when faced with the prospect of maintaining hundreds of web pages They are often expected to produce dynamic content such as an employee directory or portal for their company Code
249. der ri Debete E settings 2 Publishing Settings Project Page Page Contre Pages Propect Publishing Tools Project Explorer x i ages_list x X Properties IX ages tn ae _ Access Denied Page Error Includable No Mame is _age name i Sal Access Oah Wo l Search Enable Caching Ne ii i i Master Page CCS PathTobtazterk List of Ages Marni _ Name hae fage id age fame si q F Design HTML Code Preview Live Page haessages DX Gey Project Ex PD Fies Explo For Help press FI Code Generation Engine CodeCharge Studio users create web applications by connecting to a database and placing data aware forms and components on a page During the page design process the representation of the project and all of its pages is saved in XML format in addition to HTML code that contains the page design ASPNEI LF ASL ASP Code Generation JS5P amp Serviet Engine PHP Perl 3 UML Site Diagrams Test Cases Sample Databases Several sample databases and applications are provided with the distribution to help you get started with CodeCharge Studio 16 Editable Grid The Editable Grid component enables the editing of multiple records simultaneously It allows to create order processing inventory management shopping cart or any other ERP type system whose integral functionality involves the manipulation of multiple records WII g punn iih a a a
250. development environment IDE to enable developers to create powerful and sophisticated web applications in record time CodeCharge Studio features powerful HTML and code editors an HTML design component project explorer property browser dockable tool windows and many other features desired by professional developers Bey b x ule fe se f i w i B j Conmections 2 l i Form and Component Builders Component Builders are key constituents of CodeCharge Studio and help users assemble Web pages from multiple components such as Grid Editable Grid Record Directory Login or Search A Builder is a dynamic wizard that creates the appropriate component on the page by allowing the developer to specify the database table and fields that are used to display validate or accept information SECC C iret i TEE f 10 Visual Query Builder Developers can easily select tables and stored procedures or custom SQL as the data source for their data aware forms A Visual Query Builder is provided for visual creation of SQL statements Fields for the Grid g pE pn ra CA Search bm i Z3 Layout Directory Categorie Fy SOWING a Navigation 11 Security Management Role based Access Control CodeCharge Studio goes the extra mile in protecting generated Web applications by implementing additional security featur
251. e i Width 400 px Series Height 300 px Display Chart title Chart Title V Legend Values W Grid lines X Axis Label Direction Horizontal or Vertical Auto Horizontal or 45 degrees Auto Vertical 45 degrees Data separators in Database Decimal Group Data separators in Chart Decimal Size Desired size of the chart in pixels Specify both width and height Chart title Title to be shown at the top of the chart Legend Specify whether to display the legend for data series Y axis Values Specify whether to label chart values Grid lines Specify whether to display grid lines X Axis Label Direction Direction of labels shown below the chart X axis 336 Layout Select where and how the chart legend should be displayed EJ add Modify Flash Chart Add Modify Flash Chart Select Chart type b Data Source ul Type fi Series i Options 337 Style Select chart style which controls the colors fonts animations and other visual attributes associated with the chart Styles can be reused across multiple charts You can also create custom chart styles and modify them via the built in Flash Chart Style Builder Select an available style and click Modify to access this feature PJ Add Modify Flash Chart Add Modify Flash Chart Select a Style for the Chart Data Source Standard A Series Chast Title Bright 338 Flash Chart Style Builder Flash Chart Style Builder provides gl
252. e This is part of the database configuration Boolean Format This property specifies the format of boolean types expected in the database This is part of the database configuration Use LIMIT TOP This option specifies whether or not the LIMIT or TOP clauses should be used to limit amount of data returned from SQL queries You should use this option when you have large tables and your queries typically return a large number of rows Same as Design Use the same Connection Settings specified in the Design Tab Your server database connections will use the same database connection configuration you specified for design side connections Use ODBC Data Source Name This option should be selected if the connection to the database will be through ODBC Using the list box field you can select one of the ODBC DSN s that is currently registered on the machine Alternatively you can create a new ODBC DSN by clicking on the New button Use Connection String This option specifies a connection string that contains the details necessary to make a connection to the database Some of the details included in the connection string are database driver to be used location of the database file and the username and password needed to connect to the database If you are an experienced user you can simply type in the proper connection string into the provided field However most people would find it necessary to click the Build button and use the Data Link Prop
253. e Identifier LCID that specifies a location according to which the dates times and currencies are formatted Charset The name of character encoding for example ISO LATIN 7 output by the application which will be appended to the Content Type header during HTTP transmission File Upload The type of a file upload component to be used on pages that support file upload functionality Component Email Component The type of component to be used for sending emails include type Whether common files will be included via absolute virtual paths or paths relative to the server s root Template Folder The location where HTML templates should be placed on the server relative to the project folder CKeditor Base The path to the CKeditor installation folder on the server absolute starting with or relative to Path the project folder For example CKeditor or CKeditor 83 PHP4 PHP5 with Templates Code File Extension Encode Extension Defines the file extension that will be used for generated pages It should be set to the same value as the file extension defined within the web server for the selected programming language for example php for the PHP language Specifies the module used for character encoding conversion Improved HTTP Caching Enables or disables the improved caching If set to Yes the application will remove any Charset Output File Format PHP Version Template Folder CKeditor Base Path HTTP headers t
254. e Query by Example QBE interface in the Visual Query Builder With these types of queries you do not have to know SQL since CodeCharge Studio generates the specific SQL syntax based on the tables and fields you have selected for the query If you wish to see the generated SQL statement select the SQL tab at the bottom of the window You cannot edit a generated SQL query SQL queries This is a query you enter directly as text into the query builder You can either change a generated query to a custom query and modify the query or enter a new query directly into the editor By default the query type is table When you convert a table type query the query builder will prompt you to rebuild the query This is the same as requesting the query builder to replace any custom definition of the query with a new generated query based on the table and field definitions Once you have created a custom query you cannot change the type back to table Stored procedure This is a query that is invoked thru a stored procedure See Form Data Source for more details about creating queries and the visual query builder 404 Data Dictionary Property Editor You work with the property editor by selecting tables and fields To open the property editor double click on a table or field in the database explorer Table properties Form Title Display List of Employees ard Events Record Form Events Form Title Input Add Edit Employees Rep
255. e URL for example to specify French use locale fr A sample URL may look like www website com page1 php locale fr The locale URL parameter automatically sets the session variable and cookie if you select to use them as well This allows you to create a single URL that activates specific locale that is then preserved for the duration of the session and or the cookie Session variable The locale can be specified by the session variable locale For example setting the session variable s value to fr will activate the French locale The session variable will be set automatically when the locale URL parameter activates a specific locale The same session variable may also be used to select locale specific content from the database using session based WHERE parameter or stored procedure parameter Cookie A locale can also be saved in a user cookie so that visitors coming back to a web site can view it in the locale that they last selected If enabled the cookie will be set automatically when the language URL parameter activates a specific language HTTP Header Accept Language This is the default language preference automatically provided by Web browsers The locale willbe selected automatically when your Web application detects an acceptable locale selection in the HIT TP header sent to the server by a Web browser For more information please refer to HI TP Accept Language Note The variable names that set the active locale can be customi
256. e a master page from your content page by either deleting and setting the property to blank or right click on the page in Design or HTML mode and select remove design from this page Removing the master page has the reverse effect of applying the master page That is the panels such as head content etc are removed from the page and the content in each panel is moved back to the content page One other thing takes place when you apply a design to a page Normally when you create a CodeCharge Studio page the initial HTML generated is based on a template which you can change in your project settings that contains the basic amount of code to render a web page It contains a lt body gt section a lt head gt section and other declarations When you add content e g a grid form CodeCharge Studio generates other HTML in conjunction with the components it adds to the page When you apply a design to a page the HTML changes Now instead of the standard HTML declarations there are template blocks that mark off where the content panels exist on the page lt BEGIN Panel content gt lt p gt Hello World lt p gt lt END Panel content gt lt BEGIN Panel head gt lt meta name GENERATOR content CodeCharge Studio 5 0 0 0 gt lt END Panel head gt If you have any special code that was part of your HTML template you may need to add or move this code to your master page 135 Master Page Property amp C
257. e content Show Confirm Dialog A dialog appears asking the user to confirm the deletion of components that were not found on the page Delete by default Any components not found on the page are automatically deleted Don t Delete by Default Components are not deleted from the page even if they are not found in the page code Use Message Message window will also be used to display synchronization warnings Window Design Editor The design editor settings provide basic information for the functional features of the design editor Design Editor Settings Show All Tags Line Break and Paragraphs Breaks will be shown using icons Show Borders A border will be shown around all HTML tables in Design mode Delay before displaying tag or Set the amount of time to wait before switching the Properties window to the component in Properties currently selected control Window seconds Horizontal spacing While in design mode the document window has an imaginary snap to grid that can be used to position elements on the page using the Positioning toolbar Use this option to specify how far apart the grid lines should be horizontally Vertical spacing How far apart the lines of the snap to grid should be vertically 67 HTML Formatting The HTML formatting settings provide basic information for formatting of HTML within the editor HTML Formatting Settings Indent Type Indent Margin Break within tags Break between tags Attribute nam
258. e data used in the presentation to the user A query can be created in place of a table by clicking the Build Query button which opens the Visual Query Builder Value The database field to be searched for the text entered in the Target control This field is usually the Field same as the control source of the Target Control field The Target control and the Value field should be consistent but the text matching is ignorant of the content e g if the Target control is employee name but the Value field is e mail addresses typing a in the employee name textbox will display a list of e mail addresses that begin with the letter a Layout Select how the Autocomplete list should be displayed Built in three variants Value Value Value Text 1 Text 1 r Text 1 E 9 description description Text 3 m aldini description ipti Text 4 Text 3 m _ lext 3 Text 5 a E a description description 414 AJAX Autofill Builder The Autofill Builder simplifies the process of adding an Autofill feature to your forms To invoke the Autofill Builder select the Builders tab at the top of the Toolbox ribbon bar Home Data Dictionary Builders Forms Edit A e x Ti Ae js EA A 2 Master Detail Pen Ai fga Search f 35 Authentication eis E 3 EME ae 5 Editable Grid fas Gallery we Service Record Report Calendar Menu Dependent Grid and Record Directory ListBoxes View amp Edit Components
259. e employees gt department_name group name FROM employees WHERE department_id dept_id where dept_id is an URL parameter that will be submitted from the Department grid The default value if parameter is missing should be 1 i e display the employees only when a department has been selected Al Columns All Column vV emp_id emp_id group _id v emp_login emp_login group_name v emp _password emp pas emp name emp_name v group_id group id m i department_id departme All Columns department_id v email email department_narme department_manager_id v picture picture v phone_home phone_hor phone work phone work Y Rearrange the fields selected in the builder until the order and number of fields matches the Employee List form at the top of this section department_name group _ name emp_name emp _login emp password title email phone_home phone_work phone cell Change the captions for department_name and group name to Department and Group Notice that the control generated for department_name is a Link control This is because we configured it this way in the data dictionary so the control type would be correct in the Department List form In Design mode select this control and change the control type to Label It is not necessary to change any properties but this change is very important without it your application will likely fail e g compilat
260. e following is an example of an fully qualified URL lt img src http www mysite com images logo gif gt If an includable page is used in multiple folders and the page contains manually created links the URL s should be absolute or you should have local copies of the includable page in the folder where the page is included Using Master Pages Master pages allow you to create a consistent layout and styling for the pages in your application Master pages are important because you can design the layout and formatting of various content sections in one page then apply the same styling to separate content pages in your web project instead of designing each web page separately When users request the content pages the pages are merged with a master page to produce output that combines the layout of the master page with the content from the content page The built in Artisteer designs that are installed with CodeCharge Studio are a good example of master pages and how they work You can find these designs in your installation folder under the designs folder See Using Artisteer Designs for more details about using designs Master pages and master templates described below use panels to structure the content and map the content to the template Any panel that is mapped to a placeholder is a content panel When you apply a design the content of your page is moved to a content panel which is mapped to a placeholder on the master page With
261. e gt lt init param gt lt init param gt lt param name gt DeniedExtensionslmage lt param name gt lt param value gt lt param value gt lt init param gt lt init param gt lt param name gt AllowedExtensionsFlash lt param name gt lt param value gt sw f fla lt param value gt lt init param gt lt init param gt lt param name gt DeniedExtensionsFlash lt param name gt lt param value gt lt param value gt lt init param gt lt load on startup gt 3 lt load on startup gt lt servlet gt lt serviet mapping gt lt servlet name gt Connector lt servlet name gt lt url pattern gt lt C KBase gt editor filemanager browser default connectors sp connector lt url pattern gt lt serviet mapping gt lt serviet mapping gt lt servlet name gt SimpleUploader lt serviet name gt lt url pattern gt lt C KBase gt editor filemanager upload simpleuploader lt url pattern gt lt serviet mapping gt File Upload Overview Description The File Upload component is used to upload files from a remote machine to a specified location on the Web server The component can be used to allow users to upload files to the server for example The component uses an input control of type file lt input type file gt which enables the end user to browse and select files on their local machine for uploading When a file is selected and submitted for uploading the File Upload component checks that the file size does not exceed a specified
262. e in database When this option is selected the builder will create a form with all related functionality including certain actions assigned to events You can also manually configure a pre existing user registration or user maintenance form to support password encryption To do so use the Record Builder with the password encryption option turned on and analyze how the page and events are structured Here are a few things to watch for New User Registration Forms Insert mode only The Encrypt Password action is assigned to the Before Execute Insert event when using database function for encryption or Before Build Insert event when using code expression for encryption User Maintenance or Password Change forms Insert and Update modes Hidden field called Shadow control is created to preserve the value of the original password retrieved from the database The Preserve Password action is assigned to the Before Show event to copy the password value from the password field to the Shadow control and to reset the password field to the default value specified in action properties The Encrypt Password action is assigned to the Before Execute Insert and Before Execute Update events when using database function for encryption or Before Build Insert and Before Build Update events when using code expression for encryption Encrypting existing passwords in a database lf your database already contains plain text passwords you can convert t
263. e in your project settings you can decide which of these translation files are used to render your web pages when the page is requested When you create a new project CodeCharge Studio will copy one of these files corresponding to your default language to your project folder e g English en txt When you add translations strings to your project your strings and the resource keys are appended to this file You can add or remove languages to your project thru your project settings To add a language go into your project settings select the Locales amp Encodings option then Add to add a new site locale This will copy and include the translation file e g French fr txt to your project 189 The default locale is the language currently in use when you build your page You can change the default locale at any time Your project can have multiple language translations translation files When you add or modify a translation key you can select from or define the translation in any of the languages that you have added to your project e g English amp French When your project is published a copy of your translation files are published with your web pages Which translation file is selected when your page is rendered depends on how your web page is requested from the server Select a Locale You should make sure before you publish your project that you have the same set of translations in every language file unless you want spe
264. e large amounts of data This is why web applications often run faster than applications based on fat clients Platform Independence Most web applications can be accessed through a variety of web browsers like Internet Explorer Firefox Netscape Navigator Opera and Lynx Web browsers exist for virtually any operating system Since they receive only the HTML document it is irrelevant if the document is being viewed on Windows Linux UNIX Mac or any other system Additionally certain web applications are accessible through wireless devices equipped with a browser and Internet connection Usage Accounting Developers can find out how many times the web application is accessed something which may not be possible when distributing standalone applications to customers The vendor can also offer a per usage fee structure 36 Challenges Encountered Using Web Technologies Although it has many benefits the Web also carries certain challenges Limited Interactivity Interactivity is limited since a web page cannot communicate with the server in real time except when the page is submitted to the server by the user For example if a program needs to populate a particular list box field it needs to refresh the whole page when the user reaches a particular field on the screen Lack of Skills The web is still foreign to many developers who have been busy developing mainframe client server and standalone applications These developers are oft
265. e location of your FTP server which can be identified by the domain name or IP address for example ftp codecharge com or ftp 123 123 123 123 etc This is the relative folder on your FTP server where the published files should be placed This path can start with a if your FTP server logs you in at the root folder or if you are aware that the path should start at the FTP server s root The username to be used to login to the FTP server The password corresponding to the user login name used to login to the FTP server This is the web address corresponding to the Server Path This URL will be used to view the page in Live Page mode By default local web servers can be accessed using the URL http localhost therefore the Server URL for your project should be lt http localhost MyProject gt You can also use the IP address of your computer such as hitp 68 100 100 100 MyProject or the domain name like http mydomain com My Project When this option is checked CodeCharge Studio will utilize the SSH protocol rather than standard FTP to publish files to remote location You can also specify the port number by adding it to the server name after a colon for example myserver com 22 Defines if CCS should connect to the server using the passive mode which is useful when the developer s machine is behind a firewall and can t access the server directly The Server URL parameter is also used in the generated programs for example to redire
266. e next step is to make the connection within CodeCharge Studio Note that you are not limited to a single database but can use multiple databases within the same project Database Connections Within CodeCharge Studio a connection is a link to a database for the purpose of creating pages based on the structure and contents of the database The majority of the forms and field controls used within CodeCharge Studio draw their content from database fields CodeCharge Studio uses database connections for two major purposes a design side connection is used for designing pages within CodeCharge Studio and a server side connection is used by the generated pages to communicate with the database The design connection is the connection that CodeCharge Studio uses to communicate with the database For example the Application Builder in CodeCharge Studio connects to the database and then automatically creates a set of Web pages that are based on your database tables and fields The most common design time techniques of connecting to a database include ODBC DSN and JET The server side connection is used by the generated pages to communicate with the database Often times the design connection is the same as the server side connection However various situations warrant the use of a server side connection that is different from the design connection This is usually the case when remote database access is undesired or not allowed For example if you use PHP
267. e or removed if not needed lt BEGIN Error gt lt tr gt lt td colspan 2 class KnockoutDataTD gt Error lt td gt lt tr gt lt END Error gt 28 Templated Technologies The methodology utilized by CodeCharge Studio to separate programming code from HTML CodeCharge Studio generates two versions of most of the languages it works with Templated such as PHP amp Tlemplates or ASP amp Templates where generated programs utilize templates Non Templated such as PHP or ASP where HTML is embedded within generated programs The main difference between the two is that Templated technologies utilize HTML templates during both the design time and run time while Non templated technologies utilize HTML templates only during the design time A Developer may switch between Templated or Non templated technologies at any point during design of his web application The only difference will be in the generated code where for example generating ASP amp Templates would result in 2 files an asp program and an html template while generating ASP would result in generating single asp program file Query string Query string is a string containing variable names and their values It is commonly used to pass some input variables to a page by appending the string to the page s address Query strings are unique to Web applications versus client server and other forms of software applications because Web applications are stateles
268. e providers installed on the development machine Login username used for Source Control interactions Displays dialog to setup provider specific options The latest version of the project files is retrieved upon opening the project Project s files are automatically checked in when closing the project Decides whether prompt is displayed to add any new project files to the repository they will be added automatically when unchecked Displays dialog to select files for Get Latest Version operation Displays dialog to select files for Check Out operation Displays dialog to select files for Check In operation Displays dialog to select files for Undo Checkout operation Automatically adds any new projects created with CCS to the repository Preserves files locked for editing after checking them in omits files changed during generation to the repository 120 Tools Options Source Control dialog CVS Plugin CodeCharge Studio integrates with CVS using separate non SCC API plug in The selection of options available for this Source Control provider is slightly different and different wording is used to match CVS concepts CodeCharge Studio uses cvs exe executable to run CVS commands and the full path to this file needs to be provided Selecting the Prompt option will display file selection dialog that includes files falling into the operation requested by user This includes files composing a page or files wit
269. e search criteria and the grid or record form displays the retrieved records that match the search criteria The Search Builder can create complex search forms that determine the number of records to be displayed per page the order the records are displayed and the SQL operator to be used to perform the search To begin the process of creating a search form click on the Search Builder option in Builders tab Step 1 Selecting a Database Connection Select or create the database connection for the search You can select one of the existing database connections create a new connection or select one of the sample databases Use an existing database Select previously configured database connection connection Create Create a new database connection or select a sample database Use one of the example databases provided with CodeCharge Studio as an Internet Intranet alternative to selecting an existing database connection If this option is selected the database connection will be created automatically Internationalized Create internationalized version by using resource translation keys in place of text Save builder options Preserve the options selected in steps 1 through 4 of the builder The options will be automatically pre selected the next time you use the Search Builder ra ha Search Builder _ Use an existing database connection IntranetDB Create Search A or select a sample database Page
270. e site after Builder completes creating pages M Internationalized use translation resources res 3 M Save builder options Display buttons as Buttons E Standalone Menu Page Horizontal Menu Header Co Vertical Menu Header amp Footer 297 There are a number of options that will determine how the builder will generate the finished pages Enable smart naming Autoincremented primary keys Use single keyword field for text and memo fields on Search Publish the site after Builder completes creating pages Menu position No Menu Standalone Menu Page Horizontal Menu Header Vertical Menu Header amp Footer With this option selected the Builder will generate English like captions for the database table and field names For example the grid form for a database table called employees will have a caption List of Employees Additionally fields with underscores in them will be converted to column captions without the underscore e g task_name will be shown as Task Name This option should be checked if the tables in your database have autoincremented primary keys With autoincremented primary keys new records are automatically assigned unique primary key values by the database when you insert a record therefore a SQL insert update should not attempt to modify this field Note that both of the sample databases have autoincremented primary keys Select this option if you want search forms
271. e supported and how to install and configure the ColdFusion engine on the web server Test the Web Server After installing the web server software and the ColdFusion engine you should run a test to make sure that the server is functioning properly Please refer to the ColdFusion server documentation which includes directions on how to test that the server is working correctly Setup Database Database connections in ColdFusion can be made using ODBC DSN s or data sources that are configured in the ColdFusion Administrator panel Create and Test a CodeCharge Project CodeCharge Studio comes with a number of example projects that you can easily generate and publish as a way of testing your setup Each of these examples comes with an Access database and a database script file that you can use to recreate the database Please refer to the section on the example solutions for detailed instructions on how to setup and use them You can also refer to the Quick Start section within the documentation for step by step instructions to create and publish your first web application and the section on deploying ColdFusion projects JSP Setup A common configuration for the development of Java applications Development Environment for the development and testing of applications A Windows desktop computer with an installation of CodeCharge Studio Local or remote MySQL database MyODBC driver Tomcat server JDK 1 3 or higher Ant build tool
272. e the report sections are shown as bands that represent section boundaries At run time certain report sections may be repeated several times and their position may be different from what s shown in CodeCharge Studio s design mode A typical report consists of the following sections Report Report_Header This section is output at the beginning of the report It usually contains the report name Header company logo and other general information like number of pages and user name Page Page Header Output at the top of each report page except the first page where it is placed below the Header Report Header section This section is commonly used for showing column headers and sorters Group Group Name Output at the beginning of each data group It is used to display data that is common to Header the group or detail sections that follow Detail Detail The main report section used for outputting each data row Section Group Group Name Output at the end of each data group It often displays group totals Footer Page Page Footer Output at the bottom of each report page It typically contains the Navigator component Footer for navigating pages in the Web output mode It can also contain the Panel named PageBreak which is a reserved panel name used for outputting page breaks in the print mode PageBreak panel is shown on all pages except the last one Report Report_ Footer Output at the end of the report It is often used to output repor
273. e to insert records you would set the Custom Insert Type property to Procedure then use the Custom Insert property to configure the procedure in a similar manner as was done using the Data Source property Similarly the other four properties can be used to configure stored procedures to update and delete records respectively 240 Note that a record or editable grid form can still have its Data Source property configured to use an ordinary table and yet have procedures for the insert update and delete operations This is because the Data Source property is different from the six properties mentioned above Essentially the Data Source property determines the means by which data will be retrieved to appear in the form while the other six properties mentioned above determine the means by which the data is manipulated depending on the operation Insert Update Delete Properties 1x Data Events Format InsertProjects Name InsertProjects Attributes Connection MSSOL Intranet Data Source Type Table Data Source projects Return Page Remove Parameters Convert URL To None Restricted Mo Allow Insert Yes Allow Update Yes Allow Delete Yes Preserve Parameters GET L Procedure Custom Insert InsertProject1 Custom Update Type Custom Update Cc ustom Delete Type Custom Delete Features Stored procedures can also be used to populate ListBox and Radiolist controls In this case the List Source Type property is se
274. e window and select Retry Server Busy x This action cannot be completed because the other program is busy Choose Switch To to activate the busy program and corect the problem ununnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 97 In the ODBC Data Source dialog select the System DSN tab and click Add to create the new data source You can also create User and File DSNs but a System DSN allows all users on the machine to use this DSN You are presented with a list of ODBC drivers as shown below that are currently installed on the local machine Scroll through the list to locate the driver for the database you intend to use Select the driver and click OK or Finish Add New Connection Design Advanced Serwer Connection Name Connectioni Database MS Access Connection Type ODBC InternetDB New User Name User Password The new connection will be added to all servers You may need to setup database connection settings to other servers 98 Depending on the driver you selected you may be required to enter additional information For an Access database driver you are presented with a window to specify the name of the DSN an optional description and the location of the Access database to be associated with the DSN ODEC Microsoft Access Setup Data Source Name CCS DNS Code Charge Studio DNS System Database 99 Creating an ODBC DSN for other databases such as MSSQL Oracle and Microsoft E
275. ead gt When this page is requested after it is published to the server CodeCharge Studio will replace the placeholders in the master page with the content from these panels and render the HTML to create a new page This example is very trivial because the master page doesn t include any styling but we could define the layout and formatting around the placeholder called content in the master page and have it apply to any content mapped to it in our web page For example we could change the font for the content placeholder like this lt font color blue size 12 gt content lt font gt title head 134 Creating a New Master Page You create a master page as you would any other CodeCharge Studio page Home Pages Blank page As mentioned before you need to add PlaceHolders Forms Components PlaceHolders to map your content panels to your template but otherwise the template should only be used to style the page i e not contain forms or controls etc Also you should follow these conventions when you create the page e Name your page masterpage and place it in a different folder from the rest of your pages Naming your page masterpage is important if you want to include your master page in the gallery of built in designs or other designs you have created with Artisteer e On your master page always include a placeholder called content and head Applying the master page moves the existing HTML from you
276. ealcuaueetouianieatavannthataumuaianatenuel sousatavamtel hawmarcunivanienanctusantardaututs 63 Customizing he WORKS aCe vara saci cech iso cecosad a a tS decay deste a a eae 66 Keyboard Accessibility ccccccssseecccceeeeceecceeeecececeeseceeecsuaueceeeeeaaececsuaaeeeeessuaaeeeesssaaeeeeesssaageeesseaas 70 PEE Tal SALOU EEEE sansa cae seo EEEE AE EET AEE EA EAE EEE ses cad PEE EEE EEE E E 72 WOKING WIE COLO CUS sarehaxetcsiehee necastunnch aut a Aa 73 oreatng a NEW IPrOlSC sieneen a A a ANAT AN 73 Adding New P ages ci csceaaccticat coc ete cs ae a a eae ee et N 74 DAVING a PTOJEC neues titi ae Ge ae a aoe Re eS Se ees 75 WOS OAC Cnet tcect ty seeateete tans a sacra tele natin tra Mate a aes tia ds cal Coat ulee ae te casi aalensiolaeieta te eeade 76 SPEGCIIVING Project SOI GS sniege e ae aa 77 Connec ng to Dalabas e Sasina a E E EEE E a 94 Source CONT OMIM Orato MN e iieiea aer eea er ar eienn 116 Multiple Directories within a Project ccccccccssececcesseeceseeeceeuseecceuseeessaeeecseueesseaseeessaneeessaneeesseaes 131 ADSOIUTS ANG RERE URES aaa r a Gale dan eee acne oan ciase oan eae 132 USING MasterPage iaeiei e ctanesuelwiettctciceatecudeshardculem bance a a 132 Usng Artisteer Design Sarenanann a a a a 146 SiG Form TEM ALCS aiarar e a a iene e a E 154 usma the Page Template serraria estan aaah ieanl oc geet wacemeeeccatvenielee 162 Working IM Desn ModE sacar sa falicess hits a a a a cea 163 Editing HTML Source Code
277. earch Title Search C Specify Search Results Grid Click Next to proceed to step 4 Step 4 Selecting a Style optional Select a style to be used to display the form Click Finish to close the builder and generate the search form 397 Using the Data Dictionary Changing Control Properties in the Data Dictionary Working Environment This section illustrates the main areas of the workspace you can use to change the component properties in the data dictionary The workspace consists of e Database Explorer The Database Explorer is used to view the database catalog and select those tables or fields you want to change e Property Editor The Property Editor is used to define the properties for the tables or fields you select in the Database Explorer The Property Editor is the document window that appears in the center portion of the workspace Database Explorer Database Explorer iX J products E projects E projects_employees E statuses tasks F task id l l l Le Le Le Le FA EA a i project_id prorty_id status_id type id task_name task_desc v userid assign by userid assign_to task_start_date task_finish_date types P user_events ro Views Queries fy Projec FA fiese F Datab 398 View of the Employees table in the Property Editor Table properties Form Title Display List of Employees Grd Events Recor
278. earch Fields Control Type Indicates your intention to create a search form Add autocomplete feature to every field The search form will have a list box that can be used to specify the number of records to be returned per page Specifies vertical or horizontal orientation of the search form Click this button to specify the advanced search option such as a submit method type and other provided options If the AND condition is selected the search form will contain an input control textbox or listbox for all selected database fields If the OR condition is selected the search form will include only one textbox control and a value entered into the textbox will be used to search against all selected database fields Alternatively you can choose the Advanced Search option which creates a single textbox while also automatically adding a listbox with search options so that users can specify whether they want to search for Any Words All Words or Exact Phrase These are the fields to be shown in the search form Refreshes the connection if you make changes to the database while using the builder Select a form field then click this button to move it upwards in the order of appearance Select a form field then click this button to move it downwards in the order of appearance Click this button to add it some fields to the form Select a form field then click this button to remove it from the form Opens the dialog with adv
279. eature of several servers see deployment scenarios below e unpacked The application will be published to folder unpacked This option is helpful for changes in one JSP page and its quick publishing when only one page is published Some older servers that do not support WAR archive files may need this option too Data Events Format 3 TaskManager General Code Lanquage J5P 1 1 JDK13 Publishing Local Network Security Type None Home Page Default cpp Default HTML Encoding utf 8 Publish J5 library Yes JSP 1 1 JDK 1 3 Target JDK Secure Server URL Use Data Source Extension No Path to logfile out Level of Logging debug Size of the logfile 1024 Class Path c home lib servietyar c horme lik Runtime libraries c home lib crimson jar RegExp API Jakarta ORO Target serwer Tomcat 6 Deploy webapp as unpacked Manager URL http localhost 8080 manager Manager login manager Manager password Context Path Server Path FCKeditor Base Path FCKeditor Full path to logfile Use out for System out err for System err The last five properties are needed to configure Tomcat 4 0 manager application for remote Tomcat administration when Target server set to Tomcat 4 0 You may leave them empty for other target servers 218 Normally you will have no problems with Java deployment with any Java Application Server that supports Servlets version 2 2 specification from Sun The details of the deployment process for several popul
280. ecting a member from the list inserts it into your code If you invoke Members List with the insertion point on a blank line AutoComplete populates the Members list with global members including functions classes and local variables For more information see Using Members List Quick Info Quick Info displays the complete declaration for any identifier in your code When you place the cursor over the identifier its declaration appears in a ToolTip For more information see Using Quick Info Parameter Info Parameter Info displays the complete declaration including a parameter list for the function to the left of the cursor The parameter in boldface indicates the next required parameter as a ToolTip during typing For more information see Using Parameter Info Complete Word Complete Word completes the variable s or function s name once enough characters to differentiate the term have been entered This can save you from having to repeatedly type long names For more information see Using Complete Word 167 Using Members List Use the Members list to work with classes Type your class or structure declaration and then type a period or gt AutoComplete displays all valid members in a scrollable list global departments departments gt cleGriddepartments Close departme Componenthame return depa Component ype jEnd Close depa DataSource department_id department_name w You can use the ar
281. ection properties window is used to configure the ODBC DSN connection Depending on the database you are using you might also have to specify the username and password to be used to login to the database once the connection is made by the ODBC driver This is usually not required when using a Microsoft Access database but other databases such as Oracle and MS SQL Server require authentication details Users of ColdFusion MX server should also register the ODBC DSN using the Data Sources option of the ColdFusion Administrator Add New Connection x Design Advanced Server Date Format yy y mm dd HH nn ss Boolean Format true false W Use LIMIT TOP Data Source Name InternetDB User Name User Password admin TILLI Database Type Database ODBC hi MS Access The new connection will be added to all servers You may need to setup database connection settings to other servers Hep foe cancel 112 Server Side Connections for JSP or Java Servlets When publishing in JSP or Java Servlets the server side connection differs significantly from the other languages You have to explicitly specify the driver to be used for the connection as well as enter a URL for the connected database JDBC Driver The name of the driver to be used e g sun jdbc odbc JdbcOdbcDriver Database URL The URL pointing to the database to be connected e g jdoc odbc intranet Note that you are not restricted
282. ed on table these tables gt Select an Available table then click this button to add it to the list of selected tables BHR h _ EEC cw Application Builder kal Project Haj Connection g Options 7 Authentication Details h Page Layout go Style Review Click this button to add ALL Available tables to the Selected tables list Select a Selected table then click this button to remove it from the list Click this button to remove all Selected tables from the list Select a table then click this button to move it upwards in the order of appearance Select a table then click this button to move it downwards in the order of appearance Available tables Selected tables ages blog categories blog_comments usergroups blog posts users countries directory categories directory items educations jevent_categories forum _messages genders incomes languages link categories links news officers smiles states store_categories store _editorial_ categories store editorial products store_order_ items jstore_ orders store products store_shopping_cart_items store shopping carts store statuses Load Save Cancel lt Back Next gt Finish Click Next to proceed to step 6 If you make changes to the database during the process of using the builder click this button to refresh the connection and retrieve the latest state of the tables 300 Step 6 Associati
283. ed with your own domain name or the IP address if desired When users request the URL in their browser the browser will contact the web server which will send the contents of the corresponding file back to the browser Type of Websites Static A static web site is one in which the pages contain hard coded content All of the content is edited and added using a standard editor and saved as a file with a htm or html file When a user accesses the page the page is loaded and displayed Content is only changed through an editor by the page developer Dynamic Dynamic web sites also referred to as web applications are programs that run on the web server and submit HTML to a web browser on a client computer These programs can be written in the same languages as standard Windows and UNIX applications although certain languages are better adapted to take advantage of the web One of the most popular programming languages Visual Basic was adapted for web use in the form of VBScript on which most ASP programs are based The latest modern web technologies utilize Java and NET both of which have roots in C If you are already developing Windows or other client server applications you should be able to create web applications The main difference lies in the output in standard applications you print text at specific 35 screen coordinates or set the value of an object that is drawn on the screen with web applications you would print HTML forma
284. eed to step 5 360 Step 5 Selecting Sorting Grid Options Specify the type of sorting controls to appear in the grid form Grid and Record Builder Option Settings Sorting Select the type of sorting controls that you want to have in the grid La Grid and Record Components Builder sorting Connection w C Wo sorting Eg Grid C Caption Caption w 5 Data Source P Caption w a Search 23 Layout Click Next to proceed to step 6 Step 6 Selecting Navigator Grid Options Specify the type of navigation controls to appear in the grid form Grid and Record Builder Option Settings Page Navigator Select the type of navigation controls that you want to have in the grid Modify Opens the Custom Navigator window where you can customize the controls to suit your needs fw Grid and Record Components Builder Navigation w C No Page Navigator a Grid C OCOS of 19 CHi C H Data Source 4 lec series Fal Search First Prev 1 2 3 4 5 of 10 Next Last C Manual Input Sorting iY Add Page Size Selection Click Next to proceed to step 7 361 Step 7 Define Common Grid Options Further customize the grid form by selecting the caption to be used for sorting as well as the navigational controls Grid Option Settings Page Navigator Select the type of Navigation controls that you want to have in the grid Modity The Custom Navigator window allows you to add custom navigation contro
285. efault Use Internationalization Features Ovencec 78 General Project Settings Each CodeCharge Studio project requires certain parameters to generate the proper programming code Here you specify the general project parameters Code Language Specifies the programming code that you will generate from your project to create the web application The available programming languages are ASP 3 0 with Templates Generates ASP 3 0 VBScript programs that use separate html files as templates during run time ASP Net C Generates aspx files with C code ASP Net VB Generates aspx files with VB code CFML 4 0 1 MX Generates ColdFusion 4 0 1 code CFML 4 0 1 MX with Templates Generates ColdFusion 4 0 1 code cfm and separate html template files JSP 1 1 JDK 1 3 Generates JSP 1 1 code PERL 5 0 with Templates Generates PERL 5 0 code and separate html template files PHP4 PHP5 with Templates Generates PHP code php and separate html template files Servlets 2 2 JDK 1 3 with Templates Generates Java Servlet code that utilizes html templates Home Page Specifies the main page of your web application which you can later launch with the F7 key or from the menu with Project Home Page The specified home page will then be generated published and opened within CodeCharge Studio in Live Page mode Form Templates The Form Templates specifies the current location of the folder with custom HTML templates for generated
286. elect the procedure from the list provided configure its parameters tasks Connection intranet Data Source Type Table tasks statuses pr Mo Records Per Page Page Size Limit Features NS TableView SQL statement or Stored Procedure that control is based on 225 Within the Data Source window you can also configure input parameter if the form will receive parameters from another form If the data source type is a table you can also use the Order By field to select the field by which the records in the form will be sorted by default After configuring the Data Source you can begin to add and configure fields in the form Configuring Form Fields When the form was added to the page it contained two or more fields which are not configured by default You can change the field type and the names of these fields to better reflect their content e To change a field to a different type right click on the field and use the Change To option to specify the new type e Assign the database fields to the form fields by using the Control Source property to select a database field for the form field e After setting the Control Source property the Data Type property should also be set to correspond to the data type of the field specified in the Control Source property e For some data types such as dates float and Boolean values you should also configure the Format property which determines how the value will be displayed Tasks
287. ementation of Section 508 guidelines Notes XHTML and Section 508 compliant Web pages usually contain additional HTML attributes such as ID and ALT Other differences relate to utilizing more style features in XHTML vs HTML for example for configuring fonts and borders Implementing Section 508 compliancy will result in much larger HTML files than simplified HTML generated otherwise z CodeCharge Studio 5 Zay no Options Z Welcome to CodeCharge Studio 5 www codecharge com Name re O E G fu Location C ACCS Projects z Application Builder Browse Language ASP 3 0 with Templates You may change the language at any time Er y Eci Site Language English its gg Standards CCS Example Pack CCS Ajax Examples Blog HTML a Create Project Cancel 73 Click OK CodeCharge Studio will create and save the new project on the disk within the specified folder The project file name will be the same as the project name with the extension ccs For example if your project name is My Project then the file name will be named My Project ccs The ccs file stores the global project settings in XML format which can be viewed or edited with any XML editor Adding New Pages There are several ways of adding new pages to the project From the File menu select the New gt Page option or press Ctrl N Click on the New Page button on the Toolbar Right click on a folde
288. en unfamiliar with web technologies web programming and web scalability issues Security Risks Utilizing the web exposes the company s network to new security risks and programming vulnerabilities that can expose private data to the public Browser Compatibility Unfortunately the competition between web browsers has resulted in many differences in supported standards thus creating confusion between users and more importantly compatibility issues with web applications It is recommended that you test your web application with several browser versions on several operating systems A useful tool for this task is NetMechanic s Browser Photo service at http www netmechanic com browser Mees 1 eins Lack of Web Development Tools Until Recently The development of web applications is time consuming due to the lack of professional web development tools The available tools are usually coding environments that require a solid programming foundation and experience Only recently have new tools become available that facilitate the creation of web applications with little programming experience These include Macromedia Dreamweaver MX Microsoft Visual Studio NET and YesSoftware CodeCharge products Of these CodeCharge is perhaps the most useful because it automatically generates programming code in a variety of programming languages and enables users to learn by examining and tweaking the code Architecture of Web Applications In general we
289. ent of ASP NET applications Development Environment for the development and testing of applications A Windows 2000 or Windows XP or Windows Vista desktop computer with an installation of CodeCharge Studio A local MS Access database or a copy of a remote MS Access database or MSDE or SQL Server 2005 Express Edition recommended or remote SQL server IIS Web Server 5 0 or higher Microsoft NET Framework 2 0 Optional if using an ODBC connection with NET Framework 1 0 ODBC NET Managed Provider Optional if using an Oracle connection with NET Framework 1 0 Oracle NET Managed Provider Server Environment for hosting the final application A Windows 2000 or higher server computer Microsoft NET Framework 2 0 IIS Web Server 5 0 or higher Optional if using an ODBC connection with NET Framework 1 0 ODBC NET Managed Provider Optional if using an Oracle connection with NET Framework 1 0 Oracle NET Managed Provider The following table provides a list of applicable operating systems web servers databases and language version options for ASP Net C and VB Net projects 49 NET Setup Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows 2003 Server any edition Windows Vista Windows 7 Internet Information Services IIS 5 0 or higher requires installation of the Microsoft Net Framework 1 0 3705 or later C or Visual Basic NET Microsoft Access MS SQL Server Oracle MySQL PostgreSQL DB2 FoxPro or other databa
290. ent panels that are mapped to each of the placeholders in the Master template At this point the two template variables the Labels post_title and post_body have been moved to the panel called Text This is correct for the post_body Label but we want the post_title Label mapped to the placeholder called Title so cut amp paste the post title Label into the Title panel Your page in the Project explorer should look something like this E E3 blog_posts c Fe TemplateFanel Ala post title g pe ami Select the post_body label and change the Label property content from text to HTML i e the content should be interpreted as HTML And the result in Preview mode should look like this My first blog post M x animage Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetuer adipiscing elit Quisque sed felis Aliquam sit amet felis Mauris semper velit semper laoreet dictum quam diam dictum uma nec placerat elit nisl in quam Etiam augue pede molestie eget rhoncus at convallis ut eros Aliquam pharetra Nulla in tellus eget odio sagittis blandit Maecenas at nisl Nullam lorem mi eleifend a fringila vel semper at ligula Mauris eu wisi Ut ante dul aliquet nec congue non accumsan sit amet lectus Mauris et mauris Duis sed massa id mauris pretium venenatis Suspendisse cursus velit vel ligula Mauris elit Donec neque Phasellus nec sapien quis pede facilisis suscipit Aenean quis risus sit amet eros volutpat
291. er Oa Connection 5 Data Source Search E3 Layout Title Employees Gallery No records found message No records 0 M Non breaking space in empty cells Display the total number of records Images folder DO f 24 Sorting Use original image size ana C Use browser scaling Navigation Width ao Style Height jz Click Next to go on to step 6 346 Step 6 Define Sorting Options of Gallery Further customize the gallery by selecting the caption type to be used for sorting as well as the navigational controls Gallery Option Settings Parameter Description Sorting Select the type of sorting controls that you want to use in the gallery a Gallery Builder Sorting ty Connection reiii 4 Data Source Caption f Caption w Search ates wid 3 Options Click Next to go on to step 7 Step 7 Define Navigation Options of Gallery Gallery Option Settings Page Navigator Select the type of Navigation controls that you want to use in the gallery Modity Opens Custom Navigator window where you can configure custom navigation controls a Gallery Builder Navigation Connection w C No Page Navigator 4 Data Source C 4 415 of 10 HIM C peppe Fal Search EE ee EE Options te First Prev 1 2345 of 10 Next Last Manual Input 24 Sorting C Custom modify ms OB Click Next to proceed to step 8 347 Step 8 Selecting a
292. er installed and running 24 hours a day Unless you purchase a dedicated server you will obtain a space on a shared server that hosts hundreds of web sites This is called virtual hosting The hosting company divides the space on their server s hard drive into partitions which they allocate to the domain names they host Visit TopHosts http Awww tophosts com to find a hosting company that matches your needs If you plan to create Web applications make sure that the plan you choose includes database hosting such as MS Access MS SQL or MySQL Domain Names When you purchase a hosting plan you will be asked to transfer or obtain a domain name for your web site The domain name is a string of characters and numbers usually a set of words that is easier to remember than the IP address assigned to your computer The domain names are stored in a Domain Name Server DNS which is part of a distributed database system that is queried whenever someone requests a URL or machine name The DNS facilitates the location of a host where when you type a URL in your browser the browser is able to lookup the IP address then send an HTTP request to the correct web server To obtain a domain name you need to find one that is available and purchase the rights to use it on an annual basis You can check the availability of the name you want at htip Awww register com and if your domain is available you can buy it there If you want to buy multiple domain names to r
293. er to delete existing records Allow Cancel Specify whether the Record should have a cancel button which would abort any current operation and return to the page specified in the Return Page property of the form Confirmation Prompts the user to confirm the insert update or delete operations dialog g Master Detail Builder Title Master Add Edit Directory Categories M Type Actions W Allow Insert W Allow Update W Allow Delete Confirmation dialog Include Cancel button ty Connection LA Data Source Detail Display buttons as Buttons Link Images EL Layout Click Next to proceed to step 5 Step 5 Selecting a type for Detail Select existing Detail form based on Record or Editable Grid or create new Add template panel a Master Detail Builder Create new Detail Form Master Editable Grid x Detail memes Use an existing Detal Form 5 Data Source N l Add Template Panel a sorting based on Con OdaSed ne empa ce a LAC te Navigation 368 Click Next to proceed to step 6 Step 6 Detail Fields You now have to select a data source as well as the fields to be included in the detail form 2 __ Use Qu ery Builder to specify the Multi Column Primary Key Us Fields for the 369 Editable Grid Field Settings Data Source Build Query Primary Key Fields for the Grid Control Type Order by Select the tab
294. erated by default by the type of builder The control pane is where you define the properties for each field The tabs on this pane are Display and Input This refers to the type of control that appears on a form For example a Record form Record builder is normally an input type form The Record form is normally built as a row of TextBox or Listbox controls from which you either enter or select something That is the Record builder creates the form from a set of Input type controls Which control gets assigned to the field depends on the datasource and the field type in the record When you run the Record builder every field is assigned to a default control You can change the control type in the builder for each field but this becomes very tedious if you create a lot of forms this way The data dictionary 405 provides an alternative approach For each field you can select the default control type that will be assigned to this field by the builder You can also define the properties of the control These are the same properties you would assign to the control after the form was generated by the builder Some properties such as Caption are shared by all the input controls so setting the caption for one input type control will set the caption for that field for every other type of control assigned to the field Other properties such as Max Length are unique just to certain types For example to assign and configure the input c
295. ere 4 0 scenario Because WebSphere 4 0 doesn t support autodeployment of war files it is necessary to do the following e Fill in all Java Site properties and Connection serverside properties e Make sure that JDBC drivers are in application class path e Get the latest version of JAXP 1 1 and SAX 2 0 for compilation and runtime execution of JSP files You can get them from the Ant installation e In Runtime libs Site property enlist absolute paths to jar files corresponding to JAXP and SAX libraries spearated by semicolons For example c ant lib jaxp jar c ant lib crimson jar These files will be copied to the WEB INF lib directory of the application e Select WebSphere 4 0 in Target server Site property e Specify Publishing Server Path property and publish your project e Install your application through the WebSphere console On the second screen of the Application Installation Wizard select No for Precompile JSPs property of your web module e Start the new application from the WebSphere Admin console restart the server if needed Tomcat Apache scenario Scenario 1 MOD JK connector e Download mod_jk dll and libapr dll and copy them to the apache modules directory e Create workers properties file in the CATALINA_HOME conf jk directory workers tomcat_home CATALINA_HOME workers java_home JAVA_HOME ps worker list ajo13 worker ajo13 port 8009 worker ajo13 host localhost worker ajp13 type ajo13 e At t
296. ert a translation resource key that corresponds to a translation string in the language resource file All CodeCharge Studio builders include the internationalization option and when selected will place on your web page the translation resource keys rather than plain text The language you select during installation becomes the language of the CodeCharge Studio IDE This is also the default language when you create a new project To change the language you are working in select the CodeCharge Studio button above the ribbon bar and select the Language option Note when you change languages you will have to restart your project The language you are working with in the IDE has no relationship to the internationalization or localization settings in your project i e you can work in English but develop websites in Spanish CodeCharge Studio is installed with a set of translation files for several languages Each file is a database of commonly used strings used within a project e g captions button text and the language specific string that goes with each one CodeCharge Studio does not translate words automatically from one language to another The default translation files are located in the installation folder under Components Translations Site In this file are a set of resource keys Each key is assigned a text string These strings are used by CodeCharge Studio in your web pages e g form titles button text etc By changing the default local
297. ertain conditions some drivers yield better performance than others In these cases you would need to refer to the documentation that comes with the driver for details on its performance 107 The following is a typical configuration for a Microsoft SQL server database using the Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server When connecting to SQL Server and Oracle databases among others you must always specify a username and password that has access to the tables used within the project Some user accounts have access to the database but not access to the required tables within the database Note that if you intend to use a MySQL database for a published ASP site you must make the connection using an ODBC DSN created using the MyODBC driver E Data Link Properties Provider Connection Advanced All Specify the following to connect to SQL Server data 1 Select or enter a server name Serenan nf Bee 2 Enter information to log on to the server i Use Windows NT Integrated security Use a specific user name and password Blank password Allow saving password 3 Select the database on the server Attach a database file as a database name a I i I eo plea h pm Pr Usma me niename E Test Connection 0K Cancel 108 Server Side Connections for PHP Server side connections in PHP vary depending on the database being connected to MySQL is
298. erties Select a field by which the records will be ordered by when initially displayed Previewing the Grid Once the fields have been added to the grid you can to view the final grid For the above setup the illustration below shows how the grid will look with the current settings Note that if you are satisfied with the form at this point you can click on the Finish button to close the builder and generate the form To continue click Next to proceed to step 3 350 Step 3 Adding a Search Form optional Add a search form that can be used to filter the records displayed in the grid form This step is optional and if you don t want a corresponding search form for the grid you can simply click the Next button to proceed to the next step i Grid Builder gy cance W Create Search Filter Search Users w Interactive Search TError Records per page listbox 5 Data Source Orientation l s_last_name gt avout s_user_login Layou Advanced E cl ol Al F ra fs zip 24 Sorting Search Fields Eo is_zip Search S Vertical Title Horizontal N ip last_name OO Navigation title user_login Options List of Users g Style At mail First email first name 351 Grid Search Settings Create Indicates your intention to create a search form Search Filter Interactive Add autocomplete to the search form search Sorting list box Gives the search form two list boxes for
299. erties windows to create the connection string Login The user account to be used to access the database Password The password corresponding to the Login name The process of creating a connection based on an OLE DB provider varies based on the type of the database as well as the provider being used However the common denominator is that the process ends with the creation of a connection string Basically a connection string is a group of attribute value pairs which specify the parameters for the connection string such as the name of the provider and the location of a database For example the connection string for Microsoft Access is usually of the form Provider Microsoft Jet OLEDB 4 0 User D Admin Data Source C CodeChargeStudio Projects TaskMan Intranet mdb Persist Security Info False In the sample connection string notice that the location of the database file is specified using a file system path The implication here is that if you are publishing the site to a server you need to know the path to the Microsoft Access database files Note that the path cannot be specified as an URL or a relative path e g database mdb When the Data Link Properties dialog is used to create the connection string the path to the database file is entered under the Connection tab In certain cases when an ASP site is published to an external server such as a commercial ISP host it is not always possible to know the file system path to the Mic
300. es are in lowercase Tag names are in lowercase Tags Indent Contents Line Breaks Before Start After Start Before End After End Reset Use space or tab indenting Number of spaces to be used for indenting The maximum number of characters that a string in a page can span If a tag is longer than the Margin length a line break will be inserted even if the tag is not closed Line breaks for strings longer than the Margin length will only be inserted in between tags Attribute names for tags will be in lowercase Tag names will be in lowercase Specify whether a specific tag will be indented Insert a Line break before the start of the tag Insert a Line break after the start of the tag Insert a Line break before the end of the tag Insert a Line break after the end of the tag Revert to the factory settings 68 Code Editor The code editor settings provide basic information for internal formatting of the code editor Code Editor Settings Tab Width Auto Indent Show Line Numbers Show whitespace Font amp Colors Font Size Display Items Foreground Background Sample Paths Number of spaces to be used to represent a tab Code will be indented automatically Line numbers are shown on the left margin of the code editor White spaces are visually represented by periods and tabs are represented using the symbol gt gt Font for the code Size of the font Select either Normal T
301. es based on the field names unless you specifically ask for them If you want to create these implicit relations you need to use the Suggest icon under the Data Dictionary tab on the ribbon bar The Suggest action will create links between tables based on the field names and add them to the relationships that may or may not already exist If you do not want these relationships you use the Reset icon on the ribbon bar to remove these relations After adding tables to the Visual Query Builder you can change the links between different tables If any relationships are wrong or not needed delete them by right clicking on them and selecting the Delete Link option priorities 7 All Colurnn priority_id priority_name vi All Columns priority_id project_id status _id task_desc task_finish_date 7 All Column task_id project_id task_name project_name task_start_date type_id user_id_assign_by userid_assign_to You can create new join links by dragging a field from one table to another field in a different table Once the join link appears between the tables you can use the properties button to confirm the joined fields and set the join type and the operator used for the join criteria e g equals Less than lt Is Null etc Notice that the top field in all the tables has an asterisk instead of a field name The asterisk is an SQL wildcard that represents all the fields in the table If you want to make use of all the fie
302. es that prevent users from externally modifying forms and submitting invalid data to the server CodeCharge Studio allows developers to define secure role based access to each page or form Record Security Groups M Restricted Group Mame Read Insert Update Cel Admin m Ww mz z Manager m we we al User Iw Iw Iw a Guest z E E Support for Multiple Programming Languages CodeCharge Studio can generate programming code in C and VB Net ASP NET VBScript ASP ColdFusion Java Servlets or JSP PHP and PERL Since the project model is stored in XML format the programming language can be changed at any time and the same project can be regenerated in multiple programming languages Code Language ASP 3 0 with Templates New Page Template ASP NET C Home Page ASP NET C InMotion Framework ASP NET VB Form Templates ASP NET VB InMotion Framework CFML 4 01 MX CFML 4 01 MX with Templates JSP 1 1 JDK 1 3 Perl 5 0 with Templates PHP4 PHPS with Templates Servlets 2 2 JDK 1 3 with Templates Project Path Extensibility CodeCharge Studio has an open architecture and is fully extensible Most of the functionality is implemented as HTML JavaScript XML and XSL Users can customize almost any part of the built in functionality or develop their own components such as Builders Components Actions and Styles In the future users will be able to obtain the CodeCharge SDK and develop their own code generation
303. eserve for future use use a less expensive bulk alternative such as http Awww namebargain com 34 Creating HTML Content Assuming that you have acquired a web service the next step is to create content that you d like other people to see The Internet is best suited for serving documents written in Hypertext Markup Language HTML HTML is a very simple language that uses tags to specify the content of a page rendered in a browser e g font size and color the position and size of images and other elements on the page The basic structure of HTML documents consists of the tags and format lt html gt lt head gt lt title gt This is the document s title lt title gt lt head gt lt body gt This is the document s body lt body gt lt html gt You can copy and paste the above text into notepad save the file as test html and open it in your browser You should then see the message This is the document s body Instead of manually writing HTML you can use any of the available HTML editors such as Microsoft FrontPage Adobe GoLive and Macromedia DreamWeaver to visually design the page then generate the HTML Each of these editors can easily be integrated into CodeCharge Studio for a familiar web development experience What is Dynamic HTML DHTML Dynamic HTML DHTML is a script based program executed by the web browser Script based programs can be written in a client side scripting language like JavaScript or VBS
304. ession variable Otherwise you will need to custom modify the code generated by CodeCharge Studio to set the cookie Cookie name The name of the cookie to be used for selecting a design The default is design Expiring in The time duration that the cookie should live Sample steps to test the dynamic design assignment 1 Go to Project Settings gt Designs and click Add to add and copy several different designs into your project 2 Set one of the designs to be the default using the Default button 3 Press F9 to generate the application and publish the files including the new designs 4 View your live page and append design DesignName to the URL For example http localhost NewProjecti NewPage1 php design BlueSkies http localhost NewProject1 NewPage1 php desiqn Casual Once a design is specified by a user via an URL parameter it will be saved automatically in a session variable or cookie if you enable them This allows Web visitors to come back to your site and see the last applied design i e without resubmitting the design parameter in the URL as long as the session or cookie has not expired Dynamic design selection only works so far as the designs are the same and consistent with your application If you change any panels or you change how the content on your web pages map to the placeholders in the master page or templates this may not work correctly Using the CCS PathToMasterPage Variable You may notice that w
305. ession variable to store the ID of users when they log in In fact the action of logging in often consists of creating a session variable by the server program 3 Application Variables Application variables are also available to all pages in one Web application They can be accessed by all users not just the current session They are cleared when the server is restarted GET and POST methods When you create Web pages that contain data entry fields the fields should appear between the lt form gt and lt form gt tags which make up a form The form tag has additional attributes one of them being Method GET or Method POST This method indicates how the information entered on the form should be submitted to the server when the user clicks the Submit button The POST method causes the information to be sent via a data stream invisible to the user If GET method is used the browser will redirect the page to a new URL which will be constructed from the base URL also specified by a form parameter followed by a question sign and all form information separated by an ampersand sign amp For example if a form asks the user to provide the first name and the last name after submitting the form the user would be redirected to a URL like this one http www mysite com pagel asp first_name James amp last_name Bond Users can manually emulate form submission by entering a URL into their browser that contains information similar
306. eviously configured database connection connection Create Create a new database connection or select a sample Use one of the example databases provided with CodeCharge Studio as an database Internet Intranet alternative to selecting an existing database connection If this option is selected the database connection will be created automatically Internationalized Use translation resources in place of text Save builder options Preserve the options selected in the Builder for each step The options will be automatically pre selected the next time you use the Builder 418 Step 2 Configure Feature Data Source The following options are available when configuring the Dependent Listboxes feature Dependent ListBoxes Builder Master Listbox H Connection store products category id a Slave Listbox 4 stare products product name Lae LEEDO Fata soured store_products 4 Build Query Bound Column product id Y Text Column product name Dependent field category id Master The listbox containing parent records Selecting an item from this list populates the Slave listbox Listbox Slave Listbox The listbox containing child records The contents of this list depends on which item was selected in the Master listbox Data Source The table to be used to create an AJAX service that will be used at runtime to retrieve the matching record This is the source of the data for populati
307. ext or CodeCharge Blocks to configure their display options Foreground color for the selected display item Background color for the selected display item This shows a preview of the display item according to the selections made The paths settings provide basic information for internal formatting of the paths Path Settings Default Server Path Default Server URL Components Default path to the web server where pages will be published HTTP URL that maps to the default server path mentioned above Path where CodeCharge Studio components are located HTML Page Template Path to an HTML template page that will be used as the base for all newly created pages Net SDK Java JDK Java ANT Location of the Net framework SDK if available Location of the Java JDK if available Location of the Java ANT if available 69 Source Control The source control settings provide basic information for internal formatting of the source control See Source Control Integration User Interface Keyboard Accessibility Many of the commands available on the Menu bar can be assessed using keyboard keys rather than the mouse This is done by using combination keys that map to particular menu options Notice that each Menu bar option has a single letter underlined Hold down the Alt key and type the underlined letter has the same effect as clicking on the menu option For instance typing the Alt F keys will open the File menu shown below
308. f appearance Click this button to add it some fields to the form Select a form field then click this button to remove it from the form Opens the dialog with advanced properties To activate the button select a field in the Fields for the Record section Note The following field types have advanced properties CheckBox List ListBox Radio Button Link and Image Link CheckBox List ListBox or Radio Button Clicking on the button will open the List DataSourse dialog illustrated below Link and Image Link Clicking on the button will open the dialog with link properties Specify the control type to be used for each of the fields in the form ro Master Detail Builder Data Source o Master directory_categories 4 Primary Ke Type category id ig Connection Fields for the Record ee category_id_parent v Detail Link herl Layout ee Style Control Type TextBox 7 Click Next to proceed to step 4 367 Step 4 Selecting Record actions You now have to decide the kind of functionality that will be available in the record form You can uncheck any of the options if you don t want the form to have the corresponding functionality Record Operations Allow Insert Specify whether the Record should allow the user to insert new records Allow Update Specify whether the Record should allow the user to update existing records Allow Delete Specify whether the Record should allow the us
309. f both Customer and YesSoftware If you do not wish to agree to the terms of this Agreement do not install or use this Software 1 OWNERSHIP OF SOFTWARE AND COPYRIGHTS The Software is copyrighted and protected by the laws of the United States and other countries and international treaty provisions You may not remove any copyright notices from the Software YesSoftware may make changes to the Software at any time without notice but is not obligated to support or update the Software Except as otherwise expressly provided YesSoftware grants no express or implied right under YesSoftware patents copyrights trademarks or other intellectual property rights You may transfer the Software only if the recipient agrees to be fully bound by these terms and if you retain no copies of the Software 2 GRANT OF LICENSE AND PROHIBITIONS Title to all copies of the Software remains with YesSoftware This Software is licensed to you You are not obtaining title to the Software or any copyrights You may not sublicense rent lease convey translate decompile or disassemble the Software for any purpose The license may be transferred to another Licensee if you keep no copies of the Software Permission must be obtained before mirroring or redistributing the evaluation copies of the Software You may not convert this Software or its parts to a different computer language or environment either manually or using an automated conversion tool such that
310. f you wish to override the default delete mechanism select the type of method to be used to perform the delete operation Specify the table SQL query or stored procedure to be used for the custom delete 244 Data Source Like other forms the Data Source property of a record form is used to specify the database resource that will provide the data for the form The data source can be a table SQL query or a stored procedure To access the Data Source dialog click on the button next to the Data Source property Name tasks Attributes Connection IntranetDB Data Source Type Table Restricted No Records Per Page 10 Page Size Limit 100 Features TableView SOL statement or Stored Procedure that control is based on All record forms must have at least one input parameter specified under the Where section of the Data Source window An input parameter must be specified because the record form must receive a primary key value in order for it to retrieve a record In many cases the primary key for a table is composed of a single field however it is possible to have a database table with a complex primary key made up of multiple fields If the primary key is complex then the record form should have an input parameter for each of the fields that make up the complex primary key When building a record form using Record Builder an input parameter is usually defined for the primary key field of the underlining table for example user_id
311. feature with the builder you can change the value property on the Autofill feature The value property defines the source of the value to be used which could be value innerHTML or some other property of the control This is a list of the controls to be filled in when the Autofill feature is activated This is described in more detail below 416 Adding Controls to be filled in When you define the Autofill feature you have to specify the controls on the form that will be filled in when the Autofill feature is activated A table is provided in the builder to define these controls When you click on one of the fields of the table a drop down list is displayed showing the possible controls database fields or Targets that can be defined PE La Controls Control name Field name Target price price value category_id image_url Src product_name description innerHTML image_url is recommended The Control name is the name of the control on the form Unless you have renamed the control the name is usually the same as the database field Not all controls are displayed in the drop down list If the control name doesn t appear in the list you must enter the name manually For example you can use the datasource from one form on your web page to update the fields of another form on the same page If you want to update a control that exists on a different form of the same page you must use the decorated name that C
312. fically intended for displaying hierarchical content The content that is displayed in a directory form is stored by top level items which have subsequent sub categories The directory form implements a drill down of information starting from parent categories and proceeding to successive subcategories A good way to conceptualize the directory form would be to think of the yahoo site directory or the directory of most search engines The Directory Builder is the fastest and easiest way to create directory forms Before you begin you must have a database connection in your project which contains a table configured according to the specifications in the above section To begin creating the form click the Directory Builder option under the Builders tab of the Toolbox A directory form is composed of two main components that operate synchronously to provide ease of navigation The first component is a Path which displays the sequences of categories that are currently being displayed by the second component the Directory Database Design The directory form imposes certain requirements on the design of the database table that will contain information to be displayed in the form While the table can contain as many fields as the user requires there are three specific fields that must be present Category ID Each item displayed in the directory form must have a category ID field that uniquely identifies the category In other words the category ID field m
313. field You can also specify own parameters that make up the key to your table or that you like to use to retrieve the matching record To add an input parameter click on the t button under the Where section You can also double click on an existing input parameter to open the Table Parameter window where it is configured Custom Operations The Data Source for a record form will typically be a single database table This is because the record form can insert update or delete records from a single table without requiring special configuration If a single table is used as the data source a single SQL statement can be executed to perform any one of the three operations If the data source is a custom SQL query or stored procedure then each of the three operations insert update delete must be configured separately The custom SQL query or stored procedure used to select the record cannot be used to insert update or delete 245 A record form has Custom Insert Custom Update and Custom Delete properties which are specifically intended to be used when the data source is not a single table Each of these three properties has to be configured for record forms that are not based on a single database table If you want to have a record form which can view but not insert update or delete records you don t have to configure these properties You should also set the Allow Insert Allow Update and Allow Delete properties to No so that the user does not at
314. fields within the grid are retrieved from one table Any other operations such as insert update or delete are also based on the same table An Editable Grid can also be based on a join query that retrieves fields from different related tables For instance when using the Editable Grid Builder the user can invoke the Visual Query Builder and specify a query based on multiple tables such as that shown below The important point to note is that any Editable Grid that is not based on a single database table requires additional configuration in order to support insert update or delete operations The SQL commands that are used to perform insert update and delete operations are restricted to single tables A select statement can retrieve fields from multiple tables but the insert update and delete statements can operate only on a single table All Editable Grids that are not based on a single table must define the Custom Insert Custom Update and Custom Delete properties in order to support insert update and delete operations DataSource Column Parameters If an Editable Grid is based on a query or a stored procedure you have to specify the Custom Insert Custom Update and Custom Delete properties in order to facilitate the insert update and delete operations respectively When you specify the Custom Update and Custom Delete properties you have to provide a Where clause which determines the records that need to be updated or deleted Unlike an ordinary re
315. filtering the data that is displayed in the form Input parameters can be received from other forms via the URL cookies or session variables For instance a search form working in conjunction with a grid form makes uses of input parameters The search form submits the input parameters and the grid form receives them and uses them to filter the records that are retrieved and displayed on the grid All record forms have at least one input parameter defined in their Data Source This input parameter is used to receive the primary key value of the database record which the form should retrieve In most cases the input parameter is received from a URL that originates from a Link field within a grid form where the database records are listed Data Events Format Name TasksGrid Attributes Connection IntranetDB Data Source Type Table priorities projects Restricted No Records Per Page 10 Page Size Limit 100 Features Table View SQL statement or Stored Procedure that control is based on 234 Visual Query Builder Properties Table fi Pi i t oD _ a EEEE Select the type of data source to be used to obtain the data Table Procedure SQL The name of the connection where the data will be retrieved This can be any one of the connections listed in the Project Explorer window Open the Connections window where you can add modify remove or test connections Update the window to
316. for example ISO LATIN 7 output by the application which will be appended to the Content Type header during HTTP transmission Display the script errors on the page The path to the CKeditor installation folder on the server absolute starting with or relative to the project folder For example CKeditor or CKeditor 84 CFML 4 01 MX CF Server Base SSL URL used to access pages configured for SSL access CKeditor Base The path to the CKeditor installation folder on the server absolute starting with or relative to the Path project folder For example CKeditor or CKeditor CFML 4 01 MX with Templates Base SSL URL used to access pages configured for SSL access CF Server CKeditor Base The path to the CKeditor installation folder on the server absolute starting with or relative to the Path project folder For example CKeditor or CKeditor JSP 1 1 JDK 1 3 Use Data Source Extension Path to logfile Level of Logging Class Path Maximum Heap Size Runtime libraries Model Folder RegExp API Target server Deploy webapp as Admin Console URL Admin login Admin password Context Path Server Path CKeditor Base Path Specifies whether the Data Source extension should be used Full path to logfile Value out means System out err means System err The level of logging DEBUG shows all messages CLASSPATH environment variable will be added to the specified Class path
317. form field then click this button to move it upwards in the order of appearance Select a form field then click this button to move it downwards in the order of appearance Click this button to add it some fields to the form Select a form field then click this button to remove it from the form pa Opens the dialog with advanced properties To activate the button select a field in the Fields for a the Grid section Note The following field types have advanced properties CheckBox List ListBox Radio Button Link and Image Link CheckBox List ListBox or Radio Button Clicking on the button will open the List DataSourse dialog illustrated below Link and Image Link Clicking on the button will open the dialog with link properties Control Type Specify the control type to be used for each of the fields in the form During the process of creating the search form you can try out various options and preview them before deciding on the appropriate ones Click Next to proceed to step 4 352 Step 4 Define Layouts Grid options Select the desired design of the grid template and placement of components inside it Here you have four layouts to choose from Tabular Grid layout that represents data in datasheet view i e in a form of rectangular table with column captions across the top row identifiers usually listed down the left margin and the data in the cell where the row and column intersect Columnar Grid layout with column cap
318. fying generated code e Maximum code simplicity and reusability e Generated applications consist of simple ASPX files Web pages that utilize reusable framework components and look familiar to all ASP NET developers e Great level of extensibility and customizability without a need for an SDK e Developers have full flexibility to modify the framework code and include the customized framework version in their applications All framework code is manually written and can be easily extended or updated by anyone e Portability to Visual Studio e Moving application development to Visual Studio is simple and easy since an InMotion Application looks no different than an application created manually with Visual Studio Both the framework code and ASPX files build by CodeCharge Studio can be easily maintained with Visual Studio However importing modified applications back to CodeCharge Studio is not supported once you modify the generated ASPX files in Visual Studio A simple way to envision the functionality and benefits of the InMotion Framework is to treat it as a library of reusable components utilized by Web pages rather than generating code for each Web page Converting CodeCharge Studio applications from VB NET or C to InMotion is straightforward by changing the programming language in project settings However any custom code will require manual conversion The InMotion Framework based applications utilize events for custom code with coding s
319. g blaster Page i 20 File Upload The process of transferring files from the end users machine to the server can now be accomplished by using the File Upload component This component generates the necessary code to enable an end user to select files from their machine and submit the files so that they are uploaded to the server Lag NewProgect 1 E H Pages i i IintranetDB t F mvert URL To None Ale Allowlnsert Yes d v Opia fp Allow Delete Yes reserve Paramet GET E E i E i E i a a CCEEEC k kir SiR ig ji A e l il cal i Delete Ts 21 Example Pack The CodeCharge Studio example pack comes in the form of a CodeCharge Studio project within which there are different sub projects which implement various programming techniques Wi i O mijo CodeCharge Studio 5 X Fullscreen Options r Welcome to CodeCharge Studio 5 ee all www codecharge com a Gi Application Builder Employee Directory Task Manager i aes E kj E Ta PE Store OCS Example Pack CES Ajax Examples Chack for Updates Community Online Forum News and Updates M 2010 o Newsgroups eS o o l Ajax Features CodeCharge Studio supports development of Ajax enabled applications through a set of Ajax features services and builders Employees 22 Menu Builder Menu Builder provides a visual method for designing and including menus within We
320. g a break line lt br gt tag to the HTML code for the radio control The original code for the radio control would look like lt BEGIN RadioButton Label gt lt input Check type radio name Label1 value Value gt Description lt END RadioButton Label gt A lt br gt tag should be added before the closing comment as in lt BEGIN RadioButton Label gt lt input Check type radio name Label1 value Value gt Description lt br gt lt END RadioButton Label gt With this adjustment the radio buttons will display vertically as shown below ReportLabel Overview HTML Label1 Image Labell Description The Report Label is the main control used to display data inside reports This component is the extended version of the Label component with all its functionality plus report specific properties To place a Report Label within a report section click the Label component in the Toolbox Report labels are similar to standard label controls however they contain additional properties that are report specific The following report label properties are available Name Control Source Type Control Source Format Text If Empty Content DBFormat Hide Duplicates Function Reset At Percent Of Identifier name used in the generated code and HTML template The type of data source that this control should be based on Field name or expression to be used as label s data source
321. g properly For a server that has been installed on the local machine the root URL http localhost 8080 or http 127 0 0 1 8080 can be used to test the server Please refer to the documentation for the server you have installed for information on how to confirm that the installation was successful Setup the Database It is common to use the MySQL database when publishing in JSP You can download MySQL from http www mysql com where you will also find documentation for the database and a link to download the MyODBC driver that can be used to make an ODBC connection to a MySQL database during design time You must use either the native MySQL interface default or ODBC driver for the design side connection but JDBC for the server side The MySQL JDBC driver can also be downloaded from http Awww mysaql com Create and Test a CodeCharge Project CodeCharge Studio comes with a number of example projects that you can easily generate and publish as a way of testing your setup Each of these examples comes with an Access database and a database script file that you can use to recreate the database Please refer to the section on the example solutions for detailed instructions on how to setup and use them You can also refer to the Quick Start section within the documentation for step by step instructions to create and publish your first web application and the section on deploying Java projects NET Setup A common configuration for the developm
322. gable tabbed views of content A panel utilizing this feature acts as a container for that can contains multiple tabs implemented as Tabbed Tabs CodeCharge Studio also includes component called TabbedView which automatically adds a new panel into the page with the Tabbed View feature assigned to it To create a tabbed section on your page first add TabbedView component to your page then add and include multiple TabbedTab components within it Alternatively you can assign Tabbed View feature to an existing panel then include multiple panels and assign Tabbed Tab feature to them Supported Components Panel Properties Name User assigned name identifying the feature within HTML 435 Sample Implementation Tabbed iew Tabbed iew1 General Name Tabbedview1 ASP NET C InMotion Framework CssClass mttabbedwiew skyle Height width pE j AJAX UpdateDB Description The UpdateDB feature allows for database interaction by inserting updating or deleting database records Supported Components All forms and controls Properties Enabled Specifies whether the feature is active Name User assigned name identifying the feature within HTML Connection Database connection name Operation Type Type of database interaction Insert Update or Delete Operation Parameters Parameters that specify database table fields and values to be updated selectable via a separate popup dialog Hide event Cl
323. ge _ First First Prev Prev ox omea After adding a navigator control to a grid you can adjust it using the Custom Navigator window To access the window right click within the navigator and select the Edit Navigator option You can then configure various options in the Custom Navigator window which is similar in appearance to the Create Navigator window above Note The Navigator cannot be placed in the repeated sections Row AltRow or Separator of the Grid and Editable Grid components 274 Panel Description The panel component creates a container for settings that control the visibility of one or several components of HTML snippets in an application For example a panel can allow only management to view additional form fields and exclude the option for non management personnel The panel component is often used with the Hide Show Component action which can be assigned to a panel s Before Show event where you specify the condition of when the panel should be shown or hidden A panel component can contain any CodeCharge Studio components of a form that are supported by that form For example if a panel is added to a CodeCharge Studio form such as grid or record it can contain only form specific components the Include Page cannot be placed inside the Panel For a panel to work correctly it is necessary that the panel does not contain structural elements of other components such as component sections identified as blocks
324. generated files to a local or network web server by selecting the Location Local Network and then configuring the parameters Server The file system path where the generated files should be published In case you use the IIS web Path server the server path is usually c lnetoub wwwroot project name If you use Apache locate the DocumentRoot variable in your configuration file httpd conf and set it to the desired web folder e g c web then set the Server Path in CodeCharge Studio to the same folder You can also specify a network path here such as network computer web My Project Server This is the web address corresponding to the Server Path This URL will be used to view the page in URL Live Page mode By default local web servers can be accessed using the URL http localhost therefore the Server URL for your project should be hitp localhost MyProject You can also use the IP address of your computer such as http 68 100 100 100 MyProject or the domain name like http mydomain com MyProject The Server URL parameter is also used in the generated programs for example to redirect users with insufficient privileges to the Login page Publishing Files By FTP You can publish the generated files to a remote Web server by setting Location property to FTP and then configuring the following FTP parameters Server Path Folder Login Password Live site URL Secure connection SFTP SSH Passive mode Th
325. ges to the list of tables you have defined in the query For example suppose query1 is a query against the employees table when you select query1 as the datasource the name of the selected datasource changes to employees since the query is based on this table The preview of your form is based on the query you defined in the Data Dictionary and similarly if you select build query the query you see will be the query you defined in the Data Dictionary and selected from the datasource list 403 Note your query is also linked to the connection and database If you modify your connection the query may no longer be valid Wherever you can select a datasource you can use a query you created in the Data Dictionary Data Source Ha Connection Data Source based on Query1 big Connection employees n Build Query Search l Fields for the Grid E Layout emp_id emp_login A Sorting emp a l emp_name E title Ho Navigation group_id Note deleted and renamed queries are not immediately removed from the list of datasources To remove them from the list of available datasources click on the Refresh button on the ribbon bar under the Data Dictionary tab Using the ribbon bar you can also change the query type in the same way in which you would change the query type in the Visual Query Builder There are 3 types of queries you can define Table queries These are queries you design using th
326. gout functionality to an existing page Click on the Authentication Builder option in the Builders tab to begin the process Note Please enable the Cookies in your web browser to make the Security work properly Step 1 Selecting the Authentication Type Select the type of functionality you want to add to the page Directory Builder Category Settings Description Login Form Adds a login form to the current page Logout Link to this Page Adds a logout link in the current page The link points to the current page Logout Link to custom Adds a logout link in the current page The link points to the page you select in the next Page step Logout action on this Adds a logout action to the current page The action is added in the After Initialize event Page of the page a Authentication Builder Login Form Ree Logout Link to this Page E Options C Logout Link to custom Page Layout C Logout Action on this Page ey Style Step 2 Selecting Login Options If you opted to add a Login form the next step allows you to specify whether you want the login field in the login form to have focus when the page loads If the field is in focus the user can begin typing into it immediately without having to click on it first Additionally the Remember Me option is available if enabled in the security settings of your application fs Authentication Builder Title P Type Focus on Login field
327. grid facilitates such operations as sorting the records based on different columns in the grid or browsing multiple pages when the records to be displayed span more than one page Grid forms can be constructed using the Grid Builder or manually using the barebones grid form provided under the Forms tab of the Toolbox Unless you need to exercise full control over the creation of the grid it is recommended that you use the Grid Builder In terms of HTML markup a grid form is made up mainly of an HTML table with different controls in its rows The illustration below shows a basic Grid form This form is created when the Grid option in the Forms tab of the Toolbox is clicked The form has a title a row for the field captions and another row where the database content is displayed Grid Elements Data Source Each grid retrieves its data based on its data source configured similarly to all other forms The Data Source is a property of a grid where you specify the database resource that will provide the data for the grid This can be a table a SQL query or a stored procedure To access the Data Source dialog click on the button next to the Data Source property B The Data Source dialog is also where you can specify input parameters Input parameters are necessary when the grid form receives values from another form such as a search form and uses the input parameters to filter the records it displays The search form submits the values then the g
328. gs NewProject1 General Code Language Perl 5 0 with Templates Publishing Local Network Security Type None Home Page Default HTML Encoding windows 1252 Publish J5 library Yes Perl 5 0 with Templates Secure Server URL Server API Library Pretix Server Path Code File Extension cl Output File Format windows Perl Path 1c perlbin perl exe Session Files Path session files Session Timeout 30 Session Files Clean Rate 100 Charset Display Errors No Strict mode No FCKeditor Base Path FCKeditor Pee File Extension 215 PERL Configuration Parameters Output File Specify whether the project is going to be published to a Windows or Linux Unix machine Format Perl Path The path to the Perl executable sometimes known as the shell bang or hash bang line This line specifies the location of the Perl program and changes based on whether a Windows or Linux Unix machine is being used An example path for windows would be perl while for Linux Unix a common path is usr local bin perl In Linux Unix You can find out the location of the Perl executable by typing the command which perl in the command prompt of a shell session For windows the command Perl h should produce information about the program including its path Session The file system path of a folder where the session variable information will be stored This should be a Files Path folder with read write access Server Path The path of a folder where the application
329. gt lt meta name description content Enter a description here gt The HTML template page can contain HTML code as well as client side script code such as JavaScript However the page cannot contain server side code such as ASP or PHP Options General Default Server Path C Inetpub wwwroot a Default Server URL http localhost components C Program Files CodeChargeStudio5 Components m HTML Page Template n C Program Files CodeChargeStudio5 Projects Template html Java SDK Home via Source Control Java Ant Home 162 Working in Design Mode Within the document window the Design mode presents a_what you see is what you get WYSIWYG representation of an HTML page template Design mode is suited for adding and manipulating the contents of a page without interacting directly with the underlying HTML code gPa H om cm ee Eg NewProjectl CodeCharge Studi Table ax a Home Data Dictionary Builders Forms Edit Layout Fullscreen Options a Fi Add Connection Server1 7 Pe aE Hr Add Diagram Qk Server Connections a Designs __ _ Publish Publish Live Home source View Project Publishing Tools E NewPagel x lt Properties f X E3 MewProject1 Pages oo List of Departments departments ewPagel ISt OF Departments Diagrams poe departments Sa a al Data Events d F Connectio
330. h The process of selecting the generic language text is automatic as long as you create an equivalent generic locale in CodeCharge Studio Technically speaking each locale has a code in the format xx yy where xx is the neutral locale code and yy is the country code The fallback process uses those codes as follows When a country yy is not specified or an unknown country yy is specified the application automatically selects a translation from the non country specific fallback locale code xx And when the xx country code is not found then the application retrieves text translation from the default locale Example Given the site locales configured in CodeCharge Studio English default English US Spanish and the corresponding locale codes are en en US sp The following table represents the mapping of sample locales requested by users to the corresponding locales available in the application none en US en US en UK en sp SP sp fr en fr CA en You can find the list of all country locale codes on the Internet at htip msdn2 microsoft com en us library ms533052 aspx The fallback process is employed for each resource that needs to be translated This offers the powerful benefit of being able to translate only those resources that differ between countries A locale may not be permanently selected because if one resource key is missing then the translation will be taken from the neutral or default locale but another resource key
331. harge Studio a page type style means that the CSS formatting rules apply to all the components e g forms on the page while a component style only applies to a particular component The best way to understand this is by looking at an example The following are two snippets of code that describe the Grid caption using the Cozy style 178 Page Style lt table class Grid cellspacing 0 cellpadding 0 gt lt tr class Caption gt lt th scope col gt lt BEGIN Sorter Sorter_country_id gt lt span class Sorter gt lt a href Sort_URL id countriesSorter_country_id gt Ild lt a gt lt BEGIN Asc_On gt lt img alt Ascending src Styles Cozy Images Asc gif gt lt END Asc_On gt lt BEGIN Desc_On gt lt img alt Descending src Styles Cozy Images Desc gif gt lt END Desc_On gt lt span gt lt END Sorter Sorter_country_id gt lt th gt Component Style lt table class GridCozy cellspacing 0 cellpadding 0 gt lt tr class CaptionCozy gt lt th scope col gt lt BEGIN Sorter Sorter_country_id gt lt span class Sorter gt lt a href Sort_URL id countriesSorter_country_id gt Ild lt a gt lt BEGIN Asc_On gt lt img alt Ascending src Styles Cozy Images Asc gif gt lt END Asc_On gt lt BEGIN Desc_On gt lt img alt Descending src Styles Cozy Images Desc gif gt lt END Desc_On gt lt span gt lt END Sorter Sorte
332. has a name that is used to identify it and optionally a function can receive arguments To define a function you have to use the lt script gt lt script gt tags In most cases JavaScript functions are defined within the lt head gt lt head gt section of a page Once a function has been defined it can be called from any 165 section of the page In the example a function called myFunction which takes no arguments is defined within lt script gt lt script gt tags lt script language JavaScript gt function myFunction var test test Confirm Are you sure you want to Cancel if test window location href newpage asp j lt script gt The function can be invoked from an HTML event For example the function is executed with the onClick event By using functions in this way you can execute complex operations through standard browser events lt input name Cancel type submit value Cancel onClick myFunction gt A common use of client side scripts such as JavaScript is to control the properties of various components within a page To do this it is necessary to identify the components so that the code can reference them In this regard the Properties window can be used to set change or find out the names of various components by clicking on them in Design or HTML mode It is to your advantage to name the components in a manner that would be conducive to using the names within script code Editing P
333. hat disable browser caching Defines the character encoding output by the application Defines the new line characters For Windows it is lt CR gt lt LF gt for Unix Linux it is lt LF gt The location where HTML templates should be placed on the server relative to the project folder The location of HTML templates on the server relative to the project folder The saved HTML templates will be published to this folder The path to the CKeditor installation folder on the server absolute starting with or relative to the project folder For example CKeditor or CKeditor Perl 5 0 with Templates Server API Library Prefix Server Path Code File Extension Output File Format Perl Path Session Files Path Session Timeout Session Files Clean Rate Charset Display Errors CKeditor Base Path The type of Server API to be used Library prefix used with mod_perl The path to the root of the web folder where mod_perl scripts should be run Perl file extension Format of the output files The Perl path Absolute or relative path to the directory to store temporary session files Session Timeout minutes This variable specifies how often session files will be checked for expiration and expired files will be deleted If Sessions Files Clean Rate 100 this check will be performed for each 100th page being loaded You might want to increase this value to improve the performance The name of character encoding
334. he Web browser will automatically split the same report into multiple pages and repeat the page header and footer on each page as needed One of the main benefits of using client paging is that the page size is determined automatically by the Web browser and doesn t need to be predefined while end users are able to configure their own printer settings like orientation and margins Some of the downsides of using client paging may include inability to implement dynamic functionality that depends on page size dynamically alter page header footer or utilize the row numbering feature with row numbers reset at page level The following report options and properties are disabled when using client paging Page Size Page M of N Results in a special Panel being inserted between detail rows This makes it easier to separate detail sections and insert a line graphics or text between detail rows Inserts a non breaking space amp nbsp into empty report cells and Text If Empty property of Report Label This option is used to improve the report layout Web browsers often do not display cell borders if a cell is completely empty Displays the current date and time at the bottom of the report in the Page Footer You must specify if you want to display the Date the Time or both Displays a column with row numbers in the detail section of the report You must specify if you d like to reset row numbering at the report page or group level The tex
335. he configuration process Parameters must be setup properly for the cache to work reliably A If you cache a page that displays user specific information for example Hello James and do not specify any cache parameters the application will retrieve the cached page from the database and display the a ceHello Jamesa text A to everybody To handle each case properly make sure the variables that are used to display different information on the page are a part of the key for this example 202 the UserlD session variable would be used Understanding this example is important in order to use the caching features properly Another example isA a calendar of community events on a page Assuming that all users will view the same calendar you can cache the calendar page and serve the cached version to all users To display information for different months the application needs to store the page output in the cache for each month To enable this functionality specify the cache parameter that is the same as the URL parameter that selects the month for example eventDate You can also place the Calendar as a standalone component within an includable page and include that page within other pages This strategy allows you to create cached components that are independent of pages If the page or included header displays a user specific message like Hello James which you don t want cached the content of the component will be cached independently Si
336. he database so this property is left blank Data Source A search form does not retrieve data from the database so this property is left blank Return Page The page where the search criteria will be submitted This is also the page containing the form that will use the values submitted by the search form Remove Specify a common separated list of form or URL parameters which should not be propagated Parameters when the form is submitted Convert URL To Specify whether the URL should be automatically converted to an absolute URL or secure URL for the SSL protocol hittps Restricted Specify whether users must be authenticated before being able to view the form Allow Insert This property is always set to No since the search form does not handle database content Allow Update This property is always set to No since the search form does not handle database content Allow Delete This property is always set to No since the search form does not handle database content Preserve Specify whether Get or Post parameters should be preserved when the form is submitted Parameters Custom Insert This property is always left blank since the search form does not handle database content Type Custom Insert This property is always left blank since the search form does not handle database content Custom Update This property is always left blank since the search form does not handle database content Type Custom Update This property is always left blank since
337. he dialog with link properties Specify the control type to be used for each of the fields in the form Select a field for the records to be ordered by when initially displayed After adding fields to the editable grid and setting the optional Order by field you can click on the Finish button to close the builder and generate the form Click Next to proceed to step 3 325 Step 3 Adding Search Fields optional Add a search form that can be used to filter the records displayed in the editable grid form This step is optional If you don t want a corresponding search form for the editable grid you can simply click the Next button to proceed to the next step 3 Editable Grid Builder if Create Search Filter Fj Connection at Interactive Search OG Data Source Records per page listbox ee Layout r Search 4 2 Vertical Horizontal Sorting HTML Template from file DivSearch ccp built in z m WO Navigation Advanced Options Search Fields T Actions firstname m last_name rr user_login i i style user password kemman Control Type 326 Editable Grid Search Field Settings Create Search Filter Interactive Search Layout Records per page list box Orientation Advanced Search Fields Control Type Activate this option to indicate your intention to create a search form Add autocomplete feature to every field Specifies vertical or
338. he end of httpd conf LoadModule section add the following line LoadModule jk_module modules mod__jk dlll e At the end of httpd conf AddModule section add the following line AddModule mod_jk c e At the end of httpd conf add the following JkWorkersFile SCATALINA_HOME cont jk workers properties JkLogFile CATALINA_HOME logs mod_jk log JkLogLevel info lt VirtualHost localhost gt ServerName localhost DocumentRoot CATALINA_HOME webapps JkMount jsp ajo13 JkMount do ajp13 lt VirtualHost gt e f needed uncomment the following delcarations in Tomcat server xml config file lt Connector className org apache ajp tomcat4 Ajo13Connector port 8009 minProcessors 5 maxProcessors 75 acceptCount 10 debug 0 gt e In CCS set publishing path to CATALINA_HOME webapps and publish your project e Start Tomcat and then Apache scenario 2 WARP connector e Download mod_webapp so and libapr dll and copy them to the apache modules directory e Atthe end of httpd conf LoadModule section add the following line 221 LoadModule webapp_module modules mod_webapp so e At the end of httpd conf AddModule section add the following line AddModule mod_webapp c e Atthe end of httpd conf add the following WebAppConnection warpConnection warp localhost 8008 WebAppDeploy JSPPortal warpConnection Portal e If needed uncomment Tomcat Apache service configuration in Tomcat server xml config file e In CCS set publishing path to CATALINA_HOME we
339. he stylesheet into the styles folder in your project entries entry after content display block height 0 clear both visibility hidden font size 0 entries entry display inline block entries entry display block height 1px content H1 clear both entries entry border 1px solid E5E9EF border radius 50Xx moz border radius 5px webkit border radius 5px khtml border radius 5px border radius 5px 5px 5px 5px padding 15px margin 0 20px 20px background color F8F9FA entries H2 159 padding bottom 10px font size 12pt entries P entries UL entries OL padding 0 0 10px color 6D798C font size 10pt entries DFN color 000000 entries LI margin left 25px entries back to top display block float right font size 9 5pt text decoration none J entries back to top hover text decoration underline e Add a link to the stylesheet at the top of your form template and save the page lt link href page Path ToRoot Styles entries css rel stylesheet type text css gt e Save all changes up this point and then add a new page to your project and run the Grid builder Select the Internet database and the blog_posts table Remove all the fields except post title and oost_body Do not include a Search form When prompted for a Layout select the grid template you created in 1 abo
340. hem to an encrypted format if you are using a Database Function method for encryption The following sample SQL statement encrypts the user_pass field stored in the users table using MySQL PASSWORD function UPDATE users SET user_paSS PASSWORD user_paSss 210 Deploying Projects Deploying ASP Applications Before you publish a project make sure the server has the correct version of the VBScript engine CodeCharge Studio generates ASP 3 0 which corresponds to VBScript 5 5 or higher Most IIS servers have the correct version of VBScript installed but if you are using Personal Web Server PWS you might need to upgrade the VBScript engine The latest version of the VBScript engine can be downloaded from the Microsoft Windows Script site Also note that at the time of publication the latest release of the ChiliSoft ASP server which can be run on Unix flavor machines supports ASP 2 0 and NOT the required ASP 3 0 Your target server must also have the necessary ODBC DSN drivers needed to connect to the database If you are using a commercial host the literature on their site should indicate which databases are supported Sometimes the host supports ODBC connections in which case you have to request that an ODBC DSN be created for you Once the DSN has been created you can configure the server side database connection to use the remote DSN For a DSN less connection like a Microsoft Access database the server side database connection has to be co
341. hen you apply a design CodeCharge Studio updates the Master Page property for the selected page The path to the master page is based on the internal CCS variable called CCS_PathToMasterPage This variable reflects the currently selected default design When you publish your website this is the design that will be selected by default Using this variable instead of a relative folder location serves several purposes e You can dynamically assign a design using an URL parameter as described above e You can change a design for several pages in your project at one time When you change the default design in your project by clicking on a different design from the ribbon bar every page using CCS_PathToMasterPage is updated to use that design If you want your pages to have different designs applied don t use this variable Instead specify the the relative folder location of the master page e g Designs BlueSkies MasterPage ccp When you do this though unlike the other pages that use the CCS_PathToMasterPage changing the default design does not affect the page If you want to later apply a different design to the page you have to first remove the design select the default design from the ribbon bar and then select Apply design to this page then change the Master Page property again to a relative folder location without using the CCS_PathToMasterPage variable e In Preview mode you can move the cursor over all the designs in you project and see
342. her types of pages In this example a stylesheet Basic has been assigned because there is a default style in the project and CodeCharge Studio automatically applied the Style when the page was created If you look at the HTML for the templates in one of the built in Artisteer designs you will notice that you do not need any of this code To eliminate the code and prevent CodeCharge Studio from regenerating it later select the page you created and set the includable option to yes then delete all the HTML in the page That is make master templates includable pages lt IDOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC W3C DTD HTML 4 01 Transitional EN http www w3 org T R html4 loose dtd gt lt html gt lt head gt lt meta name GENERATOR content CodeCharge Studio 5 0 0 12000 gt lt meta http equiv content type content text html charset windows 1252 gt lt title gt NewPage 1 lt title gt lt link rel stylesheet tyoe text css href Styles Basic Style_doctype css gt lt head gt lt body gt lt body gt lt html gt You can name your template anything you want but generally you should put your templates in the same folder as the master page This is important if you use dynamic assignment since CodeCharge Studio uses an internal variable called CCS_PathToMasterPage to locate both the master page and the master template Your master template does not have to include any placeholders but obviously without them you will not
343. hin a folder Provider The list includes CVS plug in entry Login Login username used for CVS interactions Advanced Displays dialog to setup additional CVS options CVS executable Path to the cvs exe executable Merge application Path to the application used to resolve version conflicts Update files when opening the project Project files are updated from the repository upon opening the project Commit files when closing the project Project s files get automatically committed when closing the project Prompt to add files when inserted Decides whether prompt is displayed to add any new project files to the repository they will be added automatically when unchecked Prompt to Update files Displays dialog to select files for Update operation Prompt to Commit files Displays dialog to select files for Commit operation Prompt to Edit files Displays dialog to select files for Edit operation Prompt to UnEdit files Displays dialog to select files for UnEdit operation Add new projects to the source control Automatically adds any new projects created with CCS to the repository Automatically Commit files that were Commits files changed during generation to the repository changed during generation Options x Provider evs Flugin Lagin l Set provider specific options Advanced CVS executable cidevcysnticvs exe oa Merge application c Program Files Araxis Araxis Merge Merge exe M U
344. hip to assume that you want to use the group_id field to look up something in the Groups table See Database Explorer for more details about relationships When you create a Record form and the Employees table is part of the data source and you include the group_id field from the Employees table in the record this field will be bound to a ListBox control That is everywhere group_id appears on a form the field will be represented as a ListBox But when you add group _id to a Grid form it will appear as a Label control This is because we never changed the control type for Display type forms and the default control type is Label for display forms You cannot assign a ListBox control to this field for a Grid Although you could display the ListBox as a selected item it would not make any sense to allow users to select a Group name since the record s from a Grid are never updated The form builders and the Application Builder do not utilize the Data Dictionary to build pages in the same way By default the Application Builder always creates two pages one to display data from an included table list page and one to update the table maint page The two pages are linked by a unique field If you look at the Employees table the emp_id field uniquely identifies each record in the table For this reason the Application Builder sets the control type for this field to a Link control and configures the properties so when this field
345. his SarterDirection 3 i public CCGetFaramiparameter_name default value 168 Using Parameter Info When typing a member function enter an open parenthesis character to see the parameter list AutoComplete displays the complete declaration for the function in a ToolTip The first parameter in the list appears in boldface CCGetParam CCGetParam parameter_name default_value As you type the function parameters the next parameter that you add becomes boldface COGetParan departments id d CCGetParam parameter_name default_value For overloaded functions the parameter list gives you a choice of which function you want to use To switch between functions use the arrow keys i e getPage getParameter il lobe Sting Page getParameter String name String defaultValue name a Sting specifying the name of the parameter Press ESC at any time to dismiss the list or continue typing until you have completed the function Typing the closing parenthesis also dismisses the parameter list If you dismiss the parameter list before completing the function and want to view it again press CTRL SHIFT SPACE Using Complete Word The Complete Word types the rest of a variable or function name once you have entered enough characters to differentiate the term Type in the first few letters of the name and then press CTRL SPACE AutoComplete completes the name for you If what you have typed cannot be resolved the
346. his makes it easier to maintain consistent functionality and appearance as well as reduce the size of pages that share common content Fa Uon A TaskManager CodeCharge Studio 5 p i Home Data Dictionary Builders Forms Edit i teh naps Page 7 Open Oe Add Connection 22 Server ae re h g 13 Login Page wy Save 4 Add Diagram Qi Server Connections Blank z Pare ae Designs _ Publish Publish Liwe lome Source View Page lt Application Builder Delete lt 7 Settings Publishing Settings Project Page Page Control Pages Project Publishing Tools Project Explorer IX Properties IX leg TaskManager Data Events Format Pages de Styles 4 E footer Diagrams yj Connections Resources Common Files Gy Project E EA Files Expl New Includable Page 131 Absolute and Relative URLs Concerning includable pages it is possible to include a page located in a different folder However the included page should not have manually created relative links to other pages or resources For instance a relative link is provided in the pages as follows lt img src logo gif gt Note that the relative link would not work if the includable page was included into another page in a different folder This is because the relative URL would no longer point to the correct resource However a fully qualified URL would work regardless of the location of the includable page For instance th
347. his option lets you change the shape size and other visual options Button Visual aspects of buttons Menu Visual aspects of menus Other Text font scheme used and page background pattern Additionally Style Builder provides Build Random Style button which you can use to create random styles by applying random values to the above settings This can be useful to generate alternative style patterns that you may not have considered rs Style Builder Apricot Style Builder Build Custom Style Color 7 Autumntene i Senem My chestnut wi Saturation a ee Table 3 Header Terracotta Coloration Loving autumn shading w Brushwood fa Buoy m Milestone w Mushroom C ol mn Caption Ochre Row Text E Creamsicle Alt Row Text wE Harvest m Pumpkin Spice ha Tropicanna i Vanilla Forest glade z a Random Menu Type Horizontal Passive Text Active Text Passive Text Active Text Page Header List of Records Row Link Alt Row Link Modify Record Text Box Other A Font Scheme a Background Burgund j m 9 Y List Box Value Zs Warm fa Deodar Hornbeam ta ________ Modify Renamens Remove Check Box Text Area rai 177 Applying styles dynamically at run time You may want to provide functionality within your web site to allow your visitors to change the style in which your web site appears CodeCharge Studio can help you support such functionality by allowing you to a
348. his option you also need to select the page in the Page property of the action Remove all expired Cleans up the system by deleting expired cache objects pages from cache An example of the Manage Cache action is to place it on an article maintenance page and configure the action to remove the page that displays articles from the cache when a new article is added or an existing article is updated You can also use the Manage Cache action with a URL parameter For example type admin page php cache clear to clear the whole cache during testing after content updates or if you detect Website problems that might be related to the cache We also recommend that the Manage Cache action is placed on restricted administrative pages so only authorized users can remove the cached data Server Profiles Introduction CodeCharge Studio can store publishing settings for several servers that are used during web development and for publishing the application The most common scenario is that you are testing your application locally you have web server and runtime environment configured on your development machine and after passing the tests the files are uploaded to the production server Any other scenarios with greater number of server configurations are possible with CodeCharge Studio Local development testing staging and production servers are possible to configure each keeping its settings in a configuration unit called a Server Profile SP stores
349. hows the actual HTML code for a page as well as any style and Javascript code that might be on the page If you are familiar with HTML you can add your own HTML code or adjust the existing code as desired Switching to Design mode will show the appearance of the HTML code when rendered in a browser Code This shows the language specific code for a page For instance if using the ASP amp Templates language this mode will display the ASP VBScript code for a page Preview This mode is used to preview a page without running it off the server The page is shown without the special tags or borders that are visible in Design mode The user cannot make any changes to the page while in Preview mode Live Page This is used to execute the page from the server Any database content including pages and styles are displayed in their entirety The page is fully functional and can be used to navigate post or adjust database content or perform any other functionality included in the page Error messages are displayed if problems are encountered with any of the page code Design Mode Design mode allows the user to construct a page and see the appearance of the different components on the page As the name implies Design mode is more concerned with the appearance of the page and not the functionality Use the Toolbox to add various components to the page such as form controls plain text and images Tables and cascading style sheets can be used to format the la
350. ical Code Generation One of the biggest challenges of making code generation practical is to provide developers with full flexibility of modifying the generated code while not losing the advantage of automation CodeCharge Studio s core technology handles these requirements very well and gives users the full flexibility of working with the generated code Modified portions of the code are locked from being overwritten during subsequent code generations therefore eliminating the need of importing modified code back into the application source When publishing a project or page CodeCharge Studio generates source code that is then copied to the web server to run the application Users can choose and change the programming language at any time for example generate an application in Active Server Pages on their local Windows computer then generate the same application in Java as Servlet or JSP for final deployment on any Java application server The code generated by CodeCharge Studio is very similar to human code and can be easily enhanced outside of CodeCharge Studio by any developer No other software on the market generates usable practical programming code in as many technologies as those supported by CodeCharge Studio 24 System Requirements It is highly recommended that you be familiar with database design or have an existing database that you want to use as the basis for your web application It is also desired that you have prior programmi
351. ically CVS When creating new CodeCharge Studio project with CVS Source Control configured and Add New Project to Source Control option selected the following dialog is displayed Project settings W Enable Version Control for the project CVS Root Build Module Name NewProjectl Test Help OK Cancel It includes the same options as D2c Project Settings Source Control dialog with CVS provider selected CVS Root for connecting the repository can by typed in the combo box or new CVS Root can be built using Build button Test button can be used to check if the connection succeeds 128 File Operation Confirmation Prompt Dialog Depending on the settings configured in the CodeCharge Studio Source Control options various file operation confirmation prompt dialogs will be displayed after executing operations from the context or File Source Control menus These dialogs share common layout with only few a specific features and serve for selecting which files will fall into the Source Control operation initiated by developer The file list includes checkboxes for selecting and unselecting files to execute Source Control operation on OK Confirms the selection and operation Cancel Stops the Source Control operation from executing at all Comment Text area to provide textual Description to be attached to the file version in the repository Keep checked out Checkbox preserves files locked for editing after o
352. ich the builder generates forms based on the selections made h EP Gh eY oY gh m Grid Builder Record Builder Report Builder Calendar Builder Menu Builder Autocomplete Builder Dependant ListBoxes Builder Autofill Builder Search Builder Directory Builder Authentication Builder Master Detail Builder Grid and Record Builder Editable Grid Builder Gallery Builder Service Builder Used to create grid forms that can optionally have a related search form Used to automate the process of creating record forms where database content can be inserted edited or deleted Used to create report forms Used to create calendar forms Used to create menus Used for simplify the process of adding an Autocomplete feature to forms Used for simplify the process of adding an Dependant ListBoxes feature to forms Used for simplify the process of adding an Autofill feature to forms Used to enter values into controls such that when the values are submitted Used to create a directory on the page based on the database table Used to input authentication details Login and Password that are required to grant access to users in sites that implement security Used to display a list of all the items while a record and editable grid form display detailed information about a selected item Used to display multiple records and a link is provided from the grid form records to the record Used to crea
353. id gt department name lt a gt OK Cancel The Static address for the web page is just a placeholder You want to redirect the browser to the page containing the form you want to pass the parameter to e g the current page in this example but since you have not created the page yet it is not possible to select this value In your own applications if you know the page you want to direct the browser to select it for the address Link Parameter x Source Type Expression Parameter Source department_id Parameter name dept_id Preview dept id department id OK Cancel Ordinarily you would select a database field for the source of the parameter however since this control is not part of a form yet e g a Grid there is no datasource so set the Source Type to an expression Once you have added this database field to a form you will need to change the Source Type to a datasource column Next we want to change the default title that will appear on the employee list Click on the employees table and for this example change the Form Title Display to Employee List 409 The employee list is displayed in a grid with captions running across the top of the grid We want to change the captions of each column to be more expressive than the defaults so change the captions as shown below For each caption select the column of the employees table then click on the Display tab a
354. id i e Grid and Search forms Grid and Record i e Grid Record and Search forms Gallery Gallery form Grid i e Grid and Search forms Record and Search CodeCharge Studio comes with a number of built in templates which are located in the Templates folder of your installation path The built in templates include those corresponding to the layout choices previously available in the builders plus additional templates with extra layouts and styling Editing Form Templates The form template uses specially marked blocks of HTML code called template blocks plus predefined tags used to represent dynamic content The template blocks begin and end with an HTML comment e g BEGIN Error END Error They mark special code that the builder expects to find in the template For example the template block called ControlContent in the Horizontal template for a Record form is replaced by the builder with the controls and captions defined by the datasource you selected in the builder The whole section represents one data row When the form is generated by the builder on your web page the tag ControlTitle is replaced with the field caption for the data row and the ControlTemplate is replaced with the control corresponding to the the data item The default caption and control type is defined in the Data Dictionary and can be optionally overridden in the builder The HTML for the caption and control in the form template coincides with the default
355. id Builder _ o Data Source 2 fig Connection ee Hal Lele aes b No records i Fields for the Grid 23 Layout 24 Sorting 3 Options s Style Order by Ti t 349 Grid Data Source Settings Data Source Build Query Available Fields Fields for the Grid Order by Select the table or view to use as the data source Opens the Visual Query Builder window where you can setup a SQL query that will act as the grid data source This list box shows all the fields available in the table or view These are the fields to be shown in the grid They are selected from among the Available Fields Refreshes the connection if you make changes to the database while using the builder Select a form field then click this button to move it upwards in the order of appearance Select a form field then click this button to move it downwards in the order of appearance Click this button to add it some fields to the form Select a form field then click this button to remove it from the form Opens the dialog with advanced properties To activate the button select a field in the Fields for the Grid section Note The following field types have advanced properties CheckBox List ListBox Radio Button Link and Image Link CheckBox List ListBox or Radio Button Clicking on the button will open the List DataSourse dialog illustrated below Link and Image Link Clicking on the button will open the dialog with link prop
356. id is a hybrid of the structure of a grid form and a record form The form also contains a title with descriptive text about the contents of the form The user can change this text or remove it entirely e An Editable Grid contains an HTML hidden input field called FormState and a template variable called FormScript These two controls play a role in the internal functioning of the Editable Grid and should not be altered or removed e It might appear strange that the Editable Grid has two rows reserved for the display of error messages However the two rows serve two different purposes The first error row is used to display error messages that pertain to the entire Editable Grid Within the HTML mode this first row is composed of HTML code such as that shown below lt BEGIN Error gt lt tr gt lt td class ClearErrorDataTD colspan 2 gt Error lt td gt lt tr gt lt l END Error gt e The second error row is used to display errors that pertain to particular rows within the Editable Grid For example if a value in a submitted row does not pass the validation check upon submission an error will be displayed above the offending row when the form is displayed again If multiple rows have errors each row will be preceded with an error row containing the appropriate error text The HTML code for this second row is of the form lt BEGIN RowError gt lt tr gt lt td class ClearErrorDatalD colspan 4 gt Error lt
357. ied a Design to your page See Using Artisteer Designs and Using Master Pages for more details about using Designs and Master Pages a Grid Builder Qa Connection W Data Source Search E3 Layout ak Sorting veer ma ut _ Apricot BE Navigation og N Options i F post_id cate t No records Records per pa Apply to Page Style Builder i Component aili Cancel Back When you have a Design applied to your page and you run the builder you cannot apply a Page style Your options in the builder are to either use the CSS i e style in your design to apply to all components or use the Design for the page styling and then individually select a different Component style for the form generated from the builder If you do not choose a specific Component style then the forms all use the styling defined in the Design Artisteer designs for CodeCharge Studio include their own stylesheet and related files e g icons used by CodeCharge Studio components such as the Grid form Because Page style depends on generic HTML which is the same type of method that Artisteer designs use there may be conflicts between forms you have created with Page style and any Artisteer design you have also applied to your page To prevent such conflicts a new style has been added to the dialog called Use styles from Design This is not really a style like the other styles you can select from When you select this
358. ient event or condition upon which the feature is executed You can select one or multiple events or conditions via the provided dialog Sample Implementation UpdateDB UpdateDB1 Enabled Ves Mame UpdateDE1 Connection IntranetbB ZZ Operation Type Update E Operation parameters none E Start event Update OnClick 436 Custom Update Custom Update type Table Update Table to Update employees Get Form Controls Parameters Parameter name Type Default Value emp login emp login Control emp_password emp password Control emp name emp name Control title title Control group id group id Control department _id department _id Control email email Control mirti e mirti e Cantril OK Cancel 437 Update Panel Update Panel is the panel component with an assigned AJAX feature also called Update Panel that causes any forms placed within the panel to interact without page refresh For example placing a search form and grid form within an update panel will result in the search and grid interacting with each other without page refresh The grid navigator will also work without refreshing the page To add an update panel to your page select it from the Forms tab of the Toolbox window You can then copy and paste other components ia a E T Data Dictionary 22 Editable Grid into the update panel f npigyeg Direc
359. ify the selected style The selected style will also be set as the default project style if no default style has been selected Note that the list of available styles contains three special styles named No Style Dynamic and Basic Their purpose is as follows gd Grid Builder Oa Connection wy of Postid Category id W Post Title a Y Pi post_idj category_id post_title ip lA Data Source i Ho records Search E3 Layout l Sorting OG Navigation z Options Apply to Page Style Builder Component 172 No Style No style will be applied and a simplified HTML will be created If you do not apply a style you cannot change this later unless you re edit with the builder Select this option only if you are certain that you do not need to use a style No style does not mean that there is NO styling applied to your code No style refers to a special and particular style which includes a stylesheet and icons which you can find in your project folder however the CSS is missing most of the formatting rules as in the other styles You cannot change the style with the change style option in the page context menu but you can change the style later if you re edit your form with the builder Dynamic A temporary style will be applied with specially formatted HTML that allows a different style to be selected at run time by Web application users Dynamic refers to the way in which the H
360. ilders have two types of text text that is part of the form e g form caption button text etc and text corresponding to your database items For example when you run the Record Builder the caption for the record form includes by default the text Add Edit This type of text depends on the default language selected and the translation text in the translation file The caption for the Record form uses the CCS_ RecordFormPrefix key in the translation file If your default locale is English the string added to your web page is from the English translation file If your default locale is French then the text Ajouter Editer from the French translation file is added to your web page Which text appears on the web page depends on how the web page is requested as described below The other text such as a field caption is based on the database items the form is bound to e g the caption for the database field product_name is by default Product Name These strings are not based on the translation file or translated in any way The text appears however way the item is defined in the database The builders have a Internationalized option under the Connection settings that affects how the builder places the text on the page If this option is not selected the text is inserted as described above some text e g form title is inserted from the translation file and some text e g field caption is copied from the database description
361. ill need to select the Designs button again and select the Apply design to this page option Otherwise if a design is already assigned to this page simply change the selected default design e The Apply design to this page option is also an available selection in the context menu in Design or HTML mode Selecting this option applies the currently selected default design to the page Clicking on one of the designs displayed under the Designs button on the ribbon bar changes the default design 148 e You can also apply a design manually by modifying the Master Page property for a Page component If you want to apply a design directly click on the ellipsis next to the Master Page property then find and select the master page corresponding to the design you want to apply Properties Ix Data Events Format General Attributes Restricted Ves Access Denied Page Convert URL To None Includable No SSL Access Only No Enable Caching No A la ste P qE i TE F CCS PathToMasterPage MasterPage ccp s ASP NET C InMotion Framework Validate Request True Scripting Support Automatic Specifies Master Page with design for this page e Do not apply a design this way if you already have applied a design using one of the other methods e g from the Designs icon on the ribbon bar Before changing the design remove the previous design first otherwise your page content may be corrupted e When y
362. immediately how the design would look on your web page Changing the Design Applied to a Web Page e Note using this variable and dynamic design selection implies that all of your published designs are consistent and include all the placeholders mapped to your web pages otherwise you may get errors 153 Using Stylesheets When you run the Application Builder you may notice that you can apply a design to a page or a style but not both This is because the CSS coding in the design or in the style may conflict with each other To prevent problems CodeCharge Studio only allows you to apply one or the other type of styling However this doesn t mean that you cannot later apply both a style and a design to your web page however it is recommended that if you use styles apply them to components only not the whole page and avoid setting a default style except Basic since all new pages will be created with this style Refer to Working with Styles for more information about working with Styles and designs Using Form Templates Form Templates are CodeCharge Studio pages you can use to create a customized appearance for the forms generated by the CodeCharge Studio Builders such as the Grid builder and the Record builder You can use form templates to add change delete HTML elements such as separators or just change the layout and styling of your forms The builders you can apply templates to are Authentication i e Login form Editable Gr
363. important to remember that the mapping between the panels on your content page is based on the olaceholder property not their name For example even if my master page has a placeholder called content and my content page has a panel called content my content panel must have a placeholder property named content otherwise it will not be merged with the master page correctly When you already have content on a page e g a grid form but no design when you apply a master page all the content on your existing page is moved to a panel called content Even if your master page is missing this placeholder when you apply a design to a page this content panel is created automatically Typically you won t want all of your content mapped to one placeholder Typically you want to have several different placeholders which are laid out and formatted differently Once everything is moved to the content panel you need to cut and paste the content e g forms to other panels And as mentioned before you need to make sure that your content panels are mapped to the master page correctly using the placeholder property If you have content that you may want to reuse on your web pages you may find it useful to move the content to an include page then add a reference to the include page on the panels mapped to your placeholders For example if you have a Search form which you want to reuse on different p
364. ince the login form does not handle database content Specify whether Get or Post parameters should be preserved when the form is submitted This property is always left blank since the login form does not handle database content This property is always left blank since the login form does not handle database content This property is always left blank since the login form does not handle database content This property is always left blank since the login form does not handle database content This property is always left blank since the login form does not handle database content This property is always left blank since the login form does not handle database content 206 Login Form Actions Since a login form is a scaled down version of a record form there must be a special property that distinguishes the login form from other record forms This special property comes in the form of a Login action which is placed on the OnClick Server event of the Login button located in the login form The Login action adds code to the page When the Login button is clicked the added code calls a CodeCharge function which will perform the authentication operation and redirect the user based on the outcome of the login attempt When you build a login form using the Authentication Builder the Login action is automatically added to the button If you build the form manually you can add the Login action to the OnClick event of the Login button by selecti
365. included in CodeCharge Studio or any standard encryption functions of other programming languages for example if you want to be able to decrypt passwords later or email them to end users If using PHP with MySQL consider using the MD5 function which is supported in a compatible way by both PHP and MySQL This will make it easier to convert your application to a different database type or programming language should you find a need to do so in the future Configuring password encryption support in CodeCharge Studio Project Settings To configure the authentication login functionality to utilize encrypted passwords navigate to Project Settings gt Security gt Advanced and configure the encrypted password validation settings Refer to Advanced Security Settings for more information Creating a user registration user maintenance and password update forms that save encrypted passwords 209 After enabling the Password Encryption feature in the Advanced Security Settings the Application Builder and Record Builder will display an additional password encryption option when creating new forms based on the default users table as shown below i Record Builder Title Ug Connection Add Edit Users 5 Data Source Actions M Allow Insert F slow Update IY Allow Delete M Confirmation dialog F Include Cancel button Display buttons as Buttons Images Security M Encrypt password valu
366. ing Client Variables Memory Variables Mappings Mail Server Charting Java and JvM Archives and Deployment Settings Summary DATA amp SERVICES veritafollections Verity k2 Server Data Sources Add and manage your data source connections and Data Source Names DSNsi You use a DSN to connect ColdFusion to a variety of data sources Add New Data Source Data Source Mame Driver Please select a valid driver type r Web Services Connected Data Sources DataSourceName Driver Stats cFsnippets ODBC Socket DEBUGGING amp LOGGING Debugging Settings Debugging IP Addresses Logging Settings Log Files Scheduled Tasks System Probes Code Analyzer EXTENSIONS QQQ cmane ovest a ee ee Cl a ae QQQ eee CO a ee Verify All Connections Java Applets CFA Tags Custom Tag Paths CORBA Connectors SECURITY CF Admin Password RDS Fassword Sandbox Security 217 From the Data Sources window of the ColdFusion Administrator you can create data sources for DB2 Informix Access ODBC Sockets Oracle SQL Server and Sybase For detailed information on how to create the different types of data sources please refer to the ColdFusion Administrator documentation Once you have configured the data source you can specify the data source name when configuring the server side connection in CodeCharge Studio If you do not have access to the ColdFusion Administrator because you are using a server belonging
367. ing 6 simple steps to generate a gallery Step 1 Creating a Database Connection Select or create a database connection from where the data shown in the gallery will be retrieved Here you can select one of the existing database connections create a new connection or select one of the sample databases Pa hg Gallery Builder Use an existing database connection Intranet Create ty or select a sample database C Internet Database C Intranet Database A pe l AE Internationalized use translation resources res BG N Save builder options Click Next to proceed to step 2 340 Step 2 Gallery Data Source In this step you need to specify a data source and the fields to be included in the gallery cs Gallery Builder If Create Search Filter T Connection oe Interactive Search U4 Data Source Records per page listhox LEN Layout 7 vertical Horizontal Layout HTML Template from file DivSearch cco built in i Options 7 Advanced md Sorting A Search Fields BE Navigation emp_name So Style Saja Control Type xl 341 Gallery Data Source Settings Data Source Build Query Available Fields Gallery Fields Cc cy rs KI m m Control Type Select a table or view to base your gallery on Opens Visual Query Builder where you can design the database query or provide your own SQL statement or Stored Procedu
368. ing a style to be applied to the Menu You can select No Style if you don t want to use any style or a ce Dynamic a if you want to assign a style dynamically at runtime Click the Finish button to finalize and created the menu component on your form PS Menu Builder lu Type 5 Static Data lr Layout ob Apply to Page Style Builders Component 379 Creating database driven menus Step 2 Specifying Database Connection Select or create a database connection from where the data for the menu will be retrieved You can select one of the existing database connections create a new connection or select one of the sample databases i Menu Builder Use an existing database connection IntranetDB Creates i Type or select a sample database I Data Source C Internet Database _ C Intranet Database la Layout G Style Internationalized use translation resources resz MW Save builder options 380 Step 3 Specifying Menu Data Source In this step you specify and the database table and fields containing menu items and options Database driven Menu Items Menu Item Table The database table or view containing menu items Key Id field The key field of the menu item table Parent Item Id field Database field used to identify parents ids of menu items in a hierarchical menu structure Root identifier Value of the parent parent id used to iden
369. ing can only be used for OLEDB type connections For ODBC connections you must use a DSN CodeCharge Studio provides a convenient way to build a connection string without having to know the particulars of the connector used or the database type The following are the common configuration options available for the design side Connection Connection This unique user selected name identifies the connection No two connections within the same Name project can have identical names You can use multiple connections with different names to for example use multiple databases in your project Use ODBC This option should be selected if the connection to the database will be through ODBC Using the Data Source list box field you can select one of the ODBC DSN s that is currently registered on the machine Name Alternatively you can create a new ODBC DSN by clicking on the New button CodeCharge Studio automatically installs two ODBC DSNs for the sample databases installed with the IDE called CCSIntranet and CCSInternet Use Connection This option should be selected if you plan not to use ODBC This option specifies a connection String string that contains the details necessary to make a connection to the database Some of the details normally included in the connection string are database driver to be used location of the database file and the username and password needed to connect to the database If you are an experienced user you ca
370. ing is requested the application first checks if a cached version of the page exists based on the page name and specified parameters If a cached version is found and not expired the page is retrieved from the cache and output to the user s Web browser If a cached version is not found then the page is executed output and saved into the cache for future reuse You can set the cache to expire after a specified time Note When a cached version of a page is used the controls on the page are not initialized and events not fired except for the On Cache event Cache Key Each cached object page is stored as a set of three components cache key expiration date stored as a number and the cached data itself The key is used to find a specific cache similar to using key fields in a database to find specific records A simple example of a cache key is the page name but more complex keys are used in practice as each page may display different information based on the URL form parameters or session variables Each cache key consists of e Page name including relative path such as folder1 page1 e Set of parameter values for example product_id 5 For internationalized pages CodeCharge Studio automatically includes the current language as one of the parameters in the key Due to the potential large size of cache keys they are converted to their 128 bit representation also known as hash CRC or checksum using an MD5 encryption algorithm and the
371. ink to the record form you can now proceed to configure options for the record form itself This is done under the Record tab of the Details window Fr tow Details users Search Grid amp Record on One Page Include in Menu Search Grid Link Editable Grid Record Preview W Active Data Source users r Primary Key user_id r Allow Insert Custom Insert Allow Update Custom Update Allow Delete Custom Delete Include Cancel button Available Fields education id fax first_name gender_id last_name group_id city image_url email income id ip_add Fields for the Record Page Name wusers_maint Control Type TextBox 309 Link Details Settings Active Primary Key Available Fields Fields for the Record Control Type Page Name Indicates your intention to create a record form Select the primary key field in the table This list box shows all the fields available in the table These are the fields to be shown in the record form They are selected from among the Available Fields Select an Available Field then click this button to add it to the form Click this button to add ALL Available Fields to the form select a form field then click this button to remove it from the form Click this button to remove all fields from the form Select a form field then click this button to move it upwards in the order of appearance Select a for
372. inks To have images instead of text for the navigation links Disabled links are not visible Links to pages that cannot logically be browsed are not shown e g if you are on page one you cannot browse using the first or previous links Page Numbers Apart from having the four links mentioned above specify whether you also want to have links to the individual pages and how they should appear Number of Pages Specify how many page links should be displayed Show total pages Display the total number of pages that can be browsed Add Page Size Select the page size for the grid Selection a Master Detail Builder Navigation z Jamis No Page Navigator Detail 4 4 5 of 10 c T Type C l lt lt lt 5o0f10 gt gt 2l Data Source c First Prev 1 23 4 5 of 10 Next Last Manual Input 24 Sorting C Custom Modify W Add Page Size Selection J l Options 372 Step 9 Options the Editable Grid Editable Grid Field Settings Grid layout Records per page No records found message Record separator Display the total number of records Tabular layout represents data in an ordinary datasheet view Columnar layout places each data source field into one row with column caption on its left Justified layout represents each data source field in two consecutive rows field name is placed in one row and the data is shown in the second row Specify the default number of records t
373. installed on your target server For example if you choose to use an ODBC connection you have to download and the install the Microsoft ODBC Net Data Provider This is not installed by default with the Net framework SDK If you attempt to publish a project and the ODBC Net data provider is not installed you will receive a compilation error stating that Microsoft Data Odbc dll could not be found This is one of the files that comes with the Microsoft ODBC Net data provider The server side connection can be configured to use several different types of Net providers The system providers refer to connectors that are normally already installed on your server If the connector you select doesn t work make sure that the provider is installed on the server and the machine contfig file on the server is properly configured You can find more details about the system providers at www msdn microsoft com System Data OleDb Net Framework Data Provider for OleDb System Data SqlClient Net Framework Data Provider for SQL Server System Data ODBC Net Framework Data Provider for ODBC System Data OracleClient Net Framework Data Provider for Oracle Using a Custom Provider Apart from the Net data providers other database vendors may introduce other drivers beyond those that come with the Net framework SDK For instance Oracle introduced the ODP Net data provider that provides native support for connecting to Oracle databases The ODP Net pr
374. io 5 X Data Dictionary Builders Forms Edit Fullscreen Options amp 5 Editable Grid Update Panel Tabbed View 34 Sorter Directory Dialog Panel gi Tabbed Tab i DE Navigator Grid Record Report Panel Include HE Calendar Template Panel gg PlaceHolder page Path Forms i Components Project Explorer Ox H NewPagel x X Properties Le Paes l A Data Events Format je Pages NewPaged MyLabel NewPagel x Diagrams d Attributes Ea Connections Restricted Mo T Resources Access Denied Pag 3 Common Files Convert URL To Mone Includable Mo SSL Access Only Mo Ea Enable Caching Mo 4 gt l Master Page Design HTML Code Preview Live Page Messages rix Gd Pr Ea Fl USD For Help press F1 ing Coldd NUM INS 76 Specifying Project Settings Caching Settings CodeCharge Studio cache settings improve the performance of the generated application by re using previously generated output in subsequent requests By enabling this setting it is possible to limit the number of database queries and the need of re generating the dynamic content with each request to the application Method Defines the type of the caching method It can be Database or Custom Connection Defines the connection using for connecting to the cache database Table Defines the table that stores cache data Cache Key Field Defines the column that stores the cache entry identifier Session ID
375. ion session application cookie HTML atribute of the Control value innerHtml etc Sample Implementation RemoteDLookUp RemoteDLookUp1 Enabled Yes Name RemoteDLookUpi Expression County Domain countries Criteria country id gt 20 Connection InternetDE Convert result to Text Start event Button Insert onclick Target Name My variable Target Type Variable Control Property value 434 AJAX Tabbed Tab Description The Tabbed Tab feature displays panel content as a tab of a Tabbed View Note CodeCharge Studio also includes a component called TabbedTab which automatically adds a new panel onto the page when the Tabbed Tab feature is assigned to it To create a tabbed section on your page add a TabbedView component to your page then add and include multiple TabbedTab components within it Alternatively you can assign the Tabbed View feature to an existing panel then include multiple panels and assign a Tabbed Tab feature to each of them Supported Components Panel Properties Name User assigned name identifying the feature within HTML Caption Caption to be displayed with the tab Activate Activate Tab control by action You can select one or multiple events or conditions via the provided dialog Sample Implementation Tabbed Tab JTabbedTabi Name JTabbedTabl Caption This is Tab 1 Activate AJAX Tabbed View Description The Tabbed View feature enables a panel to include navi
376. ion error because as you may recall we did not fully define the Link control properties in the data dictionary e g parameter source type Because we joined multiple tables the Grid Builder combined all of the default form titles into one heading Modify the title in the builder to Employee List The other options in the Grid Builder are unimportant for this example The final web page should look something like the picture at the top of this section 411 Working with Ajax Ajax Feature Builders AJAX Autocomplete Builder The Autocomplete Builder simplifies the process of adding an Autocomplete feature to your forms To invoke the Autocomplete Builder select the Builders tab at the top of the Toolbox ribbon bar Home Data Dictionary Builders Forms Edit al Master Detail p ge rial Search F aay 7 9 Editable Grid Ag Gallery Record Report Calendar Menu al Grid and Record Directory View amp Edit Components ks Advanced on a H Authentication i en Service Autofill Dependent ListBoxes Step 1 Choose a database connection and builder options Autocomplete Builder Use an existing database connection IntemetDB Create 3 Settings or select a sample database Internet Database Intranet Database l Internationalized use translation resources res M Save builder options Use an existing database Select a previously configured database connection
377. ipt based components does not require installation of a third party component Pure ASP Upload Author Jacob Beezle Gilley Email avis7 airmail net Modified by Will Bickford Email woic16 hotmail com Script Upload using ADODB Stream The Uploading Script which uses ADODB Stream is faster than the script based upload components The secret to the speed lies within ADO s Recordset and Stream objects It is recommended to use ASP VBScript Upload using ADODB Stream if COM based components are not available If using one of the COM based components the component must be installed and properly configured on the server where the ASP pages will be published If an ASP project is going to have one or more File Upload components in its pages the File Upload Component property of the project must be set to indicate the file upload component that is available on the server To locate this File Upload Component property click on the project name in the Project Explorer window so that the project properties are exposed in the Properties window If you set the File Upload property of the project to blank then the File Upload code will not be generated in Common Files Data Events Format 4 AppBuilderProject General Code Language ASP 3 0 with Templates Publishing Local Network Security Type None Home Page Default HTML Encoding windows 1252 Publish J5 library Yes ASP 3 0 with Templates Secure Server URL Code Page Locale Iden
378. is unable to retrieve a record then only the Insert button is shown If there is a Cancel button in the form it is always shown regardless of the operations that could be performed 246 Web Reporting and Report Form Description Web reporting functionality in CodeCharge Studio provides a great way to present or print data in detailed and grouped formats with automatically calculated fields Reports can be based on single or multi table queries as the data source The query used as the basis of a report can return either detailed or grouped data In most cases the detailed data is used and you create the necessary groupings within the report s design fr uomen Bie gt CESS Laos F Cat Looe heer ee j TH ii om oF H 3 Ho Wis asane Dpi ir and tae ak n at r i ae au Certo ba Pe pah S ed Pt Eis Pe P Catipney Bak Pica Category The poe Pitsel gd Paitini gi Auening Toim Runceng Tela Gregory Reper Beginning ASP Databases 1009 pam 21 06 aiw mas man maea S poa ppm ms an fisik paai 32i ama Hee 27 00 ERTES HTL A Firb design 1000 veb Saa Tiai and Tikki 1 05 Hus s20uer mate saw ESET 106 amw ee Firini Peg wate Deeg a Kyte 421 96 ALEE F562 taes ais Gobe gary Tetak 115 90 Paagracuring 131 30 LELE ara ras ars ma le ee ETET HiH Hava ane arms Haag ata M2075 46 27I EEEE PL
379. isting project under source control 1 Make sure default Source Control provider is configured properly 2 Open existing project or create new project using File New Project menu item 3 Open Project Settings dialog and choose Source Control section or right click project node in the Project Explorer choosing Add to Source Control command to use default Source Control provider 4 Select the option Enable Version Control for the project and configure chosen Source Control provider 5 Depending on the Source Control a dialog will be displayed for the user to choose files to be added to version control How to retrieve existing project from the repository 1 Create new project matching the project s name from the repository and remove blank NewPage7 page created by default 2 Open Project Settings dialog and choose Source Control section or right click project node in the Project Explorer choosing Add to Source Control command to use default Source Control provider 3 Select the option Enable Version Control for the project and configure chosen Source Control provider 4 Let CCS retrieve the files from the repository or use Get Latest Version Update operation selecting the project node 5 Right click project root node in the Project Explorer view and choose Refresh command to get the tree refreshed with downloaded files How to add new page to source control Make sure your project is added to Source Control Choose a folder you wan
380. ith Active following its name New This button displays a dialog to specify a new Server Profile name Note Double clicking an empty non item area in the After specifying the name new Server Profile is created and depending on the global Server Profile settings a reminder message is displayed informing to configure publishing and connections settings for the new Server Profile If the name specified is not unique within project scope the notification is displayed Add from file This button displays common file open dialog that allows to select another project s CodeCharge Studio file which includes its Server Profiles to extract and copy to the current project scope New Server Profile entries are created in the current project as a copy of the original project s settings If extracted Server Profile names are already defined in the current project they are renamed to maintain uniqueness Similarly to adding a profile an Server Profile reminder dialog is displayed if configured globally Rename This button displays Rename profile window for the Server Profile selected in the list It can be used for customization of an existing Server Profile s name Note Double clicking an item in the Server Profiles list has the same effect Duplicate This button duplicates the currently selected SP by copying its settings into a new SP The new SP s name defaults to ServerN where N is a consecutive number the SP can be renamed afterwa
381. ithin the Style css file used by the current page or grid and can be modified as needed fw Grid and Record Components Builder E Title Haj Connection List of Articles CE Grid No records found message No records w Non breaking space in empty cells Ra Source Search Display the total number of records Add Panels to each column Layout Alternate records Use CSS style 4 Sorting z a C Create alternate controls Navigation Click Next to proceed to step 8 362 Step 8 Linking the Grid to the Record The last step in configuring the grid is selecting the field to be used to link the records in the grid to the details in the record form You can select any one of the fields that are already in the grid or specify a new column to act as the link to the record form Ea Grid and Record Components Builder Select the Link Field ty Connection CE Grid ag Record Grid column article _id article title category_id article desc date add date end 4 Data Source 6 Actions E3 Layout Go Style New Grid column Detail Note Link will be created for selected column Click Next to proceed to step 9 363 Step 9 Configuring the Record Form The record form will be based on the same table as was the grid form but you have the option of selecting different fields to appear in the record form After adding the fields you should also select the Control T
382. ive options Used to present a list of options from which the user can select one Same as a dropdown with the distinction of being able to display multiple options Performs a specified action when clicked Serves the purpose of submitting all the fields within the form to the designated action page Used to return the fields in a form to the state they originally were in when the page loaded Graphical equivalent of the Submit Button Used to embed an image in the current page Same as a HyperLink an image is used to represent the link Non breaking space meaning that a line break cannot occur in its place Ends the current line of text and continues the flow of content on the next line Used to demarcate sections of a page Represents a paragraph Named anchor that can be the destination of another link Represents a comment The Find command is used to find instances of some text within a single file that is opened in the document window Along with searches performed in multiple files The Replace command is used to find and replace instances of some text within a single file that is opened in the document window Along with searches performed in multiple files you can also search and replace text within multiple files This dialog box allows you to move to a specific line in the active document 59 Table Functions The Table tab is shown only when a table is selected PAo og 8 Home Data Dictionar
383. key used to encrypt the user login and password before storing them in a cookie CCS automatically generates a default encryption key unique for each project which then can be changed in this dialog However changing the encryption key will reset the Remember me feature by requiring users with previously saved passwords to re login manually during their next visit Advanced Security Settings Session variables User ID Variable UserID User Login Variable UserLogin Group ID Variable GroupID Encrypt passwords using Database function 3 Code Expression Enable Remember Me feature Cookie name Expiring in days Sliding expiration Encryption Key Http only cookie OK Cancel 93 Connecting to Databases The ability to easily put database content on the web is one of the main features that makes CodeCharge Studio stand out from other web development tools There is a wide range of applicable options each with its own pro s and con s It would be inconceivable to accommodate all or the vast majority of the different options if each were unique Thankfully this is not the case since the Structured Query Language SQL provides a uniform way of interacting with databases and their content In general four main components make up the database experience Database Software Otherwise known as archive or repository e g Access Oracle MySQL etc Driver provider To Connect to the Database Essentially thi
384. l Button HTML lt INPUT TYPE button D Button1 NAME Button1 VALUE Button1 gt Image Buttoni Description A Button is a control that performs a specified action when clicked Usually the OnClick event of the button is assigned some script code that executes the desired function Checkbox HTML lt INPUT type checkbox id Checkbox1 name Checkbox1 gt Description A checkbox is used to toggle the selection of an option It can otherwise be viewed as a Boolean or On Off control 282 Dropdown HTML lt SELECT ID Select1 NAME Select1 gt lt OPTION gt Select1 lt OPTION gt lt SELECT gt Image Description A Dropdown is used to present a list of options from which the user can select one The user clicks on the dropdown arrow to view all the options available Form HTML lt form gt lt form gt Description A form is a container object within which you can place other form controls that submit values In of itself a form is not useful but it is indispensable when you need to use controls that display and submit values for processing A Form element has an action property that is used to specify the page or resource to which the form values should be submitted Horizontal Rule HTML lt HR gt Image Description This is simply a customizable line often used to demarcate sections of a page to make their difference more discernible 283 Hyperlink HTML lt a name CodeCharge
385. laced at run time e g Error Title Error ControlTitle ControlTemplate Buttons Navigator Sorter NoRecords countControls ClearLink HTMLFormName Action FormState FormScript Form caption This is either from the Data Dictionary or from the builder Used at run time to display error messages when processing the form e g not entering a value for a required field The field caption for the data item displayed on the form This is based on the datasource you specify in the builder and the Data Dictionary properties Placeholder for the control type generated for the data item This is based on the datasource you specify in the builder and the Data Dictionary properties Placeholder for the buttons on the form based on the sorter options you selected in the builder Placeholder for the navigator options on a grid form This is based on the navigator options you selected in the builder Placeholder for the sorter options on a grid form This is based on the options you selected in the builder Placeholder for the NoRecords message that you specify in the builder Placeholder for attribute colspan from tag lt td gt This is based on the datasource you specify in the builder Placeholder for the Clear Link options on a Search form These are template variables important to the internal handing of an editable grid form These should not be modified XXX_TotalRecords
386. larger words Perform a search which distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters Activate this checkbox if the text entered in the Find what field is a regular expression Current Document Perform the search in the current document only All Open Documents Perform the search in all opened documents Current Project Perform the search in files belonging to the current project Enter a wildcard expression to determine the file types to be searched Find the next occurrence of the text to be replaced Replaces the selected instance of the search criteria Replaces all instances of the search criteria Do not perform replacements in the current file Close the dialog box i Replace In Files Find what Find Next Replace with Match whole word only Replace All Match case Regular expression Look In Current Project ig File types 183 Using Site Diagrams A site diagram is a visual representation of all or some of the pages within a project A site diagram could also be thought of as a map of the pages within a project and the links that join the pages To create a new site diagram e Use the Project Add Diagram menu option or right click on the Diagrams option in the Project Explorer and select New Diagram e When the Select Pages dialog appears select the pages that you want to show in the site diagram e Click on a page to select it To select multiple pages hold down the Ctrl key while you click on e
387. late property directly normally it will be a relative path to where the master template is located in your application folders on the server If you use the dialogs described above to create the template panel the property will use the CCS_PathToMasterPage internal variable When you use this variable you can use dynamic design selection at run time as described below Unlike a master page you can not undo applying a master template to a panel That is with a master page if you remove the design CodeCharge Studio moves the content in the various panels back to the page and then removes the content panels that were mapped to the master page This happens automatically when you remove the design A master template does not work this way You have to move the content yourself and remove any template panels you have created if you want to undo the application of the template Master Template Property amp CCS PathToMasterPage When you apply a master template using the Template Panel icon on the ribbon bar CodeCharge Studio automatically creates a template panel then content panels for each placeholder in the master template It also automatically updates the master template property for the template panel and the placeholder property for each of the content panels You could do this manually but when CodeCharge Studio defines the master template property it automatically adds the CCS_PathToMasterPage property The CCS_PathToM
388. ld types have advanced properties CheckBox List ListBox Radio Button Link and Image Link CheckBox List ListBox or Radio Button Clicking on the button will open the List DataSourse dialog illustrated below Link and Image Link Clicking on the button will open the dialog with link properties Specify the control type to be used for each of the fields in the form Select a field for the records to be ordered by when initially displayed After adding fields to the editable grid and setting the optional Order by field you can click on the Finish button to close the builder and generate the form Click Next to proceed to step 7 370 Step 7 Sorting the Editable Grid Sorting Select the type of sorting controls that you want to have in the grid es Master Detail Builder Sorting E Master No sorting Caption jal ern A Type Caption w a LS Data Source Navigation Click Next to proceed to step 8 371 Step 8 Customizing the Navigation Page Navigator Modity Select the type of Navigation controls that you want to have in the grid If you want to have custom navigation controls on the form click Modify to open the Custom Navigator window You can customize the controls to suit your needs First Text for the link to the first record Previous Text for the link to the previous record Next Text for the link to the next record Last Text for the link to the last record Use images for l
389. lds for the Editable Grid user_login phone_home last_name first_name fax Page Name lt lt i Order by none Dea Control Type Textbox 303 Table Search Details Settings Search Grid amp Record on One Page Include in Menu Active Sorting list box Records per page list box Orientation Advanced a a E E O O p o lt O D Search Grid and Record forms will appear on the same page A link to this page will be added in the navigation menu page Indicates your intention to create a search form The search form will have two list boxes for sorting The first one will contain a list of all the available fields so the user can select the field to sort by The second will allow the user to indicate the desired sort order ASC DESC The search form will have a list box that can be used to specify the number of records to be returned per page Specify whether the search form should be vertically or horizontally oriented specify the advanced search option such as a submit method type and other provided options If the ANDa condition is selected the search form will contain an input control textbox or listbox for all selected database fields If the a ORa condition is selected the search form will include only one textbox control and a value entered into the textbox will be used to search against all selected database fields Alternatively you can choose the
390. lds from those tables Normally the Primary Key will be automatically set if the database table is defined with a Primary Key field There may be cases with certain databases or database connectors where you may need to define the key If the table contains a compound primary key that is made up or more than one field you must use the Build Query button described above to specify all the primary keys Within the Visual Query Builder dialog right click on each of the fields that make up the primary key field and select the Primary Key option The selected fields should then appear in bold These are the fields to be shown in the Editable Grid form Refreshes the connection if you make changes to the database while using the builder Select a form field then click this button to move it upwards in the order of appearance Select a form field then click this button to move it downwards in the order of appearance Click this button to add it some fields to the form Select a form field then click this button to remove it from the form Opens the dialog with advanced properties To activate the button select a field in the Fields for the Grid section Note The following field types have advanced properties CheckBox List ListBox Radio Button Link and Image Link CheckBox List ListBox or Radio Button Clicking on the button will open the List DataSourse dialog illustrated below Link and Image Link Clicking on the button will open t
391. lds in the table make sure the checkbox adjacent to the asterisk is activated Otherwise select individual fields by activating their corresponding checkboxes Use the Review Data button to confirm that you have selected all the required fields You can maximize the Visual Query Builder window and move around the individual tables to achieve better visualization of the relationships When dealing with Editable Grid and Record forms you have to indicate the primary key field for the table used in the form The primary key field is used to uniquely identify a record within the table Within a table the text for the primary key field appears in bold typeface The primary key for the countries table is country_id while the primary key for the genders table is gender_id You can designate a field in the table as the primary key field by right clicking on it and selecting the Primary Key option 01 021 You can also use the pop up menu which appears when you right click on a field to specify a Field Alias A Field Alias is essentially a substitute name to be used for the field You can use an alias to define a more meaningful name for a database field without having to change the actual field name in the databases Aliases are also used when two joined tables contain identically named fields By assigning a unique alias to one of the fields no conflict will occur when the fields are referenced in an SQL query 23 Using the Table Parameter Window The T
392. le or query that contains the fields to be used in the EditableGrid Opens the Visual Query Builder where you can construct a join query which retrieves fields from multiple tables Within the Visual Query Builder window you can select multiple related tables then select fields from those tables Normally the Primary Key will be automatically set if the database table is defined with a Primary Key field There may be cases with certain databases or database connectors where you may need to define the key If the table contains a compound primary key that is made up or more than one field you must use the Build Query button described above to specify all the primary keys Within the Visual Query Builder dialog right click on each of the fields that make up the primary key field and select the Primary Key option The selected fields should then appear in bold These are the fields to be shown in the Editable Grid form Refreshes the connection if you make changes to the database while using the builder Select a form field then click this button to move it upwards in the order of appearance Select a form field then click this button to move it downwards in the order of appearance Click this button to add it some fields to the form Select a form field then click this button to remove it from the form Opens the dialog with advanced properties To activate the button select a field in the Fields for the Grid section Note The following fie
393. lies Semicolon separated list of project assemblies Create IIS Whether to automatically create IIS application during project publishing Application CKeditor Base The path to the CKeditor installation folder on the server absolute starting with or relative to Path the project folder For example CKeditor or CKeditor ASP NET VB Secure Server Base SSL URL used to access pages configured for SSL access URL Target Version Target NET Framework version Target Schema Target Schema for ASPX pages NET Debug Specifies whether the code linked error messages should be output Mode References Semicolon separated list of project references Assemblies Semicolon separated list of project assemblies Create IIS Whether to automatically create IIS application during project publishing Application CKeditor Base The path to the CKeditor installation folder on the server absolute starting with or relative to Path the project folder For example CKeditor or CKeditor 87 Source Control Settings CodeCharge Studio allows many developers to work on a project concurrently and allows for code versioning This is achieved by interfacing with source control applications CVS and SourceOffSite Provider Defines the application to be used for source control CVS Root Defines the CVS Root folder that is used by CVS to store the versioning information for the project Path Defines the path to the folder storing the versioning info
394. ll type into a browser in order to access the pages aH Application Builder Code Language ASP 3 0 with Templates Site Language English ET H Connection Server Path C Inetpub wwwroot AppBuilderProject 7 Options Server URL http localhost AppBuilderProject Load saved options cs Application Builder Code Language ASP 3 0 with Templates h Site Language English F Ha Connection Server Path C Inetpub wwwroot AppBuilderProject ca amp Options Server URL http localhost AppBuilderProject T Authentication Tables Details Page Layout tae style If ee if I ee wh Click Next to proceed to step 2 292 Step 2 Configuring a Database You now have to configure a new database connection for the project or select one of the sample databases included in CodeCharge Studio Use a new database Select this option if you want to configure a new database connection You can then connection click on the Create button to create the connection Select a sample database Select either the Internet or Intranet sample database to use for the project connection Data Dictionary Additional options for tables and fields captions control types actions etc Read more cw Application Builder f Use anew database connection Create Project cometon or select a sample database Options C Internet Database Authentic
395. location of the page The links within the relocated page such as image links are also adjusted to refer to the correct location of the resources Using Include Pages During the process of creating a site there is usually some content that has to appear on every page For instance the navigation controls used to access the different pages within the site should appear on each page so that the user can easily move between pages To provide a uniform and centralized way of including common content into multiple pages CodeCharge Studio allows pages to be designated as includable This is done by 1 Setting the Includable property for a page to Yes in the page Properties window 2 After defining an includable page include the page within other pages To do this open the page where the include page is to be added and place the cursor at the point where the include page should appear Then click Include Page under the Forms tab of the Toolbox 3 The dialog will appear so that you can select the page to be included You can assign a name for the include page control object that is used for reference purposes within the site code 4 Include pages can be added to as many pages as desired within the site The main advantage of using include pages is that changes to the common content need to be made in one location only After changing the contents of an include page the changes will be reflected in all the other pages where the page is included T
396. look like the one below department_name End Row No records 410 The field caption is optional When we configured the data dictionary we could not set the specific page associated with the Link paramter nor determine the source for the parameter value In Design mode click on the department_name control and change the properties of the Link Open Href source and change the Static address by selecting the current page Change the Source Type for the parameter to DataSource Column and verify that the Parameter Source is department_id the name of the database column If you don t make these changes your application is likely to fail e g with compilation errors since the generated code is incorrect When the user clicks on a department name the form will submit an URL parameter like so dept_id lt the department_id value gt Department List Administration Support Finance Web Development Testing Design Documentation solutions Development System Administration Run the Grid Builder again to add another grid for the Employee list For the datasource build a query in Design mode that looks something like this by joining the Employee Department and Group tables and adding a SQL WHERE clause that returns the fields desired from the Employee table including department_name and group_name from the department and group tables SELECT lt all of the selected fields of th
397. lp Help Topics Ctrl Shift N Ctrl N Ctrl Shift O Ctrl O Ctrl S Ctrl P Ctrl Z Ctrl Shift Z Ctrl X Ctrl C Ctrl V Ctrl A Ctrl F F3 Ctrl Shift F Ctrl H Ctrl Shift H Ctrl G Ctrl F1 F9 F8 Ctrl F8 F10 Ctrl F10 Shift F10 Ctrl Shift F10 F7 Shift F7 Alt Left Alt Right Alt Up Alt Down F1 71 IDE Translation It is possible to localize CodeCharge Studio and the pages generated by using translation files Within the CodeCharge Studio installation folder the Components folder has a folder called Translations that contains two folders IDE and Site The contents of the IDE folder are plains text files that contain the text that appears within the CodeCharge Studio IDE The IDE translation files are located in the following folder c Program Files CodeChargeStudio5 Components Translations IDE txt Each line within the text files is a name value pair representing an IDE component and its corresponding text You can create files for different languages by duplicating an existing file and altering the value that appears to the right of the equals sign Once you create additional files select the language to the used by using the Language menu option New Project Ctrl Shift N Language m a my z rh rh Open Project Ctrl Shift O Close Project 1 F Rename Project Espanal Save Page Ctrl 5
398. ls to the form No records found message Specify the message that will be displayed in the grid form if there are no records to be shown Non breaking space Inserts a non breaking space amp nbsp into empty grid cells This option is used to make browsers display cell borders even if a cell is completely empty Display the total number of Specify if the label which shows the total number of records in the record set should records be displayed above the grid Add Panels to each column Specify if all controls are taken into the blocks of the following type lt BEGIN for Hide Show functionality ControlType ControlName gt lt END ControlType ControlName gt It will be used to dynamically hide show controls on the page Alternate records If this option is checked every other record in the grid will appear in a row with a different style than the preceding record You can further choose how the alternate rows should be implemented Selecting Create alternate controls will create two data rows where one row will have a different background color to emphasize the separation between consecutive rows Selecting Use CSS style applies the Set Row Style action to the Before Show Row event of the grid where in turn the main and alternate CSS style classes are specified By default the Set Row Style action will apply the Row style class to standard grid rows and the AltRow class to alternate grid rows Both these classes are defined w
399. lt Form gt 140 When you have selected content that you want to add select the Template Panel button on the ribbon bar and you should see the following form Add Template Panel HTML Template from file BlockTemplate ccp X a Select PlaceHolder Content Title The options you see for master templates are based on the default master page design selected not necessarily the design applied to your page if there is one If your project does not have a default selection the drop down list of templates will be blank You will need to browse and select the template page Once the template page is selected for Select PlaceHolder you should see a list of placeholders for the selected template Select the placeholder within the template where you want the content you selected to be moved Note the Select PlaceHolder drop down list only appears when you have selected some content in your page If you haven t selected the content correctly this field will not appear in the dialog You can also change or specify the master template and the mapped placeholders in the panel properties Select the panel you want to use as the template panel and then define the master template that applies to this panel For each panel in the template panel that is mapped to the master template placeholder select the panel then define the placeholder name that the panel is mapped to in the master template When you set the master temp
400. lue bypasses the cache Includes the value of the URL variable calendarDate in the cache key Separate page caches are created when different dates are selected Disables cache when a form is submitted as submitted forms add cssForm parameter to the URL If variable named global_disable_ caching PHP contains a value such as 1 the caching feature will not be used on the page A null or zero value will enable the cache again Cache will be disabled when a file named disable_cache is placed in the root folder of the application Enable cache only when both parameters param1 and param2 have non empty values Disable the cache when any of the two parameters are empty The example below shows how to configure cache parameters for a page containing Grid1 grid and a search form implemented in ASP or PHP The cache parameters are configured to use the URL parameters submitted by the Grid s navigator and sorters and a keyword submitted by the Search form Note Caching components with that many parameters may require a lot of database or disk space and may not be effective This example is provided only for informational purposes 203 Name ccsForm Source URL Target Nonempty value bypasses the cache Name s_ keyword Source URL Target Include value in cache key Name GridiPageSize Source URL Target Include value in cache key Name Grid1Page Source URL Target Include value in cache key Name Grid1
401. m Messages lt strong gt lt td gt lt td class HeaderRight gt lt img alt src CCS_PathToMasterPage Images Spacer gif gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt table gt The template panel we used to format the Search form has a title and content We moved the search form to the content panel so now add a title to the title panel lt BEGIN Panel Title gt Search lt END Panel Title gt 144 Our Search form already has a form title Search so since this is redundant delete this code on the search form lt table border 0 cellspacing 0 cellpadding 0 gt lt tr gt lt td gt lt img border 0 alt src oage path ToRoot Styles None Images Spacer gif gt lt td gt lt td gt lt strong gt Search lt strong gt lt td gt lt td gt lt img border 0 alt src oage path ToRoot Styles None Images Spacer gif gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt table gt Also change the alignment of the button so it appears in line with the rest of the fields lt td align left gt The final page should look something like this _ Home i New Thread Forum Messages Date Added Pictures embeded in Email Rocky Ang 01 19 2001 5 37 PM CF Custom Tag directory Michael 01 19 2001 5 18 PM writing db results to multiple pages shiaislamasp 01 04 2001 7 56 PM error message in DB MSG 01 04 2001 11 28 AM whatis this error Itworks on my iis 01 04 2001 5 02 AM dynamic queries vpi 01 03 200
402. m code into an event Note Any code added into a Server event is language specific If you change the language that the project pages are generated in you have to write a new event code in that language However Client events are implemented using browser scripting languages JavaScript JScript and as such are universally applicable regardless of programming language choice Properties IX Data Events Format E3 tasks z tasks Attributes Connection IntranetDE Data Source Type Table Data Source tasks Restricted Mo Records Per Page 10 Page Size Limit 100 Features Identifier name used in generated code and HTML template 62 Message Window The message window usually docked at the bottom of the main window provides feedback on the status of operations occurring within the environment Status information can include errors as well as the current build or upload operation currently executing Working with Documents Much of your time using CodeCharge Studio will involve the document window The document window serves multiple purposes depending on the mode it is currently set to The five different modes the document window can be set in are Design This is a visual representation of the HTML content of a page as it would appear if rendered by a web browser The user is able to add modify and remove different forms of the page The Design mode is also Known as What You See Is What You Get WYSIWYG HTML This s
403. m field then click this button to move it downwards in the order of appearance Opens the dialog with advanced properties To activate the button select a field in the Fields for the Record section Note The following field types have advanced properties CheckBox List ListBox Radio Button and TextBox if the data type is date CheckBox List ListBox or Radio Button Clicking on the button will open the List DataSourse dialog illustrated below TextBox datatype is date Clicking on the button will open the dialog illustrated below Specify the Use pop up date picker option if you want to have a popup Data Picker Selector for this fields Specify the control type to be used for each of the fields in the form Specify the name of the page where the record form will appear This option is not available when the grid search and record forms appear on the same page 310 Previewing the Pages After configuring all the forms you can preview the final forms by using the Preview tab of the Details window You will have a chance to select a style at a later stage but at the moment you can see the layout of the three forms based on the selections you made PE iw Details users E Search Grid amp Record on One Page W Include in Menu Add Edit Users Once you are satisfied with the appearance of the forms click on the OK button to close the Details window and return to the Application Builder window
404. m often used with Microsoft Visual Studio because of good integration http msdn2 microsoft com en us vstudio aa 18670 aspx sourceGear SourceOffSite Third party solution developed by SourceGear to access remote Visual SourceSafe repositories over the Internet Improved security and performance over Visual SourceSafe client Uses reserved checkout http www sourcegear com sos Concurrent Versioning System Concurrent Versioning System CVS is one of the most popular Software Configuration Management solutions available for free and with source code CVS is used in thousands of projects and has been made available by many hosting providers This system uses unreserved checkouts with alternative file locking Mature and reliable solution The support for this tool is built in inside CodeCharge Studio http Awww nongnu org cvs Note There are many other Software Configuration Management systems available They can be used with CodeCharge Studio provided their developer or a third party has implemented Microsoft s SCC API handler to access their functionality from an IDE Both Microsoft Visual SourceSafe and SourceGear SourceOffSite are accessed through such handlers and are listed in CodeCharge Studio only after installing client applications for these tools File status indicators available in CodeCharge Studio 5 Files in CodeCharge Studio 5 controlled project may have different statuses The current status is represented by an indicator icon
405. m the context menu If your project does not currently have any designs CodeCharge Studio will copy and apply the first design found in the installation folder and add it to your project otherwise it will apply the currently selected default design Note when you add a design you may need to refresh the folder tree in the Project Explorer before your changes are visible To refresh the folder tree right click on the project name in the folder tree and select the Refresh option If there are other designs you want to add to your project or remove from your project select the Designs button again on the ribbor bar and then the Settings option This will open the design options in your project settings From your project settings you can add or remove designs to your project and set the default design The default design is what gets applied to your web pages when you select the Apply design to this page option from the context menu in Design mode FaN J Add Connection EF Server1 CR F D of Hr Add Diagram Ql Server Connections s UE Publish Publish Live 12 Source View EF Settings En Publishing Settings Project Page Page Controls Project Design P Publishing Tools agel2 j NewPageil 4 NewPagei 4 NewPage3 4 NewPage2 2 NewPage4 Remove Design from this page Settings i sian HTML Code Preview Live Page 147 You can also select a design when you run the Application Builder
406. ment a custom sorting mechanism Stored Procedures Stored procedures can be used with record forms and editable grids either automatically or by configuring custom insert custom update and custom delete properties However stored procedures may not always work well with grids since the SQL needs to be altered at runtime to implement navigation and sorting while stored procedure cannot be automatically altered or generated at runtime For example the navigator control that is used to browse through grid records cannot create a procedure for extracting record count and therefore it cannot display the record or page count You are restricted to using a simple navigator that has links only for browsing pages forward and backward Grid s sorter controls also cannot be used with stored procedures as they function by appending an Order By clause to SQL statements CodeCharge Studio supports both input and output parameters of stored procedures Grid Form Description A grid form is used to display multiple rows of data within an HTML table A grid should be used when you want to display records but not edit them A grid does not have the functionality to insert update or delete database records If you need to perform any of these operations you should consider using a record form or an editable grid Typically grid forms contain Link fields to corresponding record forms where a specified record can be edited Apart from displaying multiple records a
407. menu items include commands which are also available from Project Explorer nodes context menu right clicking and several other advanced and SCC API specific commands Get Latest Retrieves the latest file version from the repository Version Check Out Retrieves the latest file version from the repository and attempts to lock it for editing locally before acquiring lock it is checked if the file isn t already locked Check In Uploads modified files into repository creating new version Undo Check Rejects local changes made to locked files restores latest file version from the repository and Out releases edit lock Add to Source Checks if there are new non versioned files within selected context folder page or project PE Control node and checks them in Remove from Removes specified files from the remote repository preserving their change history Source Control History Displays provider specific history window showing all file versions that were checked in during project lifetime the window layout and details available are provider specific but offer usually Check In date and time details ability to retrieve historical version from the repository and Diff command for determining changes made between two file versions Show Displays provider specific file Comparison window showing changes made between local Differences Properties Refresh Status modified file version and the current remote file version
408. mmands displayed on tabs They pull together all the commands you re likely to need for a type of task and they remain on display and readily available giving you rich visual aids Tabs sit across the top of the Ribbon Each one represents core tasks you do in a given program Availible tabs Home Data Dictionary Builders Forms Edit Table Woe Lo om kg Eo F EmployeeDirectory CodeCharge Studio 5 a a 9 t Open Pj Add Connection Server 1 Ea m i Paa la Save a Add Diagram i Server Connections aie Blank Includable Login a Denm 7 ao Publish Live Home x View Page Page Page Builder fs Delete T Settings G4 Publishing Settings Projet Page Page Controls Pages Project Publishing Tools ip Data Dictionary Builders Forms Edit 91 Home Standard Dialog Functions serveri g ig ge w ig E y e a a Create a new Page Includable Page Login Page Application Builder Designs Publish the project Publish the current page Home Page Source Countrol View Select the server for the project Open an existing Page Save the current page Save all changes made in multiple documents Delete Undo the last action Redo the last action that was undone Cut the current selection and place it in the clipboard Copy the current selection to the clipboard Paste the current contents of the clipboard Open the Project Settings window Add Connection Add Diagram Settings Publishing Settings
409. mplate for the design of your project and you use content pages to contain the controls forms and other content that is mapped to your design Although the IDE does not enforce this you should not for example add forms controls or components to template pages Your master page should contain only HTML and CSS to layout and style your content and placeholders for the content to want to include in the page Similarly you should not use a content page as a template Although the IDE does not enforce this it is not likely to work The master page must have at least one placeholder A placeholder is a component you add to a page which is then later mapped to and replaced by content at run time When you apply a design to your content page CodeCharge Studio automatically creates a panel on your content page for every placeholder in your master page Also it always creates a content panel called content and one called head Your design can also include master templates Master templates are similar to master pages except they are intended to be used to format sections of a page rather than the overall page Master templates also include placeholders When your content page is requested first the content is mapped to any master templates then the container panels for the templates are merged with your master page Most of how CodeCharge Studio works with designs is based on the Artisteer framework It is not necessary to have Artisteer to use ma
410. must take care when removing or changing the special template blocks If you delete a template block make sure you delete everything including the block markers within the whole block do not leave any unmatched beginning or ending block markers If you remove one of these blocks the builder will not generate that section of the form on your web page Also if you change any of the styling or class definitions you must consider how the stylesheets apply to your changes The following example is from the tabular template for a Grid The ControlTitle section represents the caption row generated at the top of the grid Without this section there is no caption row The Row and ControlContent sections are the rest of the rows of the grid Both sections are required to generate the Grid 154 lt tr class Caption gt lt BEGIN ControlTitle gt lt th scope col gt Sorter lt th gt lt END Control Title gt lt tr gt lt BEGIN Separator gt lt END Separator gt lt BEGIN Row gt lt tr class Row gt lt BEGIN Contro Content gt lt td gt ControlTemplate amp nbsp lt td gt lt END ControlContent gt lt tr gt lt END Row gt Like the HTML template blocks the builder also relies on some predfined tag definitions Some of these are used by the builder when generating a form on your web page e g ControlTitle while others are content that is rep
411. n Internette o Cache Key Field cache key at tsi Expiration Date Field numeric lcache_expiration gt Cache Content Field lcache_data ti ti Caching settings 201 Page Specific Cache Settings Enable caching property Enable Caching is a page property that allows you to specify whether an individual page should be cached Select Yes if you would like to enable caching for the page or click the button to access extended cache options and parameters Properties Data Events Format General Code Language PHP4 PHP5 with Templates Publishing Local Network Security Type Table Home Page Default ccp Default HTML Encodin Publish J5 library Ves PHP4 PHPS with Templates Secure Server URL Code File Extension php Encode Extension Improved HTTP Cachi Yes Charset Output File Format Windows PHP wersion 3 X Error Reporting Common Files Template Folder CKeditor Base Path Ezy Project Explorer SY Files Explorer Extended cache options Enable Caching Enables the caching feature for the current page Duration Amount of time before the cached object page will expire If the value is left empty or set to zero the cache will never expire Properties Buttons for creating removing and accessing cache parameter properties Name Source Target Grid columns containing cache parameter property values Cache Parameters Configuring cache parameters is a very important part of the cac
412. n Further identification is required only when the cookie becomes invalid for example when the encryption mechanism is modified the user explicitly signs out or when the login cookie expires To implement the Remember me feature create a new Login form using the Authentication Builder or select the Login Page option when creating a new page You will then be presented with the option Create Remember me checkbox as shown below 2 Authentication Builder Title f gt Type lon O Focus on Login field M Create Remember me checkbox Create HTML Template Display buttons as f Buttons Images 208 Once selected the Remember me checkbox will appear on the new login form Login W Remember me togn The Remember me feature should be further configured in the Advanced Security Settings where you can specify the login cookie expiration time and an encryption key for encrypting the information stored in it Notes e Cookies are domain specific therefore visiting the same Website via different domains or IP addresses would require filling out the Login form again and storing authentication information in separate cookies For example visiting http Wwww MyDomain com would be treated differently than visiting http MyDomain com e The Remember me functionality won t work if the user s Web browser security settings are configured to reject cookies e Any functionality where a user s personal informa
413. n IntranetCE a Resources Begin Row E Common Files Data Source Table department_id department_name department_manager_id Data Source departments End Row Restricted No No records il Records Per 10 d Fage Size Lim 100 Records per page E FirstFirstPrey Prev Page Number Paqe_Numbe Features al gt Design HTML Code Preview Live Page Messages Source Control cvs loco Fs Source Control cvs info Uc P ewF USD Source Control cvs w For Help press Fl When a selection is made in Design mode the Properties window displays the corresponding properties for the selected element You can use the Properties window in conjunction with Design mode to alter the various properties for an element and immediately see the effect of the change Design mode is also ideally suited for applying the operations available in the Table Formatting and Positioning toolbars For instance you can use the Formatting toolbar to set font properties such as size emphasis and alignment If the toolbars are not visible you can bring them up using the View Toolbars menu option Using Tables for Layout HTML tables can be used to enhance the appearances of pages by providing a convenient way to layout text graphics as well as other tables The main components of a table lt table gt are rows lt tr gt and columns cells lt td gt A table consists of one or more rows which in turn contain cells When a t
414. n form Like the search form a login form is basically a record form whose insert update and delete properties have been disabled The Authentication Builder is the easiest and best way to create a login form however it is possible to build a login form manually based on the barebones record form provided under the Forms tab of the Toolbox Before a login form can be created you have to configure the project security settings under the Security and Security Groups tab of the Project Settings dialog window These settings specify the database tables and fields that are used during the authentication process Login Form Properties To expose the login form properties click on either of the glyphs under the Data tab of the Properties window or click on the name of the login form in the Project Explorer Because a login form is a special type of record form the login form properties are identical to those of a record form although most of these properties are left blank Properties WX Data Events Format Name Login Attributes Connection Data Source Type Table Data Source Return Page Remove Parameters Convert URL To N Restricted N Allow Insert No Allow Update No Allow Delete Mi Preserve Parameters N Custom Insert Type Custom Insert Custom Update Type Custom Update Custom Delete Type Custom Delete Features 200 Login Form Properties Name Connection Source Type Data Source Return Page Remove
415. n in the Database Explorer At the top of the Property Editor change the Form Title Display property to Department List Click on the display tab in the Property Editor and select Link for the default control when this database item is used for display We want to use the department name as a link parameter for submission to other forms Although we won t use the other properties in this example some other properties we might want to change for now are Display Caption Inout Caption and Form Title Input The Data Dictionary at this point should look like this J b x Table properties Form Tite Oise Grd Events Record Form Events Form Tithe Input Add Edit Departments Report Events Columns properties Database Column Data Type Column Size Display Input Events Caption Department Name Visible Yes Default Value Format Content Text DBFormat Href Type Page Href Source Convert URL To None Integer Remove Parameters Preserve Parameters GET When users click on the department name we want to submit an URL parameter so click on the Href Source and the ellipsis in this field and define a parameter like this 408 Create Link x General Parameters Advanced Text to display Static text Text from database depq iment_name Link address Static address Address from database Preview lt a href dept id department
416. n order for the page to be parsed correctly The main template blocks within the HTML template are demarcated by HTML comments lt BEGIN Block Name gt Components objects and other code contents go here lt END Block Name gt The HTML comments mark the beginning and end of a block of HTML code that can be treated as a unique entity during the parsing process It is normal for a block to contain other nested blocks For example a block for a grid form also contains blocks for the sorters the row as well as the navigation controls for the grid It should be evident that for the grid to be parsed correctly the different blocks that make up the grid must be present and with their correct names Care should be taken when editing the HTML source code so as not to render the blocks unusable by the programming code Along with the template blocks an HTML template page also contains template variables that are always contained within curly braces i e The following code demonstrates a row template block with five template variables within the cells of a table row lt BEGIN Row gt lt tr gt lt td gt task_name lt a gt lt td gt lt td gt project_id lt td gt lt td gt priority_id lt td gt lt td gt status_id lt td gt lt td gt user_id_assign_to lt td gt lt tr gt lt END Row gt Template variables represent values are determined at run time and substituted into the template page to c
417. n simply type in the proper connection string into the provided field However CodeCharge Studio provides a convenient way to build a connection string using the Build button and the Data Link Properties windows to create the connection string User Name Specify the username required to login to the database This is required for connections that require a login to access the database This is required if you have not defined a User Name in your DSN or you do not include a use id parameter in your connection string User Password Specify the password required to login to the database This is required for connections that require a login to access the database This is required if you have not defined a Password in your DSN or you do not include a password parameter in your connection string 96 ODBC Data Sources Open Database Connectivity ODBC is a driver interface that allows CodeCharge Studio and the generated programs to communicate with the database A database connection requires specific parameters before the driver can connect to the database such as the name of the database server and or the name of the database instance When you configure a Data Source the connection information is normally stored in a common area such as the registry or a file so client programs such as CodeCharge Studio only need to refer to the Data Source by name You do not need to know where this information is stored this is handled by the driver and the
418. n the order of appearance Move a parameter downwards in the order of appearance Enclose a parameter definition within brackets Group together multiple parameters by holding down the ctrl key while clicking each one Then click on the button to place a bracket around all the selected parameters Remove existing brackets around a parameter definition or multiple parameters Stored Procedure Procedure Get Parameters SOS Select the stored procedure to be used as the data source Retrieve the stored procedure parameters from the database Add a stored procedure parameter Please refer to the section on Using the Stored Procedure Parameter window for more information 239 Remove an existing stored procedure parameter View the configuration of an existing stored procedure parameter Move a stored procedure parameter upwards in the order of appearance Move a stored procedure parameter downwards in the order of appearance SQL Statement SQL The SQL statement to be used as the data source for the form Statement UET Reset an SQL query to a previous state Add an SQL parameter Please refer to the section on Using the SQL Parameter Window for more Ey information HEN Remove an existing SQL parameter View the configuration of an existing SQL parameter Ok Save the current configuration and exit Cancel Close the window and discard any changes Using the Visual Query Builder When a form is created the Data
419. n the order of appearance Select a form field then click this button to move it downwards in the order of appearance Click this button to add it some fields to the form Select a form field then click this button to remove it from the form Opens the dialog with advanced properties To activate the button select a field in the Fields for the Grid section Note The following field types have advanced properties CheckBox List ListBox Radio Button Link and Image Link CheckBox List ListBox or Radio Button Clicking on the button will open the List DataSourse dialog illustrated below Link and Image Link Clicking on the button will open the dialog with link properties Specify the control type to be used for each of the fields in the form You can try out various options and preview them before deciding on the appropriate one Click Next to proceed to step 4 327 Step 4 Sorting the Editable Grid Sorting Select the type of sorting controls that you want to have in the grid FY Editable Grid Builder Sorting ty Connection c No sorting I Data Source C tapin fe Caption w Search C Caption w a Navigation Click Next to proceed to step 5 328 Step 5 Customizing the Editable Grid At this juncture you can further customize the editable grid form by selecting the caption to be used for sorting as well as the navigational controls Editable Grid Field Settings Page Navigator Modify Select the type of
420. n the trial mode you have 20 days to evaluate the fully functional software When you launch the software a flash screen will show the number of evaluation days that remain The screen also has four buttons Click Try to start using the software in trial mode The flash screen will also have an Activation button to activate the software using a valid serial number This can be done by entering the serial number directly into the activation window You can also use a browser to navigate to the web address indicated in the activation window and use your Serial Number and Installation Code to acquire an activation key Enter the key into the Activation Key field Click OK to complete activation lnvalid Activation Key a ra r F F I rs r Frj a a i CoDECHARGERRIRETTS Licence Agreement Run Buy Copyright 2001 2010 Yessoftware Inc All Rights Reserved 41 Upgrading Repairing or Uninstalling CodeCharge Studio If your CodeCharge Studio installation is corrupted or otherwise damaged run the setup file to modify or repair the installation or remove it entirely Starting CodeCharge Studio To start CodeCharge Studio select Start Programs CodeCharge Studio 5 CodeCharge Studio 5 in Windows General Recent Projects Pai Er Open Project ry NewProjectL ccs Solutions 3 P a i A 3 ee Employee Directory Task Manager Portal Registration Form Forum Fae x a Store CCS Exam
421. nce it will be provided by the database when a new record is inserted fw Grid and Record Components Builder Use an existing database connection InternetDB Create CA Grid or select a sample database I Data Source Internet Database Intranet Database Search Layout i Autoincremented primary keys ee rae M Internationalized use translation Sorting resources res W Save builder options Ho Navigation Click Next to proceed to step 2 356 Step 2 Grid and Record Builder Fields Select the fields to be shown in the grid form Grid and Record Builder Field Settings Data Source Build Query Fields for the Grid isd m d kd G Order by Select the table from where the data will be retrieved Brings up the Visual Query Builder window where you can setup a SQL query that will act as the grid data source These are the fields to be shown in the grid They are selected from among the Available Fields Refreshes the connection if you make changes to the database while using the builder Select a form field then click this button to move it upwards in the order of appearance Select a form field then click this button to move it downwards in the order of appearance Click this button to add it some fields to the form Select a form field then click this button to remove it from the form Opens the dialog with advanced properties To activate the button selec
422. nce the code that displays the calendar doesn t need to be executed again the calendar performance will improve Cache parameter configuration options available in the Cache Parameter dialog Name The name of the parameter for example product_id or eventDate You may also enter a code expression to be used instead of a parameter or assemble several parameter values Source The type of parameter specified in the Name field URL corresponds to a parameter included within the page URL Form corresponds to a form field and submitted via a Web form Session corresponds to a session variable Expression code expression function or variable name Target The following parameter targets are available Include value in cache key Parameter values will be used as a part of the cache key Nonempty value bypasses the cache If parameter value is empty the page will be executed normally and the cache will not be used Examples of individual cache parameter configurations Name calendarDate Source URL Target Include value in cache key Name ccsForm Source URL Target Nonempty value bypasses the cache Name global_disable_caching Source Expression Target Nonempty value bypasses the cache Name file_exists RelativePath disable_cache Source Expression Target Nonempty value bypasses the cache Name CCGetFromPost param1 amp amp CCGetFromPost param2 0 1 Source Expression Target Nonempty va
423. nd publish your first web application Note Net projects have special publishing requirements that you can read about in the section on deploying Net projects 50 Working Environment Command Area The Ribbon is designed to help you quickly find the commands that you need to complete a task Commands are organized in logical groups which are collected together under tabs To reduce clutter some tabs are shown only when needed For example the Table tab is shown only when a table is selected Home Data Dictionary Builders Forms Edit Tabs l I ia 7 b E Open im Add Connection aqeommands Blank Includable Login a en iia Page Page Page Builder pf Delete Sa settings Project Groups Fages The main menu you can open after click at the CodeCharge Studio logo Notice that the main menu names and some of the sub menus have an underlined letter This is indication that that menu can be executed using a short cut key combination by pressing the Ctrl key together with the underlined letter The title bar contains the name of the application i e CodeCharge Studio and the open project The right end of the title bar contains buttons to minimize maximize or close the application window and buttons Fullscreen Options Help There are three basic components to the Ribbon Commands are arranged in groups A command can be a button a menu or a box where you enter information Groups are sets of related co
424. nection Type Directly to MySQL MySQL server localhost Port 3306 User Name User Password Database ha Test Simple mode The new connection will be added to all servers You may need to setup database connection settings to other servers auem o cance Name of your choice This is the type of database you are connecting to This lets CodeCharge Studio know the dialect of SQL to use and other options specific to the database Even if you are using the native interface to MySQL this should be set to MySQL This indicates if you are using an ODBC DSN a connection string or the native MySQL interface IP address or the name of the server instance e g localhost and the port number default is 3306 User account to access the database Password corresponding to the User name Database instance to connect to If you have defined the proper connection info including username and password this should display a list of database instances on the server you specified Besides the native interface you can use any type of connection and database supported by the IDE e g MyODBC driver Also in Expert mode you can configure a different type of connection for your server side connections If you change the Connection Type to ODBC or Connection String completing the Add New Configuration is identical to configuring ODBC or DSN
425. nfigured to reflect the location of the Microsoft Access database on the server In the case where you know the exact file system location of the database file you can simply copy the design time connection string paste it under the Server tab and change the file location For instance if the Microsoft Access file is located at C Inetoub databases project1 database mbd the corresponding connection string would be Server Connection String Provider Microsoft Jet OLEDB 4 0 User ID Admin Data Source C Inetpub databases project1 database mbd Persist Security Info False If you don t know the file system location of the database use the VBScript Server MapPath function to automatically retrieve the path to the file You will need to edit the connection string within the Server tab of the connection settings window and include a call to the function An example connection string using the Server MapPath function would be Using MapPath to Define file Path Provider Microsoft Jet OLEDB 4 0 User ID Admin Data Source amp Server MapPath database mdb amp Persist Security Info False The database file resides in the same location as the generated common asp page The Server MapPath function retrieves the appropriate file system path and includes it in the connection string Add New Connection Design Advanced Server Database MS Access ka Date Format yyyy mm dd HH nn ss ki Boolean Format true false Use LIMIT
426. ng Forms to the Database This is a pivotal step and involves selecting the types of forms to be created for each of the tables you selected in the previous step Database Tables Settings Tables A list of the tables you selected Click on a particular table to access more configuration details Grid Pages Grid Activate this option if you want to have a grid form for the table Editable Grid Activate this option if you want to have a editable grid form for the table Search Activate this option if you want to have a search form for the table Security Level Specify the security level required to access the form Record maintenance view page Record Activate this option if you want to have a record form for the table Updateable Activate this option if you want the record form to be able to update records Security Level Specify the security level required to access the form The Record form depends on being able to find a specific and single record in the datasource which is normally by the Primary Key of the table If the Primary Key uniqueness cannot be determined you will see the following message Set the following parameters for lt table name gt tables Primary Key for the record Please see Incomplete Data message 2 Application Builder Table Grid pages Record maintenance view page z5 Project Click for Grid Editable Grid Search Security Record Updateable Security Level details Level fg Connection All F
427. ng experience in any programming language This will greatly help you make program customizations that sometimes may be required CodeCharge Studio can automatically generate 100 of simple web applications used for data administration but no tool can create complex applications without some level of custom coding Many CodeCharge Studio users are able to generate 80 to 90 of their web applications using CodeCharge Studio then manually add programming code that provides additional functionality e g to send an email or update multiple database tables System Requirements Development Environment Requirements CodeCharge Studio is available for computers running the following operating systems and environments 256 MB available RAM 200 MB available disk space 256 color monitor capable of 800 x 600 resolution Windows 2000 XP Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows Server 2012 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 or higher Microsoft NET Framework 2 0 Databases Supported CodeCharge Studio can connect to virtually any ODBC compliant database using the appropriate drivers installed on the computer where CodeCharge Studio is present Supported databases include Microsoft SQL Server Oracle MySQL DB2 Microsoft Access All other databases with an appropriate ODBC driver The generated code does not require ODBC connectivity and connects to the database using the method appropriate for the particular environment for example ADO for ASP JDBC for
428. ng into focus Whenever appropriate the two list box fields at the top left of the document window will display the Objects in the page and any members of that object Selecting a particular Object and its member in the Code field will cause the window to scroll to the location where the relevant code is located Default x h F Search Error Keyword fs emp name Department Select Value Employees Pa 4 F Design HTML Code Preview Live Page In each project regardless of coding language there is always a set of Common Files These files contain functionality that is needed in multiple pages and hence it is placed in central files In order to access these files click on the Common Files Icon in the Project Explorer The files will be opened in the document window and you will be able to access a specific file by clicking on the tab with its name The number and names of the Common Files will vary depending on the coding language being used Preview Mode Preview mode shows how the static HTML part of a page will look like when viewed in a browser No programming code is executed or published to the server Preview mode is intended to show the layout of the page without the editing features that are visible in HTML mode It is not possible to make changes to a page while in Preview mode Live Page In Live Page Mode the page is published to the server and executed so that dynamic content is made available for
429. ng key column and click on Is Primary Key 401 Defining a Relationship When the data in one table relates to data in another table the tables have a relationship expressed by the data e g each employee in the employees table belongs to a department Information about the department such as the department name is in another table In order to relate the employee to the department information each employee record in the employees table contains a department_id which is a unique value that can be used to look up information about the department in the departments table Relationships between tables is important to the way in which CodeCharge Studio builds queries When a relationship exists between tables CodeCharge Studio uses the SQL JOIN operator to relate the tables The JOIN operator is used to look up and find information from one table based on information from another table When you run one of the builders e g Grid builder and select build query this runs the Query Builder If a relationship exists between tables the relationship is shown visually as a set of connected arrows between the tables and also in the actual SQL query created by the Query Builder All Columns All Column J emp_id emp_id F group id emp_login emp_legin group_name V emp_password emp_pas J emp_name emp_name group_id group_id m s department_id departme iu NRP department_id v email email departmen
430. ng the Slave listbox A query can be created in place of a table by clicking the Build Query button which opens the Visual Query Builder Bound The key column of the datasource Column Text Column The data column containing values to be displayed in the slave listbox Dependent The data column that relates to depends on the value of the master listbox field 419 AJAX Services and Service Builder Overview An AJAX service is a program or script that outputs and provides data to AJAX features acting as AJAX clients In a standard Web application a Web page retrieves data by submitting user input to the server and the server rebuilding the full page output with the new set of data However AJAX enabled Web pages rely on JavaScript to communicate with AJAX Services that provide data in the background without a need to refresh the regular page The AJAX service usually obtains data from a database therefore it often acts as an additional layer between Web pages and the database This approach shifts responsibility of contacting the server to the AJAX service so that the AJAX enabled page doesn t need to be directly submitted to the server and refreshed Certain types of AJAX services also support data updates which means that a Web page can submit data to the AJAX service which in turn will update the database The AJAX Service Builder simplifies the process of creating an AJAX service The service you create can be used with other AJA
431. ng the action from the list of available actions When you build a Login form using the Authentication Builder you also have the option of adding a SetFocus action which sets focus to the first field in the login form This action is placed in the OnLoad client event of the page where the login form is contained When the page loads at runtime the action code moves the cursor to the first field in the login form so that the user can start typing immediately without having to manually move the cursor to the field The SetFocus action can also be added manually by selecting it from the list of available client actions Properties 3g TaskManager Data Events Format El E Pages Designs images Styles E Administration On Cache kras D Before Initialize E ya After Initialize EmployeeMaint Header Server Ae ee Logout On Initialize View Ao Before Show E P aira Before Output E PriorityMaint Before Unload Projectlist Cent ProjectMaint m On Load E Search Set Focus Statuseslist On Unload StatusMaint TaskRecord TypeMaint E TypesList m Diagrams lpg Connections So Resources amp Common Files HAAS Aa E Y Project Explorer PY Files Explorer loll Search Form Description A search form is used to provide an entry point for search criteria The search form submits the search criteria to another form grid or editable grid which uses the se
432. ng to the Login name Select this option so that opened connections are reused whenever available Select this option to use the ODBC cursor when creating the connection to the database it maybe necessary for some ODBC drivers For more information please see the PHP help odbc_connect function Apart from MySQL PHP can also used in conjunction with other databases such as Microsoft Access with an ODBC DSN as well as Oracle and Microsoft SQL server When using a database such as Oracle or Microsoft SQL server you should first ensure that the server has been compiled with support for the database or the extension for the database is enabled within the PHP ini configuration file If the server does not have the necessary extension an error will be generated when you attempt to view the page The error usually states that you attempted to use a undeclared function which is indication that the server does not have the required extension The configuration for other databases in PHP is similar to the configuration for a MySQL database However the PHP Database Library field should be adjusted to indicate the type of the connected database In the event that you want to use an ODBC DSN to connect to a database such as Microsoft Access the PHP Database Library field should be set to ODBC In this case a new field called Database appears so that you can select the type of connected database 110 Server Side Connections for PERL Just like all
433. nt Directory component on the page Otherwise the Path will not be created directory cw Directory Builder Category Table jg Connection bi s Category ID field ie Style Category Name field Parent Category field Root Category identifier Number of columns V Create a directory path for the current directory Title IList of No categories message No categories found Click Next to proceed to step 3 Step 3 Selecting a Style The final step is to select a style for the form Click Finish to close the builder and generate the form 322 Editable Grid Builder The simplest and most convenient way of building an Editable Grid is to use the Editable Grid builder located under the Builders tab Open or create a new page where the Editable Grid will be located then with the cursor placed at the location where the form should appear click on the Editable Grid option under the Builders tab of the Toolbox Step 1 Selecting a Data Source Select or create a database connection from where the data to be edited or added using the record form is stored If you already have a connection configured for the project you can select to use one of the tables in this connection to create the Editable Grid Alternatively you can create a new connection or use one of the sample databases 2 Editable Grid Builder Use an existing database connection Jy Connection 4 n at pombe A cis InternetDB
434. nternetDB x Create lL Data Source or select a sample database Actions Internet Database E3 Layout Intranet Database ee Style W Autoincremented primary keys M Internationalized use translation resources res T Save builder options Click Next to proceed to step 2 Step 2 Record Builder Fields Select a data source and the fields to be included in the record form cs Record Builder Data Source Ep Connection users 7 t Primary Ke 4 user_id X gt Actions C Layout g Style M Control Type 382 Record Builder Field Settings Data Source Primary Key Available Fields Cz Control Type Select the table to use as the data source Select the primary key field in the table This list box shows all the fields available in the table Refreshes the connection if you make changes to the database while using the builder Select a form field then click this button to move it upwards in the order of appearance Select a form field then click this button to move it downwards in the order of appearance Click this button to add it some fields to the form Select a form field then click this button to remove it from the form Opens the dialog with advanced properties To activate the button select a field in the Fields for the Record section Note The following field types have advanced properties CheckBox List ListBox Radio Button
435. ntrolTemplate lt END ControlContent gt lt END Row gt e Add a custom Master Template to your project Create a new folder called Designs MyDesigns if it does not already exist in your project Create a new page called entries and set the Includable option on the page to Yes Remove any HTML code that may exist on the page so you start with a blank page Paste the following code into the page This represents the template and styling to format the database content Save the page lt div class top banner gt lt div class content gt lt div class entries gt lt div class entry gt lt h2 gt title lt h2 gt lt p gt text lt a href top class back to top gt Back to top amp uarr lt a gt lt p gt lt div gt lt div gt lt div gt lt div gt This code has two placeholders called title and text but at this point CodeCharge Studio does not recognize them as placeholders because they are defined only in the HTML CodeCharge Studio will not create placeholders from these tags you have to add the placeholders from the ribbon bar In HTML mode delete the template variable title and then add a placeholder in its place using the Forms Placeholder icon on the ribbon bar Do the the same for the text template variable e Create a stylesheet called entries css with notepad or any other external editor Copy and paste the following CSS code into the stylesheet Put t
436. o your published project that you may want available to users Replace the selected style with another style All pages within the project will be searched for the selected style and the new style selection will be applied Launch the Style Builder to modify the selected style or create a new one Remove the selected style This is not available if the default style is selected Set the selected style to be the default style for the project The default style is applied automatically to create new pages Rebuild cascading stylesheet files css and corresponding images This option can be useful for example after modifying a style or adding a new language Refresh the list of project styles in use by the project This may be necessary if you have applied or changed a style in your project but it doesn t appear in the list Select thisoption if you want to enable the dynamic assignment feature By default when this option is selected the style can be applied using either an URL parameter e g style basic or a session variable Specify additional dynamic style selection options which define the method of assigning a style dynamically Specify whether you want to use both the styles and themes within your project Themes are deprecated and provided for backward compatibility with CodeCharge Studio 2 x projects It is recommended that this option is set to Styles for new projects created with CodeCharge Studio 5 for clarity If
437. o a page its position and layout are stored in the appropriate html file while its properties and attributes are stored in the corresponding ccp CodeCharge page file Control A low level component object that can be placed on a page and has a set of properties and events Controls can be used to receive user input or display dynamic content They are also visible in Project Explorer where together with pages and forms they make up the object model of the Web application A Control cannot have child components Example controls are Label TextBox TextArea and ListBox Certain controls can be further categorized as Supporting controls because their purpose is to enhance and support the functionality of forms for example a Sorter and a Navigator can be used to allow users to sort and navigate the data presented in a Grid form Design Time The process and the time of creating web applications by working with CodeCharge Studio usually performed by a developer 26 Dynamic Content The content that is not defined during design time Dynamic content is usually retrieved from the database during run time but may also be calculated during program execution Dynamic content is output directly to the browser or can be embedded within HTML by replacing template blocks Event Procedure A procedure automatically executed in response to an event initiated by the program code during execution Form A high level component that is place
438. o be shown per page Specify the message that will be displayed in the grid form if there are no records to be shown Add ability to specify the record separator Display the total number of records that are retrieved in a form es Master Detail Builder Grid layout Master Tabular petal Columnar C Justified S Type Tas Data Source Records per page A Sorting No records found message HO Navigation Record separator F Display the total number of records 373 Linking the Master and Detail The last step in configuring the grid is selecting the field to be used to link the records in the master record to the details in the record form You can select any one of the fields that are already in the master record a Master Detail Builder Select the Link Field Master Detail Type LA Data Source Sorting Navigation Detail Form Title Layout Add Edit Directory Items 374 Select layout for Master and Detail optional For Editable Grid Separate Forms Details Form in Cell For Record 375 Step 8 Selecting a Style optional Select a style for the editable grid form This step is optional Editable Grid Style Options Style This element contains a list of styles to choose from After selecting a style click the Finish button to generate the form to the page i Master Detail Builder Master Detail M Type I Data
439. o the On Load client event of an existing TextArea and configuring it Properties Data Events Format El Server On Validate Before Show El Client On Key Press On Load Attach FCKeditor On Change ToolbarSet Name Full Width Config Parameter The height of the editing area in pixels or percent If left blank 261 Using CKeditor with Java Servlets amp JSP If you use Java you should modify common classes after installing CKeditor because the file information about CK connector servlets their parameters and servlet mapping are to be specified in web xml file Add the code below to server side classpath Runtime libraries can be used for this project property lt serviet gt lt servlet name gt Connector lt servlet name gt lt serviet class gt com fredck CKeditor connector ConnectorServlet lt servlet class gt lt init param gt lt param name gt baseDir lt param name gt lt param value gt UserFiles lt oaram value gt lt init param gt lt init param gt lt param name gt debug lt param name gt lt param value gt true lt param value gt lt init param gt lt load on startup gt 2 lt load on startup gt lt servlet gt lt serviet gt lt serviet name gt SimpleUploader lt servlet name gt lt serviet class gt com fredck CKeditor uploader SimpleUploaderServilet lt servlet class gt lt init param gt lt param name gt baseDir lt param name gt lt param value gt UserFiles lt o
440. obal customization options for charts which can be reused and applied across multiple charts The default styles cannot be modified however you can click the Save As button to save the current changes as a new style The new custom styles can be further modified and saved via the OK button ES FlashChart Style Builder Autumn 1 FlashChart Style Builder Build Custom Schema Color Scheme Standard an Series Concurrent Resize A Eont ma Chartarea GA oaan Concurrent Change Transpat Chart Effect Series Change Transparency Glare Inverse Resize In Serias co Border Inverse Change Transparency In Series 7 Transparency Other A Font Scheme Gridline L gt Animation 7 Hints None Save AS OK Cancel 339 Gallery Builder Gallery Builder is designed for creating a Web based image gallery as part of your application The resulting gallery displays images in horizontal grid like format and in fact it is fully based on the standard CCS grid component The Gallery Builder creates a gallery by placing the grid component on the page and altering its HTML template to produce horizontal layout Additionally the Gallery Layout action is applied to the grid s Before Show Row event which opens and closes grid s table row tag lt tr gt based on the desired number of columns to be used in the gallery The Gallery Builder is available under the Builders tab When launching it you will be provided with the follow
441. ode the application will use the Lines per Print Page property to display a specific number of records per page while all report pages will be shown on one screen for users to be able to print it from their Web browser Properties Data Events Format E store_products Mame Attributes Connection Data Source Type Data Source Groups Restricted store_products InternetDB Table store_products No 40 100 Mo Lines per Web Page Page Size Limit Enable Print Mode 249 Report Sections Every report is made up of multiple report sections where each section serves a different purpose and can be adjusted separately Each active report section has the following properties Name Identifier name used in the generated code and HTML template Visible Should the section be shown on the report page at run time Select No to hide it Height The height of the report in abstract line units You can imagine that a line is 1 pixel high and specify the true pixel height if Known In other cases you may decide to use data rows as a line and specify 1 as the section height Refer to report properties for more information Report Label The Report Label is the main control used to display data inside reports This component is the extended version of the Label component with all its functionality plus report specific properties To place a Report Label within a report section click the Label component in the Toolbox
442. odeCharge Studio selects for the control Normally the name of the control is the form name followed by the control name without spaces e g store_productsprice where store_products is the name of the form When a web page is requested e g from browser all CodeCharge Studio controls are rendered as HTML controls The name generated must match the name of the HTML control generated by CodeCharge Studio so you may need to examine the rendered web page source first to determine the name e g store_products_ctl0O_image_url Also if the control you want to update is a Label control you will need to add a lt span gt tag in order to uniquely identify the control e g item_name lt span id my_formitem_name gt lt span gt ro Controls Control name Field name Target price price value image_url product_id src description category_id innerHTML product_name image_url description Is recommended Is_active The Field name is the name of the database field which depends on the datasource you have defined in the Builder a ba Controls Control name Field name Target price price value image_url image_url description description Ta T ML The Target is the HTML property of the Control you specified When the web page is requested e g in the browser all CodeCharge Studio controls are rendered as HTML controls When Autofill is activated this is the 417 property of the associated HTML control that is up
443. ok like lt a href record php id 6372 amp edit true gt Record details lt a gt A list of currently configured link parameters is displayed on the Parameters tab It contains Parameter Name Source Type and Parameter Source columns representing each parameter s name and the way its value to pass is 2 1 extracted Beside the list three buttons are available for adding new parameter plus button removing selected one minus button and editing selected parameter s properties Under the list a preview window provides insight into how the resulting link will look like Adding a new parameter or editing an existing one opens Link Parameter dialog Link Parameter Source Type DataSource Column Parameter Source Parameter name Preview OK Cancel It provides a preview and fields to specify three parameter s properties e Source Type which specifies the way parameter s value is evaluated the following selections are available Expression is used to provide an expression evaluated using site s selected language syntax URL is used to extract current page s parameters passed through URL Form is used to retrieve values of the fields submitted to the current page using some form Session is used to retrieve session variables persisted between user page loads Application is used to retrieve application scoped variables Cookie is used to retrieve a value from client side cookies DataSource Column is used to retrieve a value from
444. om Delete ze Insert Update Delete A unique name for the form A collection of form attributes which are or can be used in the HTML template of the record form The database connection used by the form The type of database resource that provides the data for the form The table SQL query or stored procedure that provides the data for the form The page to which the user is redirected to after the form has been submitted successtully Specify a common separated list of form or URL parameters which should not be propagated when the form is submitted Specify whether the URL should be automatically converted to an absolute URL or secure URL for the SSL protocol https Specify whether users must be authenticated before being able to view the form Specify where the form can be used to insert new data Specify where the form can be used to update existing data Specify where the form can be used to delete existing data Specify whether Get or Post parameters should be preserved when the form is submitted If you wish to override the default insert mechanism select the type of method to be used to perform the insert operation Specify the table SQL query or stored procedure to be used for the custom insert If you wish to override the default update mechanism select the type of method to be used to perform the update operation Specify the table SQL query or stored procedure to be used for the custom update I
445. on applications Choose PHP if you re new to the web and do not have specific requirements Otherwise if you need to make a long term decision then it is important that you research all available technologies If you prefer the Windows operating system or Windows is your organization s standard then you ll most likely use it with the IIS web server and MS SQL database running ASP or NET C or VB programs Choose ASP if you need a technology that is easy to understand and learn but keep in mind that Microsoft s current focus is on NET technologies thus you should strongly consider using it sooner rather than later It is also possible that ASP will be slowly phased out and not available in future versions of Windows If you re already familiar with any object 38 oriented technologies then NET is probably the best choice for you anyway C is derived from C while VB NET is derived from Visual Basic but adapted to support object oriented programming constructs similar to C Database If you already have an existing database and want to create a web interface for it then your technology decision may be related to the type of database For example if you use a Windows compatible database such MS Access or MS SQL you should probably consider using the ASP or NET technology on a Windows hosted IIS server If your existing database is MySQL then you are probably already familiar with Linux and you may want to consider using it with PHP
446. ontrol for the group_id field in the Employees table click on the field and then the Input tab The control type displayed is the one currently configured as the default Normally for integer fields the default assignment in the data dictionary is TextBox You can see from looking at the tables that the group_id relates to the groups table It is fairly common then that you would change this control on the record to a ListBox and use the ListBox to display a list of Group names instead of forcing the user to enter a numeric value for the group Change the Input control type for the group_id field from TextBox to ListBox and change the caption from Group Id to Group Name since the record form will display names instead of ids q gt gt Table properties Form Title Display List of Employees Grid Events Record Form Events Form Title Input Add Edit Employees Report Events Columns properties Database Column Data Type Column Size Display Input Listbox Events Visible Yes Caption Group Name Default Value Unique Validation Rule Validation Text Data Source groups Bound Column group _id Text Column group name You will notice that some properties were prefilled and did not have to be changed Data Source Bound Column Text Column This is because there exists a relationship between the Groups table and the Employees table on the group_id field CodeCharge Studio uses this relations
447. operties for a Path can be exposed in the Properties window by clicking on the name of the Path in the Project Explorer window Name A unique name for the Path component Connection Database connection used by the component Source Type Type of database resource that provides the data for the Path Data Source Table SQL query or stored procedure that provides the data for the Path ID Field Database field which contains the ID of the categories displayed in the Path Parent Field Database field which contains the Parent ID of the categories displayed in the Path a category_name Attributes Visible Yes Control Source Typ Database Column Control Source category_name Data Type Text Format Default Value Content Text Href Type Page Href Source Default ccp Convert URL To None Remove Parameter Preserve Paramete GET DEBFormat Features Kdentifier name used in generated code and HTML template The Path component is composed of two Link fields and one Label field The first Link field has the text Main and is used to return the user to the root categories You can edit the HTML for this Link field and change the text Main e The second Link field in the Path component is populated dynamically to contain the list of parent categories leading up to the current category Notice that the text for this Link appears in curly braces meaning that it represents a template variable During runtime the underlying code determines
448. or C Program Files CodeChargeStudio5 Components os HTML Page Template En HTML Formatting a ler WET Framework a ma Cowindirvo Microsoft NET Framework v2 0 5072 ler Java SDK Home E via Source Control Java Ant Home The C compiler is a file called csc exe while the VB Net compiler is called voc exe The path to this file depends on the location where the Net Framework is installed An example path would be Swindir Microsoft NET Framework v2 0 50727 Once you have specified the correct path CodeCharge Studio will be able to invoke the compiler when the project pages are published If you enter the wrong path CodeCharge Studio will inform you that it was not able to locate the compiler whenever you attempt to publish a Net project In addition to the compiler requirement all Net projects must be published to a virtual folder configured in the web server 222 Virtual Directory Creation Wizard To create a virtual folder open the Internet Information Services Manager and select the site where the project will be published Then use the Action New Virtual Directory menu option to open the Virtual Directory Creation Wizard which will guide you through the steps of creating a virtual directory Internet Information Services Action view a m m Ee q Explore Open Browse Services E Start Site Stopped Stop Site Pause All Tasks d virtual Directory Delete Se
449. or each record that needs to be shown If the grid has 10 rows to be shown the data row will be printed out 10 times each time with different data being shown in the data controls If you create a grid form using the Grid builders you can elect to have an alternate data row One row would have a different background color to emphasize the separation between consecutive rows The row which appears under the data row contains text which is displayed whenever there is no data to be shown for the grid This row is displayed conditionally meaning that it is not shown when there is at least one row of data in the grid You can change the text within this row as you wish Navigator Row The last row in a grid is usually reserved for the Navigator control In a grid with records which span multiple pages the navigator provides a way to browse through all the available pages Grid Properties You can click on glyphs surrounding a grid to expose the grid s design time properties under the Data tab of the Properties panel Alternatively you can click on the name of the grid in the Project Explorer Certain grid properties can also be modified dynamically at run time The list of available design and run time properties of a grid can be found in the Grid Form Reference Record Form Description A record form is used to add edit or delete database content The record form makes these operations possible by providing three buttons that are used to initiate
450. ords No records found message Images folder Use Original image size Use browser scaling Width Height Inserts a non breaking space amp nbsp into empty gallery cells This option is used to improve the gallery layout since some web browsers do not display cell borders when a Cell is empty Add a label that displays the total number of records images retrieved by the gallery data source Message text to be displayed if there are no records images returned by the data source Either absolute or relative path to the image folder on the server If relative path is specified it should be relative to the folder of the current page You can leave this option blank if images are stored in the same folder as the current page or if your database contains absolute image URLs Select this option if you want to display images in their original size Select this option if you want to resize your images to match specific width or height The images will be resized by the Web browser which may result in poor image quality Specifies pixel width of the image to be resized Leave blank if you want the width to be calculated based on the height specified below while preserving aspect ratio of the original image Specifies pixel height of the image to be resized Leave blank if you want the height to be calculated based on the width specified above while preserving aspect ratio of the original image p ha Gallery Build
451. ormatting attributes CodeCharge Studio eliminates most of the detailed work and complexity involved in defining stylesheets In CodeCharge Studio styles are a particular set of stylesheet rules that you can refer to by name and apply in one step to either a page or component CodeCharge Studio includes several predefined styles plus a powerful Style Builder that allows developers to visually create new styles or modify existing ones Internally each Style is implemented as a standard cascading stylesheet file with the extension css plus accompanying images CodeCharge Studio also utilizes themes which are similar to styles but in a more specialized format They are no longer supported by CodeCharge Studio 5 but included for compatibility with previous product versions A style can be applied to a whole page or to individual components such as a grid record calendar etc However it is recommended that you use only one style per page to simplify the HTML and assure cross browser compatibility A style can also be applied to a whole project in which case styles assigned to all pages within the project will be replaced with the newly selected style A default style for the project can also be specified in your project settings in which case the style will be applied automatically to newly created pages Styles are stored in the Styles sub folder of your web project and are published to the web server in the same way The Styles folder is further
452. orms Enable this feature if User passwords are or will be stored in the database in an encrypted format You want to store passwords in the database in an encrypted format when entered by users on user registration and user maintenance forms optional By enabling this feature the login page will validate each user s password by encrypting it and searching for a matching encrypted password in the database The passwords must already be encrypted in the database or you must create a user registration form that saves passwords in an encrypted format as described in Implementing Password Encryption CodeCharge Studio provides two methods of protecting password confidentiality encrypting passwords using a database function or programming code code expression Notes Enabling disabling or changing the encryption method may invalidate all passwords already stored in the database using a previous encryption method Using encryption can make it more difficult to validate user passwords by external applications that may not support encryption or utilize a different encryption algorithm Database encryption function or database expression to be used to encrypt the password string Provide the name of a database function that supports single string value to be encrypted however you do not need to include the string argument Sample values for MySQL MD5 PASSWORD SHA1 Alternatively you can specify a database expression and include p
453. ort Events Columns prope ries Database Column Data Type Column Size Display Input Integer Liis play Control Label Events Caption Emp ld Default Value Format DBFormat 8 5 Display Control Type of control You may notice that the panes of the Data Dictionary such as the Database Explorer and Property Editor all share the same window space with other views of your project such as the Properties pane Don t confuse the Properties pane with the properties you can can configure thru the Property Editor in the Data Dictionary The properties in the Properties pane are related to the Project Explorer only Changing the properties in the Properties pane changes the properties of components you have already created in your project They are not part of the data dictionary The only way to change properties in the data dictionary is with the Data Dictionary Property Editor The property editor defines properties associated with the Code Charge Studio Builders There are three classifications of properties you can change Table Field and Control Type Table If you include this table in your datasource you can customize the caption that appears on the forms depending on the type of form generated e g Display Grid Input Editable Grid You can also also assign actions to events associated with these forms You cannot define custom code and the events you select are only added to your page if you include this table in your
454. orward slashes 125 File Source Control menu reference CVS After opening a project controlled with the CVS Source Control the File menu provides a context sensitive Source Control submenu for executing CVS commands It includes several items that are enabled or disabled depending on the selection made in the Project Explorer The menu items include commands which are also available from Project Explorer nodes context menu right clicking Add to Source Checks if there are new non versioned files within selected context folder page or project PE Control node and prompts to mark them for adding in the next Commit operation Update Prompts to retrieve up to date file versions from the repository for the selected context if new version is detected in the repository for a file modified locally a conflict is indicated which needs to be resolved using merge tool Commit Prompts for modified files to be uploaded to the repository creating new file versions Edit Prompts to select files to lock for local editing Unkdit Prompts to remove editing lock from a local copy restoring a version from the repository File Source Control menu reference non CVS After opening a project controlled with a non CVS Source Control the File menu provides a context sensitive Source Control submenu for executing versioning commands It includes several items which are enabled or disabled depending on the selection made in the Project Explorer The
455. ory in megabytes available for the Java Virtual Machine when javac runs Semicolon separated file list These files will be copied to the WEB INF lib directory of your application Specifies the template folder Specifies the RegExp API Host server where your application will be deployed Specifies if the files will be output into the folder or will be packed into the war file Tomcat application manager URL This property is used only if Tomcat is the target server Connection Login for Tomcat application manager This property is used only if Tomcat is the target server Connection Password for Tomcat application manager This property is used only if Tomcat is the target server The context path including the leading slash of the web application you are dealing with This property is used only if Tomcat is the target server The server path to the published files This property is used only if Tomcat is the target server The path to the CKeditor installation folder on the server absolute starting with or relative to the project folder For example CKeditor or CKeditor 86 ASP NET C Secure Server Base SSL URL used to access pages configured for SSL access URL Target Version Target NET Framework version Target Schema Target Schema for ASPX pages NET Debug Specifies whether the code linked error messages should be output Mode References Semicolon separated list of project references Assemb
456. other languages the design time connection when using PERL can be made using an OLE DB provider and driver or through an ODBC DSN However the server side connection for the PERL language requires that you install additional packages that implement the database connectivity Depending on the PERL distribution you are using there are different ways of installing packages There are also a number of publicly accessible sites where the packages can be downloaded from If you have the IndigoStar distribution of PERL you can use the GUI package manager to automatically download and install packages For the ActivateState distribution you can run the PPM bat file from a command prompt and use it to browse download and install packages For other distributions please consult the documentation that accompanies the software The packages required for PERL database connectivity are The database Interface called DBI A database driver for the specific database you are using The name of the drivers is usually of the form DBD database_name where database_name is the name of the database concerned For instance if your database of choice is MySQL you would need to have the DBI package as well as DBD MySQL Similarly to connect to an ODBC data source you would need the DBD ODBC package in addition to the DBI package Note that the DBI package needs to be installed only once after which you can incrementally install the DBD packages for the databases you
457. ou apply a design directly with the Master Page property the Add design to this page and Remove design from this page options are not available These options are only available when you let CodeCharge Studio modify the component properties To remove a design that you have applied directly delete the Master Page property by setting the property value to all blanks 149 Changing the Design Applied to a Web Page If you select Preview mode for your page CodeCharge Studio will show you how the design will affect your page You can view the effect other designs will have by selecting the Designs button on the ribbon bar and hovering the cursor over different designs Once you have found a design you want to use simply click on the design to make it the default and CodeCharge Studio will apply the design to the page Note this will not work unless you have a design applied to the page and you are using the CCS_PathToMasterPage variable to specify the location of the master page for the design Using Master Pages Using the CCS PathToMasterPage Variable Open a Fj Add Connection Bsret or ER A a save T Add Diagram ol server Connections 2 ia Publish Publish Live Home pplication _ Builder J Delete 4 Publishing Settings Projet Page Page Publishing F Employees Pronties Projects Statuses Tasks Add Edit Tasks Eror Select Value Select Value
458. ou have to specify the database table that contains the user details as well as the fields within the table that contain particular information This information includes the ID field which holds the unique ID for each user the login and password fields which contains the username password combination to be used during authentication and optionally a group level field which indicates the group to which each user belongs By clicking the Advanced button you can open the Advanced Security Settings dialog where you can configure additional parameters such as the names of session variables associated with an authenticate user password encryption and the Remember Me feature Project settings Security Method None Table Login Page Login ccp ca Convert Login Page URL to Absolute Connection IntranetDB Refresh User Table employees User ID Field emp_id Login Field emp_login Password Field emp_password Level Group Field group_id ka By default session variables are created for the User ID Variable User Login Variable and Group ID Variable only If other session variables are to be used you need to write custom code for them Please see the Create Custom Session Variables example 89 Security Groups If the site users are categorized into different groups you can use the Security Groups section to setup group ID s and names The Group ID values should correspond to the database fiel
459. ould be provided in the Project textbox New folder is created after clicking Create button without closing the dialog or after clicking OK button confirming selection Add to SourceSafe Project x Project OF Cancel Cancel Create Hep 127 SourceGear SourceOffSite 1 Upon connecting Source Control repository using SourceGear SourceOffSite provider the Connect To Server dialog is displayed It specifies remote SourceOffSite host properties namely Server and Port 2 Note Avoid selecting Connect automatically checkbox as it prevents database selection dialog from being displayed and repository operations will be only limited to the last used Source Control database 3 After connecting the SourceOffSite repository login dialog is displayed to provide Username and Password information and to choose Database to use on the remote repository 4 After successful login Add Connect to SourceSafe Project dialog is displayed Folders tree is presented to choose existing folder for CodeCharge Studio new project or create new one Refresh Project Tree button can be used to retrieve updated repository structure from the server Selection is confirmed by clicking OK button 5 Note When choosing existing folder for CodeCharge Studio project files make sure Project textbox is empty to avoid creating subfolder after clicking OK button Connect To Server Server Server x Connect Fort Cancel Connect automat
460. ovide single line input Used to present the multiple line inputs placed inside the table Used to present the directory Used to present the calendar Used exclusively on grid forms It allows the data within the grid to be sorted according to a particular field Used exclusively on grid forms A navigator provides functionality that allows the database records within a grid to be browsed Used to represent a path Panel component with an assigned AJAX feature also called Update Panel that causes any forms placed within the panel to interact without page refresh Displays panel content in a separate window overlay Create panels for every placeholder on selected template page The Tabbed View enables a panel to include navigable tabbed views of content 56 El Gl e E l E amp FEK Tabbed Tab Placeholder Slider Captcha Numeric Up Down Pop Up Date Picker Hidden Text Area Check Box Image Image Link Radio Button List Box Button Check Box List Add File Upload Add CK editor The Tabbed Tab displays panel content as a tab of a Tabbed View Placeholder controls define regions where replaceable content will appear The slider is a control that allows the user to change the values of another control by moving an icon along a gradient scale Captcha requires that the user type letters or digits from a distorted image that appears on the screen Text Box component with Up and Down icons
461. ovider offers better performance than the OLE DB or ADO drivers since it taps into the native Oracle API without using an automation layer such as that used by OLE DB or ADO Note While working with Oracle it is strongly recommended that you not use the OleDB provider since this may cause serious problems Please use the ODP Net data provider instead 114 In the event that you use a native vendor provider refer to their documentation for instructions on how to configure the connection Note that if your CodeCharge Studio project is pre compiled before publishing the binaries for the provider may have to be present and properly registered in the machine where the compilation takes place i e where you are running CodeCharge Studio even though you may not be using that type of connection for designing your application Modify Connection Server Serverl x Design Advanced Serwer Database MySQL Date Format yyyy mm dd HH nnss Boolean Format 1 0 Use LIMIT TOP Same as Design Use Connection String server 127 0 0 1 database internet Use system provider System Data OleDb Use custom provider Name mysql connection Invariant mysql Type MySql Data MySqlClient MySqlt The changes will be applied to server Server Hep ok cance When you are using a vendor supplied provider you have to provide certain information before CodeCharge Studio can use that connector Use custom Select thi
462. ow this first Link control e The second Link control in the directory form is used to place all subcategories below their root category e The last Link control in the directory form appears only when there are more subcategories than the value of the No of Subcategories property The user can click on this link to access the rest of the categories CateqoryLink Mo categories found UbcategorvLink lore Form Data Source Description In CodeCharge Studio dynamic data is displayed using fields that are contained within different types of forms The data that could be displayed in a form field depends on the data source configured for the form In other words a forms data source determines the selection of database fields that a field in that form could be configured to display This section will examine how form data sources are configured It will show how to configure a form data source from scratch as opposed to using a form builder to automate the process of building the form and its data source A form data source is configured using the Visual Query Builder dialog window The Visual Query Builder dialog window can be accessed by the Data Source property of a form in the Data tab of the Properties window In addition to facilitating the configuration of a data source for a form the Visual Query Builder dialog window is used to setup input parameters Inout parameters are values that are received by the form and used in the process of
463. ox TextBox1 gt Attributes placed at page level have predefined prefix named page which can be used anywhere on the page without limitations However these attributes are always related to the master page thus if you use page attribute within an includable page its value will be retrieved from the master s page collection Examples Example The following example demonstrates how to improve Web accessibility by applying ALT text to images for example in Web based gallery Use the Gallery Builder to create a gallery based on the Employees table in the supplied Intranet database then switch to the HTML mode and find HTML code that represents image link similar to the one below lt a href picture gt lt img src picture_Src border 0 gt lt a gt Now edit the HTML to create an ALT attribute and then add an attribute named AltAttr as shown below lt a href picture gt lt img src picture_Src border 0 alt picture AltAttr gt lt a gt Use the following attribute configuration Source Type DataSource column Source Name emp_name 281 HTML Controls Bookmark HTML lt a name Bookmark1 gt lt a gt Description A Bookmark is essentially a named anchor that can be the destination of another link Anchors are often used in long pages so that the user can conveniently jump to designated positions within the document by using links to the anchors Create Bookmark Bookmark name OK Cance
464. pdate files when opening the project Commit files when closing the project M Prompt to add files when inserted M Prompt to Update files M Prompt to Commit files M Prompt to Edit files M Prompt to UnEdit files Add new projects to the source control Automatically Commit files that were changed during generation 121 Project settings Source Control Visual SourceSafe Upon checking Enable Version Control for the project checkbox and choosing Microsoft Visual SourceSafe in the Provider list box the following configuration options are available to configure Visual SourceSafe access Database Path to the ini file describing Visual SourceSafe connectivity Browse button to lookup the ini file Test Button to test Visual SourceSafe connectivity functional Path Path within the repository where the project is will be located Login Login information used to authenticate repository access password saved separately Project settings Source Control settings M Enable Version Control for the project Provider Microsoft Visual SourceSafe Database a se Test Path GNewProjectl Login P Detailed Visual SourceSafe connection settings including database name and login information are configured using SourceOffSite specific dialogs displayed upon connecting the repository after project reloads 122 Project Settings Source Control SourceGear SourceOffSite Upon checking Enable Version Control for the p
465. peration completes Advanced Used to display additional provider specific options r Add To Source Control Mane Path en txt C Program Files CodeChargeStudio Projects NewProject l MewPagel ccp C Program Filesi CodeChargeStudio Projects NewProject Cancel NewPagel html C Program Files CodeChargeStudio Projects NewProject JE MewProject ccs C Program Files CodeChargesStudioi Projects NewProjecti Select All Unselect All Keep Checked Out Comment The following table summarizes which features are available in operation s prompt dialog Add to Source Control CVS Commit CVS X X Edit CVS Xx UnEdit CVS Xx Update CVS X Add to Source Control non CVS x X X Check In non CVS X X X Check Out non CVS X X x Details Get Latest Version non CVS X x Details Undo Check Out X x Details 129 Advanced Operation Options Dialogs Visual SourceSafe Advanced Check Out Options Dialog Action that should be taken when trying to overwrite writable file during Get operation Ask Replace Skip Merge Set time Timestamp that should be assigned to the retrieved file Current Modification Check In Don t get local copy Prevents check out operation from getting the most recent version from server Allow multiple Overrides default reserved checkout mode checkouts Advanced Check Out Options x Replace writable OK Ask Dont get local copy Allow multiple
466. ple Pack CCS Ajax Examples Blog To create a new project i e web application select New project and click OK To open an existing project click it in the list of recently opened projects or select Open Projects to browse and find the project on your computer If you are evaluating CodeCharge Studio a splash screen will appear with several options that allow you to view the license agreement try the product activate it or exit If your evaluation period has expired the Try button will be disabled and you will have a choice to activate the product or exit by selecting the Quit button 42 Product Activation When you purchase CodeCharge Studio you receive a Serial Number that allows you to activate the product and remove the 30 day trial protection Product activation also removes the message Generated with CodeCharge Studio that is included at the bottom of web pages generated by the trial version To activate CodeCharge Studio select Activate Product from the CodeCharge Studio menu or press the Activation button on the initial splash screen that is shown after CodeCharge Studio is launched In the CodeCharge Studio Activation dialog enter the information that identifies you as a registered user Note The Name Company and Address are optional but the Serial Number is a required field Once you enter the Serial Number and other information click OK to activate the product via the Internet CodeCharge Studio attempts to connect to a
467. pplication at run time specifies none This option enables internationalization features within your application It allows you to generate and publish an internationalized application that can be localized without using CodeCharge Studio even if you have setup only one language within CodeCharge Studio such as English If selected the following features will be incorporated into your application The text translations resources will be published as standalone files separate from the application code Therefore even if you make your generated application code available for sale without CodeCharge Studio your clients will be able to edit the text or create new translations by editing the resource files on the sever Ability to accept locale selection requests via HTTP cookie session variable or URL parameter and activate the corresponding locale Pages will be displayed in the output encoding corresponding to the active Locale If this option is not selected the text translations will be included as part of the programming code in common files Common asp Common php etc Notes This option is selected automatically when you have added more than one language in your CodeCharge Studio project This option affects only the generated applications as internationalization features are always available in CodeCharge Studioa s IDE and do not depend on this option Pages will be displayed in the output encoding specified via the META
468. pre selected the next time you use the Report Builder i Report Builder _ Use an existing database connection Intern etDE Create US Data Source or select a sample database daa Groups Internet Database C Intranet Database Layout Calc Fields Internationalized use translation resources res 24 Sorting If Save builder options Click Next to proceed to step 2 385 Step 2 Select a data source and fields for the report Data Source Specify the table s or view s for the report to be based on or click Build Query to access Visual Query Builder where you can design your database query or enter an SQL query statement Build Query Brings up the Visual Query Builder window where you can setup a SQL query that will act as the report data source Fields for the The list of fields returned by the data source selected to be included in the report Report Refreshes the list of tables and fields in the database if you make changes to the database after having begun using the builder Order By Select the database field by which you d like to order the data on the report Select Custom or click to select multiple fields or specify descending order a Report Builder Data Source ig Connection store_categores store_products 4 uid Query saa Groups Layout m price anii Calc Fields product_name
469. process and output to the web browser Template files consist of standard HTML content plus specially marked template blocks that are replaced with database values or expressions during run time Templates are used by CodeCharge Studio during the design time and optionally are utilized by generated programs during run time Template use during design time Template is one of the key components in designing web applications with CodeCharge Studio Working with templates is the same as working with standard HTML however CodeCharge Studio embeds template blocks within the template to store additional information about components Template use during run time When working with Templated technologies such as PHP amp Templates during code generation CodeCharge Studio publishes templates to the server as is which are later utilized by the generated programs during run time Templated programs utilize templates as follows A user points their browser to a page on the web server for example www site com Default asp A program Default asp is executed on the web server which then loads the template into internal memory and renders it by replacing template blocks with dynamic data The program then outputs rendered template to the browser When working with non Templated technologies such as PHP or ASP Templates are not being used CodeCharge Studio converts templates during code generation to standard HTML and programming code necessary to outp
470. publishing settings and database connections settings which may differ across different servers the application is published to and run on Each SP specifies a different set of publishing properties depending on the publishing method selected Local Network publishing vs FTP SFTP SSH publishing Also the range of database connection settings depends on the database you are connecting to and API used to connect Changing Server Profiles Server Profiles defined within current project scope are available through a listbox in the CodeCharge Studio toolbar The listbox contains server configurations defined in the current project scope Listbox selection specifies the active profile which is used when publishing project files By default each CodeCharge Studio project defines two profiles e Server1 stores default local publishing settings e Server2 stores the alternate FTP publishing settings po Name Server FTP Server gE Edit Servers Managing Server Profiles To define duplicate or rename a server profile Servers dialog is used To access it choose Edit Servers option in the toolbar Server Profiles switching listbox or click Edit Servers button in the Project settings dialog s Publishing section 205 The Servers dialog lists Server Profiles defined in the project scope The list presents Server Name and Type columns specifying Server Profile s name and publishing method chosen The active Server Profile is marked w
471. r IA Data Source C 4 4 5 of 10 bHLH c sh Groups m le lt lt 50f10 gt gt gt z First Prev 1 2 3 4 5 of 10 Next Last Manual Input Custom M odifyzx Click Next to proceed to step 7 390 Step 7 Define report options Specify additional layout and behavior options for the report cii Report Builder Display and Print options Lines per Web page Enable print mode ch Groups Lines per print page Create printable version link Ha Connection lA Data Source Layout M Use client paging Calc Fields Features to include A sorting Total Records Found Page M of N OG Navigation Record separator s i iiz i te INTA ISINIAININ TATA PET ALAU ELEC RL TE INAR IW TW NANA IAG F es a C Non breaking space in empty cells Current date and time as Search Date M Row numbering reset by Os Repot S YC No records found message No records 391 Lines per Web page Enable mode print Lines per print page Create printable version link Total Found Page M of N Records Use client paging Record separator Non breaking space in empty cells Current Date and Time as Row numbering reset by No records found message The height of the report page displayed in a Web browser measured in abstract line units assigned to each report section Refer to the Report Paging section of the doc
472. r alternative is Windows with IIS and MS Access running ASP or NET programs This environment can be installed at a cost below 500 but at some point you could outgrow MS Access as it is a limited database sufficient for a small number of users The CodeCharge community Website hitto Awww gotocode com successfully used MS Access for over a year However we found that the server occasionally crashed when more than 10 users submitted information at exactly the same time Thus the recommended alternative for Windows users is to use MS SQL database although this brings the cost of the system to over 1 000 and even much more if you plan on implementing a scalable multi server solution If you re willing to spend the extra money then you can also consider obtaining ColdFusion or Java for either Linux or Windows If you do not require to have your own dedicated server then you can easily find many web hosting companies that offer both Linux and Windows Web hosting plans for anywhere between 10 and 50 or more for advanced needs The price usually covers support for a variety of technologies including PHP Java PERL and ColdFusion for the Linux platform as well as ASP NET Java and ColdFusion for the Windows platform Operating System Preference If you love the Linux operating system or your management requires the use of Linux for web hosting then you are most likely to use the Apache web server and a MySQL database running PHP Java or ColdFusi
473. r content page to these new panels as follows o Moves all the HTML between the lt head gt tags to a panel called head o Moves all the HTML between the lt body gt tags to a panel called content e Again if your master page does not include these placeholders they will be created automatically when you apply the design however unless you map the placeholder property to the correct placeholders on the master page this will not work e Do not modify or delete the placeholder tags directly in your master pages e g content nhead You can modify the HTML around the tags but do not rename the tags delete the tags or add tags of your own directly If you create your template say with another editor it is sometimes useful to write the tags directly in HTML This is useful for identifying where your placeholders should be in the template but later you will need to replace this code by inserting the placeholders in the IDE using the ribbon bar Forms Components PlaceHolder This is because PlaceHolder components are represented by tags in the HTML but their definition is kept in the CodeCharge Studio page The IDE cannot create the components from just the tags in the HTML e Your design stylesheet should appear at the top of the master page and you should remove any other stylesheets e g any CodeCharge Studio Style stylesheets e Do not modify the template markers in your content page e g lt BEGIN Panel conten
474. r in the Project Explorer window and select the New Page option CodeCharge Studio 5 Pad oo aid Home Data Dictionary Builders Forms Edit l j at i I r ar ir 7 7 zh P Open Fl Add Connection SF Server a ra Save Add Diagram l Server Connections Blank Includable Login Application Designs Page Page Page Builder A elete o ET Settings Er Fublishing Settings Fages Project Project Explorer ix L TaskManager n Diagr ts E ap Connections m Resources ja Common Files Regardless of the method you use to initiate the process you will be presented with the Add New Page dialog which has two tabs The first tab is called Pages and allows you to create CodeCharge Studio pages ccp Using this page you can elect to Create one or more pages using the Application Builder Create a Login Page that will automatically have a Login form The site Security settings must be configured before selecting this option Add different types of files which aren t in CodeCharge Studio format ccp from the Files tab of the Add New Page window 74 Note These files cannot be used to add CodeCharge Forms Controls or Components from within the CodeCharge Studio IDE If you add Text XML or JScript files you will be able to open and see the raw code within the files If you add a HTML file you will be able to see the raw code as well as switch to Design and Preview mode
475. r information Session variables must be properly configured and working on the server if the project implements security The PHP ini file specifies the location where the session variable files are stored This is in a variable called session_save_path Make sure that this variable refers to a valid folder or the server will not be able to create session variables If you are using a remote host which means that you do not have access to the PHP ini file you can ask your host if they allow user defined htaccess files In an Apache server a htaccess file placed in the users directory can be used to override the default properties configured in files such as the PHP ini file For more information about these files please refer to the Apache documentation When deploying a PHP project the server side database connection is always different from the design time database connection This is unlike ASP and Net where the server and design connections can be the same This means that in all projects you have to configure the server side connection before publishing 212 The server side database connections in PHP are implemented using database libraries Each library contains code that encapsulates the functions needed to carry out database operations Currently there are libraries for Interbase MSQL MySQL Improved MySQL ODBC Oracle Oracle OCI PostgreSQL SQL Server SQL Anywhere and Sybase Add New Connection x Design Advanced Server
476. r the locales added to your project If you only want selected locales to appear in the editor select Multiple to access the list of all available locales You can add several locales by holding the CTRL or SHIFT button Show only those keys for which translation in not defined Search feature to display only those keys and translations where the specified keyword is found Add or delete a translation resource key and associated translations Export or import translated resources to or from a comma separated CSV file The translation resource key that identifies a translation string A single key is used with multiple translation strings that have the same meaning across multiple locales Displays the locale associated with the translation string Translation string that will be used to display information at run time in place of the key Project settings x y va Source Control Locales amp Encodings settings File Encoding Western European Windows 1252 Default HTML Encoding Western European Windows 1252 Date Display Format ShorDate hi Site Locales Add French Edit Translations Remove OK Cancel 196 Note some translations such as Chinese may not appear as displayable text in the editor This is because the characters are in Unicode To view or edit this text click on the translation next to the key and select the ellipsis next to the text Thi
477. r was selected the Connection tab will resemble the illustration It is necessary to enter a path to the Microsoft Access database file in the Select or enter a database name field If the Microsoft Access database file is password secured you will also need to enter the necessary authentication details in the User name and Password fields Otherwise as is most frequently the case the Blank password checkbox is activated to indicate that no authentication is required to access the database After entering the necessary details it is a good idea to click Test Connection to make sure that the configuration works correctly If correct a dialog box appears to confirm the integrity of the connection otherwise an error message Is displayed depending on the specific error Data Link Properties Provider CUER Advanced All Select the data you want to connect to OLE DB Provider s Microsoft Office 12 0 Access Database Engine OLE DB Pro Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Analysis Services 9 0 Microsoft OLE DB Provider For Data Mining Services Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Indexing Service Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers Microsoft OLE DB Provider for OLAF Services 2 0 Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Oracle Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Search Microsoft OLE DB Provider tor SQL Server Microsoft OLE DB Simple Provider MS Data Shape OLE DE Provider for Microsoft Directory Services 4 ilii ok Canca
478. r way you intend to style your pages 179 Searching and Replacing CodeCharge Studio provides facilities to search and replace occurrences of specified text within a single file or multiple files You can access these facilities using the Edit Find and Replace menu option Find The Find command is used to find instances of some text within a single file that is opened in the document window Find What Enter the text or regular expression to search for Match whole word Perform a search for whole words as opposed to parts of larger words only Match case Perform a search which distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters Regular Expression Activate this checkbox if the text entered in the Find what field is a regular expression Direction Specify the direction in which the search should be performed based on the current position of the cursor Find Next Find the next occurrence of the search text Mark All Perform a search and place a bar mark to the left of each line where the text is found Cancel Terminate the search and close the dialog box Note When you are working in Design mode the Regular Expression and Mark All options are not available These two options appear when in HTML or Code mode Find Next Match whole word only Mark All Match case Cancel Regular expression 180 Replace The Replace command is used to find and replace instances of some text within a single file that is opene
479. r when the form is submitted Before the file is stored on the server the File Upload component performs validation checks to ensure that the file does not exceed a specified size limit or is of a type that is not allowed If the validation fails the form will appear again with an error message and the file will not be saved to the server Note that the file input control appears when a new record is being inserted or there is no existing file associated with the record being viewed If the record being viewed has an existing file the File Upload component will display information about the file and hide the file input control Picture logo png 33870 bytes Delete F The file input control is always displayed if the Required property of the form is set to Yes In this case the information about the file and file input control is shown Add Edit Files logo png 33870 bytes Delete Submit 267 Hidden Input Control The File Upload component also contains a hidden input control The HTML code for the hidden input control is lt input type hidden value ActualFileName name Control Name gt Picture if State FileName FileSize bytes File upload Browse Delete This hidden input control is used when a record containing an existing file is being viewed In this case the value of the input control is set to the actual filename of the file that is currently present A The user does not see the hidden
480. r_country_id gt lt th gt Visually on the rendered web page the page style and the component style may look the exactly the same To tell what type of styling is applied to a form you will have to look at the code in HTML mode In the example above the page style for the grid form contains specific references to icons in the style Same as component but the HTML code does not refer to the style by name For example forms e g Grid are described as HTML tables so the generic page stylesheet defines rules for all HTML tables or rules related to named elements e g class Row class Caption etc With component style the HTML for the Grid is the same but now special attributes have been added to the HTML so the stylesheet can target this particular form The elements of the table describing the form are named by stylesheet e g class GridCozy Using Styles with Form Templates Different rules apply to the builders when you are using a form template Normally when you run one of the builders you can assign a Page or Component style to the page or form Which type of Style you choose affects the HTML generated for the form When you select Page style the HTML generated is the same as any other form created with the Page style This way you can change the style for more than one form at a time on the page since they share the same HTML code When you choose a Component style the HTML generated
481. rams to the Context element lt Resource name jdbc Connection1 auth Container tyoe avax sql DataSource gt lt ResourceParams name dbc Connection1 gt lt parameter gt lt name gt user lt name gt lt value gt User Name lt value gt lt oarameter gt lt parameter gt lt name gt password lt name gt lt value gt User Password lt value gt lt oarameter gt lt parameter gt lt name gt driverClassName lt name gt lt value gt Driver Class Name lt value gt lt oarameter gt lt parameter gt lt name gt driverName lt name gt lt value gt Database Connection URL lt value gt lt oarameter gt lt ResourceParams gt name is a JNDI name as indicated in your CCS Connection properties 219 Resin 2 0 scenarios Check that DB drivers are in class path of your server Choose appropriate scenario and change properties marked red scenario 1 Auto deployment from webapps directory DataSource extension is not used Before code generation verify that Use Data Source site property is set to No Fill in connection properties to indicate Driver class name Database url user login and password Ensure that your database driver is in your application server class path Place generated war file to where war dir element of Virtual Host configuration element points to Generally it is lt RESIN HOME gt webapps Scenario 2 Deployment through web app configuration DataSource extension is not used Add
482. rds Set active This button defines the SP to be used for generating code and publishing operations This operation is equivalent to switching active server profile using toolbar s Server Profiles listbox The currently active server profile is marked with Active following its name in the list Remove This button removes the currently selected Server Profile The settings are lost unless Cancel button is pressed to cancel dialog s editing operations Note The button is only enabled for non active Server Profiles Active Server Profile cannot be removed Help This button displays help topics related to the Servers dialog and Server Profiles OK Clicking this button approves changes made to the Server Profiles lists Cancel Clicking this button rejects all changes made to the Server Profiles list during dialog session The list is reverted to the state before opening the dialog Server Name Server 1 Active Add from file Server Rename Duplicate OK Cancel 206 Configuring Server Profiles Global Settings Options Publishing Settings Project settings Don t show message when new Server Profile is created Dont show message when Server Profile is changed Encrypt server and database passwords in Server Profiles Encryption Key Ask the password every time Publishing settings Active Server Serveri Edit Servers Website wil be published to this server until a different server is
483. rds found Specify the message that will be displayed in the grid form if there are no records to be message shown Display the total number Display the total number of records that are retrieved in a form of records Grid layout Tabular layout represents data in an ordinary datasheet view Columnar layout places each data source field into one row with column caption on its left Justified layout represents each data source field in two consecutive rows field name is placed in one row and the data is shown in the second row Custom HTML Template PY Editable Grid Builder Title Hij Connection Add Edit Users Grid layout 4 Data Source Tabular Search Columnar C Justified C HTML Template from file Records per page No records found message No records Record separator M Non breaking space in empty cells Display the total number of records Click Next to proceed to step 7 330 Step 7 Selecting Editable Grid Options You now have to decide the kind of functionality that will be available in the editable grid form You can uncheck any of the options if you don t want the form to have the corresponding functionality Editable Grid Operations Allow Insert Specify whether the Editable Grid should allow the user to insert new records Use the Number of empty rows property to specify the number of empty rows that should be provided for the purpose of inserting new records Allow Update
484. re to be used as gallery Data Source The list of fields available in the specified table or query These are the fields to be shown in the gallery They are selected from among the Available Fields Select an Available Field then click this button to add it to the gallery Click this button to add ALL Available Fields to the gallery Select a gallery field then click this button to remove it from the gallery Click this button to remove all fields from the gallery Select a gallery field then click this button to move it upwards in the order of appearance Select a gallery field then click this button to move it downwards in the order of appearance td gt Refreshes the list of tables and fields if you make changes to the database after having begun using the builder Specify the control type to be used for each of the fields in the form Here you should specify Image or Image Link type for the picture field 342 Any number of fields can be specified where at least one of them should contain the URLs of images to be displayed while others can contain image caption and any other information to be displayed above or below images a Gallery Builder Data Source Uj Connection employees Build Query a Gallery Fields emp name ENG Control Type i Order by After fields have been selected click Next to go on to step 3 343 Step 3 Adding a Search Form optional Step 3
485. reate the final page For instance each database field in a grid form has a corresponding template variable When the page is executed the programming code retrieves values from the database and replaces the template variables with the retrieved values Just like template blocks the names of template variables should not be altered or the programming code will not be able to parse the variables Template variables can be moved around to customize or adjust the layout of the page but this should be done with care and prior knowledge of how the change will affect the parsing of the page 164 Using JavaScript Jscript Ordinarily a page is mostly composed of HTML code that defines the static content within the page This is the content that is shown when a page is opened in HTML mode In certain situations it is desirable to make a page more interactive which can be accomplished by adding client side scripts The execution of client side scripts is largely dependent on events triggered when the user performs certain actions The script consists of a set of instructions for the action to be performed in response to the event The most popular language for writing client side scripts is JavaScript JScript is a Microsoft flavor of JavaScript that is specifically geared for execution on the Windows platform Scripts can also be written in VBScript but most non Microsoft browsers don t support VBScript Scripts are sometimes complicated by the fact tha
486. reflect the current database status if changes are made while using the Data Source window Display the list of tables available in the connection if you need to add a table Display the Join Link orTable Properties windows The Join Link window contains the properties of a join Joins are the lines that appear between two tables to represent a relationship between the tables Click on a join line then click on this button to display the Join Link window If you click on the properties button when a table is selected the Table Properties window appears and you can enter an alias name for the table An alias is an alternate name that can be used for example when you want to assign a shorter or more meaningful name to a database table Delete the selected table or join Display the SQL statement corresponding to the table and join setup in the Visual Query Builder This is the SQL statement will be executed during run time to retrieve fields for the form Retrieve and display a sample of the database content based on the data source type selected You can specify the number of records returned by entering a value in the Row Count field and hitting the Refresh button to retrieve the records Add a parameter to the where clause Please refer to the section on Using the Table Parameter window for more information Remove a parameter from the where clause View the configuration of an existing where clause parameter Move a parameter upwards i
487. rid form captures them for use in the where clause of the SQL statement that retrieves the database records Grid Sorters A grid form typically has sorter controls for each column in the grid Sorters controls are used to facilitate sorting of the records within the grid based on the columns of the grids For instance if a grid has name email and title 242 columns sorters could be used to sort the grid records based on any one of the three columns Sorter controls are usually located in the top most row of the grid as shown below HL e L ta m Grid Sorters kl Y Project Priority FY Status YF Hame amp Y Assigned To Y ilask id project_name priority name status name task name user id assign_to No records Add Mew ls Page Number of Total Pages When you build a grid form using the Grid builders you can elect to have the sorter controls automatically added to the form If you build the form manually you can also add sorter controls using the Sorter option under the Forms tab of the Toolbox For more information on how to add and configure sorter controls please refer to the section on building forms manually Data Row The controls which display data in a grid are usually contained in the second row of the grid Usually the data controls in a grid are Label controls that can display data but don t allow the user to alter or submit the data During runtime the data row in the grid is outputted f
488. rl pattern gt lt serviet mapping gt 262 lt serviet mapping gt lt serviet name gt SimpleUploader lt serviet name gt lt url pattern gt lt C KBase gt editor filemanager upload simpleuploader lt url pattern gt lt serviet mapping gt CKeditor or FCKeditor CKeditor is a third party rich text editor WYSIWYG that can be used instead of the HTML TextArea control CKeditor provides powerful visual text editing functionality for your pages E Source W O 2 5 pam a E ee wi cof R Be p m os h Bi U M x GE zwei E ZEEE wm B H Be e eEesgorye 7 oma T Font i Size A Ay Aln x CKeditor installation file as well as CKeditor documentation can be found at the CKeditor website There are two common methods of installing CKeditor for use in CCS projects e The simplest way is to copy CKeditor files directly to your project folder on the server In this case you do not need to publish CKeditor files when publishing your CCS project e Another method is to copy CKeditor files to a sub folder of your CCS project In this case you need to configure your project publishing settings so that CKeditor files will be published to the server Open CCS project settings and on the Publishing tab select All files with extensions then add all of CKeditor file extensions to the list The downside to this method is that publishing CKeditor files will increase project publishing time In CCS the CKeditor can be used by selecting it from
489. rmation for the project Login Defines the username to be used to log into the SourceOffSite server Project settings Source Control settings Enable Version Control for the project Provider SourceGear SourceOtsite Path NewProject1s Login Implementing Security A necessary prerequisite to the implementation of any security within a project is the creation of a login page to authenticate users To create a security login page Select the Login Page from the Home tab If you want to add a login form to an existing page you can use the Authentication Builder to create the form within the page Once you have a login page in the project you can configure the project security settings QQ Home Data Dictionary Builders D Ae E Open zl save Blank Includable Page Page Application Builder g Delete Data Dictionary Builders Forms Edit Pan Master Detail 3 p gt 5 Authenticatior Eley a Editable Grid Servic Grid Record Report Autocomplete Autofill Dependent Authentication Builder 4 Grid and Record ListBoxes View amp Edit Advanced 88 Project Security Settings To setup security for a project You need to specify the database table and fields that contain the user information This is done using the Security and Security Groups sections of the Project Settings windows In the Security section y
490. rneath Visible Sets whether or not the Panel is visible on the page Panel uses the CSS visibility property to control this Enabled Specifies whether the feature is active Width Sets the width of a window No value the panel is resized depending on the content Height Sets the height of a window No value the panel is resized depending on the content Show event Client event or condition that shows the modal window You can select one or multiple events or conditions via the provided dialog Hide event Client event or condition that hides the modal window You can select one or multiple events or conditions via the provided dialog Sample Implementation Name Dialogl Title New Panel Modal Yes Visible Mo Enabled Yes Width 500 Height 300 Show event ShowButten onclick Hide event 441 Slider Description The slider is a control that allows the user to change the values of another control by moving an icon along a gradient scale Supported Components All forms and controls Properties Name Enabled Length Minimum value Maximum value Step Position Orientation Default value User assigned name identifying the feature within HTML Specifies whether the feature is active Length of a Slider in pixels Minimum Slider value Maximum Slider value Value for every step Default position of slider This option determines whether the slider has the min at the left the max at the right or
491. rogramming Language Source Code Opening a project page in the Code mode displays the code for the page If the page has any server side events two pages are displayed one is the main page and the other is the page containing the code for the events Also all projects have a set of common files that can be accessed by double clicking on the Common Files tab in the Project Explorer window The common files contain functionality that is shared by all of the pages in project By default the programming code in a page is displayed using a gray back ground If the code is manually edited to differ from the code that was generated by CodeCharge Studio the background color of the code changes to white The white background is an indication that the code will no longer be automatically updated by CodeCharge Studio but rather is under the control of the developer This means that any changes you make to the page will not affect the code with the white background unless you change the code manually The screenshot below shows a block that has been manually edited and another that is in its original state Execute Components 41 SEF49D21 This Block Has been altered and therefore has a white background Header Operations search Operation End Execute Components Go to destination page 41 6D355F4Fp If NOT Redirect j Then UnloadPage Response Redirect Redirect End If End Go to destination In most cases events should be used to add any
492. roject checkbox and choosing SourceGear SourceOffSite in the Provider list box the following configuration options are available to configure SourceOffSite access Path Path within the repository where the project is will be located Login Login information used to authenticate repository access password saved separately Project settings Source Control settings M Enable Version Control for the project Provider SourceGear Sourcedttsite Path NewPra ject Login Detailed SourceOffSite connection settings are configured using SourceOffSite specific dialogs displayed upon connecting the repository after project reloads 123 Project Settings Source Control CVS Upon checking Enable Version Control for the project checkbox and choosing CVS plug in in the Provider list box the following configuration options are available to configure CVS access CVS CVSROOT string used to specify remote or local CVS location The template for this connection string is Root method user password hostname port path to repository Build Opens CVSROOT building dialog Test Initiates test connection to the CVS repository configured with specified CVS Root Project settings Source Control settings M Enable Version Control for the project Provider evs Flugin CYS Root locals cvs Module Marne NewProjectt T 124 CVSROOT Builder dialog The CVSROOT Builder dialog assists in creating a connection
493. rom PHP on the server where your application is deployed Note earlier versions of CodeCharge Studio did not include a native MySQL interface in the IDE so ODBC was required for design side connections when the target platform was PHP or PERL Product Features Key Features of CodeCharge Studio Application Builder The Application Builder is perhaps the most advanced web development automation tool available to web developers With just a few clicks users can create complex database enabled Web applications with dozens or even hundreds of web pages for data management and administration PE Wem 4g dot CodeCharge Studio 5 gt Y a Fullscreen Options F Welcome to CodeCharge Studio 5 Es ol www codecharge com General Name NewProject l 3 C WProgram Fikes x86 CodeChangeS huckoS Propects tatit Bu a Blank Project ay Solatioes Bowe pa yi be cp ASP 3 0 wah Tamplates m y a H Tou may change the language of any hme Employee Directory Task Manager Porai Registration F n F rum Site A igh ra ki s St tg e Uepi Standads Store OCS Example Pack CCS Ajax Examples Blog HTHL Section S06 compliant j Creste Progect Cancel att hh Community News and Updates M 2010 o Newsgroups o Online Forum Integrated Development Environment IDE CodeCharge Studio combines visual interface design tools with an integrated
494. rosoft Access database In such cases you can use of the Server MapPath ASP function to automatically retrieve the path to the file In this case the function call is embedded directly into the connection string Provider Microsoft Jet OLEDB 4 0 User D Admin Data Source amp Server MapPath Intranet mdb amp Persist Security Info False 106 If you use the Server MapPath function make sure that the Access database file resides in the same location as the Common asp file Also note that the Server MapPath function can only be used for the server side connection never the design time connection FJ Data Link Properties Provider Connection Advanced All Specify the following to connect to Access data 1 Select or enter a database name Program Files amp 6 CodeChange Studio 5 Examp 2 Enter information to log on to the database Blank password Allow saving password Test Connection oK Cancel Help When connecting to databases other than Microsoft Access the process of creating the server side connection is essentially the same with variances based on the parameters required to create the connection string For example when using a Microsoft SQL Server or Oracle database you can either use an ODBC DSN or an OLE DB Provider The choice of course depends on whether you have the ODBC driver or OLE DB provider available on the machine where the pages will be published Additionally under c
495. row keys to move through the list or if you know the first few letters of the member name begin typing to go to the member in the list directly If you type a word that is not in the list the nearest match is displayed To insert the selected member into your code type a period characted or gt or press ENTER TAB or CTRL ENTER or double click on the member Press ESC at any time to close the Members list Use the Members list to work with Global Variables or Global Functions With the insertion point on a blank line in your source file press CTRL SPACE The Members list opens populated with only global variables including global functions classes and local variables Members List Viewing The following table shows the icons that appear in the Members list Class 3 Private member function 4 Protected member function Public member function a Private member variable Protected member variable Public member variable ei Public property amp Public enumerator Public structure Public interface Public namespace Public delegate Using Quick Info To display type information move the pointer over the identifier E g for declared CCGetParam function function CCGetParam oarameter_name default_value Implementation Quick Info tip amp this gt PageNumber intval CCGetParam this gt ComponentWName Fage 1 fthis gt SorterName ClCGetParam departmentsdrder TJ t
496. rver Extensions W b Refresh Server Extensions Administrator Export List e On the main wizard window click Next to proceed to the next step e Specify an alias that will be used to access the virtual folder The alias name can be the same as the name of the folder where the project will be published or a different name The alias cannot contain spaces or other special characters Virtual Directory Creation Wizard Virtual Directory Alias You must give the virtual directory a short name or alas for quick reference Type the alas you want to use to gain access to this Web virtual directory Use the Same naming conventions that wou would for naming a directory Alaz NetProiect e Specify the actual folder where the project pages will be published The folder can be within the web server root or any other folder on the machine Virtual Directory Creation Wizard Web Site Content Directory Where i the content you want to publish on the Web site Enter the path to the directory that contains the content Directory D Inetpub wumroothN etProject Browse 223 e Specify the access permissions for the virtual folder Unless you have specific reasons you should accept the default settings Virtual Directory Creation Wizard Access Permissions What access permissions do vou want to set for this virtual director Allow the following If Read M Run scripts such as ASP Execute such as ISA
497. s ml Begin Rowy o o d End Row You can also define a translation using the Properties pane Wherever you would specify a string you can substitute a resource string and a translation For example you can define a translation for the Default Value property of a Label Data Events Format fab first_name Name first_name Attributes Caption res first_narme Visible Yes Control Source Type Database Column Control Source first_name Data Type Text Format Required No Unique No Input Validation Error Control Validation Rule Validation Text DBFormat Features Defaut value assigned to this control for new records E g 1 Bob Now 195 Creating Translation Resources Central to localizing a web site is to create text translations for each of the locales or languages that can be selected on the web site CodeCharge Studio includes a translation editor that can be used to create edit import and export locale specific translations The translation editor can be accessed either from the Project Settings gt Locales amp Encodings dialog or from the Project Explorer gt Resources gt Locales folder by double clicking on the specific locale name The following functionality is available in the translation editor Language selector Not translated Look for Add Delete Export Import Key Locale column Text Locale you want to work with All will show you all the translations fo
498. s acts as a bridge between the database and the language being used e g ODBC OLE DB PERL DBI Programming Language The programming language includes programming constructs that enable it to establish connections to the database and execute SQL commands against it e g ASP PHP PERL etc SQL Language used to Instruct the Database It is important to make the distinction that it is SQL and not the programming language that actually instructs the database The programming language is used to establish a connection to the database and sends SQL commands to be executed over the opened connection The SQL transmitted is largely standard but different products do have proprietary SQL commands above and beyond the standard commands Various factors influence the choice of database used These include but are not limited to the amount of information being stored the speed and versatility required of the resultant application security backup and recovery concerns price as well as operating cost of the database compatibility with the intended programming language availability of database drivers to connect to the database using the chosen programming language availability of enhanced functionality such as stored procedures procedural programming replication etc availability of a web host who supports the database and ease of use Having selected the database to use and ensured that all the necessary components are in place th
499. s and a variable set on one Web page usually cannot be retrieved on another Web page unless it is passed between pages in the form of a query string or a session variable or a cookie 29 End User License Agreement End User License Agreement for CodeCharge Studio 5 Software Copyright c 2001 2013 YesSoftware Inc All Rights Reserved BY DOWNLOADING AND OR IMPLEMENTING THIS SOFTWARE YOU AGREE TO THE FOLLOWING LICENSE DEFINITIONS You and Licensee refers to the person entity or organization which is using the Software known as CodeCharge Studio and any successor or assignee of same YesSoftware refers to YesSoftware Inc and its successors or manufacturer and owner of this Software AGREEMENT After reading this agreement carefully if you Customer do not agree to all of the terms of this agreement you may not use this Software Unless you have a different license agreement signed by YesSoftware that covers this copy of the Software your use of this Software indicates your acceptance of this license agreement and warranty All updates to the Software shall be considered part of the Software and subject to the terms of this Agreement Changes to this Agreement may accompany updates to the Software in which case by installing such update Customer accepts the terms of the Agreement as changed The Agreement is not otherwise subject to addition amendment modification or exception unless in writing signed by an officer o
500. s authorization is 91 Advanced Security Settings The Advanced Security Settings dialog provides extended security configuration options which further improve the usability and security of your Web application The following options are provided Session Variables User ld Variable User Login Variable Group ID Variable x Encrypt passwords using Database Function In this section you can specify the names of three session variables listed below which will be created automatically upon a user s login and preserved for the duration of the user session A user is considered to be logged in as long as these variables are present For security reasons it is recommended that you use different variable names for different applications hosted on the same server especially if served via a single domain name This will prevent a user from having access to multiple applications after logging in into one Defines the name of the session variable that stores the id of the currently logged in user You can also use this session variable as form data source parameter for example to display data that belongs to the current user Defines the name of the session variable that stores the login of the currently logged in user Defines the name of the session variable that stores the security group of the currently logged in user This session variable is then used to determine if the current user has access to restricted pages and f
501. s bar that is used to display helpful information about the selected property For instance in the illustration below the status bar at the bottom of the Properties windows displays information about the height property of the lt TR gt tag Data Tab Whereas the Format tab displays HTML CSS properties and events the properties displayed under the Data Tab are implemented at the programming language level and can usually be controlled programmatically As with the Format tab the properties displayed under the Data tab vary depending on the currently selected control in the Project Explorer or Document window Format Tab The Format tab contains properties and events for various HTML CSS elements The Format tab is mainly used when a page is opened in the Document window in HTML mode In this case selecting an HTML tag within the document will cause the Format tab to display the Properties and events applicable to that particular tag Events Tab Events are designated points that occur during the process of code execution Using the Events tab it is possible to add Actions or custom code that will be executed at the point in the code where the event occurs Actions are predefined snippets of code that perform common functions such as validating a phone number or Zip code or sending an email message However since there cannot be actions for all the possible operations that you may want to perform in an event you can also enter your own custo
502. s dialog contains options that customize how the CodeCharge Studio IDE interacts with your chosen source control provider The selection of options is shared for non CVS providers CVS specific options are described in the next section Selecting the Prompt option will display file selection dialog that includes files matching the operation requested by the user This includes files composing a page or files within a folder Provider Login Advanced Get files when opening the project Check files in when closing the project Prompt to add files when inserted Prompt to get latest version Prompt to check files out Prompt to check files in Prompt to undo files check out Add new projects to the source control Keep items checked out when checking In Automatically check in files that were checked out during generation options ied Provider microsoft visual SourceSafe Login Set provider specific options Advanced Get files when opening the project Check files in when closing the project M Prompt to add files when inserted M Prompt to get latest version M Prompt to check files out M Prompt to check files in i Prompt to undo files check out T Add new projects to the source control Keep items checked out when checking in M Automatically check in files that were checked out during generation The list includes built in CVS Plugin entry and Microsoft SCC API compatibl
503. s introduced to overcome the limits of the Visible property of individual components A panel can contain any number of CodeCharge Studio controls and components that can be hidden shown simultaneously Since the panel is a visual component its boundaries are visible in the Design mode The panel can be easily added from the Toolbox like any other component When placed on a page panels are displayed in the Project Explorer with all components contained within the Panel Known Limitations Values of hidden controls are set to NULL when saving the data whether controls are hidden directly or via a panel For example you may create a record form with certain updateable fields hidden conditionally When a user submits the form the Web browser will not submit the non existing fields As the result the form that is updated will not receive those control values and will set them to NULL e When updating existing records this problem can be solved by using custom code to retrieve the previous record value s from the database and assigning those values back to the control for example in the form s Before Build Update event e When inserting new records this problem can be solved by specifying default values in the control s Default Value property 2 5 Path Overview HTML lt BEGIN Path NewPath1 gt lt table width 100 gt lt tr gt lt td gt lt a href PathBeginLink_Src gt Main lt a gt lt l BEGIN PathComponent gt lt a
504. s option to use a vendor supplied provider provider Name This is a description of the connection This can be any text you want to supply Invariant This is a unique name assigned to the provider in your machine config or web config file If you know the provider is installed on the server and you want to use the installed provider enter the invariant name as it appears in the server s machine config file and do not enter a type string Adding a type string means that CodeCharge Studio will add an entry in your web config file to define another provider If you provide a type string you must use an invariant name that doesn t conflict with the installed provider Type Do not define this if you know the provider is installed on the server and you want to use that provider If you know the provider is NOT installed on the server enter a unique string for the invariant name this can be anything but it must be unique for all the providers on the server and define a type string You can find an example of a type string in your machine config file A type string is similar to an assembly name It uniquely identifies the assembly for the provider you want to use When you provide a type string CodeCharge Studio adds a DobProviderFactories entry to your web config file therefore it is important that you 1 use a unique invariant name so it doesn t conflict with the invariant names of other providers
505. s that could be displayed A link is provided to access extra columns if they are more than the limit Restricted Specifies whether a user has to be authenticated in order to view the form Data Events Format A directory_categories Name directory_categories Attributes Connection InternetDB Data Source Type Table Data Source directory_categories cat directory_categories sub Category ID Field cat_category_id Subcategory ID Field sub category_id No of Columns No of Subcategories Restricted No The Data Source for the directory form is based on a join query that matches the category ID field against the Parent Category ID field of the same table As you can seen in the Visual Query Builder screenshot below the same table yo categories is used albeit with two different aliases cat and sub The relationship between the table aliases is formed by the category_id field in the first table and the category_id_parent field in the second table All Columns All Columns v category_id cat_category_id category_id sub_category_id category_id_parent category_id_parent v7 category_name cat_category_ v category_name sub_category_name 233 The main components of the directory form are three Link controls e The first Link control in the directory form is used to place all root or top level categories This Link appears in bold typeface by default All other subcategories belonging to a root category are listed bel
506. s will open an editor where you can modify the text in the native characters The translation resource files are stored in the project folder in Unicode UTF 8 files which are similar to ASCII text but can contain international Unicode characters They hold key and text string pairs in the format of Key Translation where Key is the translation resource key and Translation is the translated text associated with the key Each locale utilizes a different resource file name in the format Locale txt where Locale is the Locale ID such as en US en US txt for English United States or just en for the English language neutral locale Language Selection and Fallback Process When you publish a localized application it will display information using the default locale and formats until the application or a user selects a different locale There are several locale selection methods that can be enabled in your web application The most basic allows the users to specify their preferred region in their operating system or language in their web browser configuration For example on Windows computers users can specify their region in the Regional and Language Options Internet Explorer users can override those settings by selecting preferred languages in IE Tools gt Internet Options gt Languages The web browser will then include the user s region or language preferences in the HTTP headers sent when communicating with a web server to access a
507. se via ODBC The following is a list of steps that should be performed to setup and test the environment where the Net pages will be published These steps don t have to be followed strictly in the order in which they are presented below Install and configure the web server software In order to publish Net pages an installation of the IIS 5 0 or higher server is required The IIS server is available on Windows 2000 and XP Professional operating systems and the Windows 2003 server In addition to the IIS 5 0 server download and install the Net Framework This can either be the Net Framework redistributable or the Net Framework SDK http www asp net Test the Web Server After installing the web server software run a test to make sure that the server is functioning properly For a server that has been installed on the local machine the URL http localhost or http 127 0 0 1 can be used to test the server When you type in this address you should be able to see the default page in the root directory of the server In order to test whether the Net Framework was successfully installed you need to test a aspx page Please refer to the documentation that accompanies the Net Framework for information on how to test that the installation was successful Setup the Database Once you confirm that you have a fully functional web server make sure that you have a suitable database to use In the case of Net the easiest database to use is
508. selected Please check that the database connection settings are setup correctly for this server Type Local Network Server Path C Inetpub wwrwroot NewProjectl Server URL http localhost NewProjecti Files to publish Project Files code and HTML template files Allfiles with extensions htmi js asp php jsp cfm cfc pl pm cgi mal Reset All files excluding extensions lecs ccp Reset 207 Database Connection Settings Add New Connection x Design Advanced Server Connection Name Connectionl Database ANSI SOL 92 DBC Data Source Name Use Connection String User Name User Password Modify Connection Server Server Design Advanced Server Connection Mane InternetDB Database ms ACCESS Use ODBC Data Source Name rs Use Connection String Provider Microsott Jet GLEDB 4 0 Data Source C 4Pro Build User Mame User Password Using the Remember Me Feature The Remember Me feature allows users to store their login information on their local computer allowing them to skip the login process when coming back again to the Website When a user chooses to be remembered the authentication information will be stored in an encrypted format for the specified time period as a Web browser cookie During subsequent Website visits the login credentials will be retrieved decrypted and automatically used to initiate a new login sessio
509. sertion point is within a comment in your source file AutoComplete options will not be available The insertion point is inside a string literal If the insertion point is inside the quotation marks around a string literal AutoComplete options will not be available e The insertion point is outside the script markers 169 In ASP PHP and JSP if the insertion point is outside the script markers lt gt or lt gt AutoComplete options will not be available The insertion point is outside member declaration in a class In ASP PHP if the insertion point is within class declaration but it s outside class members AutoComplete options will not be available Function result is not treated as an object In PHP the function result is not treated as an object therefore any expression of the some_function gt type will not render an AutoComplete list In ASP if the function can return several objects different classes its result is not treated as an object Non CCS Packages and Net Framework classes are unavailable The content of the linked non CCS packages will not be supported by the AutoComplete for Java Net Framework and external libraries will not be supported by the AutoComplete for C and VB 170 Styles Overview CodeCharge Studio styles are made from cascading style sheet CSS definition files css and accompanying graphics Styles define fonts colors buttons graphics spacing and other layout f
510. server that validates the Serial Number and provides an Activation Key If you are behind a firewall or don t have Internet access from the host computer auto activation is not possible Uncheck the Auto activation through the Internet option and visit the URL shown on the screen to obtain the activation key You can also email sales yessoftware com to obtain the activation key via email Pease include your serial number and the Installation Code shown on the activation screen lnvalid Activation Key Licence Agreement Run Buy Copyright 2001 2010 Yessoftware Inc All Rights Reserved What You Need to Get Started Once the CodeCharge Studio setup is complete you are almost ready to start generating and viewing dynamic database driven web pages To use CodeCharge Studio to produce web applications you will need the following Database CodeCharge Studio works in concert with a database which should be put in place before creating an application with CodeCharge Studio If you have a Windows web server the database is usually MS Access or MS SQL If your production web server is hosted on Linux Sun or another UNIX flavor then you will most likely use the popular and free database MySQL Although MySQL can be accessed remotely you can also install it locally on your Windows computer for testing your programs Test Web Server The test web server is usually installed on the same desktop computer as CodeCharge Studio It is used to test
511. shed by internationalization and localization of the web site and CodeCharge Studio supports web site internationalization I18N and localization L10N Internationalization consists of preparing a web site to display language and country specific localized content localization consists of managing and creating localized data and resources such as translation strings and formats An internationalized web site is not usable unless it is localized to at least one language and country locale In summary both processes consist of Specifying language and couniry locale settings including formats and output encoding Placing translation resource keys on Web pages Creating translation resources translated texts Specifying how users will select their language when viewing the web site When internationalizing a web site a language and country are usually used as a combination that is referred to as the region locale or culture CodeCharge Studio and this document use the term locale for the language and country combination A country selection is optional When a country is not specified the locale is considered neutral or can be referred to as just a language Examples of neutral locales that consist of a language are French and Spanish while country specific locales might be French Canada French France Spanish Mexico or Spanish Spain When configuring a neutral locale CodeCharge Studio requires that you select a country whose
512. since CodeCharge Studio needs to search the project folder for all specified file extensions Publishing settings Active Server Server Edit Servers Website wil be published to this server until a different server is selected Please check that the database connection settings are setup correctly for this server Type FTP Secure connection SFTP SSH Server Path Folder _ _ _ Login D E Password Live site URL M Passive mode Test Files to publish Project Files code and HTML template files All fles with extensions itmilsjssaspsohp jsoscfrolomicgi mdbigit Reset All fles excluding extensions Reset 82 Server and programming language settings The Server Settings sections allows you to configure settings relevant to the selected programming language It will show different settings for different languages Project settings Server and programming language settings Secure Server URL Code File Extension php Encode Extension Improved HTTP Caching Yes Charset Output File Format Windows PHF version 5 x Error Reporting Template Folder CKeditor Base Path ckeditor ASP 3 0 with Templates Code Page Sets the numeric character set that will be used when displaying dynamic content Different locales may use override it and use different code pages Locale Identifier Sets the Local
513. sorting The first one will contain a list of all the available fields so that the user can select the field to sort by The second list box will indicate the desired sort order ASC DESC Records per The search form will have a list box that can be used to specify the number of records to be page list box returned per page Orientation Specifies vertical or horizontal orientation of the search form Advanced Click this button to specify the advanced search option such as a submit method type and other provided options If the ANDa condition is selected the search form will contain an input control textbox or listbox for all selected database fields If the ag ORa condition is selected the search form will include only one textbox control and a value entered into the textbox will be used to search against all selected database fields Alternatively you can choose the a oeAdvanced Searcha option which creates a single textbox while also automatically adding a listbox with search options so that users can specify whether they want to search for a oeAny Wordsa a oeAll Wordsa or a ceExact Phrasea Available Fields This list box shows all the fields available in the table or view Search Fields These are the fields to be shown in the search form They are selected from among the Available Fields ka Refreshes the connection if you make changes to the database while using the builder a Select a
514. ss last_name address3 title age_id a user_login card_expire_date addressl card_number 4 city Page Name users_list Order by none tee 305 Table Grid Details Settings Active Grid Layout Sorting Page Navigator Available Fields Fields for the Grid K Build Query Page Name Order by Alternate records Record Separator Indicates your intention to create a grid form Select the desired layout of the grid form Tabular Columnar and Justified Select the type of sorting controls you want to have on the grid form Select the type of navigation controls you want to have on the grid form This list box shows all the fields available in the table or view These are the fields to be shown in the grid form They are selected from among the Available Fields select an Available Field then click this button to add it to the form Click this button to add ALL Available Fields to the form Select a form field then click this button to remove it from the form Click this button to remove all fields from the form Select a form field then click this button to move it upwards in the order of appearance Select a form field then click this button to move it downwards in the order of appearance Opens the dialog to specify parameters used for joining with other tables The Table View identifies the other to which the current table is bound by the Bound
515. ssign the dynamic style to your web pages using either an URL parameter a session variable or a cookie to define the style To enable this functionality first set the dynamically modify styles option in your project settings and use the Advanced button to specify the method to be used to select styles at run time The following options are available Query String Select this option if you would like style to be selected via an URL Query String parameter e g parameter style basic Parameter The name of the URL parameter to be used for selecting a style The default is style name Session Select this option if you would like the style to be selected via a session variable If the Query variable String parameter option is also checked then the session variable will be automatically set when a style parameter is suppliedin the URL Session The name of the session variable to be used for selecting styles The default is style variable name Cookie Select this option if you would like the style to be selected via a cookie If the Query String parameter or Session variable options are also checked then the cookie will be created and set automatically when a style is selected via URL parameter or session variable Cookie name The name of the cookie to be used for selecting a style The default is style Expiring in The time duration that the cookie should live Sample steps to test the dynamic style assignment e
516. ssociated with an existing file When the checkbox is checked and the form is submitted using the Submit or Update button the file will be deleted from the server Note if you want to delete the file only you should use the Update button of the form with the checkbox checked logo png 33870 bytes Delete v However if you want to delete the file as well as the database record associated with it you should use the Delete button of the form logo png 33870 bytes Delete C 268 Hidden Overview HTML lt input type hidden value Hidden1 name Hidden1 gt Image Hiddent only visible in design mode Description A Hidden field is the equivalent of a Text Box except that a hidden field has no visual representation on the rendered page Unless the user views the source HTML for a page there is no visual indication of the existence of a Hidden field Hidden fields are often used to hold data that needs to be submitted or propagated but the user should not or does not need to see the data Hidden fields are also useful when entering information that does not require user input For example you can have a hidden field that contains the current date The date is automatically entered into the field by using a function to set the value of the Default property of the field The user will not be aware of the fields existence and does not have to enter the value but the hidden field will submit the value when the form is
517. ster pages and master templates but there are certain conventions that you should be aware of that CodeCharge Studio follows This will make it easier for you to understand and implement your own designs e Every design is in a separate folder under the designs folder in your project Your design can be anywhere but if you do not follow this convention your design will not appear in the menus and dialogs of the CodeCharge Studio IDE e Every master page in a design is called MasterPage Your master page can be called anything but if you do not follow this convention your design will not appear in the menus and dialogs of the IDE e Every master page must have at least one placeholder You add placeholders to your templates using the Forms tab and PlaceHolder icon on the ribbon bar e Whenever you create or change a template e g MasterPage always save your page before using e Every master page is assumed to have two placeholders called content and head Any time you apply your design to a content page CodeCharge Studio creates a panel structure that includes a panel for each one of these placeholders This occurs even if your master page does not have these placeholders e These placeholders have special meaning when you apply a design to a content page Even if your master page does not have a placeholder called content CodeCharge Studio will create a content panel called content and move everything between the lt
518. string to specify a local or remote CVS repository location the protocol to be used and other connection details The available property options depend on the connection protocol chosen in the Protocol listbox The protocols available include ext Using rsh protocol with external client application to connect remote repository fork Using local repository without initiating network connection gserver Using GSSAPI generic interface to network security systems local Using local repository pserver Using password protected protocol server Using rsh protocol internal client sserver Using SSL encrypted authentication ssh Using ssh protocol SSpi Using SSPI protocol PT CVSROOT Builder Protocol Esener T pserver 2 0 58d Username password hostname port proxy proxyport tunnel proxyuser Droxyvoassword I 2 CYSROOT preview PServer OK Cancel For connecting to CVS repository located on the developer s machine local protocol is recommended Most remote repositories use pserver support connection methods Contact your CVS administrator for information about connecting to your remote repository Note ocal and fork protocols for accessing local repositories cannot be built using CVSROOT Builder dialog They need to be typed in the CVS Root textbox directly using the following format local c path to repository fork c path to repository Make sure backslashes in Windows paths are replaced with f
519. stylesheets that CodeCharge Studio generates for your project in the styles folder Error ControlTitle ControlTemplate Buttons Form templates are intended to be used to control the layout and styling applied to the form in the builder Although they exist as CodeCharge Studio pages you should not use them in this way You should not add CodeCharge Studio components to a template The reason is that when you add a component CodeCharge Studio creates the HTML to render the component plus the properties that affect the state of the component and the source code that defines the behavior and appearance All of this is stored and represented in different ways in your project However when you apply a form template only the HTML is used by the builder Specifically the special template blocks and template variables are replaced with text and components by the builder If you added a component such as a TextBox to the form template the resulting form would lack the code and properties for the component in the result and you would likely get errors when you published your pages since the code and HTML rendering would not be in sync Modify only the HTML that describes the layout of the form The built in templates are provided as a reference to start customizing the layout and styling of your form When you customize one of these templates you can use either CodeCharge Studio or an external editor but either way you change the template you
520. t gt These denote where your content exists for each panel and should not be changed e Make sure that your master page is published with your project This should occur automatically but depending on your project settings not all resources e g images stylesheets might be published to the server with your project e Optionally add other placeholders for other parts of your web page such as a menu sidebar frameset etc e Optionally add master templates for applying different layouts and formatting to different sections of your master page See Using Master Templates for more details e Always make sure to save your master page when you make any changes Applying and Removing a Master Page There are two ways to apply or remove a master page from your content page The simplest way is to change the master page property Select the content page then the Data tab in the Properties pane Find the master page property and enter or browse to the master page you want to apply If you have created your master page following the conventions described above you can also set your master page as the default design using the Designs icon on the ribbon bar Then you can also apply your master page to a page by right clicking on the page content Design or HTML mode and select apply design to this page from the context menu The master page used is based on the default design which you assign with the Designs icon You remov
521. t a field in the Fields for the Grid section Note The following field types have advanced properties CheckBox List ListBox Radio Button Link and Image Link CheckBox List ListBox or Radio Button Clicking on the button will open the List DataSourse dialog illustrated below Link and Image Link Clicking on the button will open the dialog with link properties Order the records in the grid will be initially displayed La Grid and Record Components Builder Data Source Oy Connection counties CA Grid s Fields for the Grid d Search country _name 23 Layout t 4 Sorting HG Navigation fo Options E Record Order by none Ea Ed Style Click Next to proceed to step 3 357 Step 3 Creating a Search Form optional Step 3 is optional and should be used only if you want to have a search form that can filter the records displayed in the grid If a search form is not needed click Next to proceed to step 4 F9 Grid and Record Components Builder a Interactive Search al Grid Records per page listbox Orientation Vertical C Horizontal Layout Search Fields article desc article _id article title category_id date_add date_end A Data Source g Options ia Record 358 Grid and Record Builder Search Settings Create Search Filter Interactive Search Records per page list box Orientation Advanced S
522. t a font Select a font size Paste the contents of the Clipboard as text Cut the selection and put it on the Clipboard Copy the selection and put it on the Clipboard Delete the selection Convert the selected text to bold typeface Convert the selected text to italics typeface Underline the selected text Insert line numbers Insert bullets Decrease indentation Increase indentation Left align Center align Right align Select a font color for the current text Select a background color for the current font Clear all formatting from your text and return your text to its default formatting styles Show paragraph marks and other hidden formatting symbols Select a format for the currently selected text 58 PECETI er ta SHHE Tg Insert Table Form Text Box Password Text Area Checkbox Radio Button Dropdown Listbox Button Submit Button Reset Button Image Button Image ImageLink Space Line Break Horizontal Rule Paragraph Break Bookmark Comment Find Find in Files Replace Replace in Files Go To Open the Insert Table window A form is a container object within which you can place other form controls that submit values Used to provide single line input Same as Text Box except that all characters entered are masked using asterisks Used when a large amount of data needs to be entered Used for the selection of options Used for the selection of mutually exclus
523. t not all browsers support the same object model when it comes to script execution Basic script operations such as showing a popup window will usually execute seamlessly on most browsers As the scripts become more complex you are bound to encounter instances where some portions of a script are supported in one browser and not another You can provide multiple implementations of the same script for each browser type or inform the user of the preferred browser to use for optimal performance e CodeCharge Studio provides a number of client side scripts in the form of actions that can be added to component events This is accomplished using the Forms tab of the Toolbox The client side events are listed under the Events tab of the properties window To add an action right click on the event and select the Add Action option Once selected the dialog appears with the list of available actions from which you can choose one to be added e Apart from using the actions provided by CodeCharge Studio you can manually add JavaScript code to an HTML page It is necessary that you have some basic understanding of JavaScript and JavaScript reference documentation to guide you in the process You should be aware of the extent to which the code you write is Supported in the browsers that you anticipate your viewers will use Within CodeCharge Studio the Format tab of the Properties window displays a list of events to which you could attach JavaScript code This list
524. t specifies the requested page size You can limit this value in Web mode by specifying the Page Size Limit in report s properties Report Sorting The reporting engine supports the dynamic data sorting functionality via the Sorter component Users can change the sort order by clicking the sorter links or buttons The sort order does not apply to groups and the data can be dynamically sorted only within a group Report Form A report form is used to present or print data It does not have built in functionality to insert update or delete database records If you need to perform any of these operations consider using a record form or an editable grid In addition to displaying multiple data records a report facilitates operations like sorting the records based on different columns in the report or browsing multiple pages when the data to be displayed spans more than one page Due to their internal complexity report forms are usually constructed using the Report Builder In terms of HTML markup a grid form is made up mainly of an HTML structure with different controls 248 Report Properties Once you create a report usually with the Report Builder you may further customize the report behavior by changing its properties You can also change properties of individual report sections by selecting them in the Project Explorer panel Name Connection Data Source Type Data Source Groups Restricted Lines Web Page Size per Page
525. t the bottom of the Property Editor and then change the Caption property in the grid For this example we ll change the captions to From Emp ld To Id From Emp Login To Login From Emp Password To Password From Emp Name To Employee Name From Emp Title To Title From Phone Home To Home Phone From Phone Work To Work Phone From Phone Cell To Cell Phone Instead of group_id and the department_id values we want to display group and department names so we will join the departments groups and employees tables when we build the grid for the Employee List and include these fields from the other tables in the grid form Run the Grid Builder and for the datasource select the departments table and build a query that returns both the department_name and the department_id Use build query to create the query Remove the department_id from the grid form That is include department_id in the query datasource but do not display it in the grid Do not include a search form for this grid The other options are unimportant for this example but we included the sorter control so the list could be arranged alphabetically Remember we changed the default title for the departments table to Department List so this should be the default title as it appears on the form Also we defined the default control for department_name as a Link control so the the web page at this point should
526. t to Procedure then the List Data Source property is used to configure the stored procedure and its parameters List Source Type Procedure List Data Source myProcedure 1 Bound Column ProcedureField1 Text Column ProcedureField 241 Custom SQL If you use a custom SQL statement as the data source for a grid or editable grid there are certain nuances you should be aware of In order for the navigator control to be able to get a count of the number of records returned by the SQL statement the underlying code has to dynamically create a query to return the record count In most cases the generated SQL query is able to execute correctly However if a complex SQL query is used for example one that has a Group By clause the total number of records cannot be calculated correctly and the navigator control will not function properly In the event that you do use a complex SQL query you can manually edit the generated code where the CountSQL variable for the form is defined You will need to provide an alternate SQL statement to be used to retrieve the proper record count Complex SQL queries also present problems for the sorter control which functions by appending an Order By clause to the original SQL query If the query uses complex features such as Unions and nested queries it will not be possible to dynamically create a correct SQL statement with the Order By clause Try to use simple SQL queries or manually edit the generated code to imple
527. t to add page to in the Project Explorer Right click the folder and choose New Page command or use File New Page menu Configure page name and template confirming page creation Depending on the Source Control setup dialog will be displayed to choose the files to add to the repository If add prompt is disabled page files can be manually added to the repository right clicking the new page and choosing Add to Source Control command When using CVS plug in pages need to be Committed before editing O eee N 118 How to modify a page under source control 1 2 3 If a page is locked or partially locked it needs to be marked for editing choosing Check Out non CVS or Edit CVS commands from the context menu Page can be modified now If events are added to the page a prompt may appear asking to add new event related files to the repository After making changes the page should be inserted into repository using Check In non CVS or Commit CVS commands How to commit new project version 1 2 3 Unlock modify or add pages and files needed for new functionality keeping them unlocked until tested Right click project node in the Project Explorer to execute Check In Commit operation for all the files in the project at once Make sure to provide comment to describe the functionality and modifications made 119 Source Control Integration User Interface Options Options Source Control dialog non CVS Thi
528. t to be shown when there is no data to be shown for example if the report s data source doesn t return any records Click Next to proceed to step 8 392 Step 8 Select search fields for the report optional Adds a search form that can be used to filter the records displayed in the report This step is optional If you don t want a corresponding search form for the report click Next to proceed to the final step Create Indicates your intention to create a search form that will be used to filter the report s data Search Filter Sorting list box Specify if you want users to be able to select the sort field for the report to be sorted by Records per Specify if you want users to be able to specify how many records to display per report page page list box Orientation Specifies vertical or horizontal orientation of the search form Advanced Specify advanced search options such as submit method type and other properties If the AND button condition is selected the search form will contain an input control textbox or listbox for all selected database fields If the OR condition is selected the search form will include only one textbox control and a value entered into the textbox will be used to search against all selected database fields Alternatively you can choose the Advanced Search option which creates a single textbox while also automatically adding a listbox with search options so that users can specify whether they
529. t totals This section can Footer also include the Panel component named NoRecords which is a reserved panel name shown only when the database returns an empty data set Report sections cannot be added from the CodeCharge Studio Toolbox however sections deleted accidentally can sometimes be restored via the Groups property of the report Click the button within that property to open the Groups dialog where the Restore button on the Section tab allows restoring removed sections Keep in mind that not all reports require all available sections 2 8 Sorter Overview Image Description Sorters are used exclusively on grid and editable grid forms They allow the grid data to be sorted according to a particular field Usually a sorter is placed in the top row of an HTML table where grid data is displayed You can customize a sorter by right clicking on it and selecting the Edit Sorter option The following options are available in the Edit Sorter window to customize the sorter Capim The sorter has a link to initiate sorting Clicking on the link will reverse the order of the sort Cachan w The sorter has a link to initiate sorting An image is used to indicate if the current order is ascending or descending Caption v The sorter has four images two that can be clicked to initiate sorting in ascending or descending order and two that indicate the current order of the sort Edit Sorter Sorter1 Layout Xx Caption Sorter1 a sor
530. t_narme department_manager_id v picture picture vV phone_home phone_hor phone work phone work Y SELECT employees group_name department_name FROM employees INNER JOIN groups ON employees group_id groups group_id INNER JOIN departments ON employees department_id departments department_id This query displays the employee information plus the name of the group and department they belong to In the Visual Query Builder if you delete one or more relationships the JOIN operator is dropped from the SQL query SELECT employees group_name department_name FROM employees departments groups Without the join this query cross tabulates all the records in the employees table with all the records in both the departments and groups tables This query does not have much usefulness since every employee is listed along with all the deparments and groups that exist not just those that the employee is assigned to The relationships between tables is not static You can use the Visual Query Builder to delete or add relationships You should define relationships that make sense relative to the data in each field but you are not constrained to do so You can relate any fields between any tables but the subsequent query generated by CodeCharge Studio will probably not be correct so be careful when selecting the fields that should be referenced Relationships between tables are normally defined as foreign key constraints in
531. tabase Columns Alphabetically I Check for Updates on launch I Show existing events in Project Explorer I Don t show warning messages For Builders I Autorefresh Preview in Builders I Close the FTP Upload dialog box when uploading is completed T Save pages With changes every minutes ci Paths Use external web editor a So Cinta c Program Files Dreamweaver Dreamweaver exel i e Once you specify the external web editor to be used open a page in that editor by right clicking on the page name within the Project Explorer and selecting the Open Externally option Pa Maa F LS HellowWorld Pages C Designs 0 Styles C Templates n Diagrams 9 Connections ey Publish Hello World l a Resources lg ile Open Externally Rename XS Delete Close g Change Style AT Properties e You can proceed to make changes and adjustments to the document Be cautious not to alter any of the CodeCharge Studio blocks that appear within curly braces or in HTML comments When you are finished save and close the document in the external editor and switch back to CodeCharge Studio A window will appear prompting you that the document was altered outside CodeCharge Studio Click on the Yes button to reload the document with the changes made in the external editor CodeCharge Studia C Projects HelloWorld Hellovorld html 2 i a This file was modified outside of the source editor Do you want
532. te CodeCharge Studio will add a template panel to your page and update the master template property for the panel automatically then create content panels within the template panel corresponding to the placeholders in the master template and update the placeholder property for each panel For example if your master template has two placeholders called title and content CodeCharge Studio will create an inner content panel for each one You are responsible for defining or moving any content within each of the content panels To select some content first e g form and then move it to a template panel Select some content that you want to apply the template to and select the Template Panel button from the ribbon bar In Design or HTML mode select the content you want to add In Design mode the current selection has a series of move and reshape icons boxes around the outline of the selection E E Search Error Message s_message Author s_author O You can also select your content in HTML mode HTML mode should be used instead of Design Mode since it is often difficult to select the content properly and when this occurs the generated HTML code for the page may not E MLFormName action Action gt lt tr class Er al saison aera LLrOL lt td colspan 2 gt Er Ss Bottom gt za hret Cleark gt finput type submit class Button nam Button Name al
533. te grid forms with multiple line inputs Used to to create Web based Image Gallery The Service Builder allows you to create AJAX service pages 55 Forms and Controls A form refers to a section of a page containing normal content markup labels and optionally may contain an HTML form element with form controls in it A CodeCharge Studio form is visually demarcated using one or more HTML tables with various content appearing in the table rows and columns Controls are dynamic elements placed on a page and are often used to display database content Controls play a central role in any given form that deals with database content Controls and their values can also be controlled programmatically Grid Form Record Form Report Form Panel Flash Chart Include Page Inline Date Picker l Label Link Text Box Editable Grid Directory Calendar Sorter Navigator Path Update Panel Dialog Panel Template Panel Tabbed View Used to display multiple records of data Used to add edit or delete database content Used to present the report Used to present the panel Provides a visual method for designing and including Flash charts within a Web page Used to include pages e g header and footer pages Used to toggle the date selector Used to represent a wide variety of content Used extensively in grid forms whereby you can have a simple link that links to another page Used to pr
534. te to the content on your page First you can add a template panel to your page then add some content panels to the template and content e g form to each content panel Second you can select some content on your page then apply a master template to the content e g forms you select To add a template panel to your page Select the Forms tab on the ribbon bar Select the page where you want to create a template panel and click on theTemplate Panel button on the ribbon bar In Design mode or HTML mode you can also place the cursor anywhere on the page Add Template Panel HTML Template from file Select PlaceHolder BlockTemplite cep MasterPage ccp MenuTemplate ccp 139 The options you see for master templates are based on the default master page design selected not necessarily the design applied to your page if there is one See Using Artisteer Designs for more information about setting the default design If your project has no default design the drop down list will be blank You will need to browse and select the template page When you want to apply a master template that you have created typically you will need to browse and select the template Otherwise if you are working with a master page you created make your master page the default design and the list of master templates you have created will appear in this drop down list Do not use a master page as the template When you select a master templa
535. templates Extensive Database Support CodeCharge Studio supports most existing databases via JET and ODBC to establish the design time connection The server side connection can be made using JET ODBC JDBC ADO DBI and PHPLib to connect to databases during run time EF Data Link Properties Provider Connection Advanced Select the data you want to connect t OLE OB Provider s Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE DB Provider Microsoft Office 12 0 Access Database Engine OLE DB Pro Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Analysis Services 9 0 Microsoft OLE DB Provider For Data Mining Services Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Indexing Service Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers Microsoft OLE DB Provider for OLAP Services 8 0 Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Oracle Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Search Microsoft OLE DB Providerfor SQL Server Microsoft OLE DB Simple Provider MSData Shape OLE OB Provider for Microsoft Directory Services Multiple Database Connections CodeCharge Studio supports multiple database connections to allow Web applications sources for example to validate user access against an external user database PO Wook oa Home Data Dictionary Builders Isa l Blank Inchudable Login Application Page Page Page Builder Open Pages ProjectExplorer A X Lag NewPropect 1 Pages fj Designs H ages _lst H ages mant H Footer I Header H Login m Ceagrans X Ta fE Poe ces Common Fies
536. tempt to perform an operation that is not supported To configure the Custom Insert Custom Update or Custom Delete property click the button next to the property The screenshot below shows the Custom Insert window where you can configure the Custom Insert property When configuring the property you have the choice of using a table SQL query or stored procedure Use the Custom Insert Type field to select your method You will also need to specify input parameters for the fields involved in the operation In the screenshot above the Custom Insert Type is set to Table and five input parameters first_name last_name title email and city have been defined This means that the value of these five input parameters will be used in the insert operation Please note that if you place your control into panel and set panel s design time Visible Property to Dynamic when the panel is invisible Insert Update operations for this control wona t be performed unless otherwise specified in custom operations In the case of a custom delete operation you would only need to specify an input parameter for the primary key field s This is because when a record is being deleted the record form only needs to know the primary key value in order to identify and delete the record When defining custom operations also consider how you want to handle empty parameters Sometimes you will need them to be registered in the database as NULL or empty values however of
537. ten it is reasonable to ignore empty parameters and do not include them in the corresponding SQL query Especially when hiding panels you may want to ignore fields hidden within the panels rather than updating them with empty values Refer to the option Exclude missing form fields parameters from data updates in Project Settings and Custom Insert and Custom Update for more information on handling empty parameters Properties Data Events Format E NewRecord1 Restricted Allow Insert Allow Update Allow Delete Preserve Parameter GET Custom Insert Type Custom Update Ty Custom Update Custom Delete Typ Custom Delete Features TableView SOL statement or Stored Procedure that form is based on Record Form Buttons For each operation a record form can perform Insert Update Delete there is a corresponding button which is used to initiate the operation In some cases you can also have a Cancel button to cancel the current operation and return the user to the page specified in the Return Page property of the form If you use the Record builder to construct the record form specify whether the generated record form should have all or some of the buttons During runtime the underlying code determines which of the buttons should be shown If the record form receives an input parameter and is able to retrieve a database record then the Update and Delete buttons are shown If the record form does not receive any input parameter or
538. ternet Database C Intranet Database lE Data Source amp Actions M Autoincremented primary keys Internationalized use translation Detail resources res W Save builder options EA Link The Autoincremented primary keys checkbox should be activated if the records that will be contained in the Record will have autoincrement primary keys that are provided automatically by the database With this option selected the Record will not have an editable or submittable control for the primary key since that would result in a database error Conversely if primary keys are user provided then this option should not be selected In this case the Record would have a field where the user can enter a value for the primary key Click Next to proceed to step 3 366 Step 2 Record Builder Fields Select a data source and the fields to be included in the record form Record Builder Field Settings Data Source Primary Key Fields for the Record ead G Control Type Select the table to use as the data source Select the primary key field in the table These are the fields to be shown in the record form They are selected from among the Available Fields Refreshes the connection if you make changes to the database while using the builder Select a form field then click this button to move it upwards in the order of appearance Select a form field then click this button to move it downwards in the order o
539. that displays updated information You may want to place the Manage Cache action on restricted administrative pages so only authorized users can remove the cached data Recommendations e Page cache configuration should be the last step in the application building process after the functionality is finalized and the testing completed e Do not cache pages that use a lot of parameters and require large cache keys assembled from many cache parameters It s best to cache only pages that may be slow to execute like a Calendar or Directory with many items or static pages that do not utilize any URL parameters such as page headers and footers menus and article type content e Remember to clear the cache when publishing new versions of your Web application to the server e Do not cache data maintenance pages with record forms used for modifying the data e Divide large pages into multiple includable pages and cache only pages that display the data not pages that are used to submit data e Make sure that cache parameters are configured to cover different states of all components on the page 200 User Interface Global Cache Settings To utilize cache functionality in your project enable the caching feature and configure the cache settings by selecting Project gt Settings gt Caching You may need to create a database table that will be used for storing cached data The table design needs to correspond to the cache options described below
540. the CKeditor website There are two common methods of installing CKeditor for use in CCS projects e The simplest way is to copy CKeditor files directly to your project folder on the server In this case you do not need to publish CKeditor files when publishing your CCS project e Another method is to copy CKeditor files to a sub folder of your CCS project In this case you need to configure your project publishing settings so that CKeditor files will be published to the server Open CCS project settings and on the Publishing tab select All files with extensions then add all of CKeditor file extensions to the list The downside to this method is that publishing CKeditor files will increase project publishing time 260 In CCS the CKeditor can be used by selecting it from the Forms tab of the Toolbox When selected the CKeditor configuration dialog will appear as shown below Editor configuration General Parameters Editor Type CkEditor gt ToolbarSet Name Ful width 640 Poel Height 450 Pixels OK Cancel The options shown in the dialog are same as in the Attach CKeditor action which is automatically added the On Load client event of the TextArea control created at the same time Selecting this action exposes CKeditor parameters configured via the above dialog where you can further modify them as needed As you may suspect you could also add CKeditor to your page by manually attaching the Attach CKeditor action t
541. the Forms tab of the Toolbox When selected the CKeditor configuration dialog will appear as shown below Editor configuration General Parameters Editor Type CkEditor gt ToolbarSet Name Ful width 640 Poel Height 450 Pies OK Cancel 263 The options shown in the dialog are same as in the Attach CKeditor action which is automatically added the On Load client event of the TextArea control created at the same time Selecting this action exposes CKeditor parameters configured via the above dialog where you can further modify them as needed As you may suspect you could also add CKeditor to your page by manually attaching the Attach CKeditor action to the On Load client event of an existing TextArea and configuring it Properties Data Fwents Format E Server On Validate Before Show B Client On Key Press On Load Attach FCKeditor On Change ToolbarSet Name Full Width 640 Contig Parameter The height of the editing area in pixels or percent If left blank Using CKeditor with Java Servlets amp JSP If you use Java you should modify common classes after installing CKeditor because the file information about CK connector servlets their parameters and servlet mapping are to be specified in web xml file Add the code below to server side classpath Runtime libraries can be used for this project property lt serviet gt lt servlet name gt Connector lt servlet name gt lt serviet
542. the JDBC DataSource extension Set the Use Data Source Extension property of the Project to Yes This option is in your Project settings under the Server Script category of settings Based on the used application server specify the value for the JNDI Name field Optionally specify the User Name and User Password Add New Connection Design Advanced Server Database MS Access l Date Format yyyy mm dd HH nn ss Boolean Format true false g ly Use LIMIT TOP User Name User Password EE eee JNDI Name java comp env jdbc Connectioni The new connection will be added to all servers You may need to setup database connection settings to other servers Help OK Cancel Server Side Connections for Net In the IDE CodeCharge Studio uses non managed non Net ODBC drivers or OLEDB providers These are the only type of connections you can select from when deciding what to use for a design side connection These may or may not be installed on your Windows platform For instance if you want to use the MyODBC MYSQL ODBC driver you will need to install the driver from www mysal com Your sever side connection can use either managed or unmanaged providers If you select the Same as Design CodeCharge Studio will generate the code necessary to use the non managed connectors but if you do not select this option you need to use a managed provider and you will need to ensure that the provider is
543. the network If you send information to the computer next to you for example the router does not need to send anything to the Internet If you want to view a web page on the Internet the router will send your request to another gateway that it determines the closest to the destination server If you connect to the Internet from home you will need a router bridge or a modem to translate signals from your local computer or network to the format needed to enable data to travel to and from the Internet The modem is usually used to connect a single computer to the Internet via an ISP by converting digital data into analog signals for transmission over a telephone line If you use a DSL connection you can connect to the DSL line via a DSL bridge or router The bridge converts the DSL signal to the format used by your local network and can be used to directly connect several computers to the Internet A DSL router is more expensive but can provide an Internet connection for your entire local area network A router can also include a proxy server that provides the ability to share a single IP address among multiple computers connected to the Internet This preserves the number of IP addresses you use and adds extra security since the public IP address belongs to the router and your local computers cannot be accessed from the Internet without a valid IP address Another function of a proxy server is to store and cache the data so that local computers can obtain
544. the parent categories and uses them to populate the value of this Link field This Link will not work if altered e The thirds item in the Path component is a Label field which is populated dynamically to contain the name of the category being viewed The text for this Label is a template variable whose value is determined at runtime depending on the links the user clicks This field should also not be altered pomm m a MO Fa E Categories gt PathCategory gt CurrentCategory 232 Structure of the directory Form The properties of the directory form can be exposed in the Properties window by clicking on the name of the form in the Project Explorer Name A unique name for the directory form Connection Database connection used by the form Source Type Type of database resource that provides the data for the form Data Source Table SQL query or stored procedure that provides the data for the form Category ID Database field which contains the ID of the categories displayed in the Path Field Subcategory ID Database field which contains the ID of the subcategories This is essentially the same as the Field Category ID field but the field comes from an alias table No of Columns Directory form displays categories in columns Use this property to set the number of columns to be used No of Each category in the directory form can have a number of subcategories This property limits the Subcategories number of subcategorie
545. the stored procedure parameter if applicable Direction Stored procedure parameters can be of different types Select the type of the current parameter being referred to Input Input Output Output Return Value Scale Number of decimal points for a number Precision Number of digits for a number Parameter Source Name The name of the input parameter Data Type Type of input parameter Expression URL Form Session Application Cookie Format Format of the input parameter value e g a Date could have the format mm dd yyyy if applicable Default Default value to be used incase no value is received for the input parameter Value Using the SQL Parameter Window The SQL Parameter window is used to define input parameters when an SQL query is being used as the data source SQL Parameter Window Properties Variable Name Name of the SQL variable field Type Data type of the variable field Text Integer Float Date Boolean Memo Format Format of the variable field e g a Boolean parameter could have the format true false if applicable Parameter Source Name Name of the input parameter source Type Type of the input parameter Expression URL Form Session Application Cookie Format Format of the input parameter value e g a Boolean field could have the format True False or Yes No if applicable Default Default value to be used in case no value is received from the input parameter source It should be Value valid s
546. ther arising out of or related to this agreement shall be brought only in a state or federal court of competent jurisdiction located in San Mateo County California The parties hereby consent to the personal jurisdiction of such courts 10 U S GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS This Software is provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 or subparagraphs c 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at 48 CFR 52 227 19 as applicable Contractor is YesSoftware Inc 6330 S Eastern Ave 5 Las Vegas NV 89119 USA E mail sales codecharge com 31 For More Information CodeCharge Studio provides a rich array of options for generating sites that correspond to common business applications The depth of automation in the process the degree to which the resulting pages can be integrated into an existing site and the level of customization offered to the web designer support superior productivity with a high degree of attractiveness in the end result If you have questions go to the CodeCharge Studio user forums at http forums codecharge com to get answers and pointers Or visit http support yessoftware com for the latest bulletins product updates or to submit email support requests 2 8275 S Eastern Ave Suite 20
547. they appear in the database For instance when using Alphabetically the builders to create components the fields will be shown alphabetically if this option is selected Check for updates CodeCharge Studio will connect to the internet and check for new software updates If there on launch are new updates a window will open with the details of the update including where to obtain it Show text Caption text will appear next to each of the buttons in the Toolbox Show tooltips Caption text will appear as a tooltip when the mouse pointer hovers over each of the buttons in the Toolbox Show existing events The existing events will be shown in the Project Explorer Use external web Specify the path to an external editor that you would like to use to edit the HTML pages editor 66 Server Profiles Options The server profiles settings provide basic information used during web development and for publishing the application Generator The generator settings provide basic information for the visible functions of the code generator Generator Settings Indent Type Use spaces or tabs to indent the generated code Indent Number of spaces to be used for indenting Synchronization During the process of creating a page the user often deletes some components from the page Mode and this is subsequently detected by CodeCharge Studio during the process of synchronization This option allows you to specify the action to be taken when synchronizing pag
548. tically Hides the detail section of the report This option doesn t need to be used unless for example you don t want to show detail rows and forgot or were unable to create an SQL query that performs necessary groupings Creates additional Percent fields below the sum fields in the group s footer section a Report Builder What summary values would you like calculated tg Connection sum Count _ Min Max Average U Data Source price 7 daa Groups Layout Click Next to proceed to step 6 it i E m E product_name E a E E E a Hide Detail Calculate percent of total for sums 389 Step 6 Define Sorting options of the report Option Description Sorting The type of sort options to be available above the detail columns in the page header es Report Builder Sorting ly Connection Ween A Data Source Caption fe Caption w saa Groups Cieee Layout Calc Fields Click Next to proceed to step 6 Step 6 Define navigation options of the report Option Deseription Page Select the type of navigation controls to be included below the detail columns in the page footer Navigator The navigator is used to navigate through report pages when all the data does not fit on one page Modify Select Custom and then click Modify to open the Custom Navigator window where you can customize the controls to suit your needs a Report Builder Navigation w spear C No Page Navigato
549. tifier Charset Finclude type Absolute virtual paths Template Folder FCKeditor Base Path FCKeditor Specify a File Upload component to use 266 structure of the File Upload Component When viewed in Design mode the File Upload component appears as the following Fane FaeSow byte Fae upioad Browse _ bear HTML Code lt BEGIN FileUpload name gt lt input type hidden name ControlName value State gt lt BEGIN Info gt FileName FileSize bytes lt END Info gt lt BEGIN Upload gt lt input type file name FileControl gt lt END Upload gt lt BEGIN DeleteControl gt Delete lt input type checkbox name DeleteControl DeleteChecked gt lt END DeleteControl gt lt END FileUpload name gt The File Upload component is made up of the following elements File Input Control The first element in the File Upload component is a file input control The HTML code for the file input control is lt input type file name ControlIName gt Picture State 00 FileName FileSize bytes File upload The file input control allows the user to select a file from their local machine The user views a page with the control by clicking on the Browse button to open a dialog window where the user can navigate to and select a file from their local machine Delete L Add Edit Files The file that is selected will then be uploaded to the serve
550. tify the highest level in item hierarchy Leave blank if you don t use parent ids or if an empty parent id indicates top level item Caption field Table column containing menu item captions URL field Static Page name or http address used as destination for all menu items address URL field Address Table column containing destination URLs for menu items from database Ea Menu Builder Menu Item Table y Type menu Key Id field Qaj Connection menu_id T me Parent Item Id field i Layout Root identifier Style Caption field menu name Title field URL field C Static address Address from database _ menu_link iui Target field Static target Target from database menu id T Step 4 and 5 Steps 4 and 5 provide menu layout and style options and are identical to steps 3 and 4 when defining static menu 381 Record Builder The Record Builder can be used to automate the process of creating record forms where database content can be inserted edited or deleted To begin the process click on the Record Builder option in the Builders tab Step 1 Selecting a Data Source Select or create a database connection from where the data to be edited or added using the record form is stored You can select one of the existing database connections create a new connection or select one of the sample databases Ea Record Builder Use an existing database connection I
551. ting Caption Caption w Caption w ua Preview Text Area Overview HTML lt textarea name TextArea1 gt TextArea1 lt textarea gt Image iTextdreal E A Text Area field is used when a large amount of data needs to be entered or viewed in an editable control The control has scrollbars to allow adding text beyond the specified rows and columns Use the Rows and Cols properties that appear under the Format tab of the Properties window to set the number of rows and columns to be displayed in the Text Area 2 9 Text Box Overview HTML lt input value TextBox1 name TextBox1 gt Image TextBox Description A text box is used to provide single line input It is used when a small amount of data needs to be entered Text Box controls are located in record search and editable grid forms where they are used to submit values There are few cases when a Text Box or other form controls will be found in a grid form since it does not have the capability to submit values Component Attributes Applies to Grid Form Record Form Report Form Editable Grid Form Directory Form Calendar Form Button CalendarNavigator Checkbox CheckBoxList FileUpload Hidden Image ImageLink IncludePage Label Link ListBox Navigator Path RadioButton ReportLabel ReportSection Sorter TextArea TextBox Description Component attributes are dynamic HTML attributes and variables that can be modified at runtime either a
552. ting an existing database connection If this option is selected the database connection will be created automatically No database used Calendar The calendar will display only static information or an empty calendar template does not contain any events Internationalized Create internationalized version of the calendar by using resource translation keys in place of text Save builder options Preserve the options selected in steps 1 through 4 of the builder The options will be automatically pre selected the next time you use the Calendar Builder ro Calendar builder P L No database used Calendar does not lt contain any events 5 Data Source Use an existing database connection E Year IntranetDB Create Navigation or select a sample database Style Internet Database C Intranet Database M Internationalzed use translation resources res F Save builder options Click Next to proceed to step 2 317 Step 2 Select a data source and fields for the calendar Data Source Table s for the calendar will be based on Click Build Query to access the Visual Query Builder and design your database query or enter an SQL query statement The table or query must contain at least one date or date time type field Refresh the list of tables and fields in the database Event Date field The database field containing dates of events to be shown in the calendar Improve performance Checking this
553. tings Read 4 Write 2 Execute 1 X 7 Owner x X Group x X 5 Public x X 5 For instance 700 would assign read write and execute permissions for the file owner and no permissions for the other groups For the PERL scripts to be available to the users you need to assign them the read and execute permissions e g 755 This will give users other than the owner the ability to read and execute the scripts but not write to them Important note If the project files are published to a location other than the cgi bin folder the access to Common pm must be closed using the web server settings CodeCharge Studio does not provide a facility for changing the file permissions most FTP clients do provide this facility If you have telnet access to the server you can execute the chmod command remotely to set the appropriate file permissions Deploying ColdFusion Applications The two main concerns when deploying a ColdFusion project are server compatibility and configuring the server side connection string The ColdFusion code generated by CodeCharge Studio requires a server that supports the full set of tags in ColdFusion 4 01 or higher This means that you cannot deploy the site to a ColdFusion Express site ColdFusion Express supports only a subset of the tags that are supported in the full version of ColdFusion server 216 Although the minimal server version required is 4 01 you can also deploy the pages to servers that have version 4 5 5
554. tion is stored locally on his or her computer cannot be guaranteed to be fully secure for example in cases where a potential attacker may gain access to a user s computer and retrieve local cookies Developers are advised to exert caution when implementing the Remember me functionality for applications that deal with financial or other sensitive data Implementing Password Encryption For improved security many Web systems encrypt user passwords stored in a database CodeCharge Studio supports the following types of user authentication e plain text password storage low security e two way password encryption medium security e one way password encryption highest security An implementation of any of the supported password encryption methods consists of the following steps Choosing a desired password encryption method Configuring password encryption support in CodeCharge Studio Project Settings Creating a user registration user maintenance and password update forms that save encrypted passwords Encrypting existing passwords in a database Choosing a desired password encryption method You can utilize any password encryption method supported by your database or programming language for example MySQL PASSWORD function or PHP md5 function For the list of available encryption functions please refer to your programming language or database documentation You can also use two way encryption function CCEncryptSitring ASP PHP Perl
555. tions placed to the left of the data row Each data source field corresponds to one row Justified A layout where each data source field corresponds to two grid rows field name is placed in one row and the data is shown in the row below it Gallery Horizontal grid layout that is generally used for displaying an image gallery Style NOTE When selecting the Gallery Style layout you may need to convert at least one of your controls to an image You can do this after completing all Builder steps by right clicking on the control in the Design mode and selecting Change To gt Image You can also configure the following options if desired Records per page The number of records to be displayed per page by default Record separator If checked a template block called Separator will be inserted between rows and alternating rows Rows per page Number of gallery rows available when Gallery Style is selected Columns per row Number of gallery columns available when Gallery Style is selected ri Grid Builder Layout t connection Tab br 4 Data Source Columnar Justified Search Gallery Style C HTML Template from file Sorting sal OG Navigation E Options Records per page Rows per page 7 aye Columns per row ao Record separator Click Next to proceed to step 5 353 Step 5 Define Sorting Grid Options Further customize the grid form by selecting the caption to be used for sorting
556. to have a single field that can be used to search against all the text and memo fields in the corresponding grid form If this option is not selected the search form will have a field for each individual text and memo field Select this option if you want the generated pages to be published to the Server Path specified in Step 1 immediately after the Builder completes creating the pages If you don t want to have a menu page The menu will be placed in a standalone page where the user will be able to navigate to the linked pages This means that the individual pages will not have a menu and neither will the header amp footer pages Creates a horizontal menu of the Header page A vertical menu is placed on the Header amp Footer pages that subsequently appear at the top and bottom of all the other pages Click Next to proceed to step 4 298 Step 4 Setting Security The next step involves setting the Access Authentication Dialog Settings which are the security mechanism of the project Use authentication Select this option if you want your pages to have security authentication User Table Select the table where user authentication information is contained User ID Field Select the database field with the unique user ID s Login Field Select the database field with the Login name of the users Password Field Select the database field with the user passwords Level Group Field Select the field with the user security levels Se
557. to using JDBC drivers only You can use any valid driver provided that it is installed and properly configured on your system If you are not familiar with Java database drivers and URL s you can refer to the Java documentation for more detailed information Note that in addition the following optional parameters can also be used as required Use LIMIT TOP This option specifies if the LIMIT or TOP clause should be used to limit the size of SQL result sets User Name The username to be used to login to the database User Password The password corresponding to the Login user name Max Number of The maximum number of connections to be allowed to the database Connections Connection Timeout The duration of time after which an idle or unresponsive connection will be terminated Database properties Some drivers allow other properties to be specified Add New Connection Design Advanced Server Database ms Access Date Format yyyymm dd HH nn ss Boolean Format truetalse M Use LIMIT TOP Same as Design User Mame User Password C JDBC Driver sun jdbc odbc JdbcOdbeDr iver Database URL jdbc odbc intranet Max Number of es Connections connection Timeout bp soo Database properties fone property per line E The new connection will be added to all servers You may need to setup database connection settings to other servers Help OK Cancel 113 Also you can use
558. tom query See Form Data Source for more information about using the Visual Query Builder a Home Data Dictionary Builders Forms Edit EF a7 Insert Brackets 2 Group By oot Remove Brackets Order By REMMIVE OOOGLRELS a G Refresh _ 2 la S i Export Open Relationships Add Quer Add Table Add Condition Connection Ba Import Query Type toFROM to WHERE j Edit Condition gX Delete Queries Relationships Connections Database Explorer Ix Data Dictionary X T NewPage1 J IntranetDB neon Tables SS ir Vere a riorities roj E aaa Queries i FROM All Columns All Column 7 ANC employees emp_id priority _id projec priorities emp_login priority_name project projects emp_password project statuses emp_name i tasks title WHERE group id GROUP BY department_id ORDER BY email at ee ra To rename a query right click on the query in the folder tree and select Rename To delete a query right click on the query in the folder tree and select Delete When you create a query the query becomes part of the list of available datasources when you define a form For example if you create a query called query1 and then run the Grid builder the query will appear under the list of datasources to select from If you select the query as the datasource the datasource selected at the top of the drop down box chan
559. torves es CocdeCharqe Studia 3 Builders J Forms Edit A sorter 5 Directory Be Pe OB Navigator one Grid Record Report Panel Include Label Link Text E Calendar Template Panel a PlaceHolder page Path Box Forms il Components il Controls Project Explorer A X E Default x x ig EmployeeDirectoryEx E E Pages App Code App GlobalResource bin Designs images 4 je Styles Templates E AdminMenu E AdvSearch E Default E DepsGrid E DepsRecord E E EmpsDetail E EmpsGrid E EmpsRecord E GroupsGrid E Header E Login ss Diagrams 4 Mi g iyP ipn typ For Help press Fl a EM fon Search Advanced Search I marsansanansnnssnarsansanassnnssnnnsansannnsnussnnnnansnsnnnnunnnnnsnnnnnannnnsnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnannnsananrnnannnnsnnsannnsansanansnnennnnsannnnan an I 1 1 i l 1 fiter iter F a I 1 I A LA LA AA LE LE LILA LA LA EA uw eT LA Ch tl ie a LA LA AA AE LA LALA LA LI AA LA ee eT LE weed ee 8 9 9 8 0 0 0 8 8 8 8 8 8 89 8 6 6 9 0 0 0 0 8 8 8 8 6 8 8 9 5 5 a Employee Directory A 8 8 8 8 8 AA HRH 8 0 8 8 0 0 0 8 8 8 8 0 0 0 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 0 8 8 8 8 8 0 8 8 8 8 0 80 0 8 8 8 8 80 8 gin Begin Row E name femail len oe Begin AltRow 1At name nd AltRow __Alt_work_phone No records al
560. tring expression specific for selected code generation pattern Example for PHP Een Design Design default value to be used while reviewing data in Visual Query Builder It should be valid SQL Value expression specific for selected database 239 Using Stored Procedures When setting up the Data Source property of forms the norm is to have a database table as the Data Source Type However situations arise where it would be more convenient to use a database stored procedure as the form data source Configuring a form to use a stored procedure for the data source is not much different than configuring a table data source The database you are using must support stored procedures and the particular stored procedure to be used must already exist in the database To configure a grid form to use a stored procedure click on the button of the Data Source property for the grid In the Data Source window set the Data Source Type field to Procedure Once completed the Procedure dropdown list will contain the stored procedures available in the current connection Select the procedure you want to use Query Builder ee EPESA Th Ub j SP y je Ada Farameter Save and Open Refresh Query Close Connection Type Connections Queries tar Pisliots Doarsrmotear me Delete Parametel sp ActiveDirectory_Obj 1 Default V Design Default Value sp_ActiveDirectory_SCP 1 sp_ActiveDirectory_Start 1 sp_add_agent_parameter 1
561. tting tags with the text mixed in so that it is shown properly formatted in the desired place on the page Technologies like CodeCharge Studio make it possible to design the HTML page then place various active objects in desired positions on the page This approach reduces the amount of time and effort required in creating full web applications Benefits of Using Web Technologies Web technologies confer many benefits over other technologies including client server These include Less Expensive Infrastructure Since every desktop can be equipped with a free browser the users only need inexpensive low maintenance computers that run the browser software Rapid Software Distribution Thanks to the web there is no need to distribute new software to any of the client browsers Once programs are updated on the server users can instantly see the changes the next time they load the page into their browser Troubleshooting is also improved since most issues can be investigated and resolved on the server Low Network Usage In a web environment the client application browser doesn t access the database over the network to retrieve or update the data The browser only sends instructions to the server with as much information as necessary to execute the server program The server software is responsible for communicating with and retrieving any content from the database and composing the page to be sent back to the client there is no need to exchang
562. tyle to be used to display both forms Click the Finish button to close the builder and generate the forms 365 Master Detail Builder The simplest and most convenient way of building froms for edit Master Detail record is to use the Master Detail Builder located under the Builders tab Open or create a new page where the Master Detail forms will be located then with the cursor placed at the location where the form should appear click on the Master Detail option under the Builders tab of the Toolbox After launching the builder you will be provided with the following configurations steps Step 1 Selecting a type for Master Record Select existing Master Record or create new HH Master Detail Builder hs G Create new Master Record E Master Use an existing Master Record Oy Connection M Add Submit and Delete buttons for W Data Source Master Form a Actions cE Detail Step 2 Selecting a Data Source for Master Record Select or create a database connection from where the data to be edited or added using the record form is stored If you already have a connection configured for the project you can select to use one of the tables in this connection to create the Master Detail Forms Alternatively you can create a new connection or use one of the sample databases ro Master Detail Builder Use an existing database connection FS Master InteretDB cal ee Type or select a sample database C In
563. uests usually come from browsers in the form of a URL which is then used by the web server to determine which file should be sent back to the browser such as an HTML page or an image Many popular web servers are freely available You can download Apache for Linux Windows or another platform from http httpd apache org IIS is included in Windows 2000 Windows 2003 Windows XP Professional Windows Vista and Windows 7 PWS is available for Windows 95 98 and Windows NT Although Windows XP Professional comes with a web server unfortunately the Standard Windows XP doesn t come with a web server and setting one up is very tricky 33 Once your web server is up and running you should be able to access it by starting the browser on the same computer and using the URL http localhost You can also test the server from another browser by typing your computer s IP address as the URL If your computer is on a local network within a company you can ask your colleagues to try typing your computer s name into the address field in their browser This should work as well and display the default web page setup during server installation Running Programs on a Web Server Besides serving static HTML pages many web servers can also execute programs that create the HTML output for the browser by running a server side programming language Some of the most popular languages are PHP ASP Java PERL ColdFusion and now VB NET and C The most popular web server
564. ullamcorper Ut a mi Etiam nulla Maurns interdum Back to top Who will prevail Publish your pages and make sure that the stylesheet you added in 3 above is published with your pages If you want the images to appear you will need to copy them from the Examples folder in your installation folder 161 Using the Page Template When new pages are created in a project the pages are based on an empty HTML page with no content apart form a few basic HTML tags lt html gt lt head gt lt title gt NewPage 1 lt title gt lt head gt lt body gt lt body gt lt html gt It is possible to designate a different HTML page to be used as the basis for creating new pages within a project This is done by specifying the path to the template page Select the Options button on the ribbon bar then the Options selection menu In the dialog select the Paths option The page template is useful when you want the pages created in a project to have a common look and feel In particular the template page can be used to create pages that contain customized meta tags to describe the content and nature of the page For example the following contains example meta tags for a page template lt meta http equiv expires content 0 gt lt meta http equiv Age content 699 gt lt meta name author content Enter Author Name gt lt meta name robots content all gt lt meta name keywords content Enter keywords here
565. umentation for more information Makes the report available in print mode which will display all report pages within one HTML page that can be printed Print mode can be activated by appending ShowMode Print into the URL The height of the report page to be printed measured in abstract line units assigned to each report section Refer to the Report Paging section of the documentation for more information Builder will create a link that users can click to view a printable version of the report The link will include the URL parameter ShowMode Print and will be added at the top of the page above the report It can be repositioned later Displays the total number of records returned by the data source by including a label that displays the total number of records found on your report page Add text to the Page Footer that displays the page number and the total number of pages in the format Page 1 of 5 This option is mainly used in Print mode where the Navigator is not shown When this option is enabled the report will utilize special HTML and CSS syntax that when printing causes the client computer Web browser to automatically perform page breaking The report pages will be printed based on the page size specified in client computer s printer settings A report that uses client paging can be displayed by default in Printable Mode and it will appear on the screen as a single page with a single header and footer however when printed t
566. unction or appearance you can start with one of the basic forms located under the Forms tab of the Toolbox ew ne ga i a Home Data Dictionary Builders Forms Edit Zj Editable Grid sae 4 Sorter Aa Q ab a J foro F Slider Taj Zd Captcha aa a A Directory Navigator J ab al GEH h24 Numeric Up Down ts File Upload Grid Record Report _ oR nclude Label Link Text a inline Date Flash FCK E Calendar i j Template Panel g PlaceHolder page gt gt Path Box W oz Picker ial Popup Date Picker Chart FCKeditor Forms Components Controls Additional Setting the Data Source For a form that will contain database content the Connection and Data Source properties have to be configured to indicate the table and SQL query or stored procedure that will be used to retrieve the data With the form selected in the Properties window e Connection Click on the Connection property and select the connection to be used If you have not configured a connection for the project you will need to do this before proceeding e Data Source Click on the button to configure the Data Source Data Source Type In the Visual Query Builder window set the Data Source Type property to Table Procedure or SQL If the data source type is a table select the appropriate table For an SQL query enter the SQL statement that will be used to retrieve the form fields If the data source type is a Stored Procedure s
567. ures Displaying HTML content in user s Web browser During run time a web application created with CodeCharge Studio reads the HTML template file replaces the template tags such as Label11 with dynamic database content and then sends the HTML output to the Web browser You can specify the META declaration for the HTML page so that the web browser will use the character set specified for the page In certain programming languages such as ASP and PHP the META declaration will also be used to specify the response encoding which is used to set the character set for example ISO LATIN 7 appended to the Content Type header of the corresponding object 187 For more information on character sets and encoding please refer to htto www w3 org TR i18n html tech ri20030510 102757952 http msdn microsoft com en us goglobal bb6881 14 aspx http msdn2 microsoft com en us library ms531361 aspx Note The above information about encoding currently does not apply to NET The HTML templates are converted to ASPX files and they utilize the same encoding as the files containing programming code This is especially needed for compatibility with Visual Studio NET AIl NET files html aspx cs and vb are saved in the encoding specified using the File Encoding setting of the project 188 Internationalization and Localization of Web Applications Overview Many web sites need to be adapted to a local or global audience This can be accompli
568. ust be the primary key field for the table Category Along with having a category ID field for identification each category must also have a name field that Name contains descriptive text for the category Parent Since the directory form displays hierarchical content the table must have a field that indicates the Category parent category to which each category belongs In this parent category field top level categories are marked using a special value such as zero For all other categories that belong to a higher category the parent category field is populated with the category ID field of the parent category Each category that is not a top level category must have a value in its parent category field pointing to the category to which it belongs ES categories Table m Field Name E category id AutoNumber category id parent Number category name Text You don t have to use any particular name for any of the above fields but they must exist in the table since you will be required to identify them during the process of building the directory form 231 Structure of the Path Component The Path consists of links which the user can click on to navigate to specific points in the hierarchy of categories The value of the Path changes according to the links that the user clicks in the directory form As the user navigates deeper into a hierarchy the Path adds links to all the categories leading up to the present category The pr
569. ut information to the browser Non templated programs work as follows A user points their browser to a page on the web server for example www site com Default asp A program Default asp is executed on the web server which then outputs appropriate HTML to the browser and embeds dynamic content within it Template Block Specially marked place within HTML Template usually used to mark the position of dynamic content within the page Template blocks are replaced during run time with sub content such as variable or database output Unused blocks are removed The following two types of template blocks are utilized by CodeCharge Studio Tags CodeCharge Studio uses text within curly brackets to mark the position of dynamic content Usually a tag is replaced with the value of a database field that has the same name as the tag An example of a tag is employee_name Blocks Blocks mark HTML sections for possible replacement or removal during run time For example forms generated with CodeCharge Studio are embedded within HTML between block comments that indicate starting and ending position of the form thus making it a Block that later can be removed for example to hide a form from unauthorized users The example below shows an Error Control block that is a part of a Search Form and displays error message for example if a required field doesn t contain data An Error tag is also shown which will be replaced during run time with an error messag
570. utomatically or programmatically They are introduced in CCS version 3 1 to make working with page layout more flexible and simplify creating dynamic HTML output especially where the Label control may not be functional Component attributes can be added outside or inside standard HTML tags for such purposes as dynamically applying table row style deactivating a field displaying ALT text for an image etc They also can and should be used in place of template variables which was previously an internal feature of the generated code and therefore not sufficiently flexible for custom use To insert a component attribute into HTML switch to the HTML mode and right click click on the place where you want to insert it then choose nsert attribute option You will be presented with the attribute configuration dialog as shown below cw Add Edit NewPagel attributes Create new attribute Existing attributes Name Source Type Source Name OK Cancel The dialog allows you to create a new attribute or select one of previously setup existing attributes You create a new attribute or modify an existing one by configuring the following fields 280 Name A unique name you want to assign to your attribute Source Type of the source that will provide data for the attribute such as Expression URL Form Session Type Application Cookie or DataSource Column Leave this field blank if you will control the attribute value programmatic
571. value is used to determine where to end the page and display the page footer and the navigator In Print mode the Lines per Print page value is used to determine where to end the page and show the page footer and the page break tag The Line is an abstract unit used because Web applications are not aware of the true pixel height of a report that is being output Some of the reasons for this include e The page header section may be using several font styles and graphics with sizes that cannot be determined by the Web application e Report sections may be displaying dynamic content with variable height depending on the data e You may want to design the report to be viewed at a specific screen resolution or printed on specific paper size or in portrait or landscape mode lt is left to the developer to determine the exact or approximate height of the report that should be output either in true units like pixels or abstract units like rows or lines Once you decide on a specific unit type to use you will need to determine and assign the height to each report section and specify the total number of units lines that the report should display on each page You may need to experiment with various section heights and the Lines per Web Page until you determine the settings that work best for you and your users Note The page size can be specified dynamically at run time by including in the URL the parameter named lt Report Name gt PageSize with the value tha
572. ve PY Grid Builder x Layout fpost_title post_body Q Connection A pes 4 Data Source C Columnar Justified A Search Galery Style HTML Template from file ey Style n Records per page 10 Rows per page 10 Columns per row 1 z Record separator a Cancel lt Back Next gt Finish 160 The HTML for the grid should look something like this lt BEGIN Grid blog_posts gt lt BEGIN Row gt post_title post_body lt END Row gt lt END Grid blog_posts gt e If you Preview the result at this point only the content is returned without any styling To format the content you need to apply the Master template created in 2 above To apply the template open the page in HTML mode and mark and select the two template variables in the grid post_title and post_body Do not select anything except the two template variables Now select the Template Panel icon under the Forms tab on the ribbon bar then find and select the template page you created in 2 above entries ccp and select Text as the placeholder Add Template Panel HTML Template from file Se S ia Select PlaceHolder text OK cancel This will create 3 panels underneath the grid in the Project Explorer tree The first panel called TemplatePanel is the panel that is mapped to the Master template called entries The other two panels are the cont
573. vents are defined and initialized Execute Components Data Operation method is invoked for all record controls on the page This causes the Processing mode only submitted data to be processed by each control If no data was submitted Go To Destination Page Data If Operation method for all components was executed successfully page Processing mode only operation is stopped and the browser is redirected to another page Initialize HTML Template Initializes Template object and loads template into web server memory for processing Render Page Processes all Controls and Components on the page then outputs rendered HTML to the web browser Unload Page Defines the UnloadPage Subroutine Clears page objects and controls Include External Pages Includes external pages such as Header and Footer Component Classes Implements component classes for controls present on the page 2 Property A container that stores the information about specific component s configuration or controls its behavior Certain properties are read only and cannot be altered during the run time while others can programmatically accessed and modified during the program execution Run Time The time when generated web application is being run without dependence on CodeCharge Studio for example to allow users to interact with the generated application Run time is also referred to as program execution Template Specially formatted HTML file that generated programs
574. ver side Design side refers to connections that you use with the IDE i e CodeCharge Studio to develop your application Server side refers to connections that your application uses after your application is published This section describes design side connections Refer to Configuring the Server Side Database Connection for the other type of connection Some ODBC drivers and OLEDB providers are part of your Windows OS installation e g Access Before you can use ODBC or OLEDB you must make sure that you have the proper driver provider installed and you will need the documentation for those connectors e g MyODBC for MySQL so you know what information is needed to define a database connection You will need to refer to the database vendor s website to download the appropriate connector and documentation Depending on the database you may be able to use one or several database connection methods The common methods include ODBC DSN and DSN less Normally for an ODBC connection you define a DSN Data Source Name which is simply a configuration you defineand name using the ODBC Administrator Afterwards programs such as CodeCharge Studio can refer to the named DSN to make a connection to the database The ODBC Administrator and ODBC driver handle locating and loading the configuration parameters from the DSN You can also connect to a database using a connection string DSN less refers to connections using connection strings A connection str
575. viewing Before attempting to view a page in Live Page mode make sure that the Project Publishing settings have been properly configured so that the pages are generated to the correct location In this mode you can navigate to other pages and manipulate database content as you would if the page were viewed using a browser window If problems are encountered during the process of generating or publishing the page the Messages window will show appropriate error messages Additionally if the generated pages themselves are not properly created the document window will show the error message returned from the server 65 Customizing the Workspace Access the Options Options menu for additional configuration options that further customize the CodeCharge Studio workspace The Options window has a list of six categories each with a set of configurable options General Options Server Profiles Options Generator Options Design Editor Options HTML Formatting Options Code Editor Options Paths Options Source Control Options General The general options establish the basic features and functionality of the environment General Settings Sort Database Database tables used in the project will be ordered alphabetically rather than in the order Tables they appear in the database Alphabetically Sort Database Database fields listed in the CodeCharge Studio IDE during design time will be ordered Columns alphabetically rather than in the order
576. want to search for Any Words All Words or Exact Phrase After specifying search options you can use the Preview button to see the form preview to confirm the selected options Available Fields Fields that can be included in the search form as search fields Search Fields Fields that you selected to be included in the search form Control Type The type of control to be used for the currently selected search field s cs Report Builder k Create Search Filter Connection m w Interactive Search L Data Source Records per page listbox Layout a Groups Vertical Horizontal Layout HTML Template from file DivSearch ccp built in fiai m Calc Fields E Advanced Sorting n Search Fields Navigation category_name a product_name kammal 5 Options ma ep Style Control Typ Click Next to proceed to step 9 393 Step 9 Select a Style for the report Select from the list of existing styles or click Style Builder to modify or create a new theme You can also select No Style if you don t want to use a style or Basic if you don t want to use a theme at this time but would like to preserve theme compatibility for the report in the future Search Builder Search forms are used to enter values into controls to search and retrieve records from a database Search forms are used in conjunction with grid or record forms The search form is used to submit th
577. web pages during the web application development process For example when you create a new page go to Live Page to see how it works CodeCharge Studio will generate and open the web page You can use an externally hosted web server for testing but it s much quicker to generate programs to your local hard drive and then have a local web server run them Obtaining a web server is quite easy since many Windows operating system come with free IIS while PWS Personal Web Server is also freely available for Windows 95 98 and Me Refer to Web Servers for more information 43 Note Some organizations also use a staging web server that allows end users or customers to perform the final testing before approving the launch of the site This also gives developers the ability to continue making changes and testing on the test web server A staging web server is especially useful if there is already an existing live web site that you don t want to replace until your customer or users approve the new web site Production or Live Web Server This is the main web server where you will publish your final application In some cases this can be the same server as the test Web Server in most cases you d have a separate externally hosted Web server that is publicly accessible There are various web hosting companies that offer Windows based web hosting from anywhere between 10 and 50 or more for advanced needs Scripting Engine Scripting Engines such as
578. whether a table Type SQL query or stored procedure will be used Custom Insert Specify the table SQL query or procedure to be used to insert data Custom Update For forms that require additional configuration for the update operation specify whether a table Type SQL query or stored procedure will be used Custom Update Specify the table SQL query or stored procedure to be used to update data Custom Delete For forms that require additional configuration for the delete operation specify whether a table Type SQL query or stored procedure will be used Custom Delete Specify the table SQL query or stored procedure to be used to delete data Note when configuring an editable grid the Data Source property must clearly indicate the primary key of the database table the form is based upon The primary key must be specified because the editable grid code needs to uniquely identify records To specify the primary key click the button next to the Data Source property to open the Data Source window In the Data Source window click the Build Query button to open the Visual Query Builder The Visual Query Builder displays the fields in the current table and the primary key appears in bold You can designate a field as the primary key by right clicking on it and selecting the Primary Key option 01 021 253 Editable Grids Based on Queries In its simplest form an Editable Grid is based on a single database table This means that all the
579. will attempt to discover the relations between tables by querying the database definition Besides the database though the Visual Query Builder will include any relations that have been created in the Data Dictionary plus any relations that may be inferred based on the names of the fields in the tables Where there are no relations between tables or the the relations cannot be 236 discovered the Visual Query Builder will attempt to infer any relations based on the field names For example the Tasks table has a field called priority_id and the Priorities table also has a field called priority_id Since one of the fields Priorities priority_id is also a Primary Key the Visual Query Builder infers these tables are linked and the relation is shown in the window The Visual Query Builder window automatically creates these links if it encounters two tables with fields that are potential primary and foreign key fields based on their name and data type Within the Visual Query Builder there is no way to determine if a link is based on the database definition inferred from the names of the fields or part of the Data Dictionary description However when you open the database for the first time and view the relations between tables in the Data Dictionary what you see is what is either defined in the database or whatever the Data Dictionary was able to query about the database definition It does not automatically infer any relations between tabl
580. will generate a type of HTML that uses a stylesheet just for that particular form This only affects the code generated by the builder for this form not any other code that exists for other forms on the page After you run the builder and the code has been generated on your page you change the style selection by right clicking on the component or page in design mode and selecting the Change style option in the context menu You can specify a different style for the page or component depending on which object you select That is if you select the page you can change only the page style If you select a form e g record form you can change only the component style If the form was originally generated using the page style changing the style to component will also generate new HTML for the form That is you can change the HTML for a form from page to component but not component to page In design mode you may not be able to visually see the difference in Styling If you are not certain about the styling generated for the component e g Grid look at the HTML and refer to this section How Styles Apply to Your HTML Code As mentioned before the Change style option is not available if you specifically assigned No Style to the page or component e g Grid 173 How to use Designs and Styles in Your Projects The dialog shown above for the builders e g Grid builder changes slightly if you have appl
581. xcel involve similar steps Each type of database normally requires specific configuration information particular to the database and the ODBC driver Once you have created a DSN you can use it in multiple projects by simply selecting it from among the list of available DSN s displayed by CodeCharge Studio Using the ODBC Connection in your CodeCharge Studio Project Unless your target platform is PHP or PERL when you create a connection in CodeCharge Studio you should see this version of the Add New Connection dialog In the illustration we create a connection to one of the sample databases installed with CodeCharge Studio called Intranet using the CCSIntranet DSN which is installed with CodeCharge Studio Add New Connection Design Advanced Server Connection Name Intranet Database MS Access Use ODBC Data Source Name CCSIntranet New Use Connection String User Name User Password The new connection will be added to all servers You may need to setup database connection settings to other servers Help OK Cancel 100 Connection Name Name of your choice Database This is the type of database you are connecting to This lets CodeCharge Studio know the dialect of SQL to use and other options specific to the database Even if you are using the Access ODBC driver this should be set to Access Use ODBC Select the ODBC DSN from the drop down list Datasource Name Username User account to
582. y also Known as region or culture Localization the process of converting a program to run in a particular locale or country so that all text is displayed in the native language and native conventions are used for formatting Translation resource key short string used as a key corresponding to the translated text Language resource file a file containing the pairs of translation resource keys and corresponding translated texts 198 Page and Component Caching Overview You may already be familiar with Web caching methods based on HTTP Headers and HTML Meta tags They allow previously viewed pages to be stored on usersa computers These caches are especially useful when users hit the Back button in their Web browser or otherwise recall a page that they ve previously viewed Other types of caches such as proxy or gateway are often setup between the server and the user They can serve the same content to thousands of users without the need for the server to execute the program that displays the same page for each user In many cases you can install external software that handles server side caching such as Squid or caching features of the Apache Web server Sometimes you may not have full access to your server s configuration or you may want to implement simple caching of only slow pages For this CodeCharge Studio provides server side application caching This is a powerful feature that can greatly improve your server s performan
583. y Builders Forms Edit Layout ee X a Jeb Ht p a Show Properties Delete Insert Insert Insert Insert Column Merge Split Move Move Row Move Column Move Column Bo ders d Row Above Row Below Column Left Right Cells Cell Row Up Down Left Right Table Rows amp Columns Merge Move H Show borders Insert a row above the current row Insert a row below the current row t 5 Insert a column left Insert a column right Move Column Left Move Column Right Move Row Up Move Row Down Merge Cells Split Cell Delete the current row Delete the current column Delete cells Properties Column Properties Row 60 The Project Explorer The project explorer is essentially a hierarchical drop down menu that provides access to the main components that make up a project If the Project Explorer is not visible you can use the View menu to make it visible The Project Explorer window can be docked to the side of the application against other windows such as the Toolbox or it can be a floating window The Project Explorer window works in conjunction with the Document window and the Properties window Double clicking on a page within the Project Explorer window will cause it to be opened in the Document window At the same time the Properties window displays the various properties for the currently selected component Using the Project Explorer you can drill down to the basic elements of a project and execute v
584. y in conflict with new version available in the repository The operation names used by CVS plug in are also different from the names used by other Source Control providers Commit operation is used for sending new file version to the repository and Update operation is used to retrieve current file version from the repository CVS built in locking is supported with Ealt UnEdit operations to lock and unlock a file Add to Source Control Resoke conflicts 117 File state transition diagram non CVS Non CVS Source Control providers use simpler state transition assuming file is locked exclusively for editing reserved checkout Check n operation is used to put new file version into repository and Check Out operation is used to lock file for editing Current file version can be retrieved using Get Latest Version operation Add to Source Controg Get Latest Version o Check Out Check In Undo Check Oul if loded Checked in by Checked in ee oe Set Latest Version e if relesced Comparison of operations available for CVS and non CVS Source Control providers Commit Check In Upload new version to the repository Edit Check Out Lock file for local editing UnEdit Undo Check Out Unlock file restoring original version Update Get Latest Version Get current version from repository Add to Source Control Add to Source Control Add new file to the repository Working with Source Control How to create a new project or open an ex
585. y is set to No e Fill in connection properties to indicate Driver class name Database url user login and password e You can quickly deploy your application on the administration server if auto deploy is enabled by copying war file into applications directory of the administration server scenario 2 Deployment through Administration Console Set Use Data Source site property appropriately to indicate whether you want to use DataSources in your code If you want to work with DataSources and you have not configured it already add and configure JDBC Pool and DataSource to your server as described in http e docs bea com wls docs70 ConsoleHelp jdbc html 1 104939 Bear in mind that weblogic JNDIName property should be equal to JNDI Name property of CCS connection Install your application as described in http e docs bea com wis docs70 ConsoleHelp applications html 1 104914 220 WebLogic 5 1 scenarios CodeCharge Studio requires SAX 2 0 and JAXP 1 1 libraries to work with generated JSP However WebLogic 5 1 goes with its own XML parser located in lib weblogicaux jar You have to replace those libraries with the newer ones fromshitp xmlapache org gt or lt http java sun com xml gt To accomplish this you can e Specify this libraries in Runtime libraries property of the project or run the following command wlconfig exe classpath c java xerces 2_0_ 1 xerceslmpl jar C java xerces 2_0 1 xmlParserAPIs jar e Restart the server Websph
586. yntax similar but not identical to that of other VB NET and C applications For coding documentation and examples please visit the InMotion Framework Website Important note The InMotion Framework is developed by 3rd party and included in CodeCharge Studio only for convenience YesSoftware offers community forums and provides limited technical support for the InMotion Framework Further technical support and updates can be obtained from InMotion Framework developers 443
587. you should test a asp page since this is the language you will be generating pages in By default the IIS server will bring up the asp page http localhost localstart asp Both IIS and PWS come with extensive documentation which you should consult for detailed setup configuration and testing instructions Setup the Database Once you confirm that you have a fully functional web server make sure that you have a suitable database to use The easiest database to use for ASP is Access In order for the web pages to be able to use the Access database the security settings for the database have to be setup correctly Make sure that the database file is not opened in exclusive mode by any other user Using Windows Explorer right click on the database file and open the properties dialog Under the security tab make sure everyone has access to the file or at the least the IUSR_MachineName account should have Read and Write Permissions on the file The IUSR_MachineName account is the account that is used by the web server to access the database If you are using a different database such as MS SQL server or Oracle make sure that you have an account in the database with which you can access the required tables Create and Test a CodeCharge Studio Project CodeCharge Studio comes with a number of example projects that you can easily generate and publish as a way of testing your setup Each of these examples comes with an Access database as well as a datab
588. yout of the page The Properties window displays the pertinent properties based on the component that is selected in the document window You can set or adjust these properties as needed In design mode you can toggle the display of the HTML tags icons by pressing the ctrl shortcut key or using the View gt Reveal Tags menu option You will also notice that some of the text displayed will be enclosed within curly braces e g article The content in curly braces are termed Blocks and are an indication that the text will be substituted for database content when the page is viewed live Care should be observed when handling any blocks If a block is inadvertently changed the corresponding database content would not be displayed As a rule always use the Properties window or the Project Explorer window to change the properties of block content rename or remove it Note You can change the position of the blocks relative to the other page contents without causing any harm What could be potentially harmful is changing the block itself i e spelling or deleting a block HTML Mode This displays the raw HTML code for a page Along with HTML content there could be Javascript code that was added manually or while using the events tab of the Properties window For pages that make use of Cascading Style Sheets CSS style content will also be visible depending on the method used to apply the style Like the Design mode you will see content within the
589. ype to be used for each of the fields Ea Grid and Record Components Builder Data Source Uj Connection articles hi 4 Primary Ke a Grid article_id ag Record Fields for the Record Link a gt Actions E3 Layout Ep 9 Style Control T TextBox Click Next to proceed to step 10 Step 10 Selecting Record Options Select the type of operations you want the user to be able to perform using the record form In the illustration below the Allow Delete option is disabled meaning that the record form will not allow the user to delete any existing records ES Grid and Record Components Builder E Title Haj Connection Add Edit Articles CE Grid Actions v Allow Insert Record k Allow Update Link k Allow Delete l Confirmation dialog X Data Source Include Cancel button d Display buttons as Buttons E3 Layout C Images ep Style Click Next to proceed to step 11 364 Step 11 Selecting Record Options Specify the type of layout in the record form Grid and Record Builder Option Settings Layout Select layout for the record form Ea Grid and Record Components Builder Layout ly Connection Vertical g Grid Horizontal C HTML Template from file E Record DivRecord ccp built in Link 4 Data Source amp Actions Click Next to proceed to step 12 Step 12 Selecting a Style Select a s
590. zed via the Advanced Locale Settings dialog 191 User Interface Creating Locales You can localize your web site at any time during project creation by adding support for additional languages and or countries in the Locales amp Encoding section of the project settings The process of creating a locale consists of the following steps which do not need to be performed in the same order From the menu select Project gt Settings gt Locales amp Encoding You will be presented with a dialog where you will see the following options Project settings x File Encoding none System Default dJ Default HTML Encoding none System Default Date Display Format mm dd yyyy h nn AM PM Site Locales Remove Set default Use Internationalization Features 192 File Encoding Default HTML Encoding Date Display Format Site Locales Use Internationalization Features Advanced Global non language specific option that specifies the character encoding to be used when saving programming code files such as php and asp Global non language specific option that specifies the character encoding to be used when creating and saving HTML files This encoding will be specified in the HTML files in the form of a META tag lt meta http equiv content type gt Although an encoding META tag can be removed from the HTML pages it is recommended that each HTML page contain an encoding META tag so that it can

User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents